[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2024235171A1 - Aerosol generation system - Google Patents

Aerosol generation system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024235171A1
WO2024235171A1 PCT/CN2024/092723 CN2024092723W WO2024235171A1 WO 2024235171 A1 WO2024235171 A1 WO 2024235171A1 CN 2024092723 W CN2024092723 W CN 2024092723W WO 2024235171 A1 WO2024235171 A1 WO 2024235171A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
storage
conveying belt
aerosol generating
medium conveying
medium
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2024/092723
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
郑维
熊伟
罗永杰
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Shenzhen Smoore Technology Ltd
Smoore International Holdings Ltd
Original Assignee
Shenzhen Smoore Technology Ltd
Smoore International Holdings Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202310540145.XA external-priority patent/CN118923935A/en
Priority claimed from CN202310538897.2A external-priority patent/CN118923926A/en
Priority claimed from CN202310539036.6A external-priority patent/CN118923927A/en
Priority claimed from CN202310541761.7A external-priority patent/CN118923939A/en
Priority claimed from CN202310541866.2A external-priority patent/CN118923940A/en
Priority claimed from CN202310541549.0A external-priority patent/CN118923938A/en
Priority claimed from CN202310540081.3A external-priority patent/CN118923933A/en
Application filed by Shenzhen Smoore Technology Ltd, Smoore International Holdings Ltd filed Critical Shenzhen Smoore Technology Ltd
Publication of WO2024235171A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024235171A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A24TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
    • A24FSMOKERS' REQUISITES; MATCH BOXES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES
    • A24F40/00Electrically operated smoking devices; Component parts thereof; Manufacture thereof; Maintenance or testing thereof; Charging means specially adapted therefor
    • A24F40/20Devices using solid inhalable precursors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A24TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
    • A24FSMOKERS' REQUISITES; MATCH BOXES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES
    • A24F40/00Electrically operated smoking devices; Component parts thereof; Manufacture thereof; Maintenance or testing thereof; Charging means specially adapted therefor
    • A24F40/40Constructional details, e.g. connection of cartridges and battery parts

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of atomization, and in particular to an aerosol generating system.
  • the aerosol generating system in the related art can be used to heat the columnar aerosol generating substrate to generate aerosol.
  • the atomizing medium of the aerosol generating substrate before and after atomization is mixed together, which easily leads to aerosol odor and affects the user's smoking experience.
  • the aerosol generating substrate can be made into a strip shape to solve the above problem, but when using the aerosol generating substrate, it is difficult to effectively fit with the aerosol heating structure when heated, which leads to the aerosol generating substrate The medium cannot be fully atomized.
  • the present invention aims to solve one of the technical problems existing in the prior art or related technology.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating system, comprising:
  • the medium conveyor belt is in the form of a belt and can be movably arranged;
  • a heating structure used for heating the medium conveyor belt
  • At least two groups of limiting structures including at least one group of first limiting structures and at least one group of second limiting structures, wherein the first limiting structures and the second limiting structures are arranged opposite to each other so that the medium conveying belt is in close contact with the heating structure.
  • the first limiting structure contacts the medium conveying belt and applies a force to the medium conveying belt in a direction in which the medium conveying belt and the heating structure are attached to each other;
  • the second limiting structure contacts the medium conveying belt and applies a force to the medium conveying belt in a direction in which the medium conveying belt and the heating structure are in contact with each other.
  • the aerosol generating system further comprises an air outlet channel
  • the air outlet channel is arranged opposite to the heating structure and is used to output the aerosol generated by heating the medium conveyor belt;
  • the medium conveyor belt is arranged on a side of the heating structure facing the air outlet channel;
  • the first limiting structure and/or the second limiting structure are pressed on the medium conveying belt.
  • the heating structure includes a first side and a second side; the first limiting structure is disposed on the first side; and the second limiting structure is disposed on the second side.
  • the first side and the second side are sequentially arranged along a moving direction of the medium conveying belt.
  • the aerosol generating system includes a chamber for receiving the medium conveyor belt
  • the limiting structure is arranged in the cavity.
  • the aerosol generating system further comprises an atomizing chamber, wherein the heating structure is at least partially disposed in the atomizing chamber; the atomizing chamber has an inlet and an outlet, wherein the inlet and the outlet are sequentially disposed along the moving direction of the medium conveying belt;
  • At least one group of the first limiting structures is arranged on a side of the inlet away from the outlet; and at least one group of the second limiting structures is arranged on a side of the outlet away from the inlet.
  • the aerosol generating system further comprises a first guide structure; the first guide structure is disposed on a side of the inlet away from the outlet, and is used to guide the medium conveyor belt to be heated into the inlet;
  • At least one set of the first limiting structures is disposed between the first guide structure and the inlet, and is offset from the first guide structure in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveying belt and the heating structure.
  • the aerosol generating system further comprises a second guide structure; the second guide structure is disposed on a side of the outlet away from the inlet, and is used for guiding the heated medium conveying belt output from the outlet;
  • At least one set of the second limiting structures is disposed between the second guide structure and the outlet, and is offset from the second guide structure in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveying belt and the heating structure.
  • At least one set of the first limiting structures includes limiting ribs and/or limiting wheels
  • At least one group of the second limiting structures includes limiting ribs and/or limiting wheels.
  • the aerosol generating system further comprises a body having a containing cavity disposed on the body, and the aerosol generating article is detachably disposed in the containing cavity.
  • the aerosol generating system implemented in the embodiment of the present invention has the following beneficial effects: the aerosol generating system enables the medium conveyor belt to be in close contact with the heating structure through the relatively arranged first limiting structure and the second limiting structure, thereby ensuring the effective fit between the medium conveyor belt and the heating structure, which is beneficial to the sufficient atomization of the medium conveyor belt.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating system, including a medium conveyor belt, a storage tray, a receiving tray, a heater, and a damper;
  • the medium conveyor belt is configured to be unwound from the storage tray and to be rewound by the receiving tray after passing through the heater;
  • the damper is connected to the storage disk, and is configured to provide a damping torque opposite to the unwinding rotation direction of the storage disk.
  • the damper includes a damping wheel, one end of which has a damping shaft, and the damping shaft is plugged into the storage disk and fixed relative to the circumference.
  • the damper is detachably connected to the storage tray.
  • the aerosol generating system further includes a third guide structure, a first guide structure, and a second guide structure which are sequentially spaced apart in the traveling direction of the medium conveyor belt.
  • the first guide structure and the second guide structure are respectively disposed on both sides of the heater.
  • the heater has a heating surface in contact with the medium conveying belt, and the positioning surfaces formed by the first guide structure and the second guide structure for the medium conveying belt are not in the same plane as the heating surface.
  • the heating surface is parallel to the positioning surface.
  • the aerosol generating system further comprises a position detection sensor for detecting a position of the media transport belt.
  • the position detection sensor is disposed between the third guide structure and the first guide structure.
  • the third guide structure, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are all limiting rollers.
  • the heater is in the form of a sheet.
  • the aerosol generating system further comprises a box seat, and the storage tray and the receiving tray are respectively rotatably mounted on the box seat.
  • the aerosol generating system further comprises a body, a receiving cavity is formed in the body, and the box seat, the medium conveying belt, the storage tray and the receiving tray can be detachably received in the receiving cavity.
  • the implementation of the embodiments of the present invention has at least the following beneficial effects: when the medium conveyor belt is not moving, the damping torque of the damping wheel can tighten the storage disk to prevent the medium conveyor belt from loosening; when the medium conveyor belt is moving, the damping torque of the damping wheel can make the medium conveyor belt encounter a certain resistance during the movement, so that the medium conveyor belt can achieve a pre-tightening effect during the movement, so that the medium conveyor belt can maintain a good fit with the heater.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating product, comprising:
  • a medium conveyor belt configured to be unwound from the storage tray and rewound by the receiving tray after moving along a transmission path
  • a plurality of limiters are distributed at intervals on the transmission path
  • Each of the limiting members includes a first limiting step and a second limiting step spaced apart in the axial direction thereof, and is used to limit the medium conveying belt between the first limiting step and the second limiting step.
  • the shortest distance between the first limiting step and the second limiting step is greater than the width of the medium conveying belt.
  • the storage tray comprises a first winding core shaft and a first bottom plate and a first tray cover respectively disposed at two ends of the first winding core shaft.
  • the media conveying belt is partially wound around the first winding core shaft, and the width of the media conveying belt is smaller than the shortest distance between the first bottom plate and the first plate cover.
  • the storage tray includes a second winding core shaft and a second bottom plate and a second tray cover respectively disposed at two ends of the second winding core shaft.
  • the media conveying belt is partially wound around the second winding core shaft, and the width of the media conveying belt is smaller than the shortest distance between the second bottom plate and the second plate cover.
  • each of the limiting members includes a roller and a drum rotatably mounted on the roller, and the first limiting step and the second limiting step are respectively formed by extending radially outward from both axial ends of the drum.
  • the aerosol-generating article further comprises:
  • the medium conveying belt is configured to atomize in the atomizing chamber
  • An outlet is provided for the medium conveyor belt to output the atomization chamber.
  • the inlet and the outlet are respectively disposed at two opposite sides of the atomization chamber.
  • a first annular gap is formed between a periphery of the inlet and the medium conveying belt.
  • a second annular gap is formed between the periphery of the outlet and the medium conveying belt.
  • an embodiment of the present invention also provides an aerosol generating system, comprising the aerosol generating product as described above and an aerosol generating device matched with the aerosol generating product.
  • the aerosol generating device comprises a receiving cavity, in which the aerosol generating article is at least partially detachably disposed.
  • the floating space of the medium conveyor belt in the axial direction of the limiting member is limited by the first limiting step and the second limiting step, and the medium conveyor belt does not generate friction with the first limiting step and the second limiting step, thereby ensuring smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating product, comprising:
  • a medium conveyor belt configured to be unwound from the storage tray and rewound by the receiving tray after moving along a path;
  • An elastic member is connected to the storage disk and the box body, so that friction damping is generated when the storage disk rotates relative to the box body.
  • the storage disk includes a storage reel, a damping hole is formed on the storage reel, and the elastic member is accommodated in the damping hole.
  • the central axis of the damping hole and the elastic member coincides with the rotation center line of the storage disk.
  • the elastic member includes a soft structural member
  • the box body includes a guide column disposed in the damping hole
  • the soft structural member is interference fit between the outer wall surface of the guide column and the hole wall surface of the damping hole.
  • the soft structural component is made of silicone material.
  • the storage disk has a first limiting surface
  • the box body has a second limiting surface opposite to the first limiting surface in the axial direction of the storage reel
  • the elastic member is limited between the first limiting surface and the second limiting surface
  • the storage tray further comprises a storage bottom tray and a storage tray cover respectively disposed at two ends of the storage reel.
  • the storage bottom plate or the storage plate cover has a first friction surface
  • the box body has a second friction surface
  • the elastic member pushes against the storage bottom tray or the storage tray cover with elastic force, so that the first friction surface is in close contact with the second friction surface.
  • the elastic member includes a spring or a soft structural member.
  • the first friction surface and/or the second friction surface comprises a toroidal surface.
  • the center line of the annular surface coincides with the rotation center line of the storage disk.
  • an embodiment of the present invention also provides an aerosol generating system, comprising a heater and the aerosol generating article as described above,
  • the heater is disposed between the paths of the medium conveying belt from the storage tray to the receiving tray.
  • the implementation of the embodiment of the present invention has at least the following beneficial effects: when the medium conveyor belt moves, it is in a tensioned state due to the friction damping of the storage disk, so that the medium conveyor belt can achieve a pre-tightening effect during the movement, thereby being able to maintain a good fit with the heater.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating product, comprising:
  • a medium conveyor belt configured to be unwound from the storage tray and rewound by the receiving tray after moving along a path;
  • the damping assembly comprises:
  • a first damping member is fixedly connected to the storage disk in a circumferential direction relative to the storage disk;
  • a second damping member rotatably connected to the box body
  • the torsion elastic element is connected to the first damping member and the second damping member respectively, and provides the first damping member with a first damping torsion opposite to the unwinding rotation direction of the storage disk.
  • the aerosol-generating article further comprises:
  • a damping medium disposed between the second damping member and the box body, for providing the second damping member with a second damping torque opposite to the unwinding rotation direction of the storage disk when the second damping member rotates relative to the box body;
  • the first damping torque is less than or equal to the second damping torque.
  • the damping medium includes damping grease.
  • the first damping member has a first position and a second position relative to the second damping member.
  • the torsion elastic element When the first damping member is at the first position, the torsion elastic element generates a maximum first damping torsion on the first damping member;
  • the torsion elastic element When the first damping member is in the second position, the torsion elastic element generates a minimum first damping torsion on the first damping member.
  • the minimum first damping torque is smaller than the maximum first damping torque.
  • the second damping member includes a first limiting surface and a second limiting surface that are arranged opposite to each other in the circumferential direction;
  • the first damping member comprises a boss, and the boss can rotate between the first limiting surface and the second limiting surface;
  • an angle range between the first limiting surface and the second limiting surface in the circumferential direction of the second damping member is 70° to 150°.
  • the torsion elastic element includes a torsion spring.
  • the storage disk includes a storage reel having an insertion hole formed thereon, and the damping assembly is at least partially received in the insertion hole.
  • a damping cavity is formed in the first damping member, the second damping member is at least partially disposed in the damping cavity, and the torsion elastic element is disposed in the damping cavity and sleeved on the second damping member.
  • an embodiment of the present invention also provides an aerosol generating system, comprising a heater and the aerosol generating article as described above,
  • the heater is disposed between the paths of the medium conveying belt from the storage tray to the receiving tray.
  • the torsion elastic element can continuously provide damping torsion for the storage disk through the first damping member, so that the medium conveying belt can be continuously in a pre-tightened state.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating device for heating a medium conveyor belt, comprising:
  • the receiving gear is used to provide power for winding up the medium conveying belt and is configured to be engaged with or disengaged from the driving gear according to the rotation direction of the driving gear.
  • the aerosol generating device comprises a transfer gear, and the driving gear is engaged with or disengaged from the storage gear via the transfer gear.
  • the transfer gear has a first position separated from the storage gear and a second position engaged with the storage gear
  • the driving gear When the driving gear rotates in the first direction, the driving gear can push the transfer gear to move and remain in the first position;
  • the driving gear When the driving gear rotates in a second direction opposite to the first direction, the driving gear can push the transfer gear to move and remain in the second position.
  • the aerosol generating device comprises a slide groove, and the transfer gear is slidably disposed in the slide groove.
  • the aerosol generating device further comprises a drive assembly connected to the drive gear.
  • the drive assembly includes a reduction gearbox.
  • an embodiment of the present invention also provides an aerosol generating system, including an aerosol generating article and the aerosol generating device as described above;
  • the aerosol-generating article includes a media conveyor belt.
  • the aerosol-generating article comprises a storage tray and a receiving tray
  • the unheated portion of the media conveyor belt is wound around the storage disk,
  • the heated portion of the media conveyor belt is wound around the receiving tray.
  • the storage tray is connected to the storage gear.
  • the aerosol-generating article further comprises a drive shaft connected to the unwinding gear.
  • the drive shaft can swing back and forth between a first rotational position and a second rotational position.
  • the medium conveying belt can be pushed to pass through the heater
  • the driving shaft unwinds the medium conveying belt wound on the driving shaft.
  • a through hole is formed on the driving shaft, and the medium conveying belt unwound from the storage tray passes through the through hole and is then rewound by the receiving tray.
  • the driving shaft includes two shafts spaced apart from each other, and the space between the two shafts forms the through opening.
  • the rotation centerline of the driving shaft coincides with the central axis of one of the shafts.
  • the aerosol-generating article is removably housed in the aerosol-generating system.
  • the aerosol generating article comprises an atomizing chamber, and the media conveyor belt is atomized in the atomizing chamber.
  • the driving shaft is arranged between the atomizing chamber and the receiving tray.
  • the present invention realizes the advancement and storage of the medium conveyor belt by the rotation direction of the driving gear, and can ensure the reliability of the advancement and storage of the medium conveyor belt.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a transmission device for transmitting a medium conveyor belt, the transmission device comprising:
  • a locking assembly having a locked state in which the locking assembly is relatively fixed to the medium conveying belt and an unlocked state in which the locking assembly is relatively separated from or in loose contact with the medium conveying belt;
  • a driving assembly is connected to the locking assembly to drive the locking assembly to move along a first direction.
  • the locking assembly includes at least one clamping member, and the at least one clamping member is capable of moving back and forth along a second direction intersecting with the first direction to enable the locking assembly to switch back and forth between the locked state and the unlocked state.
  • the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
  • the locking assembly includes two clamping members, and the two clamping members can approach and move away from each other along the second direction.
  • the locking assembly further comprises at least one pushing member, wherein the at least one pushing member is connected to the driving assembly and is used to drive the at least one clamping member to move to the locking state and maintain the locking state.
  • the at least one pushing member is configured to move along the first direction to drive the at least one clamping member to move along the second direction to the locking state, and when the at least one clamping member is in the locking state, drive the locking assembly to move along the first direction.
  • the at least one clamping member includes at least one first mating bevel
  • the at least one pushing member includes at least one second mating bevel
  • the at least one second mating bevel pushes against the at least one first mating bevel to move the at least one clamping member along the second direction to the locking state.
  • the locking assembly further comprises at least one elastic member, wherein the at least one elastic member is connected to the at least one clamping member and is used to drive the at least one clamping member to move to the unlocked state and maintain the unlocked state.
  • the locking assembly also includes a first mounting seat, and the at least one clamping member is disposed on the first mounting seat so as to be movable back and forth along the second direction; the pushing member is disposed on the first mounting seat so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction, and can drive the first mounting seat to move back and forth along the first direction.
  • the transmission device further comprises a second mounting seat, and the first mounting seat is disposed on the second mounting seat so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction;
  • a damping device is provided between the first mounting seat and the second mounting seat, and is used to provide a damping force for the first mounting seat when the first mounting seat moves relative to the second mounting seat.
  • the present invention also constructs an aerosol generating system, which includes any of the transmission devices described above.
  • the locking assembly When the locking assembly is in a locked state, it can be relatively fixed to the medium conveyor belt, thereby driving the medium conveyor belt to move; when the locking assembly is in an unlocked state, it can return to the initial position, and so on, to achieve continuous transportation of the strip aerosol generating matrix.
  • FIG1 is a schematic structural diagram of an aerosol generating system in a first embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG2 is a cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG1 ;
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG1 ;
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an aerosol generating article in the aerosol generating system shown in FIG3 ;
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural breakdown of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG5 ;
  • FIG7 is a schematic structural diagram of a medium conveyor belt in the aerosol generating product shown in FIG6;
  • FIG8 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the atomizer seat in the aerosol generating product shown in FIG6;
  • FIG9 is a schematic structural diagram of an aerosol generating device in the aerosol generating system shown in FIG3 ;
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of an aerosol generating device in the aerosol generating system shown in FIG9 ;
  • FIG11 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an aerosol generating system in a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG12 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG11;
  • FIG13 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG12;
  • FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG11 after the cover body and the atomizing seat are hidden;
  • FIG15 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating article in FIG12;
  • FIG16 is a front view of the aerosol generating article of FIG12;
  • FIG17 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG16 taken along line A-A;
  • FIG18 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an aerosol generating system in a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG19 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG18;
  • FIG20 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG18;
  • FIG21 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating device in FIG19;
  • FIG22 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating article in FIG19;
  • FIG23 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating article in FIG19;
  • FIG24 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating article in FIG19 at another angle
  • FIG25 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a portion of the structure of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG24;
  • FIG26 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a portion of the structure of an aerosol generating article according to some modified embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG27 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a portion of the structure of an aerosol generating article in some other modified embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG28 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an aerosol generating system in a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG29 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG28;
  • FIG30 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG28;
  • FIG31 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating device in FIG29;
  • FIG32 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating article in FIG29;
  • FIG33 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating article of FIG29;
  • FIG34 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating article in FIG29 at another angle
  • FIG35 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a portion of the structure of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG34;
  • FIG36 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the damping assembly in FIG35;
  • FIG37 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an aerosol generating system in a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG38 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG37;
  • FIG39 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG38 (wherein the drive shaft is located in a first rotation position);
  • FIG40 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG38 (wherein the drive shaft is located in a second rotation position);
  • FIG41 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating article in FIG38;
  • FIG42 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of the driving shaft in FIG41;
  • FIG43 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating device in FIG38;
  • FIG44 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the transmission assembly in FIG43 (wherein the transfer gear is located in the first position);
  • FIG45 is a schematic structural diagram of the transmission assembly in FIG43 (wherein the transfer gear is located at the second position);
  • FIG46 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an aerosol generating system in a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG47 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a transmission device in the aerosol generating system shown in FIG46;
  • Fig. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device shown in Fig. 47;
  • FIG49 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the transmission device shown in FIG47;
  • FIG50 is an exploded structural cross-sectional view of the transmission device shown in FIG47;
  • FIG51 is a schematic structural diagram of the guide structure of the transmission device shown in FIG47;
  • FIG52 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a locking assembly in an unlocked state in some embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG53 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the locking assembly shown in FIG52 in a locked state
  • 54a to 54c are schematic diagrams showing state changes of the locking assembly in some embodiments of the present invention when it moves in one direction along the first direction;
  • 55a to 55c are schematic diagrams showing state changes of the locking assembly shown in FIGS. 54a to 54c when it moves in another direction along the first direction;
  • FIG56 is a schematic diagram of force analysis of a force-applying portion on a clamping member in some embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG57 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a locking assembly in an unlocked state in other embodiments of the present invention.
  • Figure 58 is a schematic diagram of the partial structure of the locking assembly shown in Figure 57 in the locked state.
  • the terms such as “installed”, “connected”, “connected”, “fixed”, “set” and the like should be understood in a broad sense, for example, it can be a fixed connection, a detachable connection, or an integral one; it can be a mechanical connection or an electrical connection; it can be directly connected or indirectly connected through an intermediate medium, it can be the internal connection of two elements or the interaction relationship between two elements.
  • installed can be a fixed connection, a detachable connection, or an integral one
  • it can be a mechanical connection or an electrical connection
  • it can be directly connected or indirectly connected through an intermediate medium, it can be the internal connection of two elements or the interaction relationship between two elements.
  • an element When an element is referred to as being “on” or “under” another element, the element can be “directly” or “indirectly” located on the other element, or there may be one or more intermediate elements.
  • Fig. 1 shows an aerosol generating system in a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 can generate aerosol for a user to inhale.
  • the aerosol generated by the aerosol generating system 100 has the advantages of good taste and high user experience.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 includes an aerosol generating article 20 and an aerosol generating device 10; the aerosol generating article 20 can be mounted on the aerosol generating device 10 to generate aerosol when heated.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 can be detachably assembled with the aerosol generating device 10, thereby facilitating the replacement of the aerosol generating article 20.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 can generate aerosol by heating the medium conveying belt 22 in the aerosol generating article 20 to atomize and output the aerosol.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 includes a box body 21 and a medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the box body 21 is used to accommodate the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 can be atomized to generate aerosol in a heated state. It can be understood that in some other embodiments, the box body 21 can be omitted.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 can be directly installed in the aerosol generating device 10.
  • the box body 21 can be a transparent structure, such as a transparent plastic box.
  • the box body 21 is not limited to a transparent structure, and can be a non-transparent structure, such as a non-transparent plastic box or a metal box.
  • the box body 21 may include a box cover 212 and a box seat 211; the shape and size of the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are comparable.
  • the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are roughly rectangular.
  • the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are not limited to being rectangular, such as a columnar cube or an irregular shape.
  • the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are both formed with a cavity 210 on the inner side, and are both open structures, which can be spliced by combining the side of the box cover 212 with an opening and the side of the box seat 211 with an opening.
  • the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 can be connected and fixed by setting a connecting structure.
  • the connecting structure can be a screw assembly, a clamping assembly or other.
  • the connection structure may be omitted, and the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 may be connected using conventional ultrasonic technology.
  • an S-shaped baffle 217 is disposed in the cavity 210, and the baffle 217 can separate the cavity 210 into a first receiving space 2140 and a second receiving space 2150.
  • the first receiving space 2140 can be used to receive the first receiving structure 230; the second receiving space 2150 is used to receive the second receiving structure 240.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 is in a belt shape as a whole, can be wound and arranged, and can be movably arranged.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 includes a base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222.
  • the base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222.
  • the matrix layer 222 is formed on the base belt 221, and specifically, the matrix layer 222 can be formed by coating an atomized medium on the base belt 221.
  • the atomized medium can be a liquid and curable atomized medium, or a paste-like atomized medium or a solid atomized medium.
  • the matrix layer 222 is not limited to being formed by coating an atomized medium, and can also be formed by laminating or pasting an atomized medium on the base belt 221.
  • the base tape 221 is arranged in a longitudinal direction and has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 arranged opposite to each other.
  • the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 can be surfaces defined by the long side and the wide side of the base tape 221.
  • the first surface 2211 can carry the matrix layer 222.
  • the base tape 221 can be a metal sheet that is easy to conduct heat, such as aluminum foil or copper foil.
  • the base tape 221 is not limited to a metal sheet, but can also be a metal mesh, which can be formed by weaving metal wires or by setting a plurality of through holes on the metal sheet.
  • the matrix layer 222 may be formed on the entire first surface 2211 of the base tape 221, and may be formed by uniformly coating the atomized medium along the length direction of the base tape 221.
  • the thickness of the matrix layer 222 at any position of the base tape 221 may be the same.
  • the thickness of the matrix layer 222 at at least two positions of the base tape 221 may be different.
  • the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221 may be coated with the atomized medium in sections to form multiple sections of the matrix layer 222.
  • the multiple sections of the matrix layer 222 may be equidistantly distributed, and the lengths extending in the length direction of the base tape 221 may be the same. It is understood that in some other embodiments, the lengths extending in the length direction of the base tape 221 of at least two sections of the matrix layer 222 are different.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 further includes a first receiving structure 230.
  • the first receiving structure 230 is disposed in the first receiving space 2140 and can be used to receive the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated.
  • the first receiving structure 230 can be installed between the box cover 212 and the box seat 211, and connected to the box cover 212 and the box seat 211.
  • the first receiving structure 230 is not limited to being installed in the box body 21, and can also be directly installed in the aerosol generating device 10.
  • the first receiving structure 230 may be a storage disk 23, and the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated may be wound on the storage disk 23, and the storage disk 23 may drive the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated to be conveyed by rotating.
  • the storage disk 23 includes a storage disk cover 232 and a storage chassis 231.
  • the storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may be substantially circular, and the radial dimensions of the storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may be substantially equal.
  • the storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 are connected by a hollow storage reel, and the storage reel may be formed at the central axis of the storage disk cover 232 and/or the storage chassis 231, or may be independently provided, and its two ends are respectively connected to the storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231.
  • the radial dimension of the storage reel is smaller than the radial dimension of the storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231, and the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated may be wound on the storage reel. It is understandable that in some other embodiments, the storage disc cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may not be limited to a circular shape, but may also be a square shape.
  • the storage disc cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may be used to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process. In some embodiments, the storage disc cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may also be omitted. In some embodiments, the storage disc 23 is rotatably connected to the box cover 212 and/or the box seat 211, and the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated can be driven to be retracted and released by rotation, thereby realizing the storage and transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 further includes a second receiving structure 240, which is disposed in the second receiving space 2150 and is used to receive the atomized medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the receiving tray 24 is disposed between the box cover 212 and the box seat 211, and is connected to the box cover 212 and the box seat 211.
  • the second receiving structure 240 is not limited to being installed in the box body 21, but can also be directly installed in the aerosol generating device 10.
  • the second receiving structure 240 may include a storage tray 24, and the heated base belt 221 may be wound on the storage tray 24.
  • the storage tray 24 includes a storage tray cover 242 and a storage chassis 241.
  • the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 are both circular, and their radial dimensions are roughly the same.
  • the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 are arranged at intervals and connected by a hollow storage reel, which may be formed at the central axis of the storage tray cover 242 and/or the storage chassis 241, or may be independently arranged, and its two ends are respectively connected to the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241.
  • the storage reel may be cylindrical, and its radial dimension is smaller than the radial dimension of the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241, and the heated medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound thereon.
  • the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 may not be limited to a circular shape, but may also be a square shape, and the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 may prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from escaping.
  • the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 may be omitted.
  • the storage tray 24 may be rotatably connected to the box cover 212 and/or the box seat 211, and the medium conveying belt 22 may be driven to be wound thereon by rotation.
  • the storage tray 24 may include a driving wheel, and the storage tray 23 may include a driven wheel. Since the base belt 221 is wound around the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24, the storage tray 23 can be driven by the storage tray 24 to rotate. When the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 rotate at the same time, the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated is driven to feed, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 is driven to be wound around the storage tray 24.
  • the storage tray 24 is not limited to including a driving wheel, but may also include a driven wheel; the storage tray 23 is not limited to including a driven wheel, but may also include a driving wheel.
  • the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also be independently rotatable, that is, the storage tray 23 is driven to rotate by a group of driving structures, and the storage tray 24 can be driven to rotate by another group of driving structures.
  • the size of the receiving space of the second receiving structure 240 may be larger than the size of the receiving space of the first receiving structure 230.
  • the radial dimensions of the receiving tray cover 242 and the receiving chassis 241 are larger than the radial dimensions of the storage tray cover 232, and the radial dimensions of the receiving tray cover 242 and the receiving chassis 241 are larger than the radial dimensions of the storage chassis 231, so that the size of the receiving space formed between the receiving tray cover 242 and the receiving chassis 241 is larger than the size of the receiving space formed between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232.
  • the cross-sectional dimension of the storage reel may be set smaller than the cross-sectional dimension of the storage reel, so that the size of the receiving space formed between the receiving tray cover 242 and the receiving chassis 241 is larger than the size of the receiving space formed between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232.
  • the size of the receiving space of the second receiving structure 240 may also be equal to or smaller than the size of the receiving space of the first receiving structure 230.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 further includes an atomizing seat 25, and the atomizing seat 25 is partially disposed on the box body 21.
  • the atomizing seat 25 includes a main body 254 and an extension 255 disposed on the main body 254; the main body 254 can be embedded and installed in the box body 21, and an atomizing cavity 250 is formed inside the atomizing seat 25, and the atomizing cavity 250 has an inlet 251 and an outlet 252; the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are both disposed on the atomizing seat 25; the atomizing cavity 250 is formed inside the main body 254, and the atomizing cavity 250 is defined by the space of the heating structure 12 and the heating medium conveying belt 22.
  • the inlet 251 is arranged on one side of the main body 254 and communicates with the atomizing chamber 250, and is used for the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated to enter the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the outlet 252 is arranged on the other side of the main body 254 and communicates with the atomizing chamber 250, and is used for the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 to be conveyed out.
  • the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are arranged opposite to each other, and are both located at or close to the plane where the center of the atomizing chamber 250 is located.
  • the extension part 255 is arranged on the main body 254, and can pass through the box body 21, and is used to connect the suction nozzle 30.
  • the extension part 255 is columnar, and has a through structure at both ends, and an air outlet channel 253 is formed inside to communicate with the atomizing chamber 250, and is used for the aerosol formed by atomization to be output.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 further includes a guide structure 28, which is disposed in the box body 21 and is used to guide the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the guide structure 28 includes a first guide structure 282, a second guide structure 283, a third guide structure 281, and a fourth guide structure 284.
  • the first guide structure 282 and the second guide structure 283 are respectively disposed on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25.
  • the first guide structure is disposed near the inlet 251, located on the side of the inlet 251 away from the outlet 252, and is used to guide the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated into the inlet 251.
  • the second guide structure 283 is disposed near the outlet 252, located on the side of the outlet 252 away from the inlet 251, and is used to guide the heated medium conveying belt 22 output from the outlet 252 to move to the second receiving structure 240.
  • the third guide structure 281 is disposed between the first guide structure 282 and the first receiving structure 230, and is used to transfer the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated outputted from the first receiving structure 230 to the first guide structure 282.
  • the fourth guide structure 284 is disposed between the second guide structure 283 and the second receiving structure 240, and is used to guide the medium conveyor belt 22 that has passed through the second guide structure 283 and has been heated to the second receiving structure 240.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated can enter the atomizing chamber 250 along the third guide structure 281, the first guide structure 282, and the inlet 251. After atomization, the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 continue to rotate, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 can be outputted from the outlet 252 and then received into the receiving tray 24 through the second guide structure 283 and the fourth guide structure 284.
  • first guide structure 282, the second guide structure 283, the third guide structure 281 and the fourth guide structure 284 can be rotatable structures, such as rollers or guide rollers; of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the first guide structure 282, the second guide structure 283, the third guide structure 281 and the fourth guide structure 284 can also be non-rotatable structures, such as guide columns fixedly arranged in the box body 21 or others.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 further includes two groups of limiting structures 29, namely, a group of first limiting structures 291 and a group of second limiting structures 292.
  • the two groups of limiting structures 29 and the medium conveying belt 22 can be installed together in the box body 21 to form the aerosol generating article 20.
  • the two groups of limiting structures 29 and the medium conveying belt 22 are contained in the cavity 210 together.
  • the medium conveying belt 22, the limiting structure 29, the first containing structure 230, and the second containing structure 240 are not limited to forming an assembly, and the limiting structure 29 can also be directly installed on the aerosol generating device 10.
  • the limiting structure 29 is not limited to two groups, but can be more than two groups.
  • the first limiting structure 291 is not limited to one group, but can also be multiple groups; in some embodiments, the second limiting structure 292 is not limited to one group, but can also be multiple groups.
  • the first limiting structure 291 can be arranged on a side of the inlet 251 away from the outlet 252, between the first guide structure 282 and the inlet 251, and offset from the first guide structure 282 in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heating structure 12, that is, offset in a direction close to the air outlet channel 253;
  • the second limiting structure 292 can be arranged on a side of the outlet 252 away from the inlet 251, between the second guide structure 283 and the outlet 252, and offset from the first guide structure 282 in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heating structure 12.
  • the second guide structure 283 is set offset in the direction of the heating structure 12 fitting, that is, it is set offset in the direction close to the air outlet channel 253; thereby, the transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22 can be avoided from being blocked.
  • the first limiting structure 291 and the second limiting structure 292 are arranged opposite to each other, and both apply a force to the medium conveyor belt 22 in the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 fitting with the heating structure 12, thereby limiting the freedom of the medium conveyor belt 22 to move toward the side of the air outlet channel 253, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 is in close contact with the heating structure 12, thereby improving the adequacy of atomization.
  • only the first limiting structure 291 may apply a force to the medium conveyor belt 22 in the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 fitting with the heating structure 12; or, only the second limiting structure 292 may apply a force to the medium conveyor belt 22 in the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 fitting with the heating structure 12.
  • the first limiting structure 291 located between the first guide structure 282 and the inlet 251 can be one group or multiple groups, and the first limiting structure 291 located between the second guide structure 283 and the outlet 252 can also be one group or multiple groups.
  • the first limiting structure 291 can be a limiting wheel, such as a roller.
  • the two ends of the limiting wheel can be connected to the box cover 212 and the box seat 211, and the side wall of the limiting wheel can contact the medium conveyor belt 22, and apply pressure to the medium conveyor belt along the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heating structure 12.
  • the first limiting structure 291 is not limited to a limiting wheel.
  • the first limiting structure 291 can be a limiting convex rib, which can be protruded toward the cavity 210 and arranged on the inner wall of the box cover 212 or the inner wall of the box seat 211.
  • the limiting convex rib can be a plastic part integrally formed on the box body 21, or a sponge block or other fixed in the box body 21.
  • the first limiting structure 291 can also be a combination of a limiting wheel and a limiting convex rib.
  • the first limiting structure 291 is a plurality of groups, one or more of the first limiting structures 291 can be a limiting wheel or a limiting convex rib.
  • the second limiting structure 292 can be a limiting wheel, such as a roller.
  • the two ends of the limiting wheel can be connected to the box cover 212 and the box seat 211, and the side wall of the limiting wheel can contact the medium conveyor belt 22, and apply pressure to the medium conveyor belt along the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heating structure 12.
  • the second limiting structure 292 is not limited to a limiting wheel.
  • the second limiting structure 292 can be a limiting convex rib, which can be protruded toward the cavity 210 and arranged on the inner wall of the box cover 212 or the inner wall of the box seat 211.
  • the limiting convex rib can be a plastic part integrally formed on the box body 21, or a sponge block or other fixed in the box body 21.
  • the second limiting structure 292 can also be a combination of a limiting wheel and a limiting convex rib.
  • the second limiting structure 292 is a plurality of groups, one or more of the second limiting structures 292 can be a limiting wheel or a limiting convex rib.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 includes a body 11 and a heating structure 12.
  • the body 11 can be used to accommodate an aerosol generating product 20.
  • the heating structure 12 is mounted on the body 11 and can be inserted into the aerosol generating product 20 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 in the aerosol generating product 20 to generate aerosol.
  • the body 11 includes a housing 110 and a cover 111.
  • the housing 110 includes a frame 112 and a base 113.
  • the frame 112 is disposed on the base 113, and a receiving cavity 1120 is disposed on the frame 112, and the receiving cavity 1120 is used to receive the aerosol generating product 20.
  • An assembly port 1123 is provided on the side wall of the frame 112, and the assembly port 1123 is used for the aerosol generating product 20 to be loaded into the receiving cavity 1120.
  • the cover 111 is disposed at the assembly port 1123, and can detachably cover the receiving cavity 1120. By opening the cover 111, the aerosol generating product 20 can be easily taken out and replaced.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 can be detachably installed in the receiving cavity 1120, that is, the aerosol generating product 20 can be better used, which can meet the user's needs for more atomization times and can store the atomized medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the heating structure 12 is mounted on the frame 112, located on the bottom wall of the accommodating cavity 1120 and protruding toward the accommodating cavity 1120.
  • the heating structure 12 can be inserted into the atomizing seat 25 of the aerosol generating product 20, and is arranged opposite to the air outlet channel 253, for heating the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated entering the atomizing cavity 250.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 is arranged on the side of the heating structure 12 facing the air outlet channel 253.
  • the heating structure 12 includes a mounting seat 122 and a heater 121.
  • the mounting seat 122 is mounted on the bottom wall of the accommodating cavity 1120, and the heater 121 is mounted on the mounting seat 122.
  • the heater 121 can be in the form of a sheet, and in some embodiments, it can be a metal heating sheet. Of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the heater 121 is not limited to a metal heating sheet.
  • the heating structure 12 includes a first side 121a and a second side 121b, wherein the first side 121a and the second side 121b are arranged opposite to each other.
  • the first side 121a and the second side 121b can be arranged sequentially along the moving direction of the medium conveying belt 22. That is, the first side 121a can be located on the side where the inlet 251 is provided, and the second side 121b is located on the side where the outlet 252 is provided. Then, the first side 121a is provided with at least one set of limiting structures 29, and the second side 121b is provided with at least one set of limiting structures 29, and each limiting structure 29 is pressed on the medium conveying belt 22.
  • first side 121a and the second side 121b are not limited to being arranged sequentially along the moving direction of the medium conveying belt 22.
  • first side 121a can be located on the side of the heater 121 close to the mounting seat 122
  • second side 121b can be located on the side of the heater 121 away from the mounting seat 122.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 further includes a driving assembly 14, which can be installed on the body 11.
  • the driving assembly 14 is installed between the frame 112 and the base 113, and a portion of the driving assembly 14 can extend into the accommodating chamber 1120 to connect with the second accommodating structure 240 or the first accommodating structure 230, and is used to transfer the medium conveying belt 22 in the aerosol generating product 20 to the heating structure 12.
  • the driving assembly 14 can be an electric driving structure, such as the driving assembly 14 can be a motor or a reduction box, and the output shaft of the driving assembly 14 can penetrate into the accommodating chamber 1120 from the side of the frame 112 that is opposite to the accommodating chamber 1120, and be connected with the second accommodating structure 240 or the first accommodating structure 230, that is, connected with the storage disk 23 or the storage disk 24, and is used to drive the storage disk 23 and the storage disk 24 to rotate.
  • the driving assembly 14 is not limited to an electric driving structure, and can be a manual driving structure, such as a handle or a hand wheel.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 further includes a power supply 13, which is disposed in the housing 110, specifically between the frame 112 and the base 113.
  • the power supply 13 can be used to power the driving component 14 and the heating structure 12.
  • the power supply 13 can be a battery.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 further includes a main control board 15, which is disposed in the housing 110, specifically between the frame 112 and the base 113.
  • the main control board 15 is connected to the power supply 13, the driving assembly 14 and the heating structure 12.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 further includes a nozzle 30, which can be mounted on the atomizing seat 25. Specifically, the nozzle 30 can be mounted on the extension portion 255, and the user can inhale the aerosol output from the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the nozzle 30 can be roughly cylindrical. Of course, it can be understood that in other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, but can also be a flat column or other shapes.
  • FIG. 11-13 show an aerosol generating system 100 in a second embodiment of the present invention, wherein the aerosol generating system 100 comprises an aerosol generating device 10 and an aerosol generating article 20 that cooperate with each other.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 is used to store the atomizing medium, and the aerosol generating device 10 is used to heat the atomizing medium after being powered on to generate an aerosol.
  • one end of the aerosol generating system 100 further has a nozzle 30 for allowing the user to inhale the aerosol generated after the atomization medium is atomized.
  • the nozzle 30 is cylindrical. In other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, and it can also be a flat column or other shapes.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may include a cavity 210 and a medium conveying belt 22 contained in the cavity 210, wherein the medium conveying belt 22 has a matrix layer 222 distributed along its length.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 may be disposed in the cavity 210 in a winding manner, and the winding arrangement manner may enable more medium conveying belts 22 to be stored in a limited space, so that a single aerosol generating article 20 may be atomized and used multiple times.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 may further include a storage tray 23 and a receiving tray 24.
  • the unheated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage tray 23, and the heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the receiving tray 24.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 includes a body 11, a heater 121 and a main control board 15 housed in the body 11.
  • the main control board 15 is provided with a control circuit for controlling the heater 121.
  • the heater 121 can heat the substrate layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 in a contact or non-contact manner after being powered on to generate aerosol.
  • the heater 121 adopts a resistive heating method, which can generate heat through the Joule effect.
  • the heater 121 has a heating surface 1211, and the heating surface 1211 is in direct contact with the medium conveyor belt 22, so as to transfer heat to the medium conveyor belt 22 for baking and heating.
  • the heater 121 can be in a sheet shape, and the heating surface 1211 is located on one side of the heater 121 along the thickness direction and can be a plane or a substantially plane, so as to facilitate full contact with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and increase the heating area.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a mounting seat 122, which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone).
  • a mounting seat 122 which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone).
  • One end of the heater 121 may be inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed to the body 11 via the mounting seat 122, which may reduce the heat transferred from the heater 121 to the body 11 and facilitate heat insulation.
  • the heater 121 is not limited to being in the form of a sheet, and may also be in other shapes such as a columnar shape. In other embodiments, the heater 121 may also be heated by other heating methods such as electromagnetic heating, infrared radiation, ultrasound, microwave, plasma, etc.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a driving assembly 14 disposed in the body 11, and the driving assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to move forward, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can be unwound from the storage disk 23, heated and atomized by the heater 121, and then rewound by the storage disk 24.
  • a driving assembly 14 disposed in the body 11, and the driving assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to move forward, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can be unwound from the storage disk 23, heated and atomized by the heater 121, and then rewound by the storage disk 24.
  • the driving assembly 14 is an electric driving structure, which may include a reducer 141 and an output shaft 142 connected to the reducer 141, and the reducer 141 outputs the driving force through the output shaft 142.
  • the driving assembly 14 may also include other electric driving structures such as a motor.
  • the driving assembly 14 is also not limited to an electric driving structure, and it may also be a manual driving structure, such as a handle or a hand wheel.
  • the body 11 may be roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and a socket 1110 for the nozzle 30 to extend is formed at the upper end of the body 11, and a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed in the body 11.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 is detachably connected to the receiving cavity 1120.
  • the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 is used up, the matrix layer 222 can be updated by replacing the aerosol generating product 20.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 can be reused, thereby reducing the use cost of the aerosol generating system 100.
  • the body 11 is not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and it can also be in other shapes such as a cylindrical shape, a racetrack-shaped column or an elliptical column.
  • the body 11 may include a frame 112 and a cover 111 and a base 113 respectively matched with the frame 112.
  • the cover 111 and the base 113 may be respectively arranged on both sides of the frame 112 along the thickness direction.
  • An installation cavity 1130 is formed between the frame 112 and the base 113, and the installation cavity 1130 can be used to accommodate components such as the drive assembly 14, the main control board 15, and the battery.
  • the base 113 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner to facilitate the maintenance, replacement or upgrading of the parts in the installation cavity 1130.
  • the base 113 and the frame 112 can also be connected together in a non-detachable manner to prevent the user from accidentally opening the installation cavity 1130 and causing damage to the parts.
  • the frame 112 may be recessed on one side of the cassette seat 211 to form a mounting cavity 1121 for accommodating the mounting seat 122.
  • One end of the heater 121 is inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed in the mounting cavity 1121 via the mounting seat 122.
  • the other end of the heater 121 may pass through the cassette seat 211 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 in the cassette seat 211.
  • a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed between the cover 111 and the frame 112.
  • the cover 111 and the frame 112 can be connected together by one or more detachable methods such as snap connection, threaded connection, magnetic connection, etc., so that the aerosol generating product 20 can be taken out and replaced by opening the cover 111.
  • at least one magnet 114 is embedded on the side of the cover 111 facing the frame 112
  • at least one magnet 115 is embedded on the side of the frame 112 facing the cover 111 corresponding to the at least one magnet 114, so that the cover 111 and the frame 112 are magnetically fixed to each other through the magnets 114 and 115.
  • the cover 111 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material.
  • transparent is used to describe a material that allows at least a significant portion of incident light to pass through it, allowing for seeing through the material.
  • a substantially transparent material may allow enough light to pass through it so that the media transport belt 22 within the cover 111 is visible.
  • the cover 111 may be completely transparent; alternatively, the cover 111 may have a lower level of transparency while still transmitting enough light to allow the media conveyor belt 22 within the cover 111 to be visible. Further, the cover 111 may include one or more areas formed of a transparent material so that a portion of the media conveyor belt 22 is visible through the one or more areas. In addition, the area formed of the transparent material may be colored, tinted, or colorless. Of course, in other embodiments, the cover 111 may also be made of an opaque material.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 includes a box seat 211, one side of the box seat 211 is open to form a cavity 210, and the cover body 111 is disposed on the open mouth of the cavity 210 to seal the cavity 210.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 may further include a box cover disposed on the box seat 211, and the open mouth of the cavity 210 is sealed by the box cover.
  • the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are rotatably disposed on the cassette seat 211, respectively.
  • the storage tray 23 can rotate in a preset direction to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 can rotate in a direction that is the same as or opposite to the preset direction to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 23 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or in a counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or in a counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • one of the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 is a driving wheel, and the other is a driven wheel.
  • the receiving tray 24 is a driving wheel and is connected to the output shaft 142
  • the storage tray 23 is a driven wheel.
  • the receiving tray 24 rotates under the drive of the output shaft 142 to reel in the medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the storage tray 23 to rotate synchronously to unwind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 can also be driving wheels, and can be connected to the driving assembly 14 respectively.
  • the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 can also rotate asynchronously. For example, the storage tray 23 first unwinds a section of the medium conveying belt 22, and after heating is completed, the receiving tray 24 is driven to rotate for rewinding.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 may include a belt-shaped base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222 disposed on the base belt 221.
  • the matrix layer 222 includes an atomizing medium, which may include one or more of a solid and a gel, and is used to generate an aerosol after heating.
  • the base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222.
  • the base belt 221 has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 that are arranged opposite to each other in the thickness direction.
  • the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 may face the center line of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, and the first surface 2211 of the base belt 221 is relatively far away from the center line of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24.
  • the matrix layer 222 may be arranged on the first surface 2211 and/or the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 by coating, lamination or bonding. In addition, the matrix layer 222 may be distributed continuously on the base belt 221, or may be distributed at intervals in different regions.
  • the matrix layer 222 is disposed on the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221.
  • the matrix layer 222 may also be disposed on the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221, or disposed on both the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221.
  • the base belt 221 may be made of a heat-conducting material, such as a heat-conducting metal material such as aluminum foil or copper foil.
  • the base belt 221 may also be made of a heat-conducting non-metallic material, such as graphite.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be made entirely of the matrix layer 222, that is, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not include the base belt 221.
  • the heater 121 can be in contact with the side of the medium conveyor belt 22 where the matrix layer 222 is not provided, and transfer heat to the matrix layer 222 through the base belt 221. In this way, it is possible to prevent the heated matrix layer 222 from adhering to the heater 121, thereby affecting the heating effect of the heater 121.
  • the heater 121 can also be in direct contact with the matrix layer 222, which is conducive to improving the heat transfer efficiency and reducing the heat loss.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 does not need to be made of a heat-conducting material.
  • the bottom wall of the cavity 210 may also protrude to form a partition 214 and a partition 215, and the inner wall surfaces of the partition 214 and the partition 215 respectively define a first receiving space 2140 and a second receiving space 2150, and the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24 are rotatably disposed in the first receiving space 2140 and the second receiving space 2150.
  • One side of the first receiving space 2140 has an outlet 2141
  • one side of the second receiving space 2150 has an inlet 2151
  • the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can pass through the outlet 2141 and be rolled up on the receiving disk 24 through the inlet 2151.
  • the parts of the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization are respectively contained in the first containing space 2140 and the second containing space 2150. Since the matrix layer 222 usually becomes more fluffy after atomization, the thickness of the medium conveyor belt 22 becomes larger.
  • the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can be designed to be larger than the diameter of the first containing space 2140.
  • the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can also be less than or equal to the diameter of the first containing space 2140.
  • the partition 214 and the partition 215 are respectively in the shape of an arc with one side open, and the partition 214 and the partition 215 are connected to form an S-shaped structure, and the partition 214 is located at the lower side of the partition 215.
  • the structures of the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be deformed in other ways, for example, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be not connected together, and for another example, the partition 214 and/or the partition 215 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, or can also be inclined at a certain angle to the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.
  • the storage disk 23 may include a storage reel 233 and a storage base 231 and a storage disk cover 232 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 233.
  • the unheated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 233, and the storage base 231 and the storage disk cover 232 may limit the floating space of the medium conveying belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 233 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.
  • the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 are both in the shape of a disk
  • the storage reel 233 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 233 can also be in the shape of a cylinder.
  • the storage reel 233 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233.
  • the storage reel 233 may include a shaft segment 2331 integrally formed with the storage chassis 231 and a shaft segment 2332 integrally formed with the storage disc cover 232, and the shaft segments 2331 and 2332 are mutually sleeved to form the storage reel 233.
  • the storage reel 233 may also be formed by only extending the storage chassis 231 or the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 may also be a separately formed component.
  • the distance L1 between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 is greater than the width W of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the medium conveying belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck.
  • the distance L1 between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 refers to the vertical distance between the side of the storage chassis 231 facing the storage tray cover 232 and the side of the storage tray cover 232 facing the storage chassis 231.
  • the distance L1 between the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 may also be equal to the width W of the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage reel 233 may be provided with the storage chassis 231 or the storage disc cover 232 at only one end, and the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be limited by the cover 111 or the cassette seat 211.
  • the storage reel 233 may not be provided with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 at both ends.
  • the storage tray 24 may also include a storage reel 243 and a storage bottom plate 241 and a storage tray cover 242 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 243.
  • the heated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 243, and the storage bottom plate 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may limit the floating space of the medium conveying belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 243 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.
  • the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 are both in the shape of a disk
  • the storage reel 243 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 243 can also be in the shape of a cylinder.
  • the storage reel 243 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243.
  • the storage reel 243 may include a shaft segment 2431 integrally formed with the storage chassis 241 and a shaft segment 2432 integrally formed with the storage tray cover 242, and the shaft segments 2431 and 2432 are mutually sleeved to form the storage reel 243.
  • the storage reel 243 may also be formed by only extending the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242, or the storage reel 243 may also be a separately formed component.
  • the distance L2 between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 is greater than the width W of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the medium conveying belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck.
  • the distance L2 between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 refers to the vertical distance between the side of the storage chassis 241 facing the storage tray cover 242 and the side of the storage tray cover 242 facing the storage chassis 241.
  • the distance L2 between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may also be equal to the width W of the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage reel 243 may also be provided with the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242 at only one end, and the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be limited by the cover body 111 or the box seat 211.
  • the storage reel 243 may not be provided with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 at both ends.
  • the storage chassis 231 can be first installed on the box seat 211, and the storage chassis 231 can rotate smoothly on the box seat 211, then the medium conveying belt 22 is stored in the storage tray 23 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 232 is covered.
  • the storage chassis 241 is installed on the box seat 211, and the storage chassis 241 can rotate smoothly on the box seat 211, then the medium conveying belt 22 is stored in the storage tray 24 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 242 is covered.
  • the output shaft 142 can pass through the box seat 211 and be plugged into the storage reel 243 of the storage tray 24.
  • the storage reel 243 is formed with a socket 2430 for the output shaft 142 to be inserted.
  • the radial cross-section of the socket 2430 and the output shaft 142 can be a non-circular shape such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 142 can be circumferentially fixed in the socket 2430, so that the reducer 141 can drive the storage tray 24 to rotate, and the plug-in matching method makes it easy to disassemble and assemble the aerosol generating product 20 and the aerosol generating device 10.
  • the output shaft 142 can also be connected to the storage tray 24 in other ways, such as threaded connection, pin connection, etc.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 may further include a damper 17 connected to the storage disk 23, which is used to provide a reverse force to keep the storage disk 23 in a tensioned state to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from loosening.
  • the damper 17 may be disposed in the cartridge seat 211 or in the body 11. In this embodiment, the damper 17 is disposed in the body 11, so that it can be reused, reducing the replacement cost.
  • the damper 17 is a damping wheel 170 and is coaxially arranged with the storage disk 23.
  • the physical properties of the damping wheel 170 itself will keep the storage disk 23 in a tensioned state.
  • the damping wheel 170 can provide a damping torque that is opposite to the preset rotation direction of the storage disk 23 (counterclockwise in this embodiment).
  • the damping torque of the damping wheel 170 can tighten the storage disk 23 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from loosening.
  • the damping torque of the damping wheel 170 can make the medium conveying belt 22 subject to a certain resistance during the movement, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can achieve a pre-tightening effect during the movement.
  • the damper 17 may also adopt other known structures capable of providing damping torque, such as a spring, a torsion spring, etc.
  • damping wheel 170 One end of the damping wheel 170 has a damping shaft 171, which can pass through the box seat 211 and be plugged into the storage reel 233 of the storage disk 23.
  • the damping wheel 170 can use damping grease as a damping medium, and use the viscosity of the damping grease to hinder the movement of the damping shaft 171, so as to obtain a damping effect.
  • a plug-in hole 2330 for inserting the damping shaft 171 is formed on the storage reel 233.
  • the radial cross-section of the plug-in hole 2330 and the damping shaft 171 can be a non-circular shape such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, or an ellipse, so that the damping shaft 171 can be circumferentially fixed in the plug-in hole 2330 to prevent the damping shaft 171 from rotating in the plug-in hole 2330.
  • the plug-in matching method makes it easy to assemble and disassemble the damping wheel 170 and the storage disk 23.
  • the damping wheel 170 can also be connected to the storage disk 23 by other methods, such as riveting, pinning, threaded connection, etc.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include an atomizing seat 25, in which an atomizing chamber 250 is formed, and an inlet 251 and an outlet 252 are formed on the side wall of the atomizing seat 25, which are connected to the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 can enter the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251, and after being heated and atomized in the atomizing chamber 250, it can be transmitted through the outlet 252.
  • One end of the heater 121 can extend into the atomizing chamber 250 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 entering the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the atomizer seat 25 can be installed together with the box seat 211 in a detachable manner, and the atomizer seat 25 can be reused to reduce replacement costs.
  • the atomizer seat 25 can also be installed together with the box seat 211 in a non-detachable manner, or the atomizer seat 25 can also be integrally formed with the box seat 211.
  • an air inlet 2110 for allowing external air to enter the atomizing chamber 250 may be provided on the side wall of the cartridge seat 211. Specifically, the air inlet 2110 may be connected to the receiving chamber 210, and then connected to the atomizing chamber 250 through the receiving chamber 210.
  • the cross-section of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be the same or similar to the cross-section of the medium conveyor belt 22 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22).
  • a clearance fit may be adopted between the inlet 251, the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck, and the edges of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be prevented from scratching the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • annular gap 2510 formed between the periphery of the inlet 251 and the medium conveyor belt 22 and/or the annular gap 2520 formed between the periphery of the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be used as an airflow channel to connect the atomization chamber 250 with the containing chamber 210, and then connect with the air inlet 2110.
  • the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too small, otherwise it may cause excessive suction resistance, resulting in too low pressure in the atomizing chamber 250 and causing suction turbulence, affecting the suction experience.
  • the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too large, reducing or avoiding the leakage of the aerosol generated in the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251 and the outlet 252.
  • the atomizer seat 25 is disposed on the upper side of the cartridge seat 211, and may include a main body 254 and an extension portion 255 extending upward from the main body 254.
  • An air outlet channel 253 communicating with the atomizer chamber 250 is formed in the extension portion 255, and the lower end of the nozzle 30 may be inserted into the air outlet channel 253.
  • the main body 254 may be accommodated on the upper side of the cavity 210, the atomizer chamber 250 is formed in the main body 254, and the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are respectively formed on two opposite sides of the atomizer seat 25 in the transverse direction.
  • the atomizer seat 25 may also be disposed at other positions of the cartridge seat 211.
  • the configuration of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 is not limited, for example, the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be disposed at the same side of the atomizer seat 25; or, the inlet 251 may be disposed at one lateral side of the atomizer seat 25, and the outlet 252 may be disposed at the bottom side of the atomizer seat 25.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a guide structure 28, which is disposed in the cavity 210 and is used to guide the medium conveyor belt 22 during its travel, to ensure smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22, and to ensure good contact between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heater 121.
  • a guide structure 28 which is disposed in the cavity 210 and is used to guide the medium conveyor belt 22 during its travel, to ensure smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22, and to ensure good contact between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heater 121.
  • the guide structure 28 is a limiting roller 280, and the rolling friction of the limiting roller 280 ensures smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the guide structure 28 may also be other structures such as convex ribs and convex columns.
  • Each guide structure 28 may include two spaced apart limiting steps 2851 and 2852, which can allow the medium conveying belt 22 to be always limited in the axial space between the limiting steps 2851 and 2852.
  • the distance L3 between the limiting steps 2851 and 2852 may be greater than the width W of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the medium conveying belt 22 has a certain floating space in the axial direction of the limiting roller 280, so that the medium conveying belt 22 does not generate friction with the limiting steps 2851 and 2852, thereby ensuring the smooth transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 and avoiding jamming.
  • the distance L3 between the limiting steps 2851 and 2852 may also be equal to the width W of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable.
  • the limiting roller 280 includes a roller shaft 286 and a roller sleeve 285 rotatably sleeved on the roller shaft 286.
  • the roller shaft 286 is mounted on the cassette seat 211, and the outer surface of the roller sleeve 285 is used to contact with the medium conveying belt 22 and generate rolling friction.
  • the limiting steps 2851 and 2852 are respectively formed by the axial ends of the roller sleeve 285 protruding radially outward.
  • the roller shaft 286 can also be integrally formed with the cassette seat 211.
  • the plurality of guide structures 28 may include guide structures 281, 282, and 283 that are sequentially distributed on the transmission path of the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated sequentially passes through the guide structures 281, 282, and the inlet 251 to enter the atomizing chamber 250 for atomization, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 is output from the outlet 252 and then guided by the guide structure 283, and then rolled up on the storage tray 24.
  • the guide structure 281 is disposed near the outlet 2141, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can be smoothly conveyed, and the transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 is not affected by the change in the size of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23.
  • the guide structure 282 and the guide structure 283 are respectively disposed on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25 in the lateral direction, so as to make the medium conveying belt 22 in good contact with the heater 121. It should be noted that the guide structure 282 and the guide structure 283 are respectively disposed corresponding to the inlet 251 and the outlet 252. When the setting positions of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are changed, the setting positions of the guide structure 282 and the guide structure 283 can be changed accordingly.
  • the relative positions among the guide structure 282, the guide structure 283, and the heater 121 are configured such that the positioning surface P2 formed by the guide structure 282 and the guide structure 283 on the medium conveyor belt 22 is not on the same plane as the plane P1 where the heating surface 1211 of the heater 121 is located, and the medium conveyor belt 22 can be pressed toward the heating surface 1211 so as to be in close contact with the heating surface 1211.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 is always in a pre-tightened state, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heater 121 can always fit well, and the atomization efficiency is higher.
  • the positioning surface P2 refers to the plane defined by the outlet side (the side facing the inlet 251) of the contact portion of the guide structure 282 and the medium conveyor belt 22 and the inlet side (the side facing the outlet 252) of the contact portion of the guide structure 283 and the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the positioning surface P2 can also be understood as a plane where the side surface of the medium conveying belt 22 in contact with the guide structures 282 and 283 is located due to the limitation of the guide structures 282 and 283 when the heater 121 is not installed.
  • the heating surface 1211 may be parallel to the positioning surface P2 formed by the guide structures 282 and 283 for the medium conveying belt 22 , so that the contact between the heating surface 1211 and the medium conveying belt 22 is more uniform and the atomization is more uniform.
  • the heating surface 1211 is located on the upper surface of the heater 121, and the plane P1 where the heating surface 1211 is located is higher than the positioning surface P2 formed by the guide structures 282 and 283 for the medium conveying belt 22, and the heating surface 1211 is parallel to the plane defined by the central axis of the guide structures 282 and 283.
  • the upper surface of the heater 121 is in contact with the medium conveying belt 22, so that the heater 121 can also play a role in supporting the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the heating surface 1211 can also be located on the lower surface of the heater 121, in which case the plane P1 where the heating surface 1211 is located is lower than the positioning surface P2 formed by the guide structures 282 and 283 for the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a position detection sensor 289 for detecting the position of the media conveying belt 22, so as to more accurately control the operation of the driving assembly 14.
  • the position detection sensor 289 may be disposed between the guide structure 281 and the guide structure 282, and the position detection sensor 289 may accurately detect the position of the media conveying belt 22 through the limiting of the guide structure 281 and the guide structure 282.
  • the position detection sensor 289 may be any known position sensor, such as an infrared position detection sensor.
  • FIGS. 18-21 show an aerosol generating system 100 in a third embodiment of the present invention, wherein the aerosol generating system 100 comprises an aerosol generating device 10 and an aerosol generating article 20 that cooperate with each other.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 is used to store a substrate layer 222, and the aerosol generating device 10 is used to heat the substrate layer 222 after being powered on to generate an aerosol.
  • one end of the aerosol generating system 100 further has a nozzle 30 for the user to inhale the aerosol generated after the atomization of the matrix layer 222.
  • the nozzle 30 is cylindrical. In other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, and it can also be a flat column or other shapes.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may include a box body 21 and a medium conveying belt 22 contained in the box body 21, wherein the medium conveying belt 22 has a matrix layer 222 distributed along its length.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 may be disposed in the box body 21 in a winding manner, and the winding arrangement manner enables more medium conveying belts 22 to be stored in a limited space in the box body 21, so that a single aerosol generating article 20 can be atomized and used multiple times.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 may further include a storage tray 23 and a receiving tray 24.
  • the unheated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage tray 23, and the heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the receiving tray 24.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 includes a body 11 and a heater 121, a power supply 13, a driving assembly 14 and a main control board 15 housed in the body 11.
  • the main control board 15 is provided with a control circuit for controlling the heater 121, and the control circuit is electrically connected to the heater 121, the power supply 13 and the driving assembly 14 respectively.
  • the heater 121 is used to heat the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 in a contact or non-contact manner after being powered on to generate an aerosol.
  • the driving assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to travel, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can be unwound from the storage disk 23, heated and atomized by the heater 121, and then rewound by the storage disk 24.
  • the heater 121 adopts a resistive heating method, which can generate heat through the Joule effect.
  • the heater 121 has a heating surface 1211, and the heating surface 1211 is in direct contact with the medium conveyor belt 22, so as to transfer heat to the medium conveyor belt 22 for baking and heating.
  • the heater 121 can be in a sheet shape, and the heating surface 1211 is located on one side of the heater 121 along the thickness direction and can be a plane or a substantially plane, so as to facilitate full contact with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and increase the heating area.
  • the heating surface 1211 is located on the upper side of the heater 121 close to the suction nozzle 30 , so that the heater 121 also has the function of supporting the medium conveying belt 22 , which is beneficial to the fitting of the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121 .
  • the heating surface 1211 may also be located on other sides of the heater 121, such as the lower side.
  • the heater 121 is not limited to being in the form of a sheet, but may also be in other shapes such as a columnar shape.
  • the heater 121 may also use other heating methods such as electromagnetic heating, infrared radiation, ultrasound, microwave, plasma, etc.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a mounting seat 122, which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone).
  • a mounting seat 122 which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone).
  • One end of the heater 121 may be inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed to the body 11 via the mounting seat 122, which may reduce the heat transferred from the heater 121 to the body 11 and facilitate heat insulation.
  • the drive assembly 14 is an electric drive structure, which may include a reducer 141 and an output shaft 142 connected to the reducer 141, and the reducer 141 outputs the driving force through the output shaft 142.
  • the drive assembly 14 may also include other electric drive structures such as a motor.
  • the drive assembly 14 is also not limited to an electric drive structure, and it may also include a manual drive structure, such as a handle or a handwheel.
  • the body 11 may be roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and a socket 1110 for the nozzle 30 to extend out is formed at the upper end of the body 11, and a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed in the body 11.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 is detachably connected to the receiving cavity 1120.
  • the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 is used up, the matrix layer 222 can be updated by replacing the aerosol generating product 20.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 can be reused, thereby reducing the use cost of the aerosol generating system 100.
  • the body 11 is not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and it can also be in other shapes such as a cylindrical shape, a racetrack-shaped column or an elliptical column.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a sliding cover 116, which may be slidably disposed on the body 11 to cover or expose the socket 1110.
  • the sliding cover 116 may be pushed to cover the socket 1110 to prevent dust from entering the socket 1110.
  • the sliding cover 116 may be pushed to expose the socket 1110 so that the nozzle 30 can pass through the socket 1110.
  • the body 11 may include a frame 112 and a cover 111 and a base 113 respectively matched with the frame 112.
  • the cover 111 and the base 113 may be respectively arranged on both sides of the frame 112 along the thickness direction.
  • An installation cavity 1130 is formed between the frame 112 and the base 113, and the installation cavity 1130 can be used to accommodate components such as the power supply 13, the reducer 141, and the main control board 15.
  • the base 113 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner to facilitate maintenance, replacement or upgrading of components in the installation cavity 1130.
  • the base 113 and the frame 112 can also be connected together in a non-detachable manner to prevent users from accidentally opening the installation cavity 1130 and causing damage to components.
  • the frame 112 may be recessed on one side of the box body 21 to form a mounting cavity 1121 for accommodating the mounting seat 122.
  • One end of the heater 121 is inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed in the mounting cavity 1121 via the mounting seat 122.
  • the other end of the heater 121 may pass through the box body 21 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 in the box body 21.
  • a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed between the cover 111 and the frame 112.
  • the cover 111 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner such as a snap connection, a threaded connection, a magnetic connection, etc., so that the aerosol generating product 20 can be taken out and replaced by opening the cover 111.
  • at least one magnet 114 is embedded on the side of the cover 111 facing the frame 112
  • at least one magnet 115 is embedded on the side of the frame 112 facing the cover 111 corresponding to the at least one magnet 114, so that the cover 111 and the frame 112 are magnetically fixed to each other through the magnets 114 and 115.
  • the cover 111 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material.
  • transparent is used to describe a material that allows at least a significant portion of incident light to pass through it, allowing for seeing through the material.
  • a substantially transparent material may allow enough light to pass through it so that the media transport belt 22 within the cover 111 is visible.
  • the cover 111 may be completely transparent; alternatively, the cover 111 may have a lower level of transparency while still transmitting enough light to allow the media conveyor belt 22 within the cover 111 to be visible. Further, the cover 111 may include one or more areas formed of a transparent material so that a portion of the media conveyor belt 22 is visible through the one or more areas. In addition, the area formed of the transparent material may be colored, tinted, or colorless. Of course, in other embodiments, the cover 111 may also be made of an opaque material.
  • a cavity 210 is formed in the box body 21, and the medium conveyor belt 22, the storage tray 23, and the receiving tray 24 are all received in the cavity 210.
  • the box body 21 and the cavity 210 are both roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are arranged side by side along the length direction of the cavity 210.
  • the box body 21 and the cavity 210 are not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and of course, the arrangement of the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 is also not limited.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 may also not include the box seat 211 and/or the box cover 212.
  • the box body 21 may include a box seat 211 and a box cover 212 that cooperate with each other.
  • the cavity 210 is formed between the box seat 211 and the box cover 212.
  • the cavity 210 may be formed by a depression of the box seat 211 or the box cover 212, or may be formed by a depression of both the box seat 211 and the box cover 212.
  • the box seat 211 and the box cover 212 may be fixed together in a detachable or non-detachable manner such as a threaded connection, a snap connection, a magnetic connection, or an adhesive connection.
  • the cavity 210 is formed by a depression on one side of the box seat 211 along the thickness direction, and the box cover 212 is disposed at the open mouth of the cavity 210 to seal the cavity 210, and the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are fixed to each other by a plurality of screws 213.
  • the box body 21 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material, so that the medium conveying belt 22 in the box body 21 is visible.
  • the box body 21 may also be made of an opaque material.
  • the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are rotatably disposed in the box body 21.
  • the storage tray 23 can rotate in a preset direction to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 can rotate in a direction that is the same as or opposite to the preset direction to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 23 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 24 is a driving wheel and is connected to the driving assembly 14, and the storage tray 23 is a driven wheel.
  • the storage tray 24 rotates under the drive of the driving assembly 14 to reel in the medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the storage tray 23 to rotate synchronously to unwind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also be driving wheels and can be connected to the driving assembly 14 respectively.
  • the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also rotate asynchronously. For example, the storage tray 23 first unwinds a section of the medium conveying belt 22, and after heating is completed, the storage tray 24 is driven to rotate for rewinding.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 may include a belt-shaped base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222 disposed on the base belt 221.
  • the matrix layer 222 may include one or more atomizing media such as solid and gel, and is used to generate aerosol after heating.
  • the base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222.
  • the base belt 221 has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 that are arranged opposite to each other in the thickness direction.
  • the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 may face the central axis of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, and the first surface 2211 of the base belt 221 is relatively far away from the central axis of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24.
  • the matrix layer 222 may be arranged on the first surface 2211 and/or the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 by coating, lamination or bonding. In addition, the matrix layer 222 may be distributed continuously on the base belt 221, or may be distributed at intervals in different regions.
  • the matrix layer 222 is disposed on the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221.
  • the matrix layer 222 may also be disposed on the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221, or disposed on both the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221.
  • the base belt 221 may be made of a heat-conducting material, such as a heat-conducting metal material such as aluminum foil or copper foil.
  • the base belt 221 may also be made of a heat-conducting non-metallic material, such as graphite.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be made entirely of the matrix layer 222, that is, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not include the base belt 221.
  • the heater 121 can contact the side of the medium conveying belt 22 where the matrix layer 222 is not provided (in this embodiment, the second surface 2212 of the medium conveying belt 22), and transfer heat to the matrix layer 222 through the base belt 221. In this way, it is possible to prevent the heated matrix layer 222 from adhering to the heater 121, thereby affecting the heating effect of the heater 121.
  • the heater 121 can also directly contact the matrix layer 222, which is conducive to improving the heat transfer efficiency and reducing the heat loss. In this case, the medium conveying belt 22 does not need to be made of a heat-conducting material.
  • the bottom wall of the cavity 210 may also protrude to form a partition 214 and a partition 215, and the inner wall surfaces of the partition 214 and the partition 215 respectively define a first receiving space 2140 and a second receiving space 2150, and the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24 are rotatably disposed in the first receiving space 2140 and the second receiving space 2150.
  • One side of the first receiving space 2140 has an outlet 2141
  • one side of the second receiving space 2150 has an inlet 2151
  • the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can pass through the outlet 2141 and be rolled up on the receiving disk 24 through the inlet 2151.
  • the parts of the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization are respectively contained in the first containing space 2140 and the second containing space 2150. Since the matrix layer 222 usually becomes more fluffy after atomization, the thickness of the medium conveyor belt 22 becomes larger.
  • the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can be designed to be larger than the diameter of the first containing space 2140.
  • the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can also be less than or equal to the diameter of the first containing space 2140.
  • the partition 214 and the partition 215 are respectively in the shape of an arc with one side open, and the partition 214 and the partition 215 are connected to form an S-shaped structure, and the partition 214 is located on the lower side of the partition 215, and the partition 214 is located on the side of the partition 215 away from the suction nozzle 30.
  • the structure of the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be deformed in other ways, for example, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be not connected together, and for another example, the partition 214 and/or the partition 215 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, or can also be inclined at a certain angle to the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.
  • the storage disk 23 may include a storage reel 233 and a storage chassis 231 and a storage disk cover 232 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 233.
  • a mounting hole 2142 is formed on the cassette seat 211, and one end of the storage reel 233 is rotatably mounted in the mounting hole 2142.
  • the unheated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 233, and the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 may limit the floating space of the medium conveying belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 233 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.
  • the storage chassis 231 may be first mounted on the cassette seat 211, and the storage chassis 231 may be able to rotate smoothly on the cassette seat 211, and then the medium conveying belt 22 may be stored in the storage disk 23 in a winding manner, and finally the storage disk cover 232 may be covered.
  • the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 are both in the shape of a disk
  • the storage reel 233 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 233 can also be in the shape of a cylinder.
  • the storage reel 233 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233.
  • the storage reel 233 is integrally formed with the storage chassis 231, and can be formed by extending axially from the middle portion of one side of the storage chassis 231.
  • the storage reel 233 can also be integrally formed with the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 can also be partially formed on the storage chassis 231 and partially formed on the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 can also be a separately formed component.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 is greater than the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the medium conveying belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 refers to the distance between the side of the storage chassis 231 facing the storage tray cover 232 and the side of the storage tray cover 232 facing the storage chassis 231.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 may also be equal to the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable.
  • the storage reel 233 may be provided with the storage chassis 231 or the storage disc cover 232 at only one end, and the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be limited by the box cover 212 or the box seat 211.
  • the storage reel 233 may not be provided with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 at both ends.
  • the storage tray 24 may also include a storage reel 243 and a storage chassis 241 and a storage tray cover 242 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 243.
  • a mounting hole 2152 is formed on the cassette seat 211, and one end of the storage reel 233 is rotatably mounted in the mounting hole 2152.
  • the heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 243, and the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may limit the floating space of the medium conveyor belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 243 to prevent the medium conveyor belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.
  • the storage chassis 241 may be first mounted on the cassette seat 211, and the storage chassis 241 may be able to rotate smoothly on the cassette seat 211, and then the atomized portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be stored in the storage tray 24 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 242 may be covered.
  • the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 are both in the shape of a disk
  • the storage reel 243 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 243 can also be in the shape of a cylinder.
  • the storage reel 243 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243.
  • the storage reel 243 may include a shaft segment 2431 integrally formed with the storage chassis 241 and a shaft segment 2432 integrally formed with the storage tray cover 242, and the shaft segments 2431 and 2432 are mutually sleeved to form the storage reel 243.
  • the storage reel 243 may also be formed by only extending the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242, or the storage reel 243 may also be a separately formed component.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 is greater than the width of the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 refers to the distance between the side of the storage chassis 241 facing the storage tray cover 242 and the side of the storage tray cover 242 facing the storage chassis 241.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may also be equal to the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable.
  • the storage reel 243 may also be provided with the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242 at only one end, and the position limitation of the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be achieved by the box cover 212 or the box seat 211.
  • the storage reel 243 may not be provided with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 at both ends.
  • the storage reel 243 is formed with an insertion hole 244, and the output shaft 142 can pass through the box seat 211 and be inserted into the insertion hole 244.
  • the radial cross-section of the insertion hole 244 and the output shaft 142 can be a non-circular shape such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 142 can be circumferentially fixed in the insertion hole 244, so that the reducer 141 can drive the storage tray 24 to rotate, and the plug-in matching method makes it easy to assemble and disassemble the aerosol generating product 20 and the aerosol generating device 10.
  • the output shaft 142 can also be connected to the storage tray 24 in other ways, such as threaded connection, pin connection, etc.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a damping assembly 26, which is connected to the storage disk 23 and is used to provide a damping torque during the rotation of the storage disk 23 relative to the box body 21.
  • the storage disk 24 rotates under the drive of the reducer 141 to drive the medium conveying belt 22 to move. Due to the damping torque of the storage disk 23, the medium conveying belt 22 will be in a taut state, so that the medium conveying belt 22 achieves a pre-tightening effect during the movement, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can maintain a good fit with the heater 121.
  • the torque of the reducer 141 ⁇ * F1 * (R1/R2) / ⁇ , where ⁇ is a safety factor, F1 is a damping torque, ⁇ is a transmission efficiency of the reducer 141, R1 is the radius of the portion of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 24, and R2 is the radius of the portion of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23.
  • the storage disk 23 and the box body 21 have a friction surface 2311 and a friction surface 2144 respectively.
  • the friction damping causes the storage disk 23 to generate a damping torque F1 in the opposite direction of its rotation when rotating.
  • the damping assembly 26 may include an elastic member 260, such as a spring, a spring sheet, a silicone member, etc.
  • the elastic member 260 is respectively in contact with the storage disk 23 and the box body 21, and the friction surface 2311 of the storage disk 23 is elastically pressed against the friction surface 2144 of the box body 21 through the elastic deformation of the elastic member 260.
  • the storage disk 23 and the box body 21 have a limiting surface 235 and a limiting surface 216, respectively.
  • the two ends of the elastic member 260 are respectively pressed against the limiting surface 235 and the limiting surface 216, and elastic deformation is generated by pressure, thereby applying an elastic force to the storage disk 23, so that the friction surface 2311 is pressed against the friction surface 2144.
  • the limiting surface 235 and the limiting surface 216 can be arranged opposite to each other in the axial direction of the storage disk 23, so that the elastic force generated by the elastic member 260 under pressure is along the axial direction of the storage disk 23.
  • the bottom wall of the first receiving space 2140 may be protruded to form a friction protrusion 2143, and the side of the storage base 231 away from the storage disk cover 232 may abut against the friction protrusion 2143.
  • the side of the friction protrusion 2143 in contact with the storage base 231 forms a friction surface 2144, and correspondingly, the surface of the storage base 231 in contact with the friction protrusion 2143 forms a friction surface 2311.
  • the friction protrusion 2143 is annular, and its center line coincides with the rotation center line of the storage disk 23.
  • the friction protrusion 2143 can also be formed on the storage disk 23.
  • the elastic member 260 is a spring 266, which can be arranged in the storage reel 233, and the two ends of the spring 266 respectively abut against the limiting surface 235 and the limiting surface 216, so that the storage disk 23 is elastically pressed against the friction protrusion 2143 of the box seat 211.
  • a damping hole 234 is formed on the storage reel 233, and one end of the damping hole 234 is open, and the other end forms a limiting surface 235.
  • the spring 266 can be installed into the damping hole 234 from the open side of the damping hole 234, and abut against the limiting surface 235.
  • the central axis of the damping hole 234, the spring 266, and the storage disk 23 are all coincident, which is conducive to uniform force on the storage disk 23.
  • a boss 2121 may be formed on one side of the box cover 212 facing the box seat 211, and the boss 2121 may extend into the damping hole 234, and an end surface of the boss 2121 facing the box seat 211 forms a limiting surface 216. It can be understood that in other embodiments, the box cover 212 may not be provided with the boss 2121, and the spring 266 may directly abut against the box cover 212.
  • the boss 2121 can compress the spring 266, so that the spring 266 applies an elastic force F2 toward the box seat 211 to the storage chassis 231.
  • the storage chassis 231 generates friction between the friction surfaces 2311 and 2144 during relative rotation, thereby generating a damping torque F1.
  • the damping torque F1 on the storage tray 23 can be adjusted by adjusting the elastic force F2 of the spring 266.
  • the damping torque F1 F2*U*R3, wherein U is the friction coefficient between the friction surface 2311 and the friction surface 2144, and R3 is the contact radius between the friction surface 2311 and the friction surface 2144.
  • R3 (maximum radius of the friction surface 2144+minimum radius of the friction surface 2144)/2.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include an atomizing seat 25, in which an atomizing chamber 250 is formed, and an inlet 251 and an outlet 252 are formed on the side wall of the atomizing seat 25, which are connected to the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 can enter the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251, and after being heated and atomized in the atomizing chamber 250, it can be transmitted through the outlet 252.
  • One end of the heater 121 can extend into the atomizing chamber 250 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 entering the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the atomizer seat 25 can be installed together with the box seat 211 in a detachable manner, and the atomizer seat 25 can be reused to reduce replacement costs.
  • the atomizer seat 25 can also be installed together with the box seat 211 in a non-detachable manner, or the atomizer seat 25 can also be integrally formed with the box seat 211.
  • the cross-section of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be the same or similar to the cross-section of the medium conveyor belt 22 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22).
  • a clearance fit may be adopted between the inlet 251, the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck, and the edges of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be prevented from scratching the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • annular gap 2510 formed between the periphery of the inlet 251 and the medium conveyor belt 22 and/or the annular gap 2520 formed between the periphery of the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be used as an airflow channel to connect the atomization chamber 250 with the receiving chamber 210, and then with the outside world.
  • the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too small, otherwise it may cause excessive suction resistance, resulting in too low pressure in the atomizing chamber 250 and causing suction turbulence, affecting the suction experience.
  • the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too large, reducing or avoiding the leakage of the aerosol generated in the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251 and the outlet 252.
  • the atomizer seat 25 is arranged on the upper side of the box seat 211, and may include a main body 254 and an extension portion 255 extending upward from the main body 254.
  • the main body 254 can be accommodated in the upper side of the cavity 210
  • the atomizer cavity 250 is formed in the main body 254, and the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are respectively formed on the two opposite sides of the atomizer seat 25.
  • An air outlet channel 253 connected to the atomizer cavity 250 is formed in the extension portion 255, and the lower end of the suction nozzle 30 is connected to the air outlet channel 253.
  • the extension portion 255 can extend out of the box body 21, so as to facilitate mutual plug-in cooperation with the suction nozzle 30.
  • a vent 2550 that connects the air outlet channel 253 with the outside world can also be formed on the side wall of the extension portion 255.
  • the atomizer seat 25 may also be disposed at other positions of the box body 21.
  • the configuration of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 is not limited, for example, the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be disposed on the same side of the atomizer seat 25; or, the inlet 251 is disposed on one lateral side of the atomizer seat 25, and the outlet 252 is disposed on the bottom side of the atomizer seat 25.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a guide structure 28 disposed in the cavity 210, which is used to guide the medium conveying belt 22 during its travel, to ensure smooth transmission of the medium conveying belt 22, and to ensure good contact between the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may include a plurality of guide structures 28, which are spaced apart on the transmission path of the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the plurality of guide structures 28 may include a limiting roller 28a, a limiting roller 28b, and a limiting roller 28c sequentially distributed on the transmission path of the medium conveyor belt 22, and the rolling friction of each limiting roller ensures the smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated sequentially passes through the limiting roller 28a, the limiting roller 28b, and the inlet 251 into the atomizing chamber 250 for atomization, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 is output from the outlet 252 and then guided by the limiting roller 28c, and then rolled up on the storage tray 24.
  • the guide structure 28 may also include other structures such as convex ribs and convex columns.
  • the limiting roller 28a is arranged near the outlet 2141, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can be smoothly transmitted, and the transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 is not affected by the change in the size of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23.
  • the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c are respectively arranged on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25 in the lateral direction, so as to make the medium conveying belt 22 in good contact with the heater 121. It should be noted that the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c are respectively arranged corresponding to the inlet 251 and the outlet 252. When the setting positions of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are changed, the setting positions of the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c can be changed accordingly.
  • a limiting roller 28d can be provided between the limiting roller 28c and the storage tray 24.
  • the limiting roller 28d can increase the turning angle of the medium conveying belt 22 when passing through the limiting roller 28c, thereby improving the stratification problem caused by the atomized medium conveying belt 22 passing through the corner due to the small turning angle.
  • Figure 26 shows an aerosol generating product 20 in some modified embodiments of the present invention.
  • the damping component 26 in this embodiment includes a soft structural member 267.
  • the soft structural member 267 can be made of soft materials such as silicone and can be elastically deformed after being compressed, so that when the storage disk 23 rotates relative to the box body 21, friction is generated between the storage disk 23 and the box body 21, thereby providing damping torque for the storage disk 23.
  • a damping hole 234 may be formed in the axial direction of the storage reel 233, and the soft structural member 267 is accommodated in the damping hole 234.
  • the cassette seat 211 may be formed with a guide column 2111 protruding toward the damping hole 234, and the soft structural member 267 may be cylindrical and interference fit between the outer wall surface of the guide column 2111 and the hole wall surface of the damping hole 234. The friction force generated by the storage disk 23 and the cassette body 21 during relative rotation can be adjusted by adjusting the interference amount and/or softness of the soft structural member 267.
  • the limited surface 216 and the limited surface 235 can be used to limit the axial position of the soft structure 267 on the guide column 2111.
  • the two ends of the soft structure 267 can be respectively against the limited surface 216 and the limited surface 235, so that the position of the soft structure 267 is more stable.
  • the soft structure 267 can also have a certain floating space between the limited surface 216 and the limited surface 235.
  • the above-mentioned specific structure can be arbitrarily deformed as needed.
  • the guide column 2111 can also be formed on the storage disk cover 232.
  • the soft structural member 267 can also be in the shape of a solid cylinder.
  • a damping medium such as damping silica gel
  • the viscosity of the damping medium can be used to make the storage disk 23 generate damping torque when rotating relative to the box body 21.
  • the bottom surface of the cavity 210 may also be formed with a friction surface 2144 , and the storage base 231 may contact the friction surface 2144 .
  • the storage disk 23 rotates relative to the box body 21 , friction is generated between the storage disk 23 and the friction surface 2144 .
  • the aerosol generating system 100 comprises an aerosol generating device 10 and an aerosol generating article 20 that cooperate with each other.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 is used to store a substrate layer 222, and the aerosol generating device 10 is used to heat the substrate layer 222 after being powered on to generate aerosol.
  • one end of the aerosol generating system 100 further has a nozzle 30 for the user to inhale the aerosol generated after the atomization of the matrix layer 222.
  • the nozzle 30 is cylindrical. In other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, and it can also be a flat column or other shapes.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may include a box body 21 and a medium conveying belt 22 contained in the box body 21, wherein the medium conveying belt 22 has a matrix layer 222 distributed along its length.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 may be disposed in the box body 21 in a winding manner, and the winding arrangement manner enables more medium conveying belts 22 to be stored in a limited space in the box body 21, so that a single aerosol generating article 20 can be atomized and used multiple times.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 may further include a storage tray 23 and a receiving tray 24.
  • the unheated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage tray 23, and the heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the receiving tray 24.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 includes a body 11 and a heater 121, a power supply 13, a driving assembly 14 and a main control board 15 housed in the body 11.
  • the main control board 15 is provided with a control circuit for controlling the heater 121, and the control circuit is electrically connected to the heater 121, the power supply 13 and the driving assembly 14 respectively.
  • the heater 121 is used to heat the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 in a contact or non-contact manner after being powered on to generate an aerosol.
  • the driving assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to travel, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can be unwound from the storage disk 23, heated and atomized by the heater 121, and then rewound by the storage disk 24.
  • the heater 121 adopts a resistive heating method, which can generate heat through the Joule effect.
  • the heater 121 has a heating surface 1211, and the heating surface 1211 is in direct contact with the medium conveyor belt 22, so as to transfer heat to the medium conveyor belt 22 for baking and heating.
  • the heater 121 can be in a sheet shape, and the heating surface 1211 is located on one side of the heater 121 along the thickness direction and can be a plane or a substantially plane, so as to facilitate full contact with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and increase the heating area.
  • the heating surface 1211 is located on the upper side of the heater 121 close to the suction nozzle 30 , so that the heater 121 also has the function of supporting the medium conveying belt 22 , which is beneficial to the fitting of the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121 .
  • the heating surface 1211 may also be located on other sides of the heater 121, such as the lower side.
  • the heater 121 is not limited to being in the form of a sheet, but may also be in other shapes such as a columnar shape.
  • the heater 121 may also use other heating methods such as electromagnetic heating, infrared radiation, ultrasound, microwave, plasma, etc.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a mounting seat 122, which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone).
  • a mounting seat 122 which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone).
  • One end of the heater 121 may be inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed to the body 11 via the mounting seat 122, which may reduce the heat transferred from the heater 121 to the body 11 and facilitate heat insulation.
  • the drive assembly 14 is an electric drive structure, which may include a reducer 141 and an output shaft 142 connected to the reducer 141, and the reducer 141 outputs the driving force through the output shaft 142.
  • the drive assembly 14 may also include other electric drive structures such as a motor.
  • the drive assembly 14 is also not limited to an electric drive structure, and it may also include a manual drive structure, such as a handle or a handwheel.
  • the body 11 may be roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and a socket 1110 for the nozzle 30 to extend out is formed at the upper end of the body 11, and a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed in the body 11.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 is detachably connected to the receiving cavity 1120.
  • the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 is used up, the matrix layer 222 can be updated by replacing the aerosol generating product 20.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 can be reused, thereby reducing the use cost of the aerosol generating system 100.
  • the body 11 is not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and it can also be in other shapes such as a cylindrical shape, a racetrack-shaped column or an elliptical column.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a sliding cover 116, which may be slidably disposed on the body 11 to cover or expose the socket 1110.
  • the sliding cover 116 may be pushed to cover the socket 1110 to prevent dust from entering the socket 1110.
  • the sliding cover 116 may be pushed to expose the socket 1110 so that the nozzle 30 can pass through the socket 1110.
  • the body 11 may include a frame 112 and a cover 111 and a base 113 respectively matched with the frame 112.
  • the cover 111 and the base 113 may be respectively arranged on both sides of the frame 112 along the thickness direction.
  • An installation cavity 1130 is formed between the frame 112 and the base 113, and the installation cavity 1130 can be used to accommodate components such as the power supply 13, the reducer 141, and the main control board 15.
  • the base 113 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner to facilitate the maintenance, replacement or upgrading of the components in the installation cavity 1130.
  • the base 113 and the frame 112 can also be connected together in a non-detachable manner to prevent the user from accidentally opening the installation cavity 1130 and causing damage to the components.
  • the frame 112 may be recessed on one side of the box body 21 to form a mounting cavity 1121 for accommodating the mounting seat 122.
  • One end of the heater 121 is inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed in the mounting cavity 1121 via the mounting seat 122.
  • the other end of the heater 121 may pass through the box body 21 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 in the box body 21.
  • a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed between the cover 111 and the frame 112.
  • the cover 111 and the frame 112 can be connected together by one or more detachable methods such as snap connection, threaded connection, magnetic connection, etc., so that the aerosol generating product 20 can be taken out and replaced by opening the cover 111.
  • at least one magnet 114 is embedded on the side of the cover 111 facing the frame 112
  • at least one magnet 115 is embedded on the side of the frame 112 facing the cover 111 corresponding to the at least one magnet 114, so that the cover 111 and the frame 112 are magnetically fixed to each other through the magnets 114 and 115.
  • the cover 111 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material.
  • transparent is used to describe a material that allows at least a significant portion of incident light to pass through it, allowing for seeing through the material.
  • a substantially transparent material may allow enough light to pass through it so that the media transport belt 22 within the cover 111 is visible.
  • the cover 111 may be completely transparent; alternatively, the cover 111 may have a lower level of transparency while still transmitting enough light to allow the media conveyor belt 22 within the cover 111 to be visible. Further, the cover 111 may include one or more areas formed of a transparent material so that a portion of the media conveyor belt 22 is visible through the one or more areas. In addition, the area formed of the transparent material may be colored, tinted, or colorless. Of course, in other embodiments, the cover 111 may also be made of an opaque material.
  • a cavity 210 is formed in the box body 21, and the medium conveyor belt 22, the storage tray 23, and the receiving tray 24 are all received in the cavity 210.
  • the box body 21 and the cavity 210 are both roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are arranged side by side along the length direction of the cavity 210.
  • the box body 21 and the cavity 210 are not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and of course, the arrangement of the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 is also not limited.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 may also not include the box seat 211 and/or the box cover 212.
  • the box body 21 may include a box seat 211 and a box cover 212 that cooperate with each other.
  • the cavity 210 is formed between the box seat 211 and the box cover 212.
  • the cavity 210 may be formed by a depression of the box seat 211 or the box cover 212, or may be formed by a depression of both the box seat 211 and the box cover 212.
  • the box seat 211 and the box cover 212 may be fixed together in a detachable or non-detachable manner such as a threaded connection, a snap connection, a magnetic connection, or an adhesive connection.
  • the cavity 210 is formed by a depression on one side of the box seat 211 along the thickness direction, and the box cover 212 is disposed at the open mouth of the cavity 210 to seal the cavity 210, and the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are fixed to each other by a plurality of screws 213.
  • the box body 21 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material, so that the medium conveying belt 22 in the box body 21 is visible.
  • the box body 21 may also be made of an opaque material.
  • the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are rotatably disposed in the box body 21.
  • the storage tray 23 can rotate in a preset direction to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 can rotate in a direction that is the same as or opposite to the preset direction to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 23 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 24 is a driving wheel and is connected to the driving assembly 14, and the storage tray 23 is a driven wheel.
  • the storage tray 24 rotates under the drive of the driving assembly 14 to reel in the medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the storage tray 23 to rotate synchronously to unwind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also be driving wheels and can be connected to the driving assembly 14 respectively.
  • the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also rotate asynchronously. For example, the storage tray 23 first unwinds a section of the medium conveying belt 22, and after heating is completed, the storage tray 24 is driven to rotate for rewinding.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 may include a belt-shaped base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222 disposed on the base belt 221.
  • the matrix layer 222 may include one or more of a solid and a gel, and is used to generate an aerosol after heating.
  • the base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222.
  • the base belt 221 has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 that are arranged opposite to each other in the thickness direction.
  • the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 may face the central axis of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, and the first surface 2211 of the base belt 221 is relatively far away from the central axis of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24.
  • the matrix layer 222 may be arranged on the first surface 2211 and/or the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 by coating, lamination or bonding. In addition, the matrix layer 222 may be distributed continuously on the base belt 221, or may be distributed at intervals in different regions.
  • the matrix layer 222 is disposed on the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221.
  • the matrix layer 222 may also be disposed on the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221, or disposed on both the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221.
  • the base belt 221 may be made of a heat-conducting material, such as a heat-conducting metal material such as aluminum foil or copper foil.
  • the base belt 221 may also be made of a heat-conducting non-metallic material, such as graphite.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be made entirely of the matrix layer 222, that is, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not include the base belt 221.
  • the heater 121 can contact the side of the medium conveying belt 22 where the matrix layer 222 is not provided (in this embodiment, the second surface 2212 of the medium conveying belt 22), and transfer heat to the matrix layer 222 through the base belt 221. In this way, it is possible to prevent the heated matrix layer 222 from adhering to the heater 121, thereby affecting the heating effect of the heater 121.
  • the heater 121 can also directly contact the matrix layer 222, which is conducive to improving the heat transfer efficiency and reducing the heat loss. In this case, the medium conveying belt 22 does not need to be made of a heat-conducting material.
  • the bottom wall of the cavity 210 may also protrude to form a partition 214 and a partition 215, and the inner wall surfaces of the partition 214 and the partition 215 respectively define a first receiving space 2140 and a second receiving space 2150, and the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24 are rotatably disposed in the first receiving space 2140 and the second receiving space 2150.
  • One side of the first receiving space 2140 has an outlet 2141
  • one side of the second receiving space 2150 has an inlet 2151
  • the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can pass through the outlet 2141 and be rolled up on the receiving disk 24 through the inlet 2151.
  • the parts of the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization are respectively contained in the first containing space 2140 and the second containing space 2150. Since the matrix layer 222 usually becomes more fluffy after atomization, the thickness of the medium conveyor belt 22 becomes larger.
  • the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can be designed to be larger than the diameter of the first containing space 2140.
  • the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can also be less than or equal to the diameter of the first containing space 2140.
  • the partition 214 and the partition 215 are respectively in the shape of an arc with one side open, and the partition 214 and the partition 215 are connected to form an S-shaped structure, and the partition 214 is located on the lower side of the partition 215, and the partition 214 is located on the side of the partition 215 away from the suction nozzle 30.
  • the structure of the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be deformed in other ways, for example, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be not connected together, and for another example, the partition 214 and/or the partition 215 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, or can also be inclined at a certain angle to the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.
  • the storage tray 23 may include a storage reel 233 and a storage chassis 231 and a storage tray cover 232 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 233.
  • the unheated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 233, and the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 may limit the floating space of the medium conveying belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 233 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.
  • the storage chassis 231 may be first installed on the cassette seat 211, and the storage chassis 231 may be able to rotate smoothly on the cassette seat 211, and then the medium conveying belt 22 may be stored in the storage tray 23 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 232 may be covered.
  • the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 are both in the shape of a disk
  • the storage reel 233 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 233 can also be in the shape of a cylinder.
  • the storage reel 233 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233.
  • the storage reel 233 is integrally formed with the storage chassis 231, and can be formed by extending axially from the middle portion of one side of the storage chassis 231.
  • the storage reel 233 can also be integrally formed with the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 can also be partially formed on the storage chassis 231 and partially formed on the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 can also be a separately formed component.
  • the distance between the storage base 231 and the storage base cover 232 is greater than the width of the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage base 231 and the storage base cover 232, allowing the medium conveyor belt 22 to move smoothly without getting stuck.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 may also be equal to the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable.
  • the storage reel 233 may be provided with the storage chassis 231 or the storage disc cover 232 at only one end, and the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be limited by the box cover 212 or the box seat 211.
  • the storage reel 233 may not be provided with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 at both ends.
  • the storage tray 24 may also include a storage reel 243 and a storage chassis 241 and a storage tray cover 242 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 243.
  • a mounting hole 2152 is formed on the cassette seat 211, and one end of the storage reel 233 is rotatably mounted in the mounting hole 2152.
  • the heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 243, and the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may limit the floating space of the medium conveyor belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 243 to prevent the medium conveyor belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.
  • the storage chassis 241 may be first mounted on the cassette seat 211, and the storage chassis 241 may be able to rotate smoothly on the cassette seat 211, and then the atomized portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be stored in the storage tray 24 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 242 may be covered.
  • the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 are both in the shape of a disk
  • the storage reel 243 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 243 can also be in the shape of a cylinder.
  • the storage reel 243 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square.
  • the shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243.
  • the storage reel 243 may include a shaft segment 2431 integrally formed with the storage chassis 241 and a shaft segment 2432 integrally formed with the storage tray cover 242, and the shaft segments 2431 and 2432 are mutually sleeved to form the storage reel 243.
  • the storage reel 243 may also be formed by only extending the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242, or the storage reel 243 may also be a separately formed component.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 is greater than the width of the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, allowing the medium conveyor belt 22 to move smoothly without getting stuck.
  • the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may also be equal to the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable.
  • the storage reel 243 may also be provided with the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242 at only one end, and the position limitation of the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be achieved by the box cover 212 or the box seat 211.
  • the storage reel 243 may not be provided with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 at both ends.
  • the storage reel 243 is formed with an insertion hole 244, and the output shaft 142 can pass through the box seat 211 and be inserted into the insertion hole 244.
  • the radial cross-section of the insertion hole 244 and the output shaft 142 can be a non-circular shape such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 142 can be circumferentially fixed in the insertion hole 244, so that the reducer 141 can drive the storage tray 24 to rotate, and the plug-in matching method makes it easy to assemble and disassemble the aerosol generating product 20 and the aerosol generating device 10.
  • the output shaft 142 can also be connected to the storage tray 24 in other ways, such as threaded connection, pin connection, etc.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a damping assembly 26, which is used to provide a damping torque during the rotation of the storage disk 23 relative to the box body 21.
  • the storage disk 24 is driven by the reducer 141 to rotate and drive the medium conveying belt 22 to move. Due to the damping torque of the storage disk 23, the medium conveying belt 22 will be in a taut state, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can achieve a pre-tightening effect during the movement, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can maintain a good fit with the heater 121.
  • the damping assembly 26 includes a first damping member 261 connected to the storage disk 23, a second damping member 262 connected to the box body 21, and a torsion elastic element 263 connected to the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262, respectively.
  • the first damping member 261 is fixed relative to the storage disk 23 in the circumferential direction and can rotate synchronously, and the second damping member 262 can rotate relative to the box body 21.
  • the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 can be mutually sleeved together, and the torsion elastic element 263 is used to generate a damping torsion between the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262.
  • the direction of the damping torsion provided by the torsion elastic element 263 to the first damping member 261 is designed to be opposite to the unwinding rotation direction of the storage disk 23.
  • a plug hole 2330 may be formed in the storage reel 233, and the damping assembly 26 may be at least partially received in the plug hole 2330.
  • the first damping member 261 is circumferentially fixed in the plug hole 2330, so that the first damping member 261 and the storage reel 233 do not rotate relative to each other.
  • a damping chamber 2610 is formed in the first damping member 261, and the second damping member 262 is at least partially disposed in the damping chamber 2610.
  • the torsion elastic element 263 may include a torsion spring, which may be disposed in the damping chamber 2610 and sleeved on the second damping member 262.
  • the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 are respectively formed with a mounting hole 2613 and a mounting hole 2624, and the two ends 2631 of the torsion spring are respectively inserted into the mounting hole 2613 and the mounting hole 2624.
  • the mounting hole 2613 and/or the mounting hole 2624 can be an arc-shaped hole, so that the end 2631 of the torsion spring has a certain movable space in the mounting hole 2613 and/or the mounting hole 2624, which can facilitate the assembly of the torsion spring.
  • the shape and size of the mounting hole 2613 and/or the mounting hole 2624 can also match the shape and size of the end 2631 of the torsion spring.
  • the second damping member 262 and the box body 21 can be plugged into each other.
  • a damping medium 265, such as damping grease, can also be provided between the second damping member 262 and the box body 21.
  • the damping medium 265 has a certain viscosity, and the viscosity of the damping medium 265 is used to hinder the movement of the second damping member 262, thereby obtaining a damping effect.
  • the damping medium 265 causes the second damping member 262 to generate a damping force T1 in the opposite direction of its rotation.
  • the damping force T1 is designed to be greater than or equal to the damping torsion T2 formed between the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 through the torsion elastic element 263.
  • one end of the second damping member 262 may be concavely formed with a damping hole 2620, and the box seat 211 may be protruding with a mounting shaft 2142 plugged into the damping hole 2620.
  • the damping medium 265 may be filled between the outer wall of the mounting shaft 2142 and the cavity wall of the damping hole 2620.
  • the first damping member 261 may have a first position and a second position relative to the second damping member 262.
  • the first damping member 261 includes a boss 2611
  • the second damping member 262 includes a first limiting surface 2621 and a second limiting surface 2622 that are arranged opposite to each other in the circumferential direction, and a slideway 2623 for the boss 2611 to slide is formed between the first limiting surface 2621 and the second limiting surface 2622.
  • the boss 2611 is located at one end of the first damping member 261 close to the box seat 211, which is more convenient for assembly and manufacturing.
  • the boss 2611 can also be set at other positions of the first damping member 261, for example, it can also be protruded and set at any position of the side wall of the first damping member 261 between its two axial ends.
  • the first damping member 261, the second damping member 262, the torsion elastic element 263, and the storage reel 233 can all be coaxially arranged. After the first damping member 261, the second damping member 262, and the torsion elastic element 263 are installed, the boss 2611 abuts against the second limiting surface 2622, so that the torsion elastic element 263 generates a damping torsion T2min on the first damping member 261.
  • the damping torsion T2min can prevent the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 from shaking after the damping assembly 26 is assembled.
  • the reducer 141 drives the storage tray 24 to rotate, and then drives the storage tray 23 to rotate through the medium conveyor belt 22, because T2 min ⁇ T2max ⁇ T1, the storage tray 23 will first drive the first damping member 261 to move from the second position to the first position, so that the boss 2611 abuts against the first limit surface 2621.
  • the reducer 141 continues to move, and will drive the second damping member 262 to rotate through the first damping member 261.
  • the reducer 141 needs to overcome the damping force T1, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 is always tightened by the damping force T1 during the movement.
  • the torque of the reducer 141 ⁇ * T1*(R1/R2) / ⁇ , where ⁇ is the safety factor, ⁇ is the transmission efficiency of the reducer 141, R1 is the radius of the portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 wrapped around the storage tray 24, and R2 is the radius of the portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 wrapped around the storage tray 23.
  • the torsion elastic element 263 When the reducer 141 stops moving, due to the restoring torque of the torsion elastic element 263, the torsion elastic element 263 will always generate a damping torque T2max on the first damping member 261, and then generate a damping torque T2max on the storage disk 23. In this way, the medium conveying belt 22 can be kept in a pre-tightened state even when it is not moving, and will not relax. In addition, even if the medium conveying belt 22 relaxes due to unexpected circumstances, under the action of the restoring torque of the torsion elastic element 263, the first damping member 261 can be rotated back to abut against the second limiting surface 2622, thereby driving the storage disk 23 to rotate and tightening the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the rotation angle between the first limiting surface 2621 and the second limiting surface 2622 (i.e., the angle between the first limiting surface 2621 and the second limiting surface 2622 in the circumferential direction of the second damping member 262) can range from 70° to 150°. Within this range, T2 min and T2max of appropriate sizes can be obtained, and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also obtain an appropriate retraction length.
  • the damping assembly 26 may further include an elastic retaining ring 264, which may be sleeved on the second damping member 262 and used to limit the axial position of the first damping member 261 on the second damping member 262, so that the structure of the damping assembly 26 is stable and easy to assemble.
  • One end of the second damping member 262 may extend out of the first damping member 261, and the portion of the second damping member 262 extending out of the first damping member 261 may be concave to form a slot 2625 for the elastic retaining ring 264 to be mounted.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include an atomizing seat 25, in which an atomizing chamber 250 is formed, and an inlet 251 and an outlet 252 are formed on the side wall of the atomizing seat 25, which are connected to the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 can enter the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251, and after being heated and atomized in the atomizing chamber 250, it can be transmitted through the outlet 252.
  • One end of the heater 121 can extend into the atomizing chamber 250 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 entering the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the atomizer seat 25 can be installed together with the box seat 211 in a detachable manner, and the atomizer seat 25 can be reused to reduce replacement costs.
  • the atomizer seat 25 can also be installed together with the box seat 211 in a non-detachable manner, or the atomizer seat 25 can also be integrally formed with the box seat 211.
  • the cross-section of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be the same or similar to the cross-section of the medium conveyor belt 22 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22).
  • a clearance fit may be adopted between the inlet 251, the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck, and the edges of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be prevented from scratching the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • annular gap 2510 formed between the periphery of the inlet 251 and the medium conveyor belt 22 and/or the annular gap 2520 formed between the periphery of the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be used as an airflow channel to connect the atomization chamber 250 with the receiving chamber 210, and then with the outside world.
  • the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too small, otherwise it may cause excessive suction resistance, resulting in too low pressure in the atomizing chamber 250 and causing suction turbulence, affecting the suction experience.
  • the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too large, reducing or avoiding the leakage of the aerosol generated in the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251 and the outlet 252.
  • the atomizer seat 25 is arranged on the upper side of the box seat 211, and may include a main body 254 and an extension portion 255 extending upward from the main body 254.
  • the main body 254 can be accommodated in the upper side of the cavity 210
  • the atomizer cavity 250 is formed in the main body 254, and the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are respectively formed on the two opposite sides of the atomizer seat 25.
  • An air outlet channel 253 connected to the atomizer cavity 250 is formed in the extension portion 255, and the lower end of the suction nozzle 30 is connected to the air outlet channel 253.
  • the extension portion 255 can extend out of the box body 21, so as to facilitate mutual plug-in cooperation with the suction nozzle 30.
  • a vent 2550 that connects the air outlet channel 253 with the outside world can also be formed on the side wall of the extension portion 255.
  • the atomizer seat 25 may also be disposed at other positions of the box body 21.
  • the configuration of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 is not limited, for example, the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be disposed on the same side of the atomizer seat 25; or, the inlet 251 is disposed on one lateral side of the atomizer seat 25, and the outlet 252 is disposed on the bottom side of the atomizer seat 25.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a guide structure 28 disposed in the cavity 210, which is used to guide the medium conveying belt 22 during its travel, to ensure smooth transmission of the medium conveying belt 22, and to ensure good contact between the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may include a plurality of guide structures 28, which are spaced apart on the transmission path of the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the plurality of guide structures 28 may include a limiting roller 28a, a limiting roller 28b, and a limiting roller 28c sequentially distributed on the transmission path of the medium conveyor belt 22, and the rolling friction of each limiting roller ensures the smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated sequentially passes through the limiting roller 28a, the limiting roller 28b, and the inlet 251 into the atomizing chamber 250 for atomization, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 is output from the outlet 252 and then guided by the limiting roller 28c, and then rolled up on the storage tray 24.
  • the guide structure 28 may also include other structures such as convex ribs and convex columns.
  • the limiting roller 28a is arranged near the outlet 2141, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can be smoothly transmitted, and the transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 is not affected by the change in the size of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23.
  • the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c are respectively arranged on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25, so as to make the medium conveying belt 22 in good contact with the heater 121. It should be noted that the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c are respectively arranged corresponding to the inlet 251 and the outlet 252. When the setting positions of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are changed, the setting positions of the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c can be changed accordingly.
  • a limiting roller 28d can be provided between the limiting roller 28c and the storage tray 24.
  • the limiting roller 28d can increase the turning angle of the medium conveying belt 22 when passing through the limiting roller 28c, thereby improving the stratification problem caused by the atomized medium conveying belt 22 passing through the corner due to the small turning angle.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 comprises an aerosol generating device 10 and an aerosol generating product 20 that cooperate with each other.
  • a substrate layer 222 is provided in the aerosol generating product 20.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 comprises electronic components such as a battery, a heater 121, and a control circuit.
  • the battery is used to power the heater 121
  • the control circuit is used to control the heating work of the heater 121.
  • the heater 121 can heat the substrate layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 in a contact or non-contact manner to generate an aerosol.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 may further include a nozzle 30, which may be mounted at one end of the aerosol generating product 20, and is used for the user to inhale the aerosol generated by the aerosol generating product 20 after atomization.
  • a nozzle 30 is cylindrical, and may be mounted in the air outlet channel 253 in a detachable or non-detachable manner.
  • the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, and may also be a flat column or other shapes; of course, the nozzle 30 may also be mounted at one end of the aerosol generating device 10.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 is substantially in the shape of a rectangular column, and a receiving chamber 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed in the aerosol generating device 10.
  • One end of the receiving chamber 1120 has a socket 1110 for the nozzle 30 to extend out.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the aerosol generating device 10 is not limited to being rectangular, and it may also be in other shapes such as a circle, a racetrack, or an ellipse.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 is detachably mounted in the accommodating chamber 1120.
  • the substrate layer 222 in the aerosol generating article 20 can be updated by replacing the aerosol generating article 20.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 is reusable, thereby reducing the use cost of the aerosol generating system 100.
  • the aerosol generating article 20 may include a box body 21 and a medium conveying belt 22 accommodated in the box body 21.
  • a cavity 210 is formed in the box body 21, and the medium conveying belt 22 is accommodated in the cavity 210.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 is in a belt shape as a whole and has a certain length, and a matrix layer 222 is distributed along the length direction of the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the matrix layer 222 may include one or more atomizing media in solid and gel, which can generate aerosol after heating.
  • the box body 21 is roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and may include a box seat 211 and a box cover 212 that cooperate with each other.
  • the cavity 210 is formed between the box seat 211 and the box cover 212.
  • the cavity 210 may be formed by the depression of the box seat 211 or the box cover 212, or may be formed by the depression of the box seat 211 and the box cover 212.
  • the box seat 211 and the box cover 212 may be connected together by one or more detachable or non-detachable methods such as threaded connection, snap connection, magnetic connection, and bonding.
  • the box body 21 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material.
  • transparent is used to describe a material that allows at least a significant proportion of incident light to pass through it, allowing for seeing through the material.
  • a substantially transparent material may allow enough light to pass through it so that the media transport belt 22 within the box body 21 is visible.
  • the box body 21 may be completely transparent; alternatively, the box body 21 may have a lower level of transparency while still transmitting enough light to make the media conveyor belt 22 visible within the box body 21. Further, the box body 21 may include one or more areas formed of a transparent material so that a portion of the media conveyor belt 22 is visible through the one or more areas. In addition, the area formed of the transparent material may be colored, tinted, or colorless.
  • the box body 21 may also be made of an opaque material.
  • the aerosol generating product 20 may not include the box body 21 , and the medium conveyor belt 22 may be directly installed in the aerosol generating device 10 .
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 can be arranged in the box body 21 in a winding manner. Specifically, a storage disk 23 and a receiving disk 24 can be arranged in the box body 21, and the unheated part of the medium conveyor belt 22 can be wound on the storage disk 23, and the heated part of the medium conveyor belt 22 can be wound on the receiving disk 24.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 can push the medium conveyor belt 22 to unwind from the storage disk 23, and after being heated and atomized by the heater 121, it is wound up by the receiving disk 24.
  • the winding arrangement enables more medium conveyor belts 22 to be stored in the box body 21, so that a single aerosol generating product 20 can be atomized and used multiple times, and the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization is respectively wound on the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, so as to avoid poor user experience such as odor crosstalk.
  • the storage tray 23 may include a storage reel 233 and a storage bottom plate 231 and a storage tray cover 232 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 233.
  • the unheated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 233, and the storage bottom plate 231 and the storage tray cover 232 may be used to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.
  • both ends of the width of the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be respectively contacted and connected with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, which can make the movement of the medium conveyor belt 22 more stable, and can also complete the power transmission from the supply shaft 2331 to the storage chassis 231, the storage disk cover 232, and further to the medium conveyor belt 22 through the friction between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the storage chassis 231, the storage disk cover 232.
  • the width of the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be smaller than the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 has a certain floating space in the axial direction of the storage reel 233, and no friction is generated between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck.
  • the storage tray 23 may be provided with only one of the storage bottom tray 231 and the storage tray cover 232, or both ends may not be provided with the storage bottom tray 231 and the storage tray cover 232.
  • the width limit of the medium conveying belt 22 at both ends can be achieved by the box body 21.
  • the storage tray 24 may also include a storage reel 243 and a storage bottom plate and a storage tray cover 242 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 243.
  • the heated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 243, and the storage bottom plate and the storage tray cover 242 may be used to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.
  • both ends of the width of the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be respectively contacted and connected with the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242, which can make the movement of the medium conveyor belt 22 more stable, and can also complete the transmission of power from the storage shaft 241 to the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242, and further to the medium conveyor belt 22 through the friction between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242.
  • the width of the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be smaller than the distance between the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 has a certain floating space in the axial direction of the storage reel 243, and no friction is generated between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck.
  • the storage tray may be provided with only one of the storage bottom tray and the storage tray cover 242, or both ends may not be provided with the storage bottom tray or the storage tray cover 242.
  • the width limit of the medium conveying belt 22 at both ends may be achieved by the box body 21.
  • one of the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 is a driving wheel, and the other is a driven wheel.
  • the receiving tray 24 is the driving wheel and the storage tray 23 is the driven wheel. Under the action of an external driving force, the receiving tray 24 rotates to reel in the medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the storage tray 23 to rotate synchronously to unwind the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 may also be driving wheels.
  • the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 may also rotate asynchronously. For example, the storage tray 23 first unwinds a section of the medium conveying belt 22, and after heating is completed, the receiving tray 24 is driven to rotate for rewinding.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 may include a base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222 disposed on the base belt 221.
  • the base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222.
  • the base belt 221 has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 disposed opposite to each other in the thickness direction.
  • the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 may face the storage reel 233, and the first surface 2211 of the base belt 221 may be relatively far away from the storage reel 233.
  • the matrix layer 222 may be disposed on the first surface 2211 and/or the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 by coating, lamination or bonding.
  • the matrix layer 222 may be distributed continuously on the base belt 221, or may be distributed at intervals in different regions.
  • the matrix layer 222 is disposed on the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221.
  • the matrix layer 222 may also be disposed on the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221, or disposed on both the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221.
  • the base belt 221 may be made of a heat-conducting material, such as a heat-conducting metal material such as aluminum foil or copper foil.
  • the base belt 221 may also be made of a heat-conducting non-metallic material, such as graphite.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be made entirely of the matrix layer 222, that is, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not include the base belt 221.
  • the heater 121 adopts a resistive heating method, and the heater 121 generates heat through the Joule effect, thereby transferring the heat to the medium conveyor belt 22 for baking and heating.
  • the heater 121 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can be in direct physical contact to achieve heat conduction, and the heater 121 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also achieve heat transfer from the heater 121 to the medium conveyor belt 22 through indirect contact methods such as heat radiation.
  • the heater 121 can contact the side of the medium conveyor belt 22 where the matrix layer 222 is not provided, and transfer heat to the matrix layer 222 through the base belt 221. In this way, it can be avoided that the heated matrix layer 222 adheres to the heater 121 and affects the heating effect of the heater 121.
  • the heater 121 may also be in direct contact with the matrix layer 222, which is beneficial to improving the heat transfer efficiency and reducing heat loss.
  • the medium conveyor belt 22 may not need to be made of a heat-conducting material.
  • the heater 121 may also use other heating methods such as electromagnetic heating, infrared radiation, ultrasound, microwave, plasma, etc.
  • an atomizing seat 25 may be further provided in the box body 21, an atomizing chamber 250 is formed in the atomizing seat 25, and an inlet 251 and an outlet 252 are formed on the side wall of the atomizing seat 25, which are connected to the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 can enter the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251, and after being heated and atomized in the atomizing chamber 250, it can be transmitted through the outlet 252.
  • One end of the heater 121 can extend into the atomizing chamber 250 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 entering the atomizing chamber 250.
  • the cross-section of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22) is the same or similar to the cross-section of the medium conveyor belt 22 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22), and the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be fitted with a gap to avoid scratching the medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the gap between the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22 is not too large to reduce or avoid leakage of the aerosol generated in the atomization chamber 250 through the inlet 251 and the outlet 252.
  • the atomizer seat 25 is arranged on the upper side of the cavity 210, and the atomizer chamber 250 is directly connected to the lower end of the air outlet channel 253, so that the output path of the aerosol is shorter.
  • the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are respectively formed on two opposite sides of the atomizer seat 25 in the lateral direction.
  • the atomizer seat 25 can also be arranged at other positions of the cavity 210, and the atomizer chamber 250 can also be indirectly connected to the air outlet channel 253.
  • the arrangement of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 is also not limited.
  • the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be arranged on the same side of the atomizer seat 25; or, the inlet 251 is arranged on one side of the atomizer seat 25 in the lateral direction, and the outlet 252 is arranged on the bottom side of the atomizer seat 25.
  • a guide structure 28 may be further provided in the box body 21 for guiding the medium conveying belt 22 during its travel and ensuring good contact between the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121.
  • Each guide structure 28 may be a rotatable structure, such as a guide roller or a wheel; of course, it is understandable that in other embodiments, each guide structure 28 may also be a non-rotatable structure, such as a guide column or other structure fixedly provided in the box body 21.
  • each guide structure 28 is a guide roller.
  • the plurality of guide structures 28 include two guide rollers 28e and 28f, which are respectively arranged on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25 in the lateral direction, and are used to make the medium conveying belt 22 in good contact with the heater 121.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated enters the atomizing chamber 250 along the guide rollers 28e and the inlet 251 for atomization, and the atomized medium conveying belt 22 is output from the outlet 252 and then guided by the guide roller 28f, and then rolled up on the storage tray 24.
  • the two guide rollers 28e and 28f are respectively arranged corresponding to the inlet 251 and the outlet 252. When the setting positions of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are changed, the two guide rollers 28e and 28f can be changed accordingly.
  • a driving shaft 27 is further provided in the box body 21, and the driving shaft 27 rotates to push the medium conveying belt 22 to unwind from the storage tray 23 and be heated and atomized by the heater 121.
  • the driving shaft 27 can be arranged on the travel path of the medium conveying belt 22 between the heater 121 and the storage tray 24, and further, between the travel path between the guide roller 28f and the storage tray 24.
  • the driving shaft 27 can have a cam or a cam-like structure, so that the driving shaft 27 can change the path length of the medium conveying belt 22 between the heater 121 and the storage tray 24 during the rotation process.
  • a through hole 270 may be formed on the driving shaft 27, and the medium conveying belt 22 coming out of the outlet 252 passes through the through hole 270 and is then reeled onto the receiving tray 24.
  • This structure allows the medium conveying belt 22 to be wound around the driving shaft 27 during the rotation of the driving shaft 27, which can increase the stretching length of the medium conveying belt 22 each time the driving shaft 27 rotates.
  • the driving shaft 27 has the function of temporarily reeling in the medium conveying belt 22 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from being loosened.
  • the driving shaft 27 includes two rotating shafts 271 arranged at intervals, the diameters of the two rotating shafts 271 may be equal or unequal, and the interval between the two rotating shafts 271 forms a through hole 270.
  • the two rotating shafts 271 are arranged in parallel and at intervals, and the rotation center line of the driving shaft 27 may coincide with the central axis of one of the rotating shafts 271.
  • the rotation center line of the driving shaft 27 may also be parallel to the central axes of the two rotating shafts 271 but not coincident.
  • the driving shaft 27 may further include two spaced connection plates 272 .
  • the two connection plates 272 are respectively disposed at two ends of the shaft 271 and may be used to limit the medium conveying belt 22 .
  • the medium conveying belt 22 can pass through the opening 270 between the two shafts 271 and is not wrapped around the two shafts 271. At this time, the medium conveying belt 22 has the shortest path length between the heater 121 and the storage tray 24.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 coming out of the guide roller 28f passes through a shaft 271 farther from the guide roller 28f, passes through the opening 270, and then passes through a shaft 271 closer to the guide roller 28f and is wound on the storage tray 24.
  • the medium conveying belt 22 has the longest path length between the heater 121 and the storage tray 24.
  • the structure of the driving shaft 27 enables the medium conveying belt 22 to have a longer stretching length each time, and the stretching length is close to the sum of the circumferences of the two shafts 271.
  • the driving shaft 27 When the driving shaft 27 rotates in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) from the first rotation position shown in FIG. 39 to the second rotation position shown in FIG. 40, the medium conveying belt 22 can be pushed to unwind from the storage disk 23, and the speed of the medium conveying belt 22 unwound from the storage disk 23 is consistent each time the driving shaft 27 rotates, so that the length of the medium conveying belt 22 unwound from the storage disk 23 is consistent each time the driving shaft 27 rotates one cycle.
  • the driving shaft 27 rotates in a counterclockwise direction (or clockwise direction in other embodiments) from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 40 to the first rotation position shown in FIG. 39, the driving shaft 27 unwinds the medium conveying belt 22 wound thereon, and rewinds it by rotating the storage disk 24.
  • an airflow sensor 218 may be provided in the box body 21, and the airflow sensor 218 may be connected to the atomizing chamber 250 via the inlet 251 or the outlet 252.
  • the airflow sensor 218 can sense the change of airflow or air pressure, and the control circuit can start the battery to power the heater 121 according to the signal of the airflow sensor 218 to start the atomization work.
  • the airflow sensor 218 may also be provided in the aerosol generating device 10. In other embodiments, the airflow sensor 218 may not be provided in the aerosol generating system 100.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may include a body 11 and a battery, a heater 121, a control circuit, a drive assembly 14, and a transmission assembly 150 contained in the body 11.
  • the battery is electrically connected to the heater 121 and the drive assembly 14, respectively, for providing electrical energy to the heater 121 and the drive assembly 14.
  • the control circuit is electrically connected to the heater 121 and the drive assembly 14, respectively, for controlling the operation of the heater 121 and the drive assembly 14.
  • a bracket 155 may also be provided in the body 11, and the bracket 155 may be used for supporting and installing the drive assembly 14 and the transmission assembly 150.
  • the body 11 may include a frame 112, and a cover 111 and a base 113 respectively matched with the frame 112.
  • the cover 111 and the base 113 may be respectively covered on both sides of the frame 112 in the thickness direction.
  • a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed between the cover 111 and the frame 112.
  • the cover 111 and the frame 112 may be connected together in a detachable manner such as a snap connection, a threaded connection, a magnetic connection, etc., so that the aerosol generating product 20 can be taken out and replaced by opening the cover 111.
  • a plurality of magnets 114 are embedded on the side of the cover 111 facing the frame 112
  • a plurality of magnets 115 are embedded on the side of the frame 112 facing the cover 111 corresponding to the plurality of magnets 114, so that the cover 111 and the frame 112 are magnetically fixed to each other through the magnets 114 and 115.
  • An installation cavity 1130 is formed between the base 113 and the frame 112, and the drive assembly 14 and the transmission assembly 150 can be accommodated in the installation cavity 1130.
  • the base 113 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner, which is convenient for repairing, replacing or upgrading the components in the installation cavity 1130.
  • the base 113 and the frame 112 can also be connected together in a non-detachable manner to prevent the user from accidentally opening the installation cavity 1130 and causing damage to the components.
  • the frame 112 has a greater thickness than the cover 111 and the base 113, and at least most of the accommodating cavity 1120 and the installation cavity 1130 are formed by the depression of the frame 112.
  • the specific structure of the body 11 is not limited to the above specific embodiment.
  • the bottom wall of the accommodating cavity 1120 may be further recessed to form an installation cavity 1121 for the installation and fixation of the heater 121.
  • One end of the heater 121 may be directly or indirectly inserted into the installation cavity 1121 for fixation, and the other end may extend out of the installation cavity 1121 and may be inserted into the atomizing cavity 250, for heating the matrix layer 222 entering the atomizing cavity 250 after power is turned on.
  • the heater 121 may be in the form of a sheet, so as to facilitate full contact with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, so as to fully heat the matrix layer 222 on the medium conveyor belt 22 by heat conduction.
  • the heater 121 is not limited to being in the form of a sheet, and may also be in other shapes such as a columnar shape; in addition, the heater 121 may also be disposed at other positions of the body 11.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may also include a mounting seat 122 accommodated in the mounting cavity 1121.
  • the mounting seat 122 may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone).
  • PEEK polyetheretherketone
  • One end of the heater 121 may be inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed in the mounting cavity 1121 via the mounting seat 122, which can reduce the heat transferred from the heater 121 to the cavity wall of the mounting cavity 1121, and facilitate heat insulation.
  • the drive assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to travel.
  • the transmission assembly 150 is connected to the drive assembly 14, and is used to transmit the driving force of the drive assembly 14 to the aerosol generating article 20.
  • the drive assembly 14 is an electric drive structure, which may include a reducer 141 and an output shaft 142 connected to the reducer 141.
  • the drive assembly 14 may also include other electric drive structures such as a motor.
  • the drive assembly 14 is also not limited to an electric drive structure, and it may also be a manual drive structure, such as a handle or a hand wheel.
  • the transmission assembly 150 may include a driving gear 151, an unwinding gear 152, and a receiving gear 154.
  • the driving gear 151 is connected to the output shaft 142 of the reducer 141, and can rotate synchronously with the output shaft 142 under the drive of the reducer 141.
  • the unwinding gear 152 can be directly or indirectly meshed with the driving gear 151 to provide power for the medium conveying belt 22 to pass through the heater 121.
  • the receiving gear 154 can be directly or indirectly meshed with the driving gear 151 to provide power for the winding of the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the driving gear 151 can rotate in a first direction or a second direction opposite to the first direction under the drive of the reducer 141.
  • the first direction is counterclockwise and the second direction is clockwise; in other embodiments, the first direction may be clockwise and the second direction may be counterclockwise.
  • the driving gear 151 rotates in the first direction
  • the unwinding gear 152 rotates to push the medium conveying belt 22 to pass through the heater 121.
  • the storage gear 154 is configured to be engaged or disengaged with the driving gear 151 according to the rotation direction of the driving gear 151.
  • the transmission assembly 150 further includes a transfer gear 153, and the driving gear 151 and the storage gear 154 are engaged or disengaged through the transfer gear 153.
  • the transfer gear 153 may have a first position separated from the storage gear 154 and a second position engaged with the storage gear 154. In this embodiment, the relative position between the storage gear 154 and the transfer gear 153 can be adjusted by the forward and reverse rotation of the reducer 141 and the driving gear 151.
  • the driving gear 151 When the driving gear 151 rotates in the first direction, the driving gear 151 can drive the transfer gear 153 to move to the first position where the transfer gear 153 is disengaged from the storage gear 154. When the driving gear 151 rotates in the second direction, the driving gear 151 can drive the transfer gear 153 to move to the second position where the transfer gear 153 is engaged with the storage gear 154. When the driving gear 151 rotates in the first direction or the second direction, the transfer gear 153 always keeps meshing with the driving gear 151. Of course, in other embodiments, the relative position between the storage gear 154 and the transfer gear 153 can also be achieved by manual operation.
  • the frame 112 may also be formed with a slide groove 1131 for slidingly installing the transfer gear 153.
  • One end of the transfer gear 153 has a gear shaft 1531, and the gear shaft 1531 can be slidably installed in the slide groove 1131.
  • the slide groove 1131 is in the shape of a runway, and the gear shaft 1531 can slide back and forth in the length direction of the slide groove 1131, so that the transfer gear 153 can be smoothly switched between the first position and the second position.
  • the specific shape of the slide groove 1131 is not limited, for example, it can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a rectangle.
  • the setting position of the slide groove 1131 is also not limited, for example, the slide groove 1131 can also be formed on the bracket 155.
  • the bracket 155 is generally plate-shaped.
  • the driving gear 151, the unwinding gear 152, the transfer gear 153, and the storage gear 154 are all arranged on the side of the bracket 155 facing the aerosol generating product 20, so as to facilitate connection with the aerosol generating product 20.
  • the reducer 141 is arranged on the side of the bracket 155 away from the aerosol generating product 20, and the output shaft 142 passes through the bracket 155 to be connected with the driving gear 151.
  • One end of the storage gear 154 has an output shaft 1541, and the output shaft 1541 is connected to the storage reel 243 of the storage tray 24 and can drive the storage reel 243 to rotate synchronously.
  • the output shaft 1541 and the storage reel 243 can be connected together by mutual sleeve connection, and the output shaft 1541 and the storage reel 243 have a non-circular cross-section such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 1541 and the storage reel 243 can rotate synchronously, and the output shaft 1541 and the storage reel 243 are easy to disassemble and assemble.
  • One end of the unwinding gear 152 has an output shaft 1521, which is connected to the driving shaft 27 and can drive the driving shaft 27 to rotate synchronously.
  • the rotation center line of the output shaft 1521 coincides with the rotation center line of one of the shafts 271 in the driving shaft 27.
  • the rotation center line of the output shaft 1521 may not coincide with the rotation center line of each shaft 271.
  • the output shaft 1521 and the driving shaft 27 can be connected together by mutual sleeve connection, and the output shaft 1521 has a non-circular cross-section such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 1521 and the driving shaft 27 can rotate synchronously, and the output shaft 1521 and the driving shaft 27 are easy to disassemble and assemble.
  • a force F can be applied to the transfer gear 153, and the force F can cause the transfer gear 153 to slide from the second position to the first position and remain in the first position.
  • the storage gear 154 is disengaged from the transfer gear 153, and the storage gear 154 will not be driven to rotate by the transfer gear 153, and the storage tray 24 will not be stored.
  • the unwinding gear 152 rotates synchronously with the driving gear 151 in the opposite direction (clockwise in the example), thereby driving the driving shaft 27 to rotate in the clockwise direction, pushing the medium conveyor belt 22 to transmit and pass through the heater 121.
  • the control circuit controls the driving gear 151 to rotate in the second direction (clockwise in the example), thereby applying a force F' opposite to the force F to the transfer gear 153, and the force F' can make the transfer gear 153 slide from the first position to the second position and remain in the second position.
  • the unwinding gear 152 rotates synchronously with the driving gear 151 in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in the example) under the drive of the driving gear 151, thereby driving the driving shaft 27 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, thereby unwinding the portion of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the driving shaft 27.
  • the transfer gear 153 rotates with the driving gear 151 in the counterclockwise direction under the drive of the driving gear 151, thereby driving the storage gear 154 meshing with the transfer gear 153 to rotate in the clockwise direction, thereby driving the storage tray 24 to rotate in the clockwise direction, thereby winding the medium conveying belt 22.
  • the transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22 is promoted by the rotation of the driving shaft 27, so that the length of the medium conveyor belt 22 that moves each time the driving shaft 27 rotates can be ensured to be consistent.
  • the unwinding and storage actions of the medium conveyor belt 22 are achieved by the forward and reverse rotation of the reducer 141 and the driving gear 151, and the relative position between the storage gear 154 and the transfer gear 153 is adjusted by the forward and reverse rotation of the reducer 141 and the driving gear 151, with a high degree of automation and high control accuracy.
  • the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a position detection component 16, which may include a potentiometer 161.
  • the potentiometer 161 can detect the rotation angle of the storage gear 154 and feed it back to the control circuit.
  • the potentiometer 161 and the storage gear 154 can be coaxially arranged, and the potentiometer 161 can rotate synchronously with the storage gear 154.
  • the detection shaft 162 of the potentiometer 161 can pass through the bracket 155 and be plugged and fixed with the storage gear 154, so that it can rotate synchronously with the storage gear 154 under the drive of the storage gear 154.
  • the position detection component 16 is not limited to the potentiometer 161, and other known position sensors can also be used; in addition, the position detection component 16 can also accurately control the operation of the reducer 141 by detecting the rotation angle of other gears such as the storage gear 154.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 may include a housing 101, a belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and a transmission device 40.
  • the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 is movably disposed in the housing 101, and the transmission device 40 is disposed in the housing 101 and cooperates with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to provide power to the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 may be in the shape of a flat belt, but is not limited to it, and may be made of a tin foil belt with a solid aerosol generating matrix arranged on the surface.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 may further include a first reel structure 102 for winding an unheated strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22, a second reel structure 103 for winding a heated strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22, and a heating structure 12 for locally heating the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • the transmission device 40 can accurately transmit the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22, so that more atomization times are available, and the regions of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 atomized each time will not be mixed together, so that the taste is good and the user experience is improved.
  • the transmission device 40 can be disposed on the transmission path between the first reel structure 102 and the heating structure 104 to transmit the corresponding strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to the heating structure 12 for heating.
  • the aerosol generating system 100 can prevent the occurrence of undesirable situations such as odor crosstalk by collecting and storing the heated portion of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and the unheated portion of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 separately, thereby improving the user experience.
  • the first reel structure 102 and the second reel structure 103 may respectively include a chassis 1021 disposed in the shell 101, a reel 1022 disposed on the chassis 1021, and a cover body 1023 disposed on the reel 1022 and matched with the chassis 1021, wherein the cover body 1023 and the chassis 1021 may be relatively disposed at the two ends of the reel 1022, thereby forming a second receiving space for accommodating the wound and collected belt medium conveyor belt 22.
  • FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 show a transmission device 40 in one embodiment of the present invention, which is used to transmit a strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and may include a locking component 41 and a driving component 46.
  • the locking component 41 has a locking state relatively fixed with the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and an unlocking state relatively separated or loosely contacted with the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the driving component 46 is connected to the locking component 41 to drive the locking component 41 to move along the first direction B1 (horizontal direction in the figure).
  • the locking component 41 When the locking component 41 is in the locked state, it can be relatively fixed with the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, so as to drive the strip-shaped aerosol generating substrate to move; when the locking component is in the unlocked state, it can return to the initial position, and so on, to achieve continuous conveyance of the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 until the entire strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 is heated.
  • the locking assembly 41 in some embodiments includes at least one clamping member 411, which can move back and forth along a second direction B2 (vertical direction in the figure) intersecting the first direction B1 to switch back and forth between the locking state and the unlocking state of the locking assembly 41.
  • the at least one clamping member 411 can move toward the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to clamp the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to achieve the above-mentioned locking state, and move away from the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to achieve the above-mentioned unlocking state.
  • the locking assembly 41 When the locking assembly 41 is in an unlocked state, the locking assembly 41 is in a relatively separated or loosely contacted unlocked state with the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22. At this time, even if the locking assembly 41 moves, it will not drive the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to move synchronously.
  • relative separation means that the locking assembly 41 is not in contact with the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22; loose contact means that the locking assembly 41 is in contact with the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22, but the locking assembly 41 cannot drive the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to move when moving along the first direction B1.
  • the locking assembly 41 when the locking assembly 41 is in an unlocked state, the locking assembly 41 is not in contact with the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22, that is, the distance between the two clamping members 411 is greater than the thickness of the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • the second direction B2 is arranged perpendicular to the first direction B1 so that the at least one clamping member can move back and forth along a direction perpendicular to the first direction B1 to achieve vertical clamping of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 with better effect.
  • the locking assembly 41 may include two clamping members 411, and the two clamping members 411 may be moved closer to and farther from each other along the second direction B2.
  • the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 may be clamped from two opposite sides of the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • the clamping of the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 may be released.
  • one of the two clamping members 411 may be movable and the other may not be movable, and the purpose of clamping the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 may also be achieved.
  • the two clamping members 411 may be block-shaped, and each clamping member 411 has a clamping surface 4111, which is a surface of the corresponding clamping member 411 facing the other clamping member 411.
  • the two clamping members 411 are respectively in contact with two opposite surfaces of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 through their clamping surfaces 4111.
  • the clamping surfaces 4111 of the two clamping members 411 are opposite to each other, and the shapes and sizes of the two clamping members 411 are the same, so that the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 can be clamped more securely, and the stress concentration caused by insufficient alignment can be prevented from causing damage to the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • the width and length of the clamping surface 4111 can be equivalent to the width of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • the width of the clamping surface 4111 can be equal to, slightly larger than, or slightly smaller than the width of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • the clamping surface 4111 may also be set in a circular shape, and the diameter of the circular clamping surface 4111 may be equivalent to the width of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, that is, the diameter of the clamping surface 4111 may be equal to, slightly larger than, or slightly smaller than the width of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the clamping member 411 may be made of an elastic material, or at least the clamping surface 4111 of the clamping member 411 may be formed of an elastic material. In this way, the clamping member 411 and the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 are more gently abutted, which can increase friction on one hand, and prevent the clamping surface 4111 of the clamping member 411 from being too hard and damaging the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 on the other hand.
  • the clamping member 411 is not limited to being made of the above materials.
  • the clamping member 411 may also be made of a completely rigid material.
  • the locking assembly 41 in some embodiments further includes at least one pusher 413, which is connected to the drive assembly 46 and is used to drive at least one clamping member 411 to move to a locked state and remain in the locked state. It can also be said that the locking assembly 41 in some embodiments further includes a pusher 413 connected to the drive assembly 46, which is used to provide at least one driving force for the at least one clamping member 411 to move along the second direction B2. Specifically, one end of the pusher 413 is connected to the drive assembly 46, and the other end is connected to the at least one clamping member 411.
  • the locking assembly 41 further includes at least one elastic member 412, which is connected to at least one clamping member and is used to drive at least one clamping member 411 to move to an unlocked state and maintain it in the unlocked state. It can also be said that the locking assembly 41 in some embodiments may also include an elastic member 412, which is used to provide at least one elastic reset force to the at least one clamping member 411, and the direction of the at least one elastic reset force is opposite to the direction of the at least one driving force.
  • the at least one driving force is used to drive the at least one clamping member 411 closer to the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • the at least one driving force is used to drive the at least one clamping member 411 away from the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • the pushing member 413 when the locking assembly 41 includes two clamping members 411 that can move toward and away from each other, the pushing member 413 provides a pushing force to each clamping member 411, and the pushing forces provided by the pushing member 413 to the two clamping members 411 are in opposite directions (away from each other or toward each other) to push the two clamping members 411 away from or closer to each other.
  • the elastic member 412 provides two elastic reset forces in opposite directions to the two clamping members 411.
  • the setting of the elastic member 412 allows the two clamping members 411 to be elastically maintained in an unlocked state.
  • the pushing forces applied by the pushing member 413 to the two clamping members 411 are respectively greater than the corresponding elastic reset forces, the two clamping members 411 will be driven together until the belt medium conveyor belt 22 is clamped.
  • the elastic member 412 may be disposed between the two clamping members 411 to provide an elastic restoring force for the two clamping members 411 to move away from each other.
  • the elastic member 412 may include two elastic units, which are respectively disposed at opposite ends of the two clamping members 411 to provide an elastic restoring force for the two clamping members 411 to move closer to each other.
  • At least one pusher 413 is configured to move along the first direction B1 to drive at least one clamping member 411 to move along the second direction B2 to the locked state, and when at least one clamping member 411 is in the locked state, the locking assembly 41 is driven to move along the first direction B1.
  • the pusher 413 can be arranged to move back and forth along the first direction B1, and can be operably matched with the at least one clamping member 411 to provide the at least one driving force mentioned above.
  • the pushing member 413 can be out of contact with the at least one clamping member 411.
  • the pushing member 413 moves toward the at least one clamping member 411 along the first direction B1 until it contacts the at least one clamping member 411, and further gradually increases the strength of at least one pushing force provided to the at least one clamping member 411 until the corresponding elastic reset force is overcome, thereby resolving the locking of the at least one clamping member 411 corresponding to the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22.
  • At least one clamping member 411 includes at least one first mating slope 4112
  • at least one pushing member 413 includes at least one second mating slope 4130.
  • the at least one second mating slope 4130 pushes against the at least one first mating slope 4112, so that the at least one clamping member 411 moves along the second direction B2 to a locked state.
  • at least one wedge-shaped mating structure is provided between the pushing member 413 and the at least one clamping member 411, and the at least one wedge-shaped mating structure decomposes the driving force of the pushing member 413 along the first direction B1 into the at least one driving force mentioned above.
  • the at least one wedge-shaped mating structure may include a first mating bevel 4112 formed on the at least one clamping member 411 and at least one second mating bevel 4130 formed on the pushing member 413, and the first mating bevel 4112 cooperates with the at least one second mating bevel 4130 to achieve the decomposition of the driving force.
  • the clamping member 411 is pushed by the pushing member 413 and moves along the second direction B2.
  • the first mating bevel 4112 and the at least one second mating bevel 4130 can be inclined planes or arc surfaces.
  • the pushing member 413 cooperates with the first mating bevel 4112 through the second mating bevel 4130 to provide the movable clamping member 411 with a pushing force in the opposite direction to the elastic reset force to which the clamping member 411 itself is subjected, so that the pushing member 413 changes the state of the locking assembly 41 by cooperating with the clamping member 411.
  • the pushing member 413 may include a pair of force-applying portions 4131 extending toward the clamping member 411, and the pair of force-applying portions 4131 are respectively arranged corresponding to the two clamping members 411, and a second mating inclined surface 4130 is arranged at the end of each force-applying portion 4131 facing the side of the other force-applying portion 4131, and the distance of the second mating inclined surface 4130 on the pair of force-applying portions 4131 close to one end of the clamping member 411 is greater than the distance away from one end of the clamping member 411, that is, the second mating inclined surfaces 4130 on the pair of force-applying portions 4131 are arranged in an eight-shaped shape, so as to provide a directional pushing force for the two clamping members 411 when mating with the two clamping members 411.
  • the force applying portion 4131 may also be disposed on the clamping member 411 , and accordingly, the first mating inclined surface 4112 may be disposed on the force applying portion 4131 , and the second mating inclined surface 4130 may be disposed on the pushing member 413 .
  • the force-applying portion 4131 and the clamping member 411 located at the top in the second direction B2 are shown.
  • the force-applying portion 4131 exerts a force F perpendicular to the first matching inclined surface 4112 on the clamping member 411.
  • the force F can be decomposed into a force F2 along the second direction B2 and a force F1 perpendicular to F2.
  • the force F2 can push the clamping member 411 to move along the second direction B2.
  • the clamping member 411 can only move along the corresponding axis in the second direction B2, and the elastic restoring force of the elastic member 412 on the clamping member 411 is opposite to the direction of the force F2. Therefore, when the force F2 in the second direction B2 is greater than the elastic restoring force, the clamping member 411 moves downward in the second direction B2.
  • clamping member 411 located at the bottom in the second direction B2 is similar, so when the two clamping members 411 are close to each other, the locking assembly 41 can be switched from the unlocked state to the locked state.
  • the clamping member 411 located at the upper side in the second direction B2 when the pushing member 413 moves away from the clamping member 411 in the first direction B1, the force F decreases, and the force F2 in the second direction B2 decreases.
  • the force F2 in the second direction B2 is less than the elastic reset force, the clamping member 411 moves upward.
  • the first mating bevel 4112 and the second mating bevel 4130 can be arranged according to the same or similar principle as that of the embodiment.
  • the pushing member 413 may be arranged in a block shape.
  • the pushing member 413 and the clamping member 411 may be distributed along the first direction B1 respectively.
  • the pushing member 413 is provided with a through hole 4132 for the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to pass through.
  • the through hole 4132 may be located between the two force-applying portions 4131 and pass through the pushing member 413 in the first direction B1.
  • the through hole 4132 corresponds to the clamping surfaces 4111 of the two clamping members 411.
  • the clamping member 411 when the pusher 413 moves away from the clamping member 411 in the first direction B1, the clamping member 411 also moves toward the pusher 413 in the first direction B1, so that the pusher 413 can act on it, and the next transmission of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 is realized.
  • the locking assembly 41 further includes a first mounting seat 414, and the at least one clamping member 411 is disposed on the first mounting seat 414 so as to be movable back and forth along the second direction B2.
  • the pushing member 413 is disposed on the first mounting seat 414 so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction B1, and can drive the first mounting seat 414 to move back and forth along the first direction B1.
  • the two clamping members 411 can be arranged on the first mounting seat 414 so as to move back and forth along the second direction B2.
  • the first mounting seat 414 can be provided with a mounting shaft 415, which is extended along the second direction B2.
  • the two clamping members 411 are respectively sleeved on the mounting shaft 415, so as to move back and forth along the second direction B2 on the first mounting seat 414.
  • the elastic member 412 is arranged between the two clamping members 411, and is an elastic restoring force for the two clamping members 411 to move away from each other.
  • two mounting shafts 415 may be provided on the first mounting seat 414, and the two mounting shafts 415 are respectively located on both sides of the belt medium conveyor belt 22 in the first direction B1, and each clamping member 411 is respectively sleeved on the two mounting shafts 415 through two mounting rings 417, so that the clamping member 411 has better balance when moving up and down along the second direction B2.
  • the first mounting seat 414 may also be provided with two spacers 416, which are respectively arranged corresponding to the two mounting shafts 415, and the spacers 416 are provided with first mounting holes 4161 for the mounting shafts 415 to pass through, and the mounting shafts 415 are inserted into the first mounting holes 4161 to achieve the installation of the mounting shafts 415.
  • the spacers 416 may also separate the two clamping members 411.
  • the elastic member 412 on each mounting shaft 415 may include two columnar springs, which are respectively sleeved on the mounting shaft 415 and located between the corresponding clamping member 411 and the spacers 416, to provide elastic reset force for the corresponding clamping member, and the two clamping members 411 are respectively driven by independent springs, so as to achieve better stability.
  • the first mounting seat 414 may be in the shape of a rectangular frame, and may include a top wall 4141, a bottom wall 4142 opposite to the top wall 4141, and a support wall 4143 connecting the top wall 4141 and the bottom wall 4142.
  • the two mounting shafts 415 are arranged in the first mounting seat 414 at intervals, and the two ends are respectively fixed on the top wall 4141 and the bottom wall 4142.
  • the two spacers 416 are respectively arranged on the two support walls 4143 and extend toward each other.
  • the top wall 4141 and the bottom wall 4142 are correspondingly provided with second mounting holes 4145 for mounting the ends of the mounting shafts 415.
  • the push member 413 is installed in the first mounting seat 414.
  • the first mounting seat 414 has a first position C and a second position D spaced apart in the first direction B1.
  • the push member 413 can move back and forth between the first position C and the second position D relative to the first mounting seat 414.
  • the push member 413 acts on the clamping member 411 to provide a driving force for the clamping member 411.
  • the driving force of the push member 413 acting on the clamping member 411 is removed.
  • the transmission device 40 further includes a second mounting seat 42, and the first mounting seat 414 is disposed on the second mounting seat 42 so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction B1; a damping device is disposed between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42, for providing a damping force to the first mounting seat 414 when the first mounting seat 414 moves relative to the second mounting seat 42.
  • the transmission device 40 may further include a second mounting seat 42 in some embodiments, and the second mounting seat 42 may be fixed to the housing 101 of the aerosol generating system 100, so as to realize continuous conveyance of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 by the back and forth movement of the locking assembly 41 relative to the second mounting seat 42.
  • the first mounting seat 414 of the locking assembly 41 can be arranged on the second mounting seat 42 so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction B1. Due to the wedge-shaped fit between the pushing member 413 and the at least one clamping member 411, the pushing member 413 will also generate a pushing component force F1 in the same direction as the moving direction of the pushing member 413 on the first mounting seat 414 during the process of pushing the at least one clamping member 411 to move along the second direction B2 relative to the first mounting seat 414 (as shown in FIG. 56 ).
  • a damping device is provided between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42, and the damping device provides a damping force in the opposite direction to the pushing component force F1 for the first mounting seat 414, and the damping force is greater than the pushing component force.
  • the relative positions of the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 are fixed during the process of the pushing member 413 pushing the at least one clamping member 411 to move. After the at least one clamping member 411 moves into place, the pushing member 413 is fixed relative to the first mounting seat 414, and the driving force generated by the pushing member 413 is fully transmitted to the first mounting seat 414, thereby driving the first mounting seat 414 to overcome the damping force between the first mounting seat 42 and the second mounting seat 42 to move relative to the second mounting seat 42.
  • the first mounting seat 414 i.e., the clamping member 411
  • the damping force can offset the pushing force F1 in the first direction B1.
  • the two clamping members 411 can only move closer to each other along the second direction B2; when the push member 413 continues to move toward the clamping member 411, and when the pushing force generated by the push member 413 is fully transmitted to the first mounting seat 414, and the pushing force is greater than the damping force, the clamping member 411 drives the first mounting seat 414 to move to the side away from the push member 413.
  • the damping force between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 can be set to be greater than twice the pushing force F1.
  • the second mounting seat 42 may be a frame structure, and the second mounting seat 42 may include a top 421 and two side walls 422 connected to the top 421, and the two side walls 422 are spaced apart and arranged opposite to each other in the first direction B1.
  • the interior of the second mounting seat 42 has a third position E and a fourth position F spaced apart in the first direction B1.
  • the first mounting seat 414 is disposed in the second mounting seat 42, and the first mounting seat 414 can move back and forth between the third position E and the fourth position F of the second mounting seat 42 along the first direction B1 to realize the movement of the locking assembly 41 in the second mounting seat 42.
  • the transmission device 40 in some embodiments may also include a guide structure 43 for guiding the movement of the locking assembly 41. Under the guidance of the guide structure 43, the locking assembly 41 moves back and forth between the third position E and the fourth position F of the second mounting seat 42 along the first direction B1.
  • the guide structure 43 may be disposed between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 .
  • the guide structure 43 may include a guide groove 431 disposed on one of the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 and a guide rail 432 correspondingly disposed on the other.
  • the guide groove 431 and the guide rail 432 may extend along the first direction B1 .
  • the outer wall surface of the top wall 4141 of the first mounting seat 414 is opposite to the inner wall surface of the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42, and the guide groove 431 and the guide rail 432 can be respectively arranged on the two opposite surfaces of the top wall 4141 of the first mounting seat 414 and the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42.
  • the guide groove 431 can be arranged on the outer wall surface of the top wall 4141 of the first mounting seat 414, and the guide groove 431 passes through both ends of the first mounting seat 414 in the first direction B1.
  • the guide rail 432 can be correspondingly arranged on the inner wall surface of the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42, and the guide rail 432 can extend from the third position E to the fourth position F, and the side wall 422 restricts the first mounting seat 414 from moving between the third position E and the fourth position F of the second mounting seat 42.
  • the guide groove 431 can be a dovetail groove
  • the guide rail 432 can be a dovetail-type guide rail 432 adapted to the dovetail groove.
  • the second mounting seat 42 may also include a connecting wall arranged on at least one of the two opposite sides in the first direction B1, and the connecting wall is connected to the top 421 and the side wall 422.
  • One of the guide rail 432 and the guide groove 431 may be arranged on the connecting wall of the second mounting seat 42, and the other is correspondingly arranged on the first mounting seat 414 and/or the pushing member 413 of the locking assembly.
  • a damping device between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 may be disposed on the guide structure 43, for example, the damping device may be disposed between the guide groove 431 and the guide rail 432, so as to control the damping force between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42.
  • the damping device may be damping grease, which may be achieved by applying the damping grease to the guide groove 431 and/or the guide rail 432.
  • the damping grease is a high-resistance lubricating grease, which enables the first mounting seat 414 to move more steadily, smoothly, and accurately, and can reduce noise during operation.
  • the damping grease can be set and adjusted according to the requirements of the damping force, so that the two clamping members 411 can be moved closer first and then driven to move together by the pushing member 413.
  • the damping device can be other structures such as a damping sheet and a damper that have a damping effect.
  • the damping device can be set at a position other than the guide structure 43.
  • the transmission device 40 may further include a guide structure 44 for guiding the movement of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and the guide structure 44 may guide the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to be transmitted in the first direction B1.
  • the guide structure 44 may be disposed on the second mounting seat 42, and may be disposed on two side walls 422, respectively, and each guide structure 44 may include two rollers 441 disposed at intervals, the two rollers 441 are parallel to each other, and a gap 442 is formed between the two rollers 441 for guiding the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to pass through.
  • the roller 441 is rotatably disposed on the side wall 422, and the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 passes through the gap 442 and is driven to move by the rolling of the two rollers 441.
  • the guide structure 44 plays a role in positioning and guiding the movement of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 in the first direction B1.
  • the side wall 422 is provided with an opening 4221 corresponding to the guide structure 44, the roller 441 is located in the opening 4221, and the gap is located in the opening 4221.
  • the two gaps 442 correspond to the through-holes 4132 of the pusher 413, the space between the clamping surfaces 4111 of the two clamping members 411, and the space between the two supporting walls 4143 of the first mounting seat 414, wherein the corresponding parts can be centrally aligned, i.e., centrally aligned in the second direction B2, so that the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 can be smoothly transported in the first direction B1.
  • the guide structure 44 can be implemented with other structures as long as it can guide the movement of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 in the first direction B1.
  • the second mounting seat 42 may be provided with a buffer 45, which may be respectively arranged on two side walls 422, and the buffer 45 corresponds to the first mounting seat 414, and specifically may correspond to two pairs of adjacent support walls 4143 of the first mounting seat 414, and the inner wall surface of the side wall 422 of the second mounting seat 42 is provided with a mounting groove 3222 for the buffer 45 to be installed.
  • the buffer 45 plays a buffering role on the first mounting seat 414, and has the effect of shock absorption and noise prevention.
  • the buffer 45 can be arranged away from the top 421, and of course, the buffer 45 can also be arranged close to the top 421, as long as it does not affect the work of each component and the transmission of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the driving assembly 46 may include a motor 461, a screw rod 462 driven by the motor 461, and a lever 463 driven by the screw rod 462.
  • the lever 463 is connected to the pushing member 413 of the locking assembly 41 and can move back and forth along the first direction B1 under the drive of the screw rod 462 to drive the pushing member 413 to move back and forth along the first direction B1.
  • the screw rod 462 can be disposed above or below the second mounting seat 42, and the axial direction of the screw rod 462 is parallel to the first direction B1.
  • the length of the screw rod 462 can be set according to the distance between the third position E and the fourth position F in the first direction B1, so that the lever 463 has a sufficient movement stroke to drive the locking assembly 41 to move back and forth between the third position E and the fourth position F.
  • the driving component 46 can be disposed below the second mounting seat 42 .
  • a base 423 for mounting the driving component 46 is disposed below the second mounting seat 42 .
  • the base 423 has a receiving space 4231 , and the driving component 46 is installed in the receiving space 4231 .
  • the base 423 may include a partition wall 4232 connected to the two side walls 422, and a surrounding wall 4233 extending from the partition wall 4232 away from the side wall 422, the surrounding wall 4233 has an open opening 4221 opposite to the partition wall 4232, and the base 423 may also include a bottom plate 4235 blocking the open opening 4221; the partition wall 4232, the surrounding wall 4233 and the bottom plate 4235 together define the accommodating space 4231.
  • the base plate 4235 and the surrounding wall 4233 may be connected via a connecting structure, which may include a first connecting tube 471 disposed on the surrounding wall 4233, a second connecting tube 472 correspondingly disposed on the base plate 4235, and a bolt 473.
  • the inner wall of the first connecting tube 471 is provided with an internal thread matching the external thread of the bolt 473.
  • the bolt 473 is fixedly installed in the second connecting tube 472 and is threadedly engaged with the internal thread of the first connecting tube 471.
  • the motor 461 and the screw rod 462 can be installed on the base plate 4235, and the lever 463 can be connected to the screw rod 462 through a screw nut matching the screw rod 462.
  • the screw nut can move along the axial direction (i.e., the first direction B1) of the screw rod 462 following the rotation of the screw rod 462, thereby driving the locking assembly 41 to move in the first direction B1.
  • the driving assembly 46 is connected to the pusher 413 , and the driving assembly 46 first drives the pusher 413 to act on at least one clamping member 411 to lock the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 , and then drives the locking assembly 41 to move as a whole, thereby driving the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to move.
  • the lever 463 may include a sleeve portion 4631 sleeved on the screw nut and a rod portion 4632 connected to the pusher 413.
  • the pusher 413 is provided with a slot 4133 with an opening facing downward for connection with the drive assembly 46. It is understandable that the pusher 413 and the drive assembly 46 are not limited to being matched through the slot 4133, and they may also be connected in other conventional ways.
  • the sleeve portion 4631 of the lever 463 can be located in the accommodating space 4231 of the base 423, and the rod portion 4632 can pass through the partition wall 4232 to be inserted into the slot 4133.
  • the partition wall 4232 is provided with a moving channel 4234 for the lever 463 to move back and forth in the first direction B1.
  • the moving channel 4234 extends along the first direction B1 and corresponds to the screw rod 462.
  • the push member 413 is disposed in the first mounting seat 414, and the bottom surface of the push member 413 can be flush with the outer surface of the bottom wall 4142 of the first mounting seat 414.
  • the slot 4133 extends from the bottom surface of the push member 413 to the inside of the push member 413, and the length of the lever 463 in the second direction B2 is greater than the depth of the slot 4133 in the second direction B2. Therefore, when the lever 463 is plugged into the slot 4133, the top of the push member 413 lifts up the first mounting seat 414.
  • the damping effect of the damping device is located between the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42 and the top wall 4141 of the second mounting seat 42, so as to facilitate the adjustment of the damping force.
  • a hollow groove may be provided inside the pusher 413 to reduce the weight of the pusher 413 and maintain the stability of movement.
  • connection between the motor 461 and the lever 463 is not limited to being connected through the screw rod 462, and other transmission structures such as gear transmission, belt transmission, etc. may also be applicable.
  • the driving assembly 46 may further include a speed regulating box 464, which is disposed on the bottom plate 4235, and the screw rod 462 and the gear are rotatably mounted in the speed regulating box 464.
  • the motor 461 may be fixedly mounted on the bottom plate 4235, and the wiring terminal of the motor 461 is connected to the cable 465, and the cable 465 may be parallel to the second direction B2 and extend to the outside of the second mounting seat 42 for easy wiring, wherein the motor 461 may be a stepping motor, and the cable 465 may be a flexible cable.
  • the base 423 of the driving component 46 can be located above the second mounting seat 42, the driving component 46 is installed in the base 423, and the moving channel 4234 is arranged at the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42; the guide structure 43 can be arranged between the bottom wall 4142 of the first mounting seat 414 and the partition wall 4232 of the base 423, and the driving component 46 can also be used to drive the pushing member 413 to move.
  • the transmission device 40 is further described below in conjunction with the working principle:
  • the belt medium conveyor belt 22 can enter the second mounting seat 42 from the outside of the second mounting seat 42 through the gap 442 between the two rollers 441 close to the pushing member 413, and then pass through the through hole 4132 of the pushing member 413, between the two clamping members 411, and the gap 442 between the two rollers 441 away from the pushing member 413, and then pass through the second mounting seat 42.
  • the motor 461 rotates and drives the screw rod 462 to rotate, and the lever 463 drives the pushing member 413 to move from the second position D of the first mounting seat 414 to the first position C.
  • the pushing member 413 contacts and cooperates with the two clamping members 411 through its two force-applying parts 4131 respectively.
  • the first mounting seat 414 Due to the damping force between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42, the first mounting seat 414 is stationary relative to the second mounting seat 42 at this time, and the two clamping members 411 move closer to each other in the second direction B2 and clamp the belt medium conveyor belt 22; when the pushing member 413 continues to move to the left, the pushing member 413 drives the first mounting seat 414 to move to the left together, and the clamping assembly drives the belt medium conveyor belt 22 to move to the left together, thereby realizing the transmission of the belt medium conveyor belt 22 in the first direction B1.
  • the motor 461 rotates in the opposite direction and drives the screw rod 462 to rotate in the opposite direction.
  • the lever 463 drives the pushing member 413 to move from the first position C of the first mounting seat 414 to the second position D.
  • the two force-applying parts 4131 of the pushing member 413 respectively disengage from the two clamping members 411, and release the cooperation with the two clamping members 411.
  • the two clamping members 411 move away from each other.
  • the locking assembly 41 is relatively separated from the belt medium conveyor belt 22; when the pushing member 413 continues to move to the right, the pushing member 413 drives the first mounting seat 414 to move to the right together.
  • control method can be to drive the locking component 41 to move from the fourth position F of the second mounting seat 42 to the third position E to perform one transmission of the belt medium conveyor belt 22; then drive the locking component 41 to move from the third position E to the fourth position F, and release the belt medium conveyor belt 22 during the movement, and return to the fourth position F for the next transmission.
  • control method may be to control the pushing member 413 to move to the left for a period of time, drive the belt medium conveyor belt 22 to move a distance, then stop for a period of time, and then continue to move to the left, and continue to drive the belt medium conveyor belt 22 to move a distance; or, control the pushing member 413 to move to the left for a period of time, drive the belt medium conveyor belt 22 to move a distance, and then control the pushing member 413 to move to the right, release the belt medium conveyor belt 22, and then control the pushing member 413 to move to the left for the second transmission of the belt medium conveyor belt 22.
  • the transmission device 40 can be applied to the aerosol generating system 100 to transmit the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 provided with positioning holes 223.
  • the main difference between the transmission device 40 of the transmission device 40 of the above-mentioned embodiment is that the locking component 41 can be locked with the belt medium conveyor belt 22 by plugging instead of clamping, that is, when the locking component 41 is in a locked state, the locking component 41 can be plugged and fixed with the belt medium conveyor belt 22, and is relatively fixed with the belt medium conveyor belt 22, and the two become a whole.
  • the locking assembly 41 may include at least one locking member 411a, on which a third matching inclined surface 4112a having the same structure as the first matching inclined surface 4112 is provided.
  • the locking member 411a may be provided with a limiting column 4111a extending along the second direction B2, and the limiting column 4111a is adapted to the positioning hole 223 on the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to be transmitted, so that when the locking member 411a is matched with the positioning hole 223 through its limiting column 4111a, that is, when the limiting column 4111a is inserted into the positioning hole 223, the locking assembly 41 is relatively fixed to the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to move.
  • the positioning hole 223 may be circular or in other shapes
  • the limiting post 4111a may be cylindrical or in other cylindrical shapes matching the positioning hole 223, and the cross-sectional dimensions of the limiting post 4111a are adapted to the dimensions of the positioning hole 223, for example, the dimensions of the two are the same, so that the limiting post 4111a can be inserted into the positioning hole 223 and become one with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and can be easily withdrawn from the positioning hole 223 for the next transmission.
  • the limiting post 4111a and the positioning hole 223 may be provided with a plurality of corresponding ones in the width direction to facilitate quick plug-in matching.
  • the locking assembly 41 is not limited to locking the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 in the above manner, and it can also be fixed by other means such as a magnetic structure, a suction cup, etc.

Landscapes

  • Drying Of Solid Materials (AREA)

Abstract

An aerosol generation system, comprising: a medium conveying belt (22), which is in the shape of a belt and is movably arranged; a heating structure (12), used for heating the medium conveying belt (22); and at least two groups of limiting structures (29), comprising at least one group of first limiting structures (291) and at least one group of second limiting structures (292), wherein the first limiting structures (291) and the second limiting structures (292) are arranged opposite to each other, so that the medium conveying belt (22) is in tight contact with the heating structure (12). According to the aerosol generation system, by means of the first limiting structures (291) and the second limiting structures (292) that are arranged opposite to each other, the medium conveying belt (22) is in tight contact with the heating structure (12), ensuring that the medium conveying belt (22) is effectively attached to the heating structure (12), facilitating full atomization of the medium conveying belt (22).

Description

气溶胶生成系统Aerosol Generating System 技术领域Technical Field

本发明涉及雾化领域,尤其涉及气溶胶生成系统。The present invention relates to the field of atomization, and in particular to an aerosol generating system.

背景技术Background Art

相关技术中的气溶胶生成系统可用于加热呈柱状的气溶胶生成基体使其产生气溶胶,该气溶胶生成基体雾化前后的雾化介质均是混合在一起,容易导致气溶胶窜味,影响用户抽吸体验。在一些相关技术中,可将气溶胶生成基体做成带状的以解决以上问题,但是采用该气溶胶生成基体,其在加热时与气溶加热结构难以有效贴合,进而导致气溶胶生成基体上的雾化介质并不能得到充分雾化。The aerosol generating system in the related art can be used to heat the columnar aerosol generating substrate to generate aerosol. The atomizing medium of the aerosol generating substrate before and after atomization is mixed together, which easily leads to aerosol odor and affects the user's smoking experience. In some related technologies, the aerosol generating substrate can be made into a strip shape to solve the above problem, but when using the aerosol generating substrate, it is difficult to effectively fit with the aerosol heating structure when heated, which leads to the aerosol generating substrate The medium cannot be fully atomized.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本发明旨在解决现有技术或相关技术中存在的技术问题之一。The present invention aims to solve one of the technical problems existing in the prior art or related technology.

有鉴于此,第一方面,本发明实施例提供一种气溶胶生成系统,包括:In view of this, in a first aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating system, comprising:

介质输送带,呈带状,且可移动设置;The medium conveyor belt is in the form of a belt and can be movably arranged;

加热结构,用于加热所述介质输送带;A heating structure, used for heating the medium conveyor belt;

至少两组限位结构,其中,包括至少一组第一限位结构与至少一组第二限位结构,所述第一限位结构与第二限位结构相对设置以使得所述介质输送带与所述加热结构紧密接触。At least two groups of limiting structures, including at least one group of first limiting structures and at least one group of second limiting structures, wherein the first limiting structures and the second limiting structures are arranged opposite to each other so that the medium conveying belt is in close contact with the heating structure.

在一些实施例中,所述第一限位结构与所述介质输送带接触并朝所述介质输送带与所述加热结构贴合方向向所述介质输送带施加作用力;In some embodiments, the first limiting structure contacts the medium conveying belt and applies a force to the medium conveying belt in a direction in which the medium conveying belt and the heating structure are attached to each other;

和/或,所述第二限位结构与所述介质输送带接触并朝所述介质输送带与所述加热结构贴合方向向所述介质输送带施加作用力。And/or, the second limiting structure contacts the medium conveying belt and applies a force to the medium conveying belt in a direction in which the medium conveying belt and the heating structure are in contact with each other.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括出气通道;In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further comprises an air outlet channel;

所述出气通道与所述加热结构相对设置,用于输出所述介质输送带加热产生的气溶胶;The air outlet channel is arranged opposite to the heating structure and is used to output the aerosol generated by heating the medium conveyor belt;

所述介质输送带设置于所述加热结构朝向所述出气通道的一面;The medium conveyor belt is arranged on a side of the heating structure facing the air outlet channel;

所述第一限位结构和/或所述第二限位结构压设于所述介质输送带上。The first limiting structure and/or the second limiting structure are pressed on the medium conveying belt.

在一些实施例中,所述加热结构包括第一侧以及第二侧;所述第一限位结构设置于所述第一侧;以及所述第二限位结构设置于所述第二侧。In some embodiments, the heating structure includes a first side and a second side; the first limiting structure is disposed on the first side; and the second limiting structure is disposed on the second side.

在一些实施例中,所述第一侧以及第二侧沿所述介质输送带移动方向依次设置。In some embodiments, the first side and the second side are sequentially arranged along a moving direction of the medium conveying belt.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统包括收容所述介质输送带的容腔;In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system includes a chamber for receiving the medium conveyor belt;

所述限位结构设置于所述容腔中。The limiting structure is arranged in the cavity.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括雾化腔,所述加热结构至少部分设置于所述雾化腔中;所述雾化腔具有进口以及出口,所述进口以及出口沿所述介质输送带移动方向依次设置;In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further comprises an atomizing chamber, wherein the heating structure is at least partially disposed in the atomizing chamber; the atomizing chamber has an inlet and an outlet, wherein the inlet and the outlet are sequentially disposed along the moving direction of the medium conveying belt;

至少一组所述第一限位结构设置于所述进口远离所述出口的一侧;至少一组所述第二限位结构设置于所述出口远离所述进口的一侧。At least one group of the first limiting structures is arranged on a side of the inlet away from the outlet; and at least one group of the second limiting structures is arranged on a side of the outlet away from the inlet.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括第一导向结构;所述第一导向结构设置于所述进口远离所述出口的一侧,用于将待加热的所述介质输送带导入所述进口;In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further comprises a first guide structure; the first guide structure is disposed on a side of the inlet away from the outlet, and is used to guide the medium conveyor belt to be heated into the inlet;

至少一组所述第一限位结构设置于所述第一导向结构与所述进口之间,且朝远离所述介质输送带与所述加热结构贴合的方向偏移所述第一导向结构设置。At least one set of the first limiting structures is disposed between the first guide structure and the inlet, and is offset from the first guide structure in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveying belt and the heating structure.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括第二导向结构;所述第二导向结构设置于所述出口远离所述进口的一侧,用于供从所述出口输出的且经过加热的所述介质输送带移动导向;In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further comprises a second guide structure; the second guide structure is disposed on a side of the outlet away from the inlet, and is used for guiding the heated medium conveying belt output from the outlet;

至少一组所述第二限位结构设置于所述第二导向结构与所述出口之间,且朝远离所述介质输送带与所述加热结构贴合的方向偏移所述第二导向结构设置。At least one set of the second limiting structures is disposed between the second guide structure and the outlet, and is offset from the second guide structure in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveying belt and the heating structure.

在一些实施例中,至少一组所述第一限位结构包括限位凸筋和/或限位轮;In some embodiments, at least one set of the first limiting structures includes limiting ribs and/or limiting wheels;

和/或,至少一组所述第二限位结构包括限位凸筋和/或限位轮。And/or, at least one group of the second limiting structures includes limiting ribs and/or limiting wheels.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括机体,所述机体上设置有容纳腔,所述气溶胶生成制品可拆卸设置于所述容纳腔中。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further comprises a body having a containing cavity disposed on the body, and the aerosol generating article is detachably disposed in the containing cavity.

实施本发明实施例的气溶胶生成系统,具有以下有益效果:该气溶胶生成系统通过相对设置的第一限位结构与第二限位结构使得介质输送带与加热结构紧密接触,进而可保证介质输送带与加热结构的有效贴合,有利于介质输送带的充分雾化。The aerosol generating system implemented in the embodiment of the present invention has the following beneficial effects: the aerosol generating system enables the medium conveyor belt to be in close contact with the heating structure through the relatively arranged first limiting structure and the second limiting structure, thereby ensuring the effective fit between the medium conveyor belt and the heating structure, which is beneficial to the sufficient atomization of the medium conveyor belt.

第二方面,本发明实施例提供一种气溶胶生成系统,包括介质输送带、储存盘、收纳盘、加热器以及阻尼器;In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating system, including a medium conveyor belt, a storage tray, a receiving tray, a heater, and a damper;

所述介质输送带被配置为从所述储存盘放卷,并经过所述加热器后被所述收纳盘收卷;The medium conveyor belt is configured to be unwound from the storage tray and to be rewound by the receiving tray after passing through the heater;

所述阻尼器与所述储存盘连接,所述阻尼器被配置为提供与所述储存盘的放卷转动方向相反的阻尼扭力。The damper is connected to the storage disk, and is configured to provide a damping torque opposite to the unwinding rotation direction of the storage disk.

在一些实施例中,所述阻尼器包括阻尼轮,所述阻尼轮的一端具有阻尼轴,所述阻尼轴与所述储存盘插接并相对周向固定。In some embodiments, the damper includes a damping wheel, one end of which has a damping shaft, and the damping shaft is plugged into the storage disk and fixed relative to the circumference.

在一些实施例中,所述阻尼器与所述储存盘可拆卸连接。In some embodiments, the damper is detachably connected to the storage tray.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括在所述介质输送带的行进方向上依次间隔分布的第三导向结构、第一导向结构、第二导向结构。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further includes a third guide structure, a first guide structure, and a second guide structure which are sequentially spaced apart in the traveling direction of the medium conveyor belt.

在一些实施例中,所述第一导向结构和所述第二导向结构分别设置于所述加热器的两侧,In some embodiments, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are respectively disposed on both sides of the heater.

所述加热器具有与所述介质输送带接触的加热面,所述第一导向结构和所述第二导向结构对所述介质输送带形成的定位面与所述加热面不处于同一平面。The heater has a heating surface in contact with the medium conveying belt, and the positioning surfaces formed by the first guide structure and the second guide structure for the medium conveying belt are not in the same plane as the heating surface.

在一些实施例中,所述加热面与所述定位面平行。In some embodiments, the heating surface is parallel to the positioning surface.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括用于检测所述介质输送带的位置的位置检测传感器。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further comprises a position detection sensor for detecting a position of the media transport belt.

在一些实施例中,所述位置检测传感器设置于所述第三导向结构和所述第一导向结构之间。In some embodiments, the position detection sensor is disposed between the third guide structure and the first guide structure.

在一些实施例中,所述第三导向结构、所述第一导向结构和所述第二导向结构均为限位滚轮。In some embodiments, the third guide structure, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are all limiting rollers.

在一些实施例中,所述加热器为片状。In some embodiments, the heater is in the form of a sheet.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括盒座,所述储存盘和所述收纳盘分别可转动地安装于所述盒座上。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further comprises a box seat, and the storage tray and the receiving tray are respectively rotatably mounted on the box seat.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成系统还包括机体,所述机体内形成有容纳腔,所述盒座、所述介质输送带、所述储存盘和所述收纳盘均可拆卸地收容于所述容纳腔中。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system further comprises a body, a receiving cavity is formed in the body, and the box seat, the medium conveying belt, the storage tray and the receiving tray can be detachably received in the receiving cavity.

实施本发明实施例至少具有以下有益效果:在介质输送带不运动时,阻尼轮的阻尼扭力能够拉紧储存盘,避免介质输送带松弛;在介质输送带运动时,阻尼轮的阻尼扭力能够使得介质输送带在运动过程中受到一定阻力,从而使介质输送带在运动过程中达到预紧的效果,使得介质输送带能够很好地保持与加热器的贴合。The implementation of the embodiments of the present invention has at least the following beneficial effects: when the medium conveyor belt is not moving, the damping torque of the damping wheel can tighten the storage disk to prevent the medium conveyor belt from loosening; when the medium conveyor belt is moving, the damping torque of the damping wheel can make the medium conveyor belt encounter a certain resistance during the movement, so that the medium conveyor belt can achieve a pre-tightening effect during the movement, so that the medium conveyor belt can maintain a good fit with the heater.

第三方面,本发明实施例提供一种气溶胶生成制品,包括:In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating product, comprising:

储存盘;Storage disk;

收纳盘;Storage tray;

介质输送带,被配置为从所述储存盘放卷,沿一传输路径移动后被所述收纳盘收卷;以及a medium conveyor belt configured to be unwound from the storage tray and rewound by the receiving tray after moving along a transmission path; and

多个限位件,在所述传输路径上间隔分布;A plurality of limiters are distributed at intervals on the transmission path;

每一所述限位件均包括在其轴向上间隔设置的第一限位台阶和第二限位台阶,用于将所述介质输送带限位在所述第一限位台阶和所述第二限位台阶之间,Each of the limiting members includes a first limiting step and a second limiting step spaced apart in the axial direction thereof, and is used to limit the medium conveying belt between the first limiting step and the second limiting step.

所述第一限位台阶和所述第二限位台阶之间的最短距离大于所述介质输送带的宽度。The shortest distance between the first limiting step and the second limiting step is greater than the width of the medium conveying belt.

在一些实施例中,所述储存盘包括第一卷芯轴以及分别设置于所述第一卷芯轴两端的第一底盘和第一盘盖,In some embodiments, the storage tray comprises a first winding core shaft and a first bottom plate and a first tray cover respectively disposed at two ends of the first winding core shaft.

所述介质输送带部分缠绕在所述第一卷芯轴上,且所述介质输送带的宽度小于所述第一底盘和所述第一盘盖之间的最短距离。The media conveying belt is partially wound around the first winding core shaft, and the width of the media conveying belt is smaller than the shortest distance between the first bottom plate and the first plate cover.

在一些实施例中,所述收纳盘包括第二卷芯轴以及分别设置于所述第二卷芯轴两端的第二底盘和第二盘盖,In some embodiments, the storage tray includes a second winding core shaft and a second bottom plate and a second tray cover respectively disposed at two ends of the second winding core shaft.

所述介质输送带部分缠绕在所述第二卷芯轴上,且所述介质输送带的宽度小于所述第二底盘和所述第二盘盖之间的最短距离。The media conveying belt is partially wound around the second winding core shaft, and the width of the media conveying belt is smaller than the shortest distance between the second bottom plate and the second plate cover.

在一些实施例中,每一所述限位件均包括滚轴以及可转动地套设于所述滚轴上的滚筒,所述第一限位台阶和所述第二限位台阶分别由所述滚筒的轴向两端沿径向向外延伸形成。In some embodiments, each of the limiting members includes a roller and a drum rotatably mounted on the roller, and the first limiting step and the second limiting step are respectively formed by extending radially outward from both axial ends of the drum.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成制品还包括:In some embodiments, the aerosol-generating article further comprises:

雾化腔,所述介质输送带被配置为在所述雾化腔中雾化;an atomizing chamber, wherein the medium conveying belt is configured to atomize in the atomizing chamber;

进口,供所述介质输送带进入所述雾化腔;以及An inlet for the medium conveyor belt to enter the atomization chamber; and

出口,供所述介质输送带输出所述雾化腔。An outlet is provided for the medium conveyor belt to output the atomization chamber.

在一些实施例中,所述进口和所述出口分别设置于所述雾化腔的两相对侧。In some embodiments, the inlet and the outlet are respectively disposed at two opposite sides of the atomization chamber.

在一些实施例中,所述进口的周缘与所述介质输送带之间形成有第一环形间隙。In some embodiments, a first annular gap is formed between a periphery of the inlet and the medium conveying belt.

在一些实施例中,所述出口的周缘与所述介质输送带之间形成有第二环形间隙。In some embodiments, a second annular gap is formed between the periphery of the outlet and the medium conveying belt.

进一步地,本发明实施例还提供一种气溶胶生成系统,包括如上述所述的气溶胶生成制品以及与所述气溶胶生成制品相配接的气溶胶生成装置。Furthermore, an embodiment of the present invention also provides an aerosol generating system, comprising the aerosol generating product as described above and an aerosol generating device matched with the aerosol generating product.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成装置包括容纳腔,气溶胶生成制品至少部分可拆卸地设置于所述容纳腔中。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device comprises a receiving cavity, in which the aerosol generating article is at least partially detachably disposed.

实施本发明实施例至少具有以下有益效果:通过第一限位台阶和第二限位台阶限位介质输送带在限位件轴向方向上的浮动空间,且介质输送带不与第一限位台阶和第二限位台阶产生摩擦,保证介质输送带顺畅传输。Implementing the embodiment of the present invention has at least the following beneficial effects: the floating space of the medium conveyor belt in the axial direction of the limiting member is limited by the first limiting step and the second limiting step, and the medium conveyor belt does not generate friction with the first limiting step and the second limiting step, thereby ensuring smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt.

第四方面,本发明实施例提供一种气溶胶生成制品,包括:In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating product, comprising:

盒体;Box body;

可转动地设置于所述盒体的储存盘和收纳盘;A storage tray and a receiving tray rotatably disposed on the box body;

介质输送带,被配置为从所述储存盘放卷,沿一路径移动后被所述收纳盘收卷;以及a medium conveyor belt configured to be unwound from the storage tray and rewound by the receiving tray after moving along a path; and

弹性件,与所述储存盘和所述盒体连接,使所述储存盘相对于所述盒体转动时产生摩擦阻尼。An elastic member is connected to the storage disk and the box body, so that friction damping is generated when the storage disk rotates relative to the box body.

在一些实施例中,所述储存盘包括储存卷轴,所述储存卷轴上形成有阻尼孔,所述弹性件容置于所述阻尼孔中。In some embodiments, the storage disk includes a storage reel, a damping hole is formed on the storage reel, and the elastic member is accommodated in the damping hole.

在一些实施例中,所述阻尼孔和所述弹性件的中轴线与所述储存盘的转动中心线重合。In some embodiments, the central axis of the damping hole and the elastic member coincides with the rotation center line of the storage disk.

在一些实施例中,所述弹性件包括软质结构件,所述盒体包括设置于所述阻尼孔中的导向柱,所述软质结构件过盈配合于所述导向柱的外壁面以及所述阻尼孔的孔壁面之间。In some embodiments, the elastic member includes a soft structural member, the box body includes a guide column disposed in the damping hole, and the soft structural member is interference fit between the outer wall surface of the guide column and the hole wall surface of the damping hole.

在一些实施例中,所述软质结构件采用硅胶材料制成。In some embodiments, the soft structural component is made of silicone material.

在一些实施例中,所述储存盘具有第一限位面,所述盒体具有与所述第一限位面在所述储存卷轴的轴向上相对的第二限位面,所述弹性件被限位于所述第一限位面和所述第二限位面之间。In some embodiments, the storage disk has a first limiting surface, the box body has a second limiting surface opposite to the first limiting surface in the axial direction of the storage reel, and the elastic member is limited between the first limiting surface and the second limiting surface.

在一些实施例中,所述储存盘还包括分别设置于所述储存卷轴两端的储存底盘和储存盘盖,In some embodiments, the storage tray further comprises a storage bottom tray and a storage tray cover respectively disposed at two ends of the storage reel.

所述储存底盘或所述储存盘盖具有第一摩擦面,所述盒体具有第二摩擦面,The storage bottom plate or the storage plate cover has a first friction surface, and the box body has a second friction surface.

所述弹性件以弹性力推抵所述储存底盘或所述储存盘盖,使所述第一摩擦面与所述第二摩擦面紧密接触。The elastic member pushes against the storage bottom tray or the storage tray cover with elastic force, so that the first friction surface is in close contact with the second friction surface.

在一些实施例中,所述弹性件包括弹簧或软质结构件。In some embodiments, the elastic member includes a spring or a soft structural member.

在一些实施例中,所述第一摩擦面和/或所述第二摩擦面包括圆环面,In some embodiments, the first friction surface and/or the second friction surface comprises a toroidal surface.

所述圆环面的中心线与所述储存盘的转动中心线重合。The center line of the annular surface coincides with the rotation center line of the storage disk.

进一步地,本发明实施例还提供一种气溶胶生成系统,包括加热器以及如上述所述的气溶胶生成制品,Furthermore, an embodiment of the present invention also provides an aerosol generating system, comprising a heater and the aerosol generating article as described above,

所述加热器设置于所述介质输送带从所述储存盘至所述收纳盘的路径之间。The heater is disposed between the paths of the medium conveying belt from the storage tray to the receiving tray.

实施本发明实施例至少具有以下有益效果:介质输送带在运动时,因受到储存盘的摩擦阻尼,从而会处于一种绷紧状态,使介质输送带在运动过程中达到预紧的效果,从而能够很好地保持与加热器的贴合。The implementation of the embodiment of the present invention has at least the following beneficial effects: when the medium conveyor belt moves, it is in a tensioned state due to the friction damping of the storage disk, so that the medium conveyor belt can achieve a pre-tightening effect during the movement, thereby being able to maintain a good fit with the heater.

第五方面,本发明实施例提供一种气溶胶生成制品,包括:In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating product, comprising:

盒体;Box body;

可转动地设置于所述盒体的储存盘和收纳盘;A storage tray and a receiving tray rotatably disposed on the box body;

介质输送带,被配置为从所述储存盘放卷,沿一路径移动后被所述收纳盘收卷;以及a medium conveyor belt configured to be unwound from the storage tray and rewound by the receiving tray after moving along a path; and

阻尼组件;Damping components;

所述阻尼组件包括:The damping assembly comprises:

第一阻尼件,与所述储存盘相对周向固定连接;A first damping member is fixedly connected to the storage disk in a circumferential direction relative to the storage disk;

第二阻尼件,与所述盒体可转动连接;以及A second damping member, rotatably connected to the box body; and

扭力弹性元件,分别与所述第一阻尼件和所述第二阻尼件连接,为所述第一阻尼件提供与所述储存盘的放卷转动方向相反的第一阻尼扭力。The torsion elastic element is connected to the first damping member and the second damping member respectively, and provides the first damping member with a first damping torsion opposite to the unwinding rotation direction of the storage disk.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成制品还包括:In some embodiments, the aerosol-generating article further comprises:

阻尼介质,设置于所述第二阻尼件与所述盒体之间,用于在所述第二阻尼件相对于所述盒体转动时,为所述第二阻尼件提供与所述储存盘的放卷转动方向相反的第二阻尼扭力;a damping medium, disposed between the second damping member and the box body, for providing the second damping member with a second damping torque opposite to the unwinding rotation direction of the storage disk when the second damping member rotates relative to the box body;

所述第一阻尼扭力小于等于所述第二阻尼扭力。The first damping torque is less than or equal to the second damping torque.

在一些实施例中,所述阻尼介质包括阻尼油脂。In some embodiments, the damping medium includes damping grease.

在一些实施例中,所述第一阻尼件相对于所述第二阻尼件具有第一位置和第二位置,In some embodiments, the first damping member has a first position and a second position relative to the second damping member.

所述第一阻尼件在所述第一位置时,所述扭力弹性元件对所述第一阻尼件产生最大第一阻尼扭力;When the first damping member is at the first position, the torsion elastic element generates a maximum first damping torsion on the first damping member;

所述第一阻尼件在所述第二位置时,所述扭力弹性元件对所述第一阻尼件产生最小第一阻尼扭力,When the first damping member is in the second position, the torsion elastic element generates a minimum first damping torsion on the first damping member.

所述最小第一阻尼扭力小于所述最大第一阻尼扭力。The minimum first damping torque is smaller than the maximum first damping torque.

在一些实施例中,所述第二阻尼件包括在周向上相对设置的第一限位面和第二限位面;In some embodiments, the second damping member includes a first limiting surface and a second limiting surface that are arranged opposite to each other in the circumferential direction;

所述第一阻尼件包括凸台,所述凸台能够在所述第一限位面和所述第二限位面之间转动;The first damping member comprises a boss, and the boss can rotate between the first limiting surface and the second limiting surface;

所述第一阻尼件在所述第一位置时,所述凸台抵靠于所述第一限位面;When the first damping member is at the first position, the boss abuts against the first limiting surface;

所述第一阻尼件在所述第二位置时,所述凸台抵靠于所述第二限位面。When the first damping member is at the second position, the boss abuts against the second limiting surface.

在一些实施例中,所述第一限位面和第二限位面在所述第二阻尼件的周向上的角度范围为70°~150°。In some embodiments, an angle range between the first limiting surface and the second limiting surface in the circumferential direction of the second damping member is 70° to 150°.

在一些实施例中,所述扭力弹性元件包括扭力弹簧。In some embodiments, the torsion elastic element includes a torsion spring.

在一些实施例中,所述储存盘包括储存卷轴,所述储存卷轴上形成有插孔,所述阻尼组件至少部分收容于所述插孔。In some embodiments, the storage disk includes a storage reel having an insertion hole formed thereon, and the damping assembly is at least partially received in the insertion hole.

在一些实施例中,所述第一阻尼件内形成有阻尼腔,所述第二阻尼件至少部分设置于所述阻尼腔中,所述扭力弹性元件设置于所述阻尼腔中并套设于所述第二阻尼件上。In some embodiments, a damping cavity is formed in the first damping member, the second damping member is at least partially disposed in the damping cavity, and the torsion elastic element is disposed in the damping cavity and sleeved on the second damping member.

进一步地,本发明实施例还提供一种气溶胶生成系统,包括加热器以及如上述所述的气溶胶生成制品,Furthermore, an embodiment of the present invention also provides an aerosol generating system, comprising a heater and the aerosol generating article as described above,

所述加热器设置于所述介质输送带从所述储存盘至所述收纳盘的路径之间。The heater is disposed between the paths of the medium conveying belt from the storage tray to the receiving tray.

实施本发明实施例至少具有以下有益效果:扭力弹性元件能够通过第一阻尼件持续为储存盘提供阻尼扭力,使得介质输送带能够持续处于预紧状态。The implementation of the embodiment of the present invention has at least the following beneficial effects: the torsion elastic element can continuously provide damping torsion for the storage disk through the first damping member, so that the medium conveying belt can be continuously in a pre-tightened state.

第六方面,本发明实施例提供一种气溶胶生成装置,用于加热介质输送带,包括:In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides an aerosol generating device for heating a medium conveyor belt, comprising:

加热器;Heater;

驱动齿轮;Drive gear;

放卷齿轮,与所述驱动齿轮啮合,用于对所述介质输送带经过所述加热器提供动力;以及an unwinding gear meshing with the driving gear and used to provide power for the media conveying belt to pass through the heater; and

收纳齿轮,用于对所述介质输送带的收卷提供动力,且被配置为根据所述驱动齿轮的转动方向与所述驱动齿轮啮合或脱离啮合。The receiving gear is used to provide power for winding up the medium conveying belt and is configured to be engaged with or disengaged from the driving gear according to the rotation direction of the driving gear.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成装置包括转接齿轮,所述驱动齿轮通过所述转接齿轮与所述收纳齿轮啮合或脱离啮合。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device comprises a transfer gear, and the driving gear is engaged with or disengaged from the storage gear via the transfer gear.

在一些实施例中,所述转接齿轮具有与所述收纳齿轮分离的第一位置以及与所述收纳齿轮啮合的第二位置;In some embodiments, the transfer gear has a first position separated from the storage gear and a second position engaged with the storage gear;

所述驱动齿轮沿第一方向转动时,所述驱动齿轮能够推动所述转接齿轮移动并保持在所述第一位置;When the driving gear rotates in the first direction, the driving gear can push the transfer gear to move and remain in the first position;

所述驱动齿轮沿与所述第一方向相反的第二方向转动时,所述驱动齿轮能够推动所述转接齿轮移动并保持在所述第二位置。When the driving gear rotates in a second direction opposite to the first direction, the driving gear can push the transfer gear to move and remain in the second position.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成装置包括滑槽,所述转接齿轮可滑动地设置于所述滑槽。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device comprises a slide groove, and the transfer gear is slidably disposed in the slide groove.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成装置还包括与所述驱动齿轮连接的驱动组件。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device further comprises a drive assembly connected to the drive gear.

在一些实施例中,所述驱动组件包括减速箱。In some embodiments, the drive assembly includes a reduction gearbox.

进一步地,本发明实施例还提供一种气溶胶生成系统,包括气溶胶生成制品以及如上述所述的气溶胶生成装置;Furthermore, an embodiment of the present invention also provides an aerosol generating system, including an aerosol generating article and the aerosol generating device as described above;

所述气溶胶生成制品包括介质输送带。The aerosol-generating article includes a media conveyor belt.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成制品包括储存盘和收纳盘,In some embodiments, the aerosol-generating article comprises a storage tray and a receiving tray,

所述介质输送带未加热的部分缠绕在所述储存盘上,The unheated portion of the media conveyor belt is wound around the storage disk,

所述介质输送带已被加热的部分缠绕在所述收纳盘上。The heated portion of the media conveyor belt is wound around the receiving tray.

在一些实施例中,所述收纳盘与所述收纳齿轮连接。In some embodiments, the storage tray is connected to the storage gear.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成制品还包括与所述放卷齿轮连接的驱动转轴。In some embodiments, the aerosol-generating article further comprises a drive shaft connected to the unwinding gear.

在一些实施例中,所述驱动转轴能够在第一转动位置和第二转动位置之间来回摆动,In some embodiments, the drive shaft can swing back and forth between a first rotational position and a second rotational position.

所述驱动转轴从所述第一转动位置向所述第二转动位置转动的过程中,能够推动所述介质输送带经过所述加热器;During the process of the driving shaft rotating from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the medium conveying belt can be pushed to pass through the heater;

所述驱动转轴从所述第二转动位置向所述第一转动位置转动的过程中,所述驱动转轴放卷缠绕在所述驱动转轴上的所述介质输送带。During the process of the driving shaft rotating from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, the driving shaft unwinds the medium conveying belt wound on the driving shaft.

在一些实施例中,所述驱动转轴上形成有穿口,从所述储存盘放卷的所述介质输送带穿过所述穿口后被所述收纳盘收卷。In some embodiments, a through hole is formed on the driving shaft, and the medium conveying belt unwound from the storage tray passes through the through hole and is then rewound by the receiving tray.

在一些实施例中,所述驱动转轴包括间隔设置的两个转轴,所述两个转轴之间的间隔形成所述穿口。In some embodiments, the driving shaft includes two shafts spaced apart from each other, and the space between the two shafts forms the through opening.

在一些实施例中,所述驱动转轴的转动中心线与其中一个所述转轴的中轴线重合。In some embodiments, the rotation centerline of the driving shaft coincides with the central axis of one of the shafts.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成制品可拆卸地收容于所述气溶胶生成系统中。In some embodiments, the aerosol-generating article is removably housed in the aerosol-generating system.

在一些实施例中,所述气溶胶生成制品包括雾化腔,所述介质输送带在所述雾化腔中进行雾化,In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article comprises an atomizing chamber, and the media conveyor belt is atomized in the atomizing chamber.

所述驱动转轴设置于所述雾化腔和所述收纳盘之间。The driving shaft is arranged between the atomizing chamber and the receiving tray.

实施本发明实施例至少具有以下有益效果:本发明通过驱动齿轮的转动方向实现介质输送带的行进和收纳,可保证介质输送带的行进和收纳的可靠性。The implementation of the embodiments of the present invention has at least the following beneficial effects: the present invention realizes the advancement and storage of the medium conveyor belt by the rotation direction of the driving gear, and can ensure the reliability of the advancement and storage of the medium conveyor belt.

第七方面,本发明实施例提供一种传输装置,用于传输介质输送带,所述传输装置包括:In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a transmission device for transmitting a medium conveyor belt, the transmission device comprising:

锁定组件,具有与介质输送带相对固定的锁定状态以及与介质输送带相对分离或松接触的解锁状态;以及A locking assembly having a locked state in which the locking assembly is relatively fixed to the medium conveying belt and an unlocked state in which the locking assembly is relatively separated from or in loose contact with the medium conveying belt; and

驱动组件,与所述锁定组件连接,以驱动所述锁定组件沿第一方向移动。A driving assembly is connected to the locking assembly to drive the locking assembly to move along a first direction.

在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件包括至少一个夹持件,所述至少一个夹持件能够沿着与所述第一方向相交的第二方向来回移动,以令所述锁定组件在所述锁定状态和所述解锁状态之间来回切换。 In some embodiments, the locking assembly includes at least one clamping member, and the at least one clamping member is capable of moving back and forth along a second direction intersecting with the first direction to enable the locking assembly to switch back and forth between the locked state and the unlocked state.

在一些实施例中,所述第二方向与所述第一方向相垂直。In some embodiments, the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.

在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件包括两个夹持件,所述两个夹持件可沿所述第二方向相靠近和相远离。In some embodiments, the locking assembly includes two clamping members, and the two clamping members can approach and move away from each other along the second direction.

在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件还包括至少一个推动件,所述至少一个推动件与所述驱动组件相连接,用于驱动所述至少一个夹持件移动至所述锁定状态并保持在所述锁定状态。In some embodiments, the locking assembly further comprises at least one pushing member, wherein the at least one pushing member is connected to the driving assembly and is used to drive the at least one clamping member to move to the locking state and maintain the locking state.

在一些实施例中,所述至少一个推动件被配置为沿所述第一方向移动,以驱动所述至少一个夹持件沿所述第二方向移动至所述锁定状态,并在所述至少一个夹持件处于所述锁定状态时,带动所述锁定组件沿所述第一方向移动。In some embodiments, the at least one pushing member is configured to move along the first direction to drive the at least one clamping member to move along the second direction to the locking state, and when the at least one clamping member is in the locking state, drive the locking assembly to move along the first direction.

在一些实施例中,所述至少一个夹持件包括至少一个第一配合斜面,所述至少一个推动件包括至少一个第二配合斜面,所述至少一个第二配合斜面推抵所述至少一个第一配合斜面,使所述至少一个夹持件沿所述第二方向移动至所述锁定状态。In some embodiments, the at least one clamping member includes at least one first mating bevel, and the at least one pushing member includes at least one second mating bevel, and the at least one second mating bevel pushes against the at least one first mating bevel to move the at least one clamping member along the second direction to the locking state.

在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件还包括至少一个弹性件,所述至少一个弹性件与所述至少一个夹持件连接,用于驱动所述至少一个夹持件移动至所述解锁状态并保持在所述解锁状态。In some embodiments, the locking assembly further comprises at least one elastic member, wherein the at least one elastic member is connected to the at least one clamping member and is used to drive the at least one clamping member to move to the unlocked state and maintain the unlocked state.

在一些实施例中,所述锁定组件还包括第一安装座,所述至少一个夹持件可沿所述第二方向来回移动地设置于所述第一安装座上;所述推动件可沿所述第一方向来回移动地设置于所述第一安装座上,并能够带动所述第一安装座沿所述第一方向来回移动。In some embodiments, the locking assembly also includes a first mounting seat, and the at least one clamping member is disposed on the first mounting seat so as to be movable back and forth along the second direction; the pushing member is disposed on the first mounting seat so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction, and can drive the first mounting seat to move back and forth along the first direction.

在一些实施例中,所述传输装置还包括第二安装座,所述第一安装座可沿所述第一方向来回移动地设置于所述第二安装座上;In some embodiments, the transmission device further comprises a second mounting seat, and the first mounting seat is disposed on the second mounting seat so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction;

所述第一安装座与所述第二安装座之间设有阻尼装置,用于在所述第一安装座相对于所述第二安装座移动时为所述第一安装座提供阻尼力。A damping device is provided between the first mounting seat and the second mounting seat, and is used to provide a damping force for the first mounting seat when the first mounting seat moves relative to the second mounting seat.

本发明还构造一种气溶胶生成系统,该气溶胶生成系统包括上述任一项所述的传输装置。The present invention also constructs an aerosol generating system, which includes any of the transmission devices described above.

实施本发明实施例的气溶胶生成系统及其传输装置具有以下有益效果:The aerosol generating system and the transmission device thereof according to the embodiment of the present invention have the following beneficial effects:

该锁定组件处于锁定状态时,可与介质输送带相对固定,从而可带动介质输送带移动;该锁定组件处于解锁状态时,能够回复到初始位置,如此往复,实现对带状气溶胶生成基质的持续输送。When the locking assembly is in a locked state, it can be relatively fixed to the medium conveyor belt, thereby driving the medium conveyor belt to move; when the locking assembly is in an unlocked state, it can return to the initial position, and so on, to achieve continuous transportation of the strip aerosol generating matrix.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

下面将结合附图及实施例对本发明作进一步说明,附图中:The present invention will be further described below with reference to the accompanying drawings and embodiments, in which:

图1是本发明第一实施例中气溶胶生成系统的结构示意图;FIG1 is a schematic structural diagram of an aerosol generating system in a first embodiment of the present invention;

图2是图1所示气溶胶生成系统的剖视图;FIG2 is a cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG1 ;

图3是图1所示气溶胶生成系统的局部结构分解示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG1 ;

图4是图3所示气溶胶生成系统中气溶胶生成制品的结构示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an aerosol generating article in the aerosol generating system shown in FIG3 ;

图5是图4所示气溶胶生成制品的局部结构分解示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural breakdown of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG4 ;

图6是图5所示气溶胶生成制品的局部结构示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG5 ;

图7是图6所示气溶胶生成制品中介质输送带的结构示意图;FIG7 is a schematic structural diagram of a medium conveyor belt in the aerosol generating product shown in FIG6;

图8是图6所示气溶胶生成制品中雾化座的结构示意图;FIG8 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the atomizer seat in the aerosol generating product shown in FIG6;

图9是图3所示气溶胶生成系统中气溶胶生成装置的结构示意图;FIG9 is a schematic structural diagram of an aerosol generating device in the aerosol generating system shown in FIG3 ;

图10是图9所示气溶胶生成系统中气溶胶生成装置的局部结构分解示意图;FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of an aerosol generating device in the aerosol generating system shown in FIG9 ;

图11是本发明第二实施例中气溶胶生成系统的立体结构示意图;FIG11 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an aerosol generating system in a second embodiment of the present invention;

图12是图11所示气溶胶生成系统的分解结构示意图;FIG12 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG11;

图13是图12所示气溶胶生成系统的纵向剖面示意图;FIG13 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG12;

图14是图11所示气溶胶生成系统隐藏盖体和雾化座后的立体结构示意图;FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG11 after the cover body and the atomizing seat are hidden;

图15是图12中气溶胶生成制品的分解结构示意图;FIG15 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating article in FIG12;

图16是图12中气溶胶生成制品的正视图;FIG16 is a front view of the aerosol generating article of FIG12;

图17是图16所示气溶胶生成制品的A-A剖面结构示意图;FIG17 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG16 taken along line A-A;

图18是本发明第三实施例中气溶胶生成系统的立体结构示意图;FIG18 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an aerosol generating system in a third embodiment of the present invention;

图19是图18所示气溶胶生成系统的分解结构示意图;FIG19 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG18;

图20是图18所示气溶胶生成系统的纵向剖面示意图;FIG20 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG18;

图21是图19中气溶胶生成装置的分解结构示意图;FIG21 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating device in FIG19;

图22是图19中气溶胶生成制品的分解结构示意图;FIG22 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating article in FIG19;

图23是图19中气溶胶生成制品的纵向剖面示意图;FIG23 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating article in FIG19;

图24是图19中气溶胶生成制品的另一角度的纵向剖面示意图;FIG24 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating article in FIG19 at another angle;

图25是图24所示气溶胶生成制品中部分结构的纵向剖面示意图;FIG25 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a portion of the structure of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG24;

图26是本发明一些变更实施例中气溶胶生成制品中部分结构的纵向剖面示意图;FIG26 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a portion of the structure of an aerosol generating article according to some modified embodiments of the present invention;

图27示出了本发明另一些变更实施例中气溶胶生成制品中部分结构的纵向剖面示意图;FIG27 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a portion of the structure of an aerosol generating article in some other modified embodiments of the present invention;

图28是本发明第四实施例中气溶胶生成系统的立体结构示意图;FIG28 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an aerosol generating system in a fourth embodiment of the present invention;

图29是图28所示气溶胶生成系统的分解结构示意图;FIG29 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG28;

图30是图28所示气溶胶生成系统的纵向剖面示意图;FIG30 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG28;

图31是图29中气溶胶生成装置的分解结构示意图;FIG31 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating device in FIG29;

图32是图29中气溶胶生成制品的分解结构示意图;FIG32 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating article in FIG29;

图33是图29中气溶胶生成制品的纵向剖面示意图;FIG33 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating article of FIG29;

图34是图29中气溶胶生成制品的另一角度的纵向剖面示意图;FIG34 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating article in FIG29 at another angle;

图35是图34所示气溶胶生成制品中部分结构的纵向剖面示意图;FIG35 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a portion of the structure of the aerosol generating article shown in FIG34;

图36是图35中阻尼组件的分解结构示意图;FIG36 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the damping assembly in FIG35;

图37是本发明第五实施例中气溶胶生成系统的立体结构示意图;FIG37 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an aerosol generating system in a fifth embodiment of the present invention;

图38是图37所示气溶胶生成系统的分解结构示意图;FIG38 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG37;

图39是图38所示气溶胶生成系统的纵向剖面示意图(其中,驱动转轴位于第一转动位置);FIG39 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG38 (wherein the drive shaft is located in a first rotation position);

图40是图38所示气溶胶生成系统的纵向剖面示意图(其中,驱动转轴位于第二转动位置);FIG40 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the aerosol generating system shown in FIG38 (wherein the drive shaft is located in a second rotation position);

图41是图38中气溶胶生成制品的分解结构示意图;FIG41 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating article in FIG38;

图42是图41中驱动转轴的立体结构示意图;FIG42 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of the driving shaft in FIG41;

图43是图38中气溶胶生成装置的分解结构示意图;FIG43 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the aerosol generating device in FIG38;

图44是图43中传动组件的结构示意图(其中,转接齿轮位于第一位置);FIG44 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the transmission assembly in FIG43 (wherein the transfer gear is located in the first position);

图45是图43中传动组件的结构示意图(其中,转接齿轮位于第二位置);FIG45 is a schematic structural diagram of the transmission assembly in FIG43 (wherein the transfer gear is located at the second position);

图46是本发明第六实施例中的气溶胶生成系统的结构示意图;FIG46 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an aerosol generating system in a sixth embodiment of the present invention;

图47是图46所示气溶胶生成系统中的传输装置的结构示意图;FIG47 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a transmission device in the aerosol generating system shown in FIG46;

图48是图47所示传输装置的剖面图;Fig. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device shown in Fig. 47;

图49是图47所示传输装置的分解结构示意图;FIG49 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the transmission device shown in FIG47;

图50是图47所示传输装置的分解结构剖面图;FIG50 is an exploded structural cross-sectional view of the transmission device shown in FIG47;

图51是图47所示传输装置的导向结构的结构示意图;FIG51 is a schematic structural diagram of the guide structure of the transmission device shown in FIG47;

图52是本发明一些实施例中的锁定组件在解锁状态下的局部结构示意图;FIG52 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a locking assembly in an unlocked state in some embodiments of the present invention;

图53是图52所示锁定组件在锁定状态下的局部结构示意图;FIG53 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the locking assembly shown in FIG52 in a locked state;

图54a至图54c是本发明一些实施例中的锁定组件在沿第一方向的一个方向移动的状态变化示意图;54a to 54c are schematic diagrams showing state changes of the locking assembly in some embodiments of the present invention when it moves in one direction along the first direction;

图55a至图55c是图54a至图54c所示的锁定组件在沿第一方向的另一个方向移动的状态变化示意图;55a to 55c are schematic diagrams showing state changes of the locking assembly shown in FIGS. 54a to 54c when it moves in another direction along the first direction;

图56是本发明一些实施例中的施力部对夹持件的受力分析示意图;FIG56 is a schematic diagram of force analysis of a force-applying portion on a clamping member in some embodiments of the present invention;

图57是本发明另一些实施例中的锁定组件在解锁状态下的局部结构示意图;FIG57 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a locking assembly in an unlocked state in other embodiments of the present invention;

图58是图57所示锁定组件在锁定状态下的局部结构示意图。Figure 58 is a schematic diagram of the partial structure of the locking assembly shown in Figure 57 in the locked state.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

为了对本发明的技术特征、目的和效果有更加清楚的理解,现对照附图详细说明本发明的具体实施方式。以下描述中,需要理解的是, “上”、“下”、“左”、“右”、“纵”、“横”、 “顶”、“底”、“内”、“外”、等指示的方位或位置关系为基于附图所示的方位或位置关系、以特定的方位构造和操作,仅是为了便于描述本技术方案,而不是指示所指的装置或元件必须具有特定的方位,因此不能理解为对本发明的限制。In order to have a clearer understanding of the technical features, purposes and effects of the present invention, the specific embodiments of the present invention are now described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the following description, it should be understood that the directions or positional relationships indicated by "upper", "lower", "left", "right", "vertical", "horizontal", "top", "bottom", "inside", "outside", etc. are based on the directions or positional relationships shown in the accompanying drawings, and are constructed and operated in a specific direction. They are only for the convenience of describing the technical solution, and do not indicate that the device or element referred to must have a specific direction, and therefore cannot be understood as a limitation to the present invention.

还需要说明的是,除非另有明确的规定和限定,“安装”、“相连”、“连接”、“固定”、“设置”等术语应做广义理解,例如,可以是固定连接,也可以是可拆卸连接,或成一体;可以是机械连接,也可以是电连接;可以是直接相连,也可以通过中间媒介间接相连,可以是两个元件内部的连通或两个元件的相互作用关系。当一个元件被称为在另一元件“上”或“下”时,该元件能够“直接地”或“间接地”位于另一元件之上,或者也可能存在一个或更多个居间元件。术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”等仅是为了便于描述本技术方案,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量,由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”、“第三”等的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。对于本领域的普通技术人员而言,可以根据具体情况理解上述术语在本发明中的具体含义。It should also be noted that, unless otherwise clearly specified and limited, the terms such as "installed", "connected", "connected", "fixed", "set" and the like should be understood in a broad sense, for example, it can be a fixed connection, a detachable connection, or an integral one; it can be a mechanical connection or an electrical connection; it can be directly connected or indirectly connected through an intermediate medium, it can be the internal connection of two elements or the interaction relationship between two elements. When an element is referred to as being "on" or "under" another element, the element can be "directly" or "indirectly" located on the other element, or there may be one or more intermediate elements. The terms "first", "second", "third", etc. are only for the convenience of describing the present technical solution, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Therefore, the features defined as "first", "second", "third", etc. can explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. For those of ordinary skill in the art, the specific meanings of the above terms in the present invention can be understood according to the specific circumstances.

以下描述中,为了说明而不是为了限定,提出了诸如特定系统结构、技术之类的具体细节,以便透彻理解本发明实施例。然而,本领域的技术人员应当清楚,在没有这些具体细节的其它实施例中也可以实现本发明。在其它情况中,省略对众所周知的系统、装置、电路以及方法的详细说明,以免不必要的细节妨碍本发明的描述。In the following description, specific details such as specific system structures, technologies, etc. are provided for the purpose of illustration rather than limitation, so as to provide a thorough understanding of the embodiments of the present invention. However, it should be clear to those skilled in the art that the present invention may be implemented in other embodiments without these specific details. In other cases, detailed descriptions of well-known systems, devices, circuits, and methods are omitted to prevent unnecessary details from obstructing the description of the present invention.

图1示出了本发明第一实施例中的气溶胶生成系统。该气溶胶生成系统100可产生气溶胶供用户抽吸。该气溶胶生成系统100产生的气溶胶具有口感佳、用户体验感高的优点。Fig. 1 shows an aerosol generating system in a first embodiment of the present invention. The aerosol generating system 100 can generate aerosol for a user to inhale. The aerosol generated by the aerosol generating system 100 has the advantages of good taste and high user experience.

如图2至图5所示,该气溶胶生成系统100包括气溶胶生成制品20以及气溶胶生成装置10;该气溶胶生成制品20可安装于该气溶胶生成装置10上,用于在加热时产生气溶胶。该气溶胶生成制品20可与气溶胶生成装置10可拆卸装配,进而便于气溶胶生成制品20的更换。该气溶胶生成装置10可通过加热气溶胶生成制品20中的介质输送带22使其雾化产生气溶胶并输出。As shown in FIGS. 2 to 5 , the aerosol generating system 100 includes an aerosol generating article 20 and an aerosol generating device 10; the aerosol generating article 20 can be mounted on the aerosol generating device 10 to generate aerosol when heated. The aerosol generating article 20 can be detachably assembled with the aerosol generating device 10, thereby facilitating the replacement of the aerosol generating article 20. The aerosol generating device 10 can generate aerosol by heating the medium conveying belt 22 in the aerosol generating article 20 to atomize and output the aerosol.

在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成制品20包括盒体21以及介质输送带22。该盒体21用于收容介质输送带22。该介质输送带22可在加热状态下雾化产生气溶胶。可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,盒体21可以省去。该介质输送带22可直接安装于该气溶胶生成装置10中。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating product 20 includes a box body 21 and a medium conveyor belt 22. The box body 21 is used to accommodate the medium conveyor belt 22. The medium conveyor belt 22 can be atomized to generate aerosol in a heated state. It can be understood that in some other embodiments, the box body 21 can be omitted. The medium conveyor belt 22 can be directly installed in the aerosol generating device 10.

在一些实施例中,该盒体21可以为透明结构,比如可以为透明的塑料盒。当然,可以理解地,在一些实施例中,该盒体21不限于为透明结构,可以为非透明结构,比如非透明塑料盒或者金属盒。在一些实施例中,该盒体21可包括盒盖212以及盒座211;该盒盖212以及盒座211的形状以及尺寸相当,在一些实施例中,该盒盖212以及盒座211大致呈长方体状。该盒盖212以及盒座211可不限于呈长方体状,比如柱状正方体状或不规则形状等。该盒盖212以及盒座211内侧均形成有容腔210,且均为敞口结构,可通过将盒盖212具有开口的一侧与盒座211具有开口的一侧拼合。该盒盖212以及盒座211之间可通过设置连接结构实现连接固定。该连接结构可以为螺接组件、卡接组件或者其他。在一些实施例中,该连接结构也可以省去,盒盖212以及盒座211可采用常规的超声技术连接。In some embodiments, the box body 21 can be a transparent structure, such as a transparent plastic box. Of course, it can be understood that in some embodiments, the box body 21 is not limited to a transparent structure, and can be a non-transparent structure, such as a non-transparent plastic box or a metal box. In some embodiments, the box body 21 may include a box cover 212 and a box seat 211; the shape and size of the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are comparable. In some embodiments, the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are roughly rectangular. The box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are not limited to being rectangular, such as a columnar cube or an irregular shape. The box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are both formed with a cavity 210 on the inner side, and are both open structures, which can be spliced by combining the side of the box cover 212 with an opening and the side of the box seat 211 with an opening. The box cover 212 and the box seat 211 can be connected and fixed by setting a connecting structure. The connecting structure can be a screw assembly, a clamping assembly or other. In some embodiments, the connection structure may be omitted, and the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 may be connected using conventional ultrasonic technology.

在一些实施例中,该容腔210中设置有呈S形的挡板217,该挡板217可将容腔210分隔为第一收容空间2140以及第二收容空间2150。该第一收容空间2140可用于收容第一收容结构230;第二收容空间2150用于收纳第二收容结构240。In some embodiments, an S-shaped baffle 217 is disposed in the cavity 210, and the baffle 217 can separate the cavity 210 into a first receiving space 2140 and a second receiving space 2150. The first receiving space 2140 can be used to receive the first receiving structure 230; the second receiving space 2150 is used to receive the second receiving structure 240.

如图5至图7所示,在一些实施例中,该介质输送带22整体呈带状,可卷绕设置,并可移动设置。在一些实施例中,介质输送带22包括基带221以及基质层222。该基带221用于承载基质层222。该基质层222形成于基带221上,具体地,该基质层222可通过在基带221上涂覆雾化介质形成。该雾化介质可以为液态并可固化的雾化介质,也可以为膏状的雾化介质或者固态雾化介质。在其他一些实施例中,该基质层222不限于通过涂覆雾化介质形成,比如也可以为在基带221上压合或粘贴雾化介质等方式形成。As shown in Figures 5 to 7, in some embodiments, the medium conveyor belt 22 is in a belt shape as a whole, can be wound and arranged, and can be movably arranged. In some embodiments, the medium conveyor belt 22 includes a base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222. The base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222. The matrix layer 222 is formed on the base belt 221, and specifically, the matrix layer 222 can be formed by coating an atomized medium on the base belt 221. The atomized medium can be a liquid and curable atomized medium, or a paste-like atomized medium or a solid atomized medium. In some other embodiments, the matrix layer 222 is not limited to being formed by coating an atomized medium, and can also be formed by laminating or pasting an atomized medium on the base belt 221.

在一些实施例中,该基带221纵长设置,且具有相背设置的第一表面2211以及第二表面2212,该第一表面2211以及第二表面2212均可以由基带221长边和宽边所界定出来的表面。其中第一表面2211可承载基质层222。在一些实施例中,基带221可以为易导热的金属片,比如铝箔或者铜箔,当然,在其他一些实施例中,基带221不限于为金属片,也可以为金属网,该金属网可通过金属丝编织形成,也可以在金属片上设置多个通孔形成。In some embodiments, the base tape 221 is arranged in a longitudinal direction and has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 arranged opposite to each other. The first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 can be surfaces defined by the long side and the wide side of the base tape 221. The first surface 2211 can carry the matrix layer 222. In some embodiments, the base tape 221 can be a metal sheet that is easy to conduct heat, such as aluminum foil or copper foil. Of course, in some other embodiments, the base tape 221 is not limited to a metal sheet, but can also be a metal mesh, which can be formed by weaving metal wires or by setting a plurality of through holes on the metal sheet.

具体地,该基质层222可形成于基带221的整个第一表面2211,可通过沿基带221的长度方向均匀涂覆雾化介质形成。在一些实施例中,该基质层222在基带221任意位置的厚度可相同。当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,基质层222在基带221存在至少两个位置的厚度可不同。在其他一些实施例中,该基带221的第一表面2211可分段涂覆雾化介质形成多段基质层222。该多段基质层222可等距分布,且在基带221的长度方向延伸的长度可相同,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,至少两段基质层222在基带221的长度方向延伸的长度不同。Specifically, the matrix layer 222 may be formed on the entire first surface 2211 of the base tape 221, and may be formed by uniformly coating the atomized medium along the length direction of the base tape 221. In some embodiments, the thickness of the matrix layer 222 at any position of the base tape 221 may be the same. Of course, it is understood that in some other embodiments, the thickness of the matrix layer 222 at at least two positions of the base tape 221 may be different. In some other embodiments, the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221 may be coated with the atomized medium in sections to form multiple sections of the matrix layer 222. The multiple sections of the matrix layer 222 may be equidistantly distributed, and the lengths extending in the length direction of the base tape 221 may be the same. It is understood that in some other embodiments, the lengths extending in the length direction of the base tape 221 of at least two sections of the matrix layer 222 are different.

在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成制品20还包括第一收容结构230。该第一收容结构230设置于第一收容空间2140中,可用于收容待加热的介质输送带22。第一收容结构230可安装于盒盖212以及盒座211之间,且与盒盖212以及盒座211连接。在其他一些实施例中,该第一收容结构230不限于安装于盒体21中,也可直接安装于气溶胶生成装置10中。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating product 20 further includes a first receiving structure 230. The first receiving structure 230 is disposed in the first receiving space 2140 and can be used to receive the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated. The first receiving structure 230 can be installed between the box cover 212 and the box seat 211, and connected to the box cover 212 and the box seat 211. In some other embodiments, the first receiving structure 230 is not limited to being installed in the box body 21, and can also be directly installed in the aerosol generating device 10.

在一些实施例中,该第一收容结构230可以为储存盘23,待加热的介质输送带22可卷绕于储存盘23上,该储存盘23可通过转动带动待加热的介质输送带22传送。在一些实施例中,储存盘23包括储存盘盖232、储存底盘231。该储存盘盖232以及储存底盘231可大致呈圆形,且储存盘盖232以及储存底盘231的径向尺寸可大致相当。该储存盘盖232以及储存底盘231之间通过一中空的储存卷轴连接,该储存卷轴可形成于储存盘盖232和/或储存底盘231中轴处,也可独立设置,且其两端分别与储存盘盖232以及储存底盘231连接。储存卷轴的径向尺寸小于储存盘盖232以及储存底盘231的径向尺寸,待加热的介质输送带22可卷绕于该储存卷轴上。可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,储存盘盖232以及储存底盘231可不限于呈圆形,也可以为方形。该储存盘盖232以及储存底盘231可用于阻挡介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。在一些实施例中,该储存盘盖232以及储存底盘231也可以省去。在一些实施例中该储存盘23与盒盖212和/或盒座211可转动连接,可通过转动带动待加热的介质输送带22收放,进而实现收纳和传送待加热的介质输送带22。In some embodiments, the first receiving structure 230 may be a storage disk 23, and the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated may be wound on the storage disk 23, and the storage disk 23 may drive the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated to be conveyed by rotating. In some embodiments, the storage disk 23 includes a storage disk cover 232 and a storage chassis 231. The storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may be substantially circular, and the radial dimensions of the storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may be substantially equal. The storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 are connected by a hollow storage reel, and the storage reel may be formed at the central axis of the storage disk cover 232 and/or the storage chassis 231, or may be independently provided, and its two ends are respectively connected to the storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231. The radial dimension of the storage reel is smaller than the radial dimension of the storage disk cover 232 and the storage chassis 231, and the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated may be wound on the storage reel. It is understandable that in some other embodiments, the storage disc cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may not be limited to a circular shape, but may also be a square shape. The storage disc cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may be used to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process. In some embodiments, the storage disc cover 232 and the storage chassis 231 may also be omitted. In some embodiments, the storage disc 23 is rotatably connected to the box cover 212 and/or the box seat 211, and the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated can be driven to be retracted and released by rotation, thereby realizing the storage and transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated.

在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成制品20还包括第二收容结构240,第二收容结构240设置于第二收容空间2150中,用于收容雾化后的介质输送带22。在一些实施例中,收纳盘24设置于盒盖212以及盒座211之间,且与盒盖212以及盒座211连接。在其他一些实施例中,该第二收容结构240不限于安装于盒体21中,也可直接安装于气溶胶生成装置10中。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating product 20 further includes a second receiving structure 240, which is disposed in the second receiving space 2150 and is used to receive the atomized medium conveyor belt 22. In some embodiments, the receiving tray 24 is disposed between the box cover 212 and the box seat 211, and is connected to the box cover 212 and the box seat 211. In other embodiments, the second receiving structure 240 is not limited to being installed in the box body 21, but can also be directly installed in the aerosol generating device 10.

在一些实施例中,该第二收容结构240可包括收纳盘24,经加热后的基带221可卷绕于该收纳盘24上。在一些实施例中,该收纳盘24包括收纳盘盖242、收纳底盘241。该收纳盘盖242以及收纳底盘241均呈圆形,且径向尺寸大致相当。收纳盘盖242以及收纳底盘241间隔设置并通过一中空的收纳卷轴连接,该收纳卷轴可形成于收纳盘盖242和/或收纳底盘241中轴处,也可独立设置,且其两端分别与收纳盘盖242以及收纳底盘241连接。该收纳卷轴可以呈圆柱状,其径向尺寸小于收纳盘盖242以及收纳底盘241的径向尺寸,加热后的介质输送带22可卷绕于其上。在一些实施例中,收纳盘盖242以及收纳底盘241可不限于呈圆形,也可呈方形,该收纳盘盖242以及收纳底盘241可阻挡介质输送带22脱出。在一些实施例中,收纳盘盖242以及收纳底盘241可以省去。在一些实施例中,收纳盘24可与盒盖212和/或盒座211可转动连接,可通过转动带动介质输送带22卷绕于其上。In some embodiments, the second receiving structure 240 may include a storage tray 24, and the heated base belt 221 may be wound on the storage tray 24. In some embodiments, the storage tray 24 includes a storage tray cover 242 and a storage chassis 241. The storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 are both circular, and their radial dimensions are roughly the same. The storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 are arranged at intervals and connected by a hollow storage reel, which may be formed at the central axis of the storage tray cover 242 and/or the storage chassis 241, or may be independently arranged, and its two ends are respectively connected to the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241. The storage reel may be cylindrical, and its radial dimension is smaller than the radial dimension of the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241, and the heated medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound thereon. In some embodiments, the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 may not be limited to a circular shape, but may also be a square shape, and the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 may prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from escaping. In some embodiments, the storage tray cover 242 and the storage chassis 241 may be omitted. In some embodiments, the storage tray 24 may be rotatably connected to the box cover 212 and/or the box seat 211, and the medium conveying belt 22 may be driven to be wound thereon by rotation.

在一些实施例中,该收纳盘24可包括主动轮,储存盘23可包括从动轮。由于基带221是绕设于储存盘23和收纳盘24上的,则储存盘23可在收纳盘24带动下转动。储存盘23以及收纳盘24同时转动时带动待加热的介质输送带22进给,并且带动雾化后的介质输送带22卷绕于收纳盘24。在其他一些实施例中,该收纳盘24不限于包括主动轮,也可包括从动轮;该储存盘23不限于包括从动轮,其也可包括主动轮。在一些实施例中,储存盘23以及收纳盘24也可独立转动设置,也即储存盘23由一组驱动结构带动转动,收纳盘24可由另一组驱动结构带动转动。In some embodiments, the storage tray 24 may include a driving wheel, and the storage tray 23 may include a driven wheel. Since the base belt 221 is wound around the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24, the storage tray 23 can be driven by the storage tray 24 to rotate. When the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 rotate at the same time, the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated is driven to feed, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 is driven to be wound around the storage tray 24. In some other embodiments, the storage tray 24 is not limited to including a driving wheel, but may also include a driven wheel; the storage tray 23 is not limited to including a driven wheel, but may also include a driving wheel. In some embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also be independently rotatable, that is, the storage tray 23 is driven to rotate by a group of driving structures, and the storage tray 24 can be driven to rotate by another group of driving structures.

在一些实施例中,第二收容结构240的收容空间尺寸可大于第一收容结构230的收容空间尺寸。具体地,该收纳盘盖242和收纳底盘241的径向尺寸均大于储存盘盖232的径向尺寸,且该收纳盘盖242和收纳底盘241的径向尺寸均大于储存底盘231的径向尺寸,从而使得收纳盘盖242和收纳底盘241之间形成的收容空间的尺寸大于储存底盘231与储存盘盖232之间形成的收容空间的尺寸。当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,也可将储存卷轴的横截面尺寸小于收纳卷轴的横截面尺寸设置,使得收纳盘盖242和收纳底盘241之间形成的收容空间的尺寸大于储存底盘231与储存盘盖232之间形成的收容空间的尺寸。在其他一些实施例中,第二收容结构240的收容空间尺寸也可等于或小于第一收容结构230的收容空间尺寸。In some embodiments, the size of the receiving space of the second receiving structure 240 may be larger than the size of the receiving space of the first receiving structure 230. Specifically, the radial dimensions of the receiving tray cover 242 and the receiving chassis 241 are larger than the radial dimensions of the storage tray cover 232, and the radial dimensions of the receiving tray cover 242 and the receiving chassis 241 are larger than the radial dimensions of the storage chassis 231, so that the size of the receiving space formed between the receiving tray cover 242 and the receiving chassis 241 is larger than the size of the receiving space formed between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232. Of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the cross-sectional dimension of the storage reel may be set smaller than the cross-sectional dimension of the storage reel, so that the size of the receiving space formed between the receiving tray cover 242 and the receiving chassis 241 is larger than the size of the receiving space formed between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232. In some other embodiments, the size of the receiving space of the second receiving structure 240 may also be equal to or smaller than the size of the receiving space of the first receiving structure 230.

如图8所示,在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成制品20还包括雾化座25,该雾化座25部分设置于该盒体21上。该雾化座25包括主体部254以及设置于主体部254上延伸部255;该主体部254可嵌入安装于盒体21中,该雾化座25内侧形成有雾化腔250,该雾化腔250具有进口251以及出口252;该进口251和出口252均设置于雾化座25;雾化腔250形成于主体部254的内侧,该雾化腔250由加热结构12加热介质输送带22的空间所界定出。该进口251设置于该主体部254的一侧,且与雾化腔250连通,用于供待加热的介质输送带22进入雾化腔250中,该出口252设置于该主体部254的另一侧,并与雾化腔250连通,用于供雾化后的介质输送带22传送出。该进口251以及出口252相对设置,且均位于或靠近雾化腔250的中心所在的平面。该延伸部255设置于该主体部254上,可从盒体21穿出,用于连接吸嘴30。该延伸部255呈柱状,且为两端贯通结构,内侧形成与雾化腔250连通的出气通道253,用于供雾化形成的气溶胶输出。As shown in FIG8 , in some embodiments, the aerosol generating product 20 further includes an atomizing seat 25, and the atomizing seat 25 is partially disposed on the box body 21. The atomizing seat 25 includes a main body 254 and an extension 255 disposed on the main body 254; the main body 254 can be embedded and installed in the box body 21, and an atomizing cavity 250 is formed inside the atomizing seat 25, and the atomizing cavity 250 has an inlet 251 and an outlet 252; the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are both disposed on the atomizing seat 25; the atomizing cavity 250 is formed inside the main body 254, and the atomizing cavity 250 is defined by the space of the heating structure 12 and the heating medium conveying belt 22. The inlet 251 is arranged on one side of the main body 254 and communicates with the atomizing chamber 250, and is used for the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated to enter the atomizing chamber 250. The outlet 252 is arranged on the other side of the main body 254 and communicates with the atomizing chamber 250, and is used for the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 to be conveyed out. The inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are arranged opposite to each other, and are both located at or close to the plane where the center of the atomizing chamber 250 is located. The extension part 255 is arranged on the main body 254, and can pass through the box body 21, and is used to connect the suction nozzle 30. The extension part 255 is columnar, and has a through structure at both ends, and an air outlet channel 253 is formed inside to communicate with the atomizing chamber 250, and is used for the aerosol formed by atomization to be output.

再如图4至图6所示,在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成制品20还包括导向结构28,该导向结构28设置于该盒体21中,用于给介质输送带22传输导向。在一些实施例中,该导向结构28包括第一导向结构282、第二导向结构283、第三导向结构281、第四导向结构284。其中,第一导向结构282以及第二导向结构283分别设置于雾化座25的两相对侧。该第一导向结构靠近进口251设置,位于进口251远离出口252的一侧,用于将待加热的介质输送带22导入进口251。第二导向结构283靠近出口252设置,位于出口252远离进口251的一侧,用于供从出口252输出的且经过加热的介质输送带22移动导向,以将其导至第二收容结构240。该第三导向结构281设置于第一导向结构282以及第一收容结构230之间,用于将第一收容结构230输出的待加热的介质输送带22传输至第一导向结构282。第四导向结构284设置于第二导向结构283以及第二收容结构240之间,用于将经过第二导向结构283的且已被加热过的介质输送带22导至第二收容结构240中。储存盘23以及收纳盘24转动时,待加热的介质输送带22可沿第三导向结构281、第一导向结构282、进口251进入雾化腔250中,雾化后,储存盘23以及收纳盘24继续转动,雾化后的介质输送带22可从出口252输出再经过第二导向结构283、第四导向结构284收入收纳盘24中。As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 , in some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 further includes a guide structure 28, which is disposed in the box body 21 and is used to guide the medium conveying belt 22. In some embodiments, the guide structure 28 includes a first guide structure 282, a second guide structure 283, a third guide structure 281, and a fourth guide structure 284. The first guide structure 282 and the second guide structure 283 are respectively disposed on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25. The first guide structure is disposed near the inlet 251, located on the side of the inlet 251 away from the outlet 252, and is used to guide the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated into the inlet 251. The second guide structure 283 is disposed near the outlet 252, located on the side of the outlet 252 away from the inlet 251, and is used to guide the heated medium conveying belt 22 output from the outlet 252 to move to the second receiving structure 240. The third guide structure 281 is disposed between the first guide structure 282 and the first receiving structure 230, and is used to transfer the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated outputted from the first receiving structure 230 to the first guide structure 282. The fourth guide structure 284 is disposed between the second guide structure 283 and the second receiving structure 240, and is used to guide the medium conveyor belt 22 that has passed through the second guide structure 283 and has been heated to the second receiving structure 240. When the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 rotate, the medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated can enter the atomizing chamber 250 along the third guide structure 281, the first guide structure 282, and the inlet 251. After atomization, the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 continue to rotate, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 can be outputted from the outlet 252 and then received into the receiving tray 24 through the second guide structure 283 and the fourth guide structure 284.

在一些实施例中,第一导向结构282、第二导向结构283、第三导向结构281以及第四导向结构284可以为可转动结构,比如可以为滚轮或者导向辊;当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,第一导向结构282、第二导向结构283、第三导向结构281以及第四导向结构284也可以为非转动结构,比如可以为固定设置于盒体21中的导向柱或者其他。In some embodiments, the first guide structure 282, the second guide structure 283, the third guide structure 281 and the fourth guide structure 284 can be rotatable structures, such as rollers or guide rollers; of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the first guide structure 282, the second guide structure 283, the third guide structure 281 and the fourth guide structure 284 can also be non-rotatable structures, such as guide columns fixedly arranged in the box body 21 or others.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还包括两组限位结构29,也即包括一组第一限位结构291以及一组第二限位结构292。在一些实施例中,该两组限位结构29和介质输送带22可一同安装于盒体21中,形成该气溶胶生成制品20。具体地,该两组限位结构29与介质输送带22一同收容于容腔210中。当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,该介质输送带22、限位结构29、第一收容结构230、第二收容结构240不限于形成组件,该限位结构29也可直接安装于气溶胶生成装置10上。在其他一些实施例中,该限位结构29不限于为两组,可以为大于两组。在一些实施例中,该第一限位结构291不限于为一组,也可以为多组;在一些实施例中,该第二限位结构292也不限于为一组,也可以为多组。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 further includes two groups of limiting structures 29, namely, a group of first limiting structures 291 and a group of second limiting structures 292. In some embodiments, the two groups of limiting structures 29 and the medium conveying belt 22 can be installed together in the box body 21 to form the aerosol generating article 20. Specifically, the two groups of limiting structures 29 and the medium conveying belt 22 are contained in the cavity 210 together. Of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the medium conveying belt 22, the limiting structure 29, the first containing structure 230, and the second containing structure 240 are not limited to forming an assembly, and the limiting structure 29 can also be directly installed on the aerosol generating device 10. In some other embodiments, the limiting structure 29 is not limited to two groups, but can be more than two groups. In some embodiments, the first limiting structure 291 is not limited to one group, but can also be multiple groups; in some embodiments, the second limiting structure 292 is not limited to one group, but can also be multiple groups.

该第一限位结构291可设置于进口251远离出口252的一侧,位于第一导向结构282与进口251之间,且朝远离所述介质输送带22与所述加热结构12贴合的方向偏移第一导向结构282设置,也即可向靠近出气通道253的方向偏移设置;该第二限位结构292可设置于出口252远离进口251的一侧,位于第二导向结构283与出口252之间,且朝远离所述介质输送带22与所述加热结构12贴合的方向偏移第二导向结构283设置,也即可向靠近出气通道253的方向偏移设置;进而可避免阻挡介质输送带22的传输,第一限位结构291和第二限位结构292相对设置,并均朝介质输送带22与加热结构12贴合方向向介质输送带22施加作用力,限制介质输送带22向出气通道253一侧移动的自由度,使得介质输送带22与加热结构12紧密接触,提高雾化的充分性。可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,也可只有第一限位结构291朝介质输送带22与加热结构12贴合方向向介质输送带22施加作用力;或者,也可只有第二限位结构292朝介质输送带22与加热结构12贴合方向向介质输送带22施加作用力。The first limiting structure 291 can be arranged on a side of the inlet 251 away from the outlet 252, between the first guide structure 282 and the inlet 251, and offset from the first guide structure 282 in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heating structure 12, that is, offset in a direction close to the air outlet channel 253; the second limiting structure 292 can be arranged on a side of the outlet 252 away from the inlet 251, between the second guide structure 283 and the outlet 252, and offset from the first guide structure 282 in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heating structure 12. The second guide structure 283 is set offset in the direction of the heating structure 12 fitting, that is, it is set offset in the direction close to the air outlet channel 253; thereby, the transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22 can be avoided from being blocked. The first limiting structure 291 and the second limiting structure 292 are arranged opposite to each other, and both apply a force to the medium conveyor belt 22 in the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 fitting with the heating structure 12, thereby limiting the freedom of the medium conveyor belt 22 to move toward the side of the air outlet channel 253, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 is in close contact with the heating structure 12, thereby improving the adequacy of atomization. It can be understood that in some other embodiments, only the first limiting structure 291 may apply a force to the medium conveyor belt 22 in the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 fitting with the heating structure 12; or, only the second limiting structure 292 may apply a force to the medium conveyor belt 22 in the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 fitting with the heating structure 12.

可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,当限位结构29大于两组时,位于第一导向结构282以及进口251之间的第一限位结构291可以为一组或者多组,位于第二导向结构283与出口252之间的第一限位结构291也可以为一组或者多组。It can be understood that in some other embodiments, when the limiting structure 29 is greater than two groups, the first limiting structure 291 located between the first guide structure 282 and the inlet 251 can be one group or multiple groups, and the first limiting structure 291 located between the second guide structure 283 and the outlet 252 can also be one group or multiple groups.

在一些实施例中,第一限位结构291可以为限位轮,比如滚轮。该限位轮两端可与盒盖212以及盒座211相接,且该限位轮的侧壁可与介质输送带22接触,沿介质输送带22与加热结构12贴合方向向介质输送带施加压力。当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,第一限位结构291不限于为限位轮,在其他一些实施例中,第一限位结构291可以为限位凸筋,该限位凸筋可朝容腔210方向凸出设置于盒盖212内壁或者盒座211内壁。该限位凸筋可以为一体成型于盒体21上的塑胶件,也可以为固定于盒体21中的海绵块或者其他。在其他一些实施例中,第一限位结构291也可以为限位轮和限位凸筋的组合。当该第一限位结构291为多组时,可以其中一组或者多组第一限位结构291为限位轮或者限位凸筋。In some embodiments, the first limiting structure 291 can be a limiting wheel, such as a roller. The two ends of the limiting wheel can be connected to the box cover 212 and the box seat 211, and the side wall of the limiting wheel can contact the medium conveyor belt 22, and apply pressure to the medium conveyor belt along the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heating structure 12. Of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the first limiting structure 291 is not limited to a limiting wheel. In some other embodiments, the first limiting structure 291 can be a limiting convex rib, which can be protruded toward the cavity 210 and arranged on the inner wall of the box cover 212 or the inner wall of the box seat 211. The limiting convex rib can be a plastic part integrally formed on the box body 21, or a sponge block or other fixed in the box body 21. In some other embodiments, the first limiting structure 291 can also be a combination of a limiting wheel and a limiting convex rib. When the first limiting structure 291 is a plurality of groups, one or more of the first limiting structures 291 can be a limiting wheel or a limiting convex rib.

在一些实施例中,第二限位结构292可以为限位轮,比如滚轮。该限位轮两端可与盒盖212以及盒座211相接,且该限位轮的侧壁可与介质输送带22接触,沿介质输送带22与加热结构12贴合方向向介质输送带施加压力。当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,第二限位结构292不限于为限位轮,在其他一些实施例中,第二限位结构292可以为限位凸筋,该限位凸筋可朝容腔210方向凸出设置于盒盖212内壁或者盒座211内壁。该限位凸筋可以为一体成型于盒体21上的塑胶件,也可以为固定于盒体21中的海绵块或者其他。在其他一些实施例中,第二限位结构292也可以为限位轮和限位凸筋的组合。当该第二限位结构292为多组时,可以其中一组或者多组该第二限位结构292为限位轮或者限位凸筋。In some embodiments, the second limiting structure 292 can be a limiting wheel, such as a roller. The two ends of the limiting wheel can be connected to the box cover 212 and the box seat 211, and the side wall of the limiting wheel can contact the medium conveyor belt 22, and apply pressure to the medium conveyor belt along the direction of the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heating structure 12. Of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the second limiting structure 292 is not limited to a limiting wheel. In some other embodiments, the second limiting structure 292 can be a limiting convex rib, which can be protruded toward the cavity 210 and arranged on the inner wall of the box cover 212 or the inner wall of the box seat 211. The limiting convex rib can be a plastic part integrally formed on the box body 21, or a sponge block or other fixed in the box body 21. In some other embodiments, the second limiting structure 292 can also be a combination of a limiting wheel and a limiting convex rib. When the second limiting structure 292 is a plurality of groups, one or more of the second limiting structures 292 can be a limiting wheel or a limiting convex rib.

一同参阅图1至图3以及图9至图10,该气溶胶生成装置10包括机体11、以及加热结构12。该机体11可用于收容气溶胶生成制品20。加热结构12安装于机体11上,可插入气溶胶生成制品20中,用于加热气溶胶生成制品20中的介质输送带22,使其产生气溶胶。Referring to FIGS. 1 to 3 and 9 to 10 , the aerosol generating device 10 includes a body 11 and a heating structure 12. The body 11 can be used to accommodate an aerosol generating product 20. The heating structure 12 is mounted on the body 11 and can be inserted into the aerosol generating product 20 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 in the aerosol generating product 20 to generate aerosol.

在一些实施例中,机体11包括机壳110以及盖体111。该机壳110包括框体112以及底座113。框体112设置于底座113上,该框体112上设置有容纳腔1120,该容纳腔1120用于收容气溶胶生成制品20。该框体112的侧壁上开设有装配口1123,该装配口1123用于供气溶胶生成制品20装入于容纳腔1120中。该盖体111设置于该装配口1123处,且可拆卸盖合该容纳腔1120。通过打开该盖体111,可便于气溶胶生成制品20的取出和更换。气溶胶生成制品20可拆卸安装于容纳腔1120中,也即采用可更好的气溶胶生成制品20,可满足用户雾化次数多的需求且能够收纳雾化后的介质输送带22。In some embodiments, the body 11 includes a housing 110 and a cover 111. The housing 110 includes a frame 112 and a base 113. The frame 112 is disposed on the base 113, and a receiving cavity 1120 is disposed on the frame 112, and the receiving cavity 1120 is used to receive the aerosol generating product 20. An assembly port 1123 is provided on the side wall of the frame 112, and the assembly port 1123 is used for the aerosol generating product 20 to be loaded into the receiving cavity 1120. The cover 111 is disposed at the assembly port 1123, and can detachably cover the receiving cavity 1120. By opening the cover 111, the aerosol generating product 20 can be easily taken out and replaced. The aerosol generating product 20 can be detachably installed in the receiving cavity 1120, that is, the aerosol generating product 20 can be better used, which can meet the user's needs for more atomization times and can store the atomized medium conveyor belt 22.

在一些实施例中,加热结构12安装于该框体112上,位于该容纳腔1120的底壁且朝容纳腔1120凸出。当气溶胶生成制品20安装于该容纳腔1120中时,该加热结构12可插入气溶胶生成制品20的雾化座25中,且与出气通道253相对设置,用于加热进入雾化腔250中的待加热的介质输送带22。在一些实施例中,该介质输送带22设置于加热结构12朝向出气通道253的一面。在一些实施例中,加热结构12包括安装座122以及加热器121。该安装座122安装于该容纳腔1120的底壁,该加热器121安装于该安装座122上。在一些实施例中,该加热器121可呈片状,在一些实施例中,其可以为金属发热片。当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,加热器121不限于为金属发热片。In some embodiments, the heating structure 12 is mounted on the frame 112, located on the bottom wall of the accommodating cavity 1120 and protruding toward the accommodating cavity 1120. When the aerosol generating product 20 is installed in the accommodating cavity 1120, the heating structure 12 can be inserted into the atomizing seat 25 of the aerosol generating product 20, and is arranged opposite to the air outlet channel 253, for heating the medium conveying belt 22 to be heated entering the atomizing cavity 250. In some embodiments, the medium conveying belt 22 is arranged on the side of the heating structure 12 facing the air outlet channel 253. In some embodiments, the heating structure 12 includes a mounting seat 122 and a heater 121. The mounting seat 122 is mounted on the bottom wall of the accommodating cavity 1120, and the heater 121 is mounted on the mounting seat 122. In some embodiments, the heater 121 can be in the form of a sheet, and in some embodiments, it can be a metal heating sheet. Of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the heater 121 is not limited to a metal heating sheet.

在一些实施例中,该加热结构12包括第一侧121a以及第二侧121b,其中第一侧121a以及第二侧121b相对设置,具体地,在一些实施例中,该第一侧121a以及第二侧121b可沿介质输送带22移动方向依次设置。也即第一侧121a可位于设有进口251的一侧,第二侧121b位于设有出口252的一侧。则该第一侧121a设置有至少一组限位结构29,第二侧121b设置有至少一组限位结构29,且每一限位结构29压设于介质输送带22上。可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,该第一侧121a以及第二侧121b也不限于沿介质输送带22移动方向依次设置。在一些实施例中,第一侧121a可以位于加热器121靠近安装座122的一侧,第二侧121b可位于加热器121远离安装座122的一侧。In some embodiments, the heating structure 12 includes a first side 121a and a second side 121b, wherein the first side 121a and the second side 121b are arranged opposite to each other. Specifically, in some embodiments, the first side 121a and the second side 121b can be arranged sequentially along the moving direction of the medium conveying belt 22. That is, the first side 121a can be located on the side where the inlet 251 is provided, and the second side 121b is located on the side where the outlet 252 is provided. Then, the first side 121a is provided with at least one set of limiting structures 29, and the second side 121b is provided with at least one set of limiting structures 29, and each limiting structure 29 is pressed on the medium conveying belt 22. It can be understood that in some other embodiments, the first side 121a and the second side 121b are not limited to being arranged sequentially along the moving direction of the medium conveying belt 22. In some embodiments, the first side 121a can be located on the side of the heater 121 close to the mounting seat 122, and the second side 121b can be located on the side of the heater 121 away from the mounting seat 122.

在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成装置10还包括驱动组件14,该驱动组件14可安装于机体11上,具体地,该驱动组件14安装于框体112以及底座113之间,且部分可伸入容纳腔1120中,以与第二收容结构240或第一收容结构230连接,用于将气溶胶生成制品20中的介质输送带22传送至加热结构12。在一些实施例中,该驱动组件14可以为电动驱动结构,比如该驱动组件14可以为电机或者为减速箱,该驱动组件14的输出轴可从框体112与容纳腔1120相背设置的一侧穿入容纳腔1120中,与第二收容结构240或第一收容结构230连接,也即可与储存盘23或收纳盘24连接,用于带动储存盘23以及收纳盘24转动。当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,该驱动组件14也可不限于为电动驱动结构,可以为手动驱动结构,比如手柄或者手轮。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 further includes a driving assembly 14, which can be installed on the body 11. Specifically, the driving assembly 14 is installed between the frame 112 and the base 113, and a portion of the driving assembly 14 can extend into the accommodating chamber 1120 to connect with the second accommodating structure 240 or the first accommodating structure 230, and is used to transfer the medium conveying belt 22 in the aerosol generating product 20 to the heating structure 12. In some embodiments, the driving assembly 14 can be an electric driving structure, such as the driving assembly 14 can be a motor or a reduction box, and the output shaft of the driving assembly 14 can penetrate into the accommodating chamber 1120 from the side of the frame 112 that is opposite to the accommodating chamber 1120, and be connected with the second accommodating structure 240 or the first accommodating structure 230, that is, connected with the storage disk 23 or the storage disk 24, and is used to drive the storage disk 23 and the storage disk 24 to rotate. Of course, it can be understood that in some other embodiments, the driving assembly 14 is not limited to an electric driving structure, and can be a manual driving structure, such as a handle or a hand wheel.

在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成装置10还包括电源13,该电源13设置于该机壳110中,具体位于框体112以及底座113之间。该电源13可用于给驱动组件14以及加热结构12供电。在一些实施例中,该电源13可以为电池。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 further includes a power supply 13, which is disposed in the housing 110, specifically between the frame 112 and the base 113. The power supply 13 can be used to power the driving component 14 and the heating structure 12. In some embodiments, the power supply 13 can be a battery.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10还包括主控板15,主控板15设置于该机壳110中,具体位于框体112以及底座113之间。该主控板15与电源13、驱动组件14以及加热结构12连接。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 further includes a main control board 15, which is disposed in the housing 110, specifically between the frame 112 and the base 113. The main control board 15 is connected to the power supply 13, the driving assembly 14 and the heating structure 12.

在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成系统100还包括吸嘴30,该吸嘴30可装配于该雾化座25上。具体地,该吸嘴30可套设于延伸部255上,用户供用户抽吸从雾化腔250输出的气溶胶。在一些实施例中,该吸嘴30可大致呈圆柱状,当然,可以理解地,在其他一些实施例中,该吸嘴30不限于呈圆柱状,也可以为扁平的柱状或者其他形状。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system 100 further includes a nozzle 30, which can be mounted on the atomizing seat 25. Specifically, the nozzle 30 can be mounted on the extension portion 255, and the user can inhale the aerosol output from the atomizing chamber 250. In some embodiments, the nozzle 30 can be roughly cylindrical. Of course, it can be understood that in other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, but can also be a flat column or other shapes.

图11-13示出了本发明第二实施例中的气溶胶生成系统100,该气溶胶生成系统100包括相互配合的气溶胶生成装置10和气溶胶生成制品20。其中,气溶胶生成制品20用于存储雾化介质,气溶胶生成装置10用于在通电后加热雾化介质,以生成气溶胶。11-13 show an aerosol generating system 100 in a second embodiment of the present invention, wherein the aerosol generating system 100 comprises an aerosol generating device 10 and an aerosol generating article 20 that cooperate with each other. The aerosol generating article 20 is used to store the atomizing medium, and the aerosol generating device 10 is used to heat the atomizing medium after being powered on to generate an aerosol.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成系统100的一端还具有吸嘴30,用于供用户抽吸雾化介质雾化后生成的气溶胶。在本实施例中,吸嘴30呈圆柱状。在其他实施例中,该吸嘴30不限于呈圆柱状,其也可以为扁平的柱状或者其他形状。In some embodiments, one end of the aerosol generating system 100 further has a nozzle 30 for allowing the user to inhale the aerosol generated after the atomization medium is atomized. In this embodiment, the nozzle 30 is cylindrical. In other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, and it can also be a flat column or other shapes.

具体地,气溶胶生成制品20可包括容腔210以及收容于容腔210中的介质输送带22,介质输送带22沿其长度方向分布有基质层222。在一些实施例中,介质输送带22可通过卷绕的方式设置于容腔210中,卷绕设置的方式能够使得在有限的空间内能够存储较多的介质输送带22,使得单个气溶胶生成制品20能够多次雾化使用。Specifically, the aerosol generating article 20 may include a cavity 210 and a medium conveying belt 22 contained in the cavity 210, wherein the medium conveying belt 22 has a matrix layer 222 distributed along its length. In some embodiments, the medium conveying belt 22 may be disposed in the cavity 210 in a winding manner, and the winding arrangement manner may enable more medium conveying belts 22 to be stored in a limited space, so that a single aerosol generating article 20 may be atomized and used multiple times.

进一步地,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括储存盘23和收纳盘24,介质输送带22未被加热的部分可卷绕于储存盘23上,介质输送带22已被加热后的部分可卷绕于收纳盘24上。通过将雾化前后的介质输送带22分别卷绕在储存盘23和收纳盘24上,能够避免窜味等不佳用户体验。Furthermore, the aerosol generating product 20 may further include a storage tray 23 and a receiving tray 24. The unheated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage tray 23, and the heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the receiving tray 24. By winding the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization on the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24, respectively, poor user experience such as odor crosstalk can be avoided.

气溶胶生成装置10包括机体11以及收容于机体11中的加热器121和主控板15。主控板15上设置有用于控制加热器121的控制电路,加热器121可在通电后通过接触或者非接触的方式加热气溶胶生成制品20中的基质层222,以生成气溶胶。The aerosol generating device 10 includes a body 11, a heater 121 and a main control board 15 housed in the body 11. The main control board 15 is provided with a control circuit for controlling the heater 121. The heater 121 can heat the substrate layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 in a contact or non-contact manner after being powered on to generate aerosol.

在本实施例中,加热器121采用电阻式的加热方式,其能够通过焦耳效应产生热量。加热器121具有一加热面1211,加热面1211与介质输送带22直接接触,从而将热量传递到介质输送带22进行烘烤加热。进一步地,加热器121可以为片状,加热面1211位于加热器121沿厚度方向的一侧并可以为平面或大致为平面,便于与带状的介质输送带22充分接触,增大发热面积。In this embodiment, the heater 121 adopts a resistive heating method, which can generate heat through the Joule effect. The heater 121 has a heating surface 1211, and the heating surface 1211 is in direct contact with the medium conveyor belt 22, so as to transfer heat to the medium conveyor belt 22 for baking and heating. Further, the heater 121 can be in a sheet shape, and the heating surface 1211 is located on one side of the heater 121 along the thickness direction and can be a plane or a substantially plane, so as to facilitate full contact with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and increase the heating area.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10还可包括安装座122,安装座122可采用陶瓷或PEEK(聚醚醚酮)等耐高温材料制成。加热器121的一端可插装于安装座122上,并经由安装座122固定于机体11中,可减少加热器121向机体11传递的热量,利于隔热。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a mounting seat 122, which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone). One end of the heater 121 may be inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed to the body 11 via the mounting seat 122, which may reduce the heat transferred from the heater 121 to the body 11 and facilitate heat insulation.

当然,在其他实施例中,加热器121不限于为片状,其也可以为柱状等其他形状。在另一些实施例中,加热器121也可采用电磁加热、红外辐射、超声、微波、等离子等其他加热方式。Of course, in other embodiments, the heater 121 is not limited to being in the form of a sheet, and may also be in other shapes such as a columnar shape. In other embodiments, the heater 121 may also be heated by other heating methods such as electromagnetic heating, infrared radiation, ultrasound, microwave, plasma, etc.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10还可包括设置于机体11中的驱动组件14,驱动组件14用于提供介质输送带22行进的驱动力,使得介质输送带22能够从储存盘23放卷,经过加热器121被加热雾化,然后被收纳盘24收卷。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a driving assembly 14 disposed in the body 11, and the driving assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to move forward, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can be unwound from the storage disk 23, heated and atomized by the heater 121, and then rewound by the storage disk 24.

在本实施例中,驱动组件14为电动驱动结构,其可包括减速器141以及与减速器141连接的输出轴142,减速器141通过输出轴142输出驱动力。当然,在其他实施例中,驱动组件14也可包括电机等其他电动驱动结构。在另一些实施例中,驱动组件14也可不限于为电动驱动结构,其也可以为手动驱动结构,比如手柄或者手轮。In this embodiment, the driving assembly 14 is an electric driving structure, which may include a reducer 141 and an output shaft 142 connected to the reducer 141, and the reducer 141 outputs the driving force through the output shaft 142. Of course, in other embodiments, the driving assembly 14 may also include other electric driving structures such as a motor. In other embodiments, the driving assembly 14 is also not limited to an electric driving structure, and it may also be a manual driving structure, such as a handle or a hand wheel.

在一些实施例中,机体11可大致呈长方体状,机体11的上端形成有供吸嘴30伸出的插口1110,机体11内形成有一用于收容气溶胶生成制品20的容纳腔1120。气溶胶生成制品20可拆卸地配接于容纳腔1120中。当气溶胶生成制品20内的基质层222用尽后,可通过更换气溶胶生成制品20来实现基质层222的更新。气溶胶生成装置10可重复利用,从而可降低气溶胶生成系统100的使用成本。当然,在其他实施例中,机体11不局限于呈长方体状,其也可以呈圆柱状、跑道形柱状或椭圆柱状等其他形状。In some embodiments, the body 11 may be roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and a socket 1110 for the nozzle 30 to extend is formed at the upper end of the body 11, and a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed in the body 11. The aerosol generating product 20 is detachably connected to the receiving cavity 1120. When the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 is used up, the matrix layer 222 can be updated by replacing the aerosol generating product 20. The aerosol generating device 10 can be reused, thereby reducing the use cost of the aerosol generating system 100. Of course, in other embodiments, the body 11 is not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and it can also be in other shapes such as a cylindrical shape, a racetrack-shaped column or an elliptical column.

机体11在一些实施例中可包括框体112以及分别与框体112相配合的盖体111、底座113。盖体111、底座113可分别设置于框体112沿厚度方向的两侧。框体112与底座113之间形成有一安装腔1130,该安装腔1130可用于容纳驱动组件14、主控板15、电池等部件。底座113与框体112之间可通过可拆卸的方式连接在一起,便于维修、更换或升级安装腔1130中的零部件。当然,底座113与框体112之间也可通过不可拆卸的方式连接在一起,避免用户误打开安装腔1130而造成零部件的损坏。In some embodiments, the body 11 may include a frame 112 and a cover 111 and a base 113 respectively matched with the frame 112. The cover 111 and the base 113 may be respectively arranged on both sides of the frame 112 along the thickness direction. An installation cavity 1130 is formed between the frame 112 and the base 113, and the installation cavity 1130 can be used to accommodate components such as the drive assembly 14, the main control board 15, and the battery. The base 113 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner to facilitate the maintenance, replacement or upgrading of the parts in the installation cavity 1130. Of course, the base 113 and the frame 112 can also be connected together in a non-detachable manner to prevent the user from accidentally opening the installation cavity 1130 and causing damage to the parts.

框体112朝向盒座211的一侧还可凹陷形成有一用于容纳安装座122的安装腔1121。加热器121的一端插装于安装座122中,并经由安装座122固定于安装腔1121中。加热器121的另一端可穿过盒座211以加热盒座211中的介质输送带22。The frame 112 may be recessed on one side of the cassette seat 211 to form a mounting cavity 1121 for accommodating the mounting seat 122. One end of the heater 121 is inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed in the mounting cavity 1121 via the mounting seat 122. The other end of the heater 121 may pass through the cassette seat 211 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 in the cassette seat 211.

盖体111与框体112之间形成有用于收容气溶胶生成制品20的容纳腔1120。盖体111与框体112之间可通过卡扣连接、螺纹连接、磁吸连接等一种或几种可拆卸的方式连接在一起,便于通过打开盖体111,实现气溶胶生成制品20的取出和更换。在本实施例中,盖体111朝向框体112的一侧嵌置有至少一个磁铁114,框体112朝向盖体111的一侧对应至少一个磁铁114嵌置有至少一个磁铁115,使得盖体111、框体112之间通过磁铁114、磁铁115相互磁吸固定。A receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed between the cover 111 and the frame 112. The cover 111 and the frame 112 can be connected together by one or more detachable methods such as snap connection, threaded connection, magnetic connection, etc., so that the aerosol generating product 20 can be taken out and replaced by opening the cover 111. In this embodiment, at least one magnet 114 is embedded on the side of the cover 111 facing the frame 112, and at least one magnet 115 is embedded on the side of the frame 112 facing the cover 111 corresponding to the at least one magnet 114, so that the cover 111 and the frame 112 are magnetically fixed to each other through the magnets 114 and 115.

在一些实施例中,盖体111可全部或至少部分由透明的材料形成。术语“透明的”用于描述这样的材料:其允许至少显著比例的入射光穿过它,使得能够看穿材料。在本发明中,大体上透明的材料可以允许足够的光通过它,使得盖体111内的介质输送带22是可见的。In some embodiments, the cover 111 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material. The term "transparent" is used to describe a material that allows at least a significant portion of incident light to pass through it, allowing for seeing through the material. In the present invention, a substantially transparent material may allow enough light to pass through it so that the media transport belt 22 within the cover 111 is visible.

盖体111可以是完全透明的;或者,盖体111也可以具有较低水平的透明度,同时仍能透射足够的光,使得盖体111内的介质输送带22可见。进一步地,盖体111可包括由透明的材料形成的一个或多个区域,以使得介质输送带22的一部分经由该一个或多个区域可见。此外,由透明的材料形成的区域可以为彩色、有色或无色的。当然,在其他实施例中,盖体111也可以由不透明的材料制成。The cover 111 may be completely transparent; alternatively, the cover 111 may have a lower level of transparency while still transmitting enough light to allow the media conveyor belt 22 within the cover 111 to be visible. Further, the cover 111 may include one or more areas formed of a transparent material so that a portion of the media conveyor belt 22 is visible through the one or more areas. In addition, the area formed of the transparent material may be colored, tinted, or colorless. Of course, in other embodiments, the cover 111 may also be made of an opaque material.

如图12-17所示,气溶胶生成制品20包括盒座211,盒座211的一侧敞开形成有容腔210,盖体111盖设于容腔210的敞开口处以封盖容腔210。当然,在其他实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括盖设于盒座211上的盒盖,通过盒盖来封盖容腔210的敞开口。As shown in FIGS. 12-17 , the aerosol generating product 20 includes a box seat 211, one side of the box seat 211 is open to form a cavity 210, and the cover body 111 is disposed on the open mouth of the cavity 210 to seal the cavity 210. Of course, in other embodiments, the aerosol generating product 20 may further include a box cover disposed on the box seat 211, and the open mouth of the cavity 210 is sealed by the box cover.

储存盘23和收纳盘24分别可转动地设置于盒座211上。储存盘23能够沿预设方向转动以放卷介质输送带22,收纳盘24能够沿与预设方向相同或相反的方向转动以收卷介质输送带22。在本实施例中,储存盘23被配置为沿顺时针方向(在其他实施例中也可以为逆时针方向)转动以放卷介质输送带22,收纳盘24被配置为沿顺时针方向(在其他实施例中也可以为逆时针方向)转动以收卷介质输送带22。The storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are rotatably disposed on the cassette seat 211, respectively. The storage tray 23 can rotate in a preset direction to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 can rotate in a direction that is the same as or opposite to the preset direction to rewind the medium conveying belt 22. In this embodiment, the storage tray 23 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or in a counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or in a counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.

在一些实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24中的一个为主动轮,另一个为从动轮。在本实施例中,收纳盘24为主动轮并与输出轴142连接,储存盘23为从动轮,收纳盘24在输出轴142的驱动下转动以收卷介质输送带22,从而带动储存盘23同步转动以放卷介质输送带22。在其他实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24也可都为主动轮,并可分别与驱动组件14连接。在另一些实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24也可不同步转动,例如,储存盘23先放卷一段介质输送带22,加热完成后,再驱动收纳盘24转动进行收卷。In some embodiments, one of the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 is a driving wheel, and the other is a driven wheel. In this embodiment, the receiving tray 24 is a driving wheel and is connected to the output shaft 142, and the storage tray 23 is a driven wheel. The receiving tray 24 rotates under the drive of the output shaft 142 to reel in the medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the storage tray 23 to rotate synchronously to unwind the medium conveying belt 22. In other embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 can also be driving wheels, and can be connected to the driving assembly 14 respectively. In other embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 can also rotate asynchronously. For example, the storage tray 23 first unwinds a section of the medium conveying belt 22, and after heating is completed, the receiving tray 24 is driven to rotate for rewinding.

介质输送带22可包括带状的基带221以及设置于基带221上的基质层222。该基质层222包括雾化介质,该雾化介质可包括固体、凝胶中的一种或多种,用于在加热后生成气溶胶。基带221用于承载基质层222。The medium conveyor belt 22 may include a belt-shaped base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222 disposed on the base belt 221. The matrix layer 222 includes an atomizing medium, which may include one or more of a solid and a gel, and is used to generate an aerosol after heating. The base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222.

基带221具有在厚度方向上相对设置的第一表面2211和第二表面2212,在介质输送带22缠绕在储存盘23、收纳盘24上时,基带221的第二表面2212可朝向储存盘23、收纳盘24的中心线,基带221的第一表面2211相对远离储存盘23、收纳盘24的中心线。基质层222可通过涂覆、压合或粘贴等方式设置于基带221的第一表面2211和/或第二表面2212上。此外,基质层222在基带221上可连续分布,或者也可分区域间隔分布。The base belt 221 has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 that are arranged opposite to each other in the thickness direction. When the medium conveying belt 22 is wound on the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 may face the center line of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, and the first surface 2211 of the base belt 221 is relatively far away from the center line of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24. The matrix layer 222 may be arranged on the first surface 2211 and/or the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 by coating, lamination or bonding. In addition, the matrix layer 222 may be distributed continuously on the base belt 221, or may be distributed at intervals in different regions.

具体地,在本实施例中,基质层222设置于基带221的第一表面2211上。当然,在其他实施例中,基质层222也可设置于基带221的第二表面2212,或者同时设置于基带221的第一表面2211和第二表面2212。Specifically, in this embodiment, the matrix layer 222 is disposed on the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221. Of course, in other embodiments, the matrix layer 222 may also be disposed on the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221, or disposed on both the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221.

进一步地,基带221可采用导热材料制成,例如铝箔或者铜箔等导热金属材料制成。当然,基带221也可采用导热的非金属材料制成,例如石墨等。在另一些实施例中,介质输送带22也可全部由基质层222制成,即,介质输送带22不包括基带221。Furthermore, the base belt 221 may be made of a heat-conducting material, such as a heat-conducting metal material such as aluminum foil or copper foil. Of course, the base belt 221 may also be made of a heat-conducting non-metallic material, such as graphite. In other embodiments, the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be made entirely of the matrix layer 222, that is, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not include the base belt 221.

加热器121可与介质输送带22未设置有基质层222的一侧接触,通过基带221向基质层222传递热量。这样,可以避免加热后的基质层222黏连在加热器121上,影响加热器121的加热效果。当然,在其他实施例中,加热器121也可直接与基质层222接触,有利于提高热传递效率,减少热量损失,此时,介质输送带22可无需采用导热材料制成。The heater 121 can be in contact with the side of the medium conveyor belt 22 where the matrix layer 222 is not provided, and transfer heat to the matrix layer 222 through the base belt 221. In this way, it is possible to prevent the heated matrix layer 222 from adhering to the heater 121, thereby affecting the heating effect of the heater 121. Of course, in other embodiments, the heater 121 can also be in direct contact with the matrix layer 222, which is conducive to improving the heat transfer efficiency and reducing the heat loss. In this case, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not need to be made of a heat-conducting material.

在一些实施例中,容腔210的底壁还可凸出形成有隔板214、隔板215,隔板214、隔板215的内壁面分别界定有第一收容空间2140、第二收容空间2150,储存盘23、收纳盘24分别可转动地设置于第一收容空间2140和第二收容空间2150中。第一收容空间2140的一侧具有出口2141,第二收容空间2150的一侧具有进口2151,储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22能够通过出口2141穿出,并通过进口2151收卷于收纳盘24上。In some embodiments, the bottom wall of the cavity 210 may also protrude to form a partition 214 and a partition 215, and the inner wall surfaces of the partition 214 and the partition 215 respectively define a first receiving space 2140 and a second receiving space 2150, and the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24 are rotatably disposed in the first receiving space 2140 and the second receiving space 2150. One side of the first receiving space 2140 has an outlet 2141, and one side of the second receiving space 2150 has an inlet 2151, and the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can pass through the outlet 2141 and be rolled up on the receiving disk 24 through the inlet 2151.

介质输送带22雾化前后的部分分别收容于第一收容空间2140和第二收容空间2150中。由于通常基质层222在雾化后会变得较为蓬松,使得介质输送带22的厚度变大。为了更好地利用容腔210内的空间,可将第二收容空间2150的直径设计为大于第一收容空间2140的直径。当然,在其他实施例中,在不考虑容腔210的空间尺寸的情况下,第二收容空间2150的直径也可小于或等于第一收容空间2140的直径。The parts of the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization are respectively contained in the first containing space 2140 and the second containing space 2150. Since the matrix layer 222 usually becomes more fluffy after atomization, the thickness of the medium conveyor belt 22 becomes larger. In order to better utilize the space in the cavity 210, the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can be designed to be larger than the diameter of the first containing space 2140. Of course, in other embodiments, without considering the spatial size of the cavity 210, the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can also be less than or equal to the diameter of the first containing space 2140.

在本实施例中,隔板214、隔板215分别呈一侧开口的圆弧形,隔板214和隔板215连接形成一S形结构,且隔板214位于隔板215的下侧。当然,在其他实施例中,隔板214和隔板215的结构也可作其他变形,例如,隔板214和隔板215也可不连接在一起,再例如,隔板214和/或隔板215也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。当然,在另一些实施例中,隔板214和隔板215也可在水平方向上并排排布,或者也可与水平方向或竖直方向呈一定夹角倾斜分布。In this embodiment, the partition 214 and the partition 215 are respectively in the shape of an arc with one side open, and the partition 214 and the partition 215 are connected to form an S-shaped structure, and the partition 214 is located at the lower side of the partition 215. Of course, in other embodiments, the structures of the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be deformed in other ways, for example, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be not connected together, and for another example, the partition 214 and/or the partition 215 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. Of course, in other embodiments, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, or can also be inclined at a certain angle to the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.

储存盘23可包括储存卷轴233以及分别设置于储存卷轴233两端的储存底盘231、储存盘盖232。介质输送带22未被加热的部分可盘绕在储存卷轴233上,储存底盘231、储存盘盖232可限位介质输送带22在储存卷轴233轴向上的浮动空间,避免介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。The storage disk 23 may include a storage reel 233 and a storage base 231 and a storage disk cover 232 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 233. The unheated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 233, and the storage base 231 and the storage disk cover 232 may limit the floating space of the medium conveying belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 233 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.

在本实施例中,储存底盘231、储存盘盖232均呈圆盘形,储存卷轴233呈圆柱状并与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232同轴设置,使得卷绕在储存卷轴233上的介质输送带22也可圆柱形。当然,在其他实施例中,储存卷轴233也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。储存底盘231、储存盘盖232的径向截面的形状可与储存卷轴233的径向截面的形状相匹配(相同或相似),或者,也可与储存卷轴233的径向截面的形状不匹配(不相同或不相似)。In this embodiment, the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 are both in the shape of a disk, and the storage reel 233 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 233 can also be in the shape of a cylinder. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 233 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. The shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233.

在一些实施例中,储存卷轴233可包括与储存底盘231一体成型的轴段2331以及与储存盘盖232一体成型的轴段2332,轴段2331、轴段2332相互套接后形成储存卷轴233。在其他实施例中,储存卷轴233也可仅由储存底盘231或储存盘盖232一体延伸形成,或者,储存卷轴233也可以为一个单独成型的部件。In some embodiments, the storage reel 233 may include a shaft segment 2331 integrally formed with the storage chassis 231 and a shaft segment 2332 integrally formed with the storage disc cover 232, and the shaft segments 2331 and 2332 are mutually sleeved to form the storage reel 233. In other embodiments, the storage reel 233 may also be formed by only extending the storage chassis 231 or the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 may also be a separately formed component.

在一些实施例中,储存底盘231和储存盘盖232之间的距离L1大于介质输送带22的宽度W,让介质输送带22不与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232之间产生摩擦,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停。这里,储存底盘231和储存盘盖232之间的距离L1是指储存底盘231朝向储存盘盖232的一侧与储存盘盖232朝向储存底盘231的一侧之间的垂直距离。In some embodiments, the distance L1 between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 is greater than the width W of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the medium conveying belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck. Here, the distance L1 between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 refers to the vertical distance between the side of the storage chassis 231 facing the storage tray cover 232 and the side of the storage tray cover 232 facing the storage chassis 231.

可以理解地,在其他实施例中,储存底盘231和储存盘盖232之间的距离L1也可等于介质输送带22的宽度W。在另一些实施例中,储存卷轴233也可仅一端设置有储存底盘231或储存盘盖232,介质输送带22另一端的限位可通过盖体111或盒座211实现。当然,在另外一些实施例中,储存卷轴233的两端也可不设置有储存底盘231和储存盘盖232。It can be understood that in other embodiments, the distance L1 between the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 may also be equal to the width W of the medium conveying belt 22. In other embodiments, the storage reel 233 may be provided with the storage chassis 231 or the storage disc cover 232 at only one end, and the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be limited by the cover 111 or the cassette seat 211. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 233 may not be provided with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 at both ends.

类似地,收纳盘24也可包括收纳卷轴243以及分别设置于收纳卷轴243两端的收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242。介质输送带22被加热后的部分可盘绕在收纳卷轴243上,收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242可限位介质输送带22在收纳卷轴243轴向上的浮动空间,避免介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。Similarly, the storage tray 24 may also include a storage reel 243 and a storage bottom plate 241 and a storage tray cover 242 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 243. The heated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 243, and the storage bottom plate 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may limit the floating space of the medium conveying belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 243 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.

在本实施例中,收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242均呈圆盘形,收纳卷轴243呈圆柱状并与收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242同轴设置,使得卷绕在收纳卷轴243上的介质输送带22也可圆柱形。当然,在其他实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242的径向截面的形状可与收纳卷轴243的径向截面的形状相匹配(相同或相似),或者,也可与收纳卷轴243的径向截面的形状不匹配(不相同或不相似)。In this embodiment, the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 are both in the shape of a disk, and the storage reel 243 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 243 can also be in the shape of a cylinder. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 243 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. The shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243.

在一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243可包括与收纳底盘241一体成型的轴段2431以及与收纳盘盖242一体成型的轴段2432,轴段2431、轴段2432相互套接后形成收纳卷轴243。在其他实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可仅由收纳底盘241或收纳盘盖242一体延伸形成,或者,收纳卷轴243也可以为一个单独成型的部件。In some embodiments, the storage reel 243 may include a shaft segment 2431 integrally formed with the storage chassis 241 and a shaft segment 2432 integrally formed with the storage tray cover 242, and the shaft segments 2431 and 2432 are mutually sleeved to form the storage reel 243. In other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may also be formed by only extending the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242, or the storage reel 243 may also be a separately formed component.

在一些实施例中,收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242之间的距离L2大于介质输送带22的宽度W,让介质输送带22不与收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242之间产生摩擦,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停。这里,收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242之间的距离L2是指收纳底盘241朝向收纳盘盖242的一侧与收纳盘盖242朝向收纳底盘241的一侧之间的垂直距离。In some embodiments, the distance L2 between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 is greater than the width W of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the medium conveying belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck. Here, the distance L2 between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 refers to the vertical distance between the side of the storage chassis 241 facing the storage tray cover 242 and the side of the storage tray cover 242 facing the storage chassis 241.

可以理解地,在其他实施例中,收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242之间的距离L2也可等于介质输送带22的宽度W。在另一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可仅一端设置有收纳底盘241或收纳盘盖242,介质输送带22另一端的限位可通过盖体111或盒座211实现。当然,在另外一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243的两端也可不设置有收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242。It can be understood that in other embodiments, the distance L2 between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may also be equal to the width W of the medium conveying belt 22. In other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may also be provided with the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242 at only one end, and the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be limited by the cover body 111 or the box seat 211. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may not be provided with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 at both ends.

在组装时,可先将储存底盘231安装在盒座211上,并且储存底盘231能够在盒座211上顺畅转动,然后将介质输送带22以缠绕的方式储存在储存盘23内,最后再盖上储存盘盖232。同理,将收纳底盘241安装在盒座211上,并且收纳底盘241能够在盒座211上顺畅转动,然后将介质输送带22以缠绕的方式收纳在收纳盘24内,最后再盖上收纳盘盖242。During assembly, the storage chassis 231 can be first installed on the box seat 211, and the storage chassis 231 can rotate smoothly on the box seat 211, then the medium conveying belt 22 is stored in the storage tray 23 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 232 is covered. Similarly, the storage chassis 241 is installed on the box seat 211, and the storage chassis 241 can rotate smoothly on the box seat 211, then the medium conveying belt 22 is stored in the storage tray 24 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 242 is covered.

输出轴142可穿过盒座211从而与收纳盘24的收纳卷轴243插接。收纳卷轴243上形成有一供输出轴142插装的插孔2430。插孔2430、输出轴142的径向截面可以为D形、四边形、多边形、椭圆形等非圆形,使得输出轴142能够在插孔2430中周向固定,从而使得减速器141能够带动收纳盘24转动,且插接配合的方式使得气溶胶生成制品20与气溶胶生成装置10之间的拆装容易。当然,在其他实施例中,输出轴142也可通过其他方式与收纳盘24连接,例如螺纹连接、销接等。The output shaft 142 can pass through the box seat 211 and be plugged into the storage reel 243 of the storage tray 24. The storage reel 243 is formed with a socket 2430 for the output shaft 142 to be inserted. The radial cross-section of the socket 2430 and the output shaft 142 can be a non-circular shape such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 142 can be circumferentially fixed in the socket 2430, so that the reducer 141 can drive the storage tray 24 to rotate, and the plug-in matching method makes it easy to disassemble and assemble the aerosol generating product 20 and the aerosol generating device 10. Of course, in other embodiments, the output shaft 142 can also be connected to the storage tray 24 in other ways, such as threaded connection, pin connection, etc.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成系统100还可包括与储存盘23连接的阻尼器17,用于提供反向作用力让储存盘23处于拉紧的状态,避免介质输送带22松弛。阻尼器17可设置于盒座211中,也可设置于机体11中。在本实施例中,阻尼器17设置于机体11中,从而可重复使用,降低更换成本。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system 100 may further include a damper 17 connected to the storage disk 23, which is used to provide a reverse force to keep the storage disk 23 in a tensioned state to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from loosening. The damper 17 may be disposed in the cartridge seat 211 or in the body 11. In this embodiment, the damper 17 is disposed in the body 11, so that it can be reused, reducing the replacement cost.

在本实施例中,阻尼器17为阻尼轮170并与储存盘23同轴设置,阻尼轮170本身的物理特性会让储存盘23处于拉紧的状态。阻尼轮170能够提供与储存盘23的预设转动方向相反(本实施例中为逆时针方向)的阻尼扭力。在介质输送带22不运动时,阻尼轮170的阻尼扭力能够拉紧储存盘23,避免介质输送带22松弛。在介质输送带22运动时,阻尼轮170的阻尼扭力能够使得介质输送带22在运动过程中受到一定阻力,从而使介质输送带22在运动过程中达到预紧的效果。In this embodiment, the damper 17 is a damping wheel 170 and is coaxially arranged with the storage disk 23. The physical properties of the damping wheel 170 itself will keep the storage disk 23 in a tensioned state. The damping wheel 170 can provide a damping torque that is opposite to the preset rotation direction of the storage disk 23 (counterclockwise in this embodiment). When the medium conveying belt 22 is not moving, the damping torque of the damping wheel 170 can tighten the storage disk 23 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from loosening. When the medium conveying belt 22 moves, the damping torque of the damping wheel 170 can make the medium conveying belt 22 subject to a certain resistance during the movement, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can achieve a pre-tightening effect during the movement.

这里,阻尼轮170的阻尼扭力满足:减速器141的扭力=安全系数*阻尼扭力*(D1/D2) / 减速器141的传动效率,这里,D1为介质输送带22缠绕在收纳盘24上的部分的直径,D2为介质输送带22缠绕在储存盘23上的部分的直径。当然,在其他实施例中,阻尼器17也可采用其他已知的能够提供阻尼扭力的结构,例如弹簧、扭簧等。Here, the damping torque of the damping wheel 170 satisfies: the torque of the reducer 141 = safety factor * damping torque * (D1/D2) / transmission efficiency of the reducer 141, where D1 is the diameter of the portion of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the receiving tray 24, and D2 is the diameter of the portion of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage tray 23. Of course, in other embodiments, the damper 17 may also adopt other known structures capable of providing damping torque, such as a spring, a torsion spring, etc.

阻尼轮170的一端具有阻尼轴171,该阻尼轴171可穿过盒座211从而与储存盘23的储存卷轴233插接。阻尼轮170可采用阻尼油脂作为阻尼介质,利用阻尼油脂的粘性来阻碍阻尼轴171的运动,从而获得阻尼效果。储存卷轴233上形成有一供阻尼轴171插装的插孔2330。插孔2330、阻尼轴171的径向截面可以为D形、四边形、多边形、椭圆形等非圆形,使得阻尼轴171能够在插孔2330中周向固定,避免阻尼轴171在插孔2330中产生转动。插接配合的方式使得阻尼轮170与储存盘23之间的装拆容易。当然,在其他实施例中,阻尼轮170也可通过其他方式与储存盘23连接,例如铆接、销接、螺纹连接等。One end of the damping wheel 170 has a damping shaft 171, which can pass through the box seat 211 and be plugged into the storage reel 233 of the storage disk 23. The damping wheel 170 can use damping grease as a damping medium, and use the viscosity of the damping grease to hinder the movement of the damping shaft 171, so as to obtain a damping effect. A plug-in hole 2330 for inserting the damping shaft 171 is formed on the storage reel 233. The radial cross-section of the plug-in hole 2330 and the damping shaft 171 can be a non-circular shape such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, or an ellipse, so that the damping shaft 171 can be circumferentially fixed in the plug-in hole 2330 to prevent the damping shaft 171 from rotating in the plug-in hole 2330. The plug-in matching method makes it easy to assemble and disassemble the damping wheel 170 and the storage disk 23. Of course, in other embodiments, the damping wheel 170 can also be connected to the storage disk 23 by other methods, such as riveting, pinning, threaded connection, etc.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括雾化座25,雾化座25内形成有雾化腔250,雾化座25的侧壁上形成有与雾化腔250相连通的进口251和出口252。介质输送带22能够经由进口251进入雾化腔250,在雾化腔250中加热雾化后再经由出口252传出。加热器121的一端可伸入到雾化腔250中,以加热进入到雾化腔250中的介质输送带22。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include an atomizing seat 25, in which an atomizing chamber 250 is formed, and an inlet 251 and an outlet 252 are formed on the side wall of the atomizing seat 25, which are connected to the atomizing chamber 250. The medium conveying belt 22 can enter the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251, and after being heated and atomized in the atomizing chamber 250, it can be transmitted through the outlet 252. One end of the heater 121 can extend into the atomizing chamber 250 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 entering the atomizing chamber 250.

在一些实施例中,雾化座25可通过可拆卸的方式与盒座211安装在一起,雾化座25可重复使用,降低更换成本。当然,在其实施例中,雾化座25也可通过不可拆卸的方式与盒座211安装在一起,或者,雾化座25也可与盒座211一体成型。In some embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 can be installed together with the box seat 211 in a detachable manner, and the atomizer seat 25 can be reused to reduce replacement costs. Of course, in its embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 can also be installed together with the box seat 211 in a non-detachable manner, or the atomizer seat 25 can also be integrally formed with the box seat 211.

在一些实施例中,盒座211的侧壁上还可设置有供外界空气进入雾化腔250的进气孔2110。具体地,进气孔2110可与容腔210相连通,进而通过容腔210与雾化腔250相连通。In some embodiments, an air inlet 2110 for allowing external air to enter the atomizing chamber 250 may be provided on the side wall of the cartridge seat 211. Specifically, the air inlet 2110 may be connected to the receiving chamber 210, and then connected to the atomizing chamber 250 through the receiving chamber 210.

在一些实施例中,进口251、出口252的截面(这里指与介质输送带22的行进方向垂直的截面)形状可与介质输送带22的截面(这里指与介质输送带22的行进方向垂直的截面)形状相同或相似。此外,进口251、出口252与介质输送带22之间可采用间隙配合,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停,还能够避免进口251、出口252的边缘刮擦到介质输送带22。此外,进口251的周缘与介质输送带22之间形成的环形间隙2510和/或出口252的周缘与介质输送带22之间形成的环形间隙2520还能够作为气流通道使用,以将雾化腔250与容腔210相连通,进而与进气孔2110相连通。In some embodiments, the cross-section of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22) may be the same or similar to the cross-section of the medium conveyor belt 22 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22). In addition, a clearance fit may be adopted between the inlet 251, the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck, and the edges of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be prevented from scratching the medium conveyor belt 22. In addition, the annular gap 2510 formed between the periphery of the inlet 251 and the medium conveyor belt 22 and/or the annular gap 2520 formed between the periphery of the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be used as an airflow channel to connect the atomization chamber 250 with the containing chamber 210, and then connect with the air inlet 2110.

可以理解地,环形间隙2510、环形间隙2520的尺寸不易过小,否则可能会造成吸阻过大,导致雾化腔250压强过小而造成抽吸紊流,影响抽吸体验。当然,环形间隙2510、环形间隙2520的尺寸也不易过大,减少或避免雾化腔250内生成的气溶胶经由进口251、出口252的泄漏。It is understandable that the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too small, otherwise it may cause excessive suction resistance, resulting in too low pressure in the atomizing chamber 250 and causing suction turbulence, affecting the suction experience. Of course, the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too large, reducing or avoiding the leakage of the aerosol generated in the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251 and the outlet 252.

具体地,在本实施例中,雾化座25设置于盒座211的上侧,其可包括主体部254以及由主体部254向上延伸的延伸部255。延伸部255内形成有与雾化腔250相连通的出气通道253,吸嘴30的下端可插装于出气通道253中。主体部254可收容于容腔210的上侧,雾化腔250形成于主体部254内,进口251、出口252分别形成于雾化座25的横向两相对侧。Specifically, in this embodiment, the atomizer seat 25 is disposed on the upper side of the cartridge seat 211, and may include a main body 254 and an extension portion 255 extending upward from the main body 254. An air outlet channel 253 communicating with the atomizer chamber 250 is formed in the extension portion 255, and the lower end of the nozzle 30 may be inserted into the air outlet channel 253. The main body 254 may be accommodated on the upper side of the cavity 210, the atomizer chamber 250 is formed in the main body 254, and the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are respectively formed on two opposite sides of the atomizer seat 25 in the transverse direction.

当然,在其他实施例中,雾化座25也可设置于盒座211的其他位置。此外,进口251、出口252的设置方式也不受限制,例如,进口251、出口252可设置于雾化座25的同一侧;或者,进口251设置于雾化座25的横向一侧,出口252设置于雾化座25的底侧。Of course, in other embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 may also be disposed at other positions of the cartridge seat 211. In addition, the configuration of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 is not limited, for example, the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be disposed at the same side of the atomizer seat 25; or, the inlet 251 may be disposed at one lateral side of the atomizer seat 25, and the outlet 252 may be disposed at the bottom side of the atomizer seat 25.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括导向结构28,导向结构28设置于容腔210中,用于在介质输送带22的行进过程中进行导向,保证介质输送带22的顺畅传输,并保证介质输送带22与加热器121良好的接触。在一些实施例中,导向结构28可以有多个,该多个导向结构28在介质输送带22的传输路径上间隔分布。在本实施例中,导向结构28为限位滚轮280,通过限位滚轮280的滚动摩擦保证介质输送带22的顺畅传输。当然,在其他实施例中,导向结构28也可以为凸筋、凸柱等其他结构。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a guide structure 28, which is disposed in the cavity 210 and is used to guide the medium conveyor belt 22 during its travel, to ensure smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22, and to ensure good contact between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heater 121. In some embodiments, there may be multiple guide structures 28, which are spaced apart on the transmission path of the medium conveyor belt 22. In this embodiment, the guide structure 28 is a limiting roller 280, and the rolling friction of the limiting roller 280 ensures smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22. Of course, in other embodiments, the guide structure 28 may also be other structures such as convex ribs and convex columns.

每一导向结构28均可包括两个间隔设置的限位台阶2851、限位台阶2852,能让介质输送带22一直限位在限位台阶2851、限位台阶2852之间的轴向空间内。在一些实施例中,限位台阶2851与限位台阶2852之间的距离L3可大于介质输送带22的宽度W,这样能够保证介质输送带22在限位滚轮280的轴向上具有一定的浮动空间,让介质输送带22不与限位台阶2851、限位台阶2852产生摩擦,保证介质输送带22的顺畅传输,避免发生卡停。当然,在其他实施例中,限位台阶2851与限位台阶2852之间的距离L3也可等于介质输送带22的宽度W,使得介质输送带22的运动更稳定。Each guide structure 28 may include two spaced apart limiting steps 2851 and 2852, which can allow the medium conveying belt 22 to be always limited in the axial space between the limiting steps 2851 and 2852. In some embodiments, the distance L3 between the limiting steps 2851 and 2852 may be greater than the width W of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the medium conveying belt 22 has a certain floating space in the axial direction of the limiting roller 280, so that the medium conveying belt 22 does not generate friction with the limiting steps 2851 and 2852, thereby ensuring the smooth transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 and avoiding jamming. Of course, in other embodiments, the distance L3 between the limiting steps 2851 and 2852 may also be equal to the width W of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable.

具体地,在本实施例中,限位滚轮280包括滚轮轴286以及可转动地套设于滚轮轴286上的滚轮套285。滚轮轴286安装于盒座211上,滚轮套285的外表面用于与介质输送带22接触并产生滚动摩擦。限位台阶2851、2852分别由滚轮套285的轴向两端沿径向向外凸出形成。在其他实施例中,滚轮轴286也可与盒座211一体成型。Specifically, in this embodiment, the limiting roller 280 includes a roller shaft 286 and a roller sleeve 285 rotatably sleeved on the roller shaft 286. The roller shaft 286 is mounted on the cassette seat 211, and the outer surface of the roller sleeve 285 is used to contact with the medium conveying belt 22 and generate rolling friction. The limiting steps 2851 and 2852 are respectively formed by the axial ends of the roller sleeve 285 protruding radially outward. In other embodiments, the roller shaft 286 can also be integrally formed with the cassette seat 211.

在一些实施例中,该多个导向结构28可包括在介质输送带22的传输路径上依次分布的导向结构281、导向结构282、导向结构283。待加热的介质输送带22依次经导向结构281、导向结构282、进口251进入雾化腔250中雾化,雾化后的介质输送带22从出口252输出再经过导向结构283导向,进而收卷在收纳盘24上。In some embodiments, the plurality of guide structures 28 may include guide structures 281, 282, and 283 that are sequentially distributed on the transmission path of the medium conveyor belt 22. The medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated sequentially passes through the guide structures 281, 282, and the inlet 251 to enter the atomizing chamber 250 for atomization, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 is output from the outlet 252 and then guided by the guide structure 283, and then rolled up on the storage tray 24.

导向结构281设置于出口2141的附近,可使得储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22能够顺畅传出,避免由于储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22的尺寸改变而对介质输送带22的传输产生影响。导向结构282、导向结构283分别设置于雾化座25的横向两相对侧,用于使介质输送带22与加热器121良好接触。需要说明的是,导向结构282、导向结构283分别与进口251、出口252对应设置,当进口251、出口252的设置位置改变时,导向结构282、导向结构283的设置位置可对应改变。The guide structure 281 is disposed near the outlet 2141, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can be smoothly conveyed, and the transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 is not affected by the change in the size of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23. The guide structure 282 and the guide structure 283 are respectively disposed on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25 in the lateral direction, so as to make the medium conveying belt 22 in good contact with the heater 121. It should be noted that the guide structure 282 and the guide structure 283 are respectively disposed corresponding to the inlet 251 and the outlet 252. When the setting positions of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are changed, the setting positions of the guide structure 282 and the guide structure 283 can be changed accordingly.

导向结构282、导向结构283、加热器121之间的相对位置被配置为,导向结构282、导向结构283对介质输送带22形成的定位面P2与加热器121的加热面1211所在的平面P1不处于同一平面上,并能够将介质输送带22压向加热面1211从而与加热面1211紧密接触。同时,由于阻尼器17的阻尼扭力使得介质输送带22一直处于预紧状态,从而能够使得介质输送带22和加热器121能够一直很好地贴合,雾化效率更高。这里,定位面P2是指由导向结构282与介质输送带22接触部分的出口侧(朝向进口251的一侧)与导向结构283与介质输送带22接触部分的入口侧(朝向出口252的一侧)所界定的平面。或者,定位面P2也可以理解为,在未安装加热器121时,介质输送带22与导向结构282、导向结构283相接触的一侧面由于导向结构282、导向结构283限位而处于的平面。The relative positions among the guide structure 282, the guide structure 283, and the heater 121 are configured such that the positioning surface P2 formed by the guide structure 282 and the guide structure 283 on the medium conveyor belt 22 is not on the same plane as the plane P1 where the heating surface 1211 of the heater 121 is located, and the medium conveyor belt 22 can be pressed toward the heating surface 1211 so as to be in close contact with the heating surface 1211. At the same time, due to the damping torque of the damper 17, the medium conveyor belt 22 is always in a pre-tightened state, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 and the heater 121 can always fit well, and the atomization efficiency is higher. Here, the positioning surface P2 refers to the plane defined by the outlet side (the side facing the inlet 251) of the contact portion of the guide structure 282 and the medium conveyor belt 22 and the inlet side (the side facing the outlet 252) of the contact portion of the guide structure 283 and the medium conveyor belt 22. Alternatively, the positioning surface P2 can also be understood as a plane where the side surface of the medium conveying belt 22 in contact with the guide structures 282 and 283 is located due to the limitation of the guide structures 282 and 283 when the heater 121 is not installed.

进一步地,加热面1211可与导向结构282、导向结构283对介质输送带22形成的定位面P2平行,能够使得加热面1211与介质输送带22的接触更均匀,雾化更均匀。Furthermore, the heating surface 1211 may be parallel to the positioning surface P2 formed by the guide structures 282 and 283 for the medium conveying belt 22 , so that the contact between the heating surface 1211 and the medium conveying belt 22 is more uniform and the atomization is more uniform.

具体地,在本实施例中,加热面1211位于加热器121的上表面,加热面1211所在的平面P1高于导向结构282、导向结构283对介质输送带22形成的定位面P2,且加热面1211与导向结构282、导向结构283的中轴线所限定的平面平行。加热器121的上表面与介质输送带22接触,从而加热器121还能够起到支撑介质输送带22的作用。可以理解地,在其他实施例中,加热面1211也可位于加热器121的下表面,此时,加热面1211所在的平面P1低于导向结构282、导向结构283对介质输送带22形成的定位面P2。Specifically, in this embodiment, the heating surface 1211 is located on the upper surface of the heater 121, and the plane P1 where the heating surface 1211 is located is higher than the positioning surface P2 formed by the guide structures 282 and 283 for the medium conveying belt 22, and the heating surface 1211 is parallel to the plane defined by the central axis of the guide structures 282 and 283. The upper surface of the heater 121 is in contact with the medium conveying belt 22, so that the heater 121 can also play a role in supporting the medium conveying belt 22. It can be understood that in other embodiments, the heating surface 1211 can also be located on the lower surface of the heater 121, in which case the plane P1 where the heating surface 1211 is located is lower than the positioning surface P2 formed by the guide structures 282 and 283 for the medium conveying belt 22.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括位置检测传感器289,用于检测介质输送带22的位置,从而更精确地控制驱动组件14的工作。位置检测传感器289可设置于导向结构281和导向结构282之间,通过导向结构281和导向结构282的限位使得位置检测传感器289能够精准检测介质输送带22的位置。同时,由于阻尼器17的阻尼扭力使得介质输送带22一直处于预紧状态,保证位置检测传感器289的位置检测更精准。位置检测传感器289可采用任何已知的位置传感器,例如红外位置检测传感器。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a position detection sensor 289 for detecting the position of the media conveying belt 22, so as to more accurately control the operation of the driving assembly 14. The position detection sensor 289 may be disposed between the guide structure 281 and the guide structure 282, and the position detection sensor 289 may accurately detect the position of the media conveying belt 22 through the limiting of the guide structure 281 and the guide structure 282. At the same time, due to the damping torque of the damper 17, the media conveying belt 22 is always in a pre-tightened state, ensuring that the position detection of the position detection sensor 289 is more accurate. The position detection sensor 289 may be any known position sensor, such as an infrared position detection sensor.

图18-21示出了本发明第三实施例中的气溶胶生成系统100,该气溶胶生成系统100包括相互配合的气溶胶生成装置10和气溶胶生成制品20。其中,气溶胶生成制品20用于存储基质层222,气溶胶生成装置10用于在通电后加热基质层222,以生成气溶胶。18-21 show an aerosol generating system 100 in a third embodiment of the present invention, wherein the aerosol generating system 100 comprises an aerosol generating device 10 and an aerosol generating article 20 that cooperate with each other. The aerosol generating article 20 is used to store a substrate layer 222, and the aerosol generating device 10 is used to heat the substrate layer 222 after being powered on to generate an aerosol.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成系统100的一端还具有吸嘴30,用于供用户抽吸基质层222雾化后生成的气溶胶。在本实施例中,吸嘴30呈圆柱状。在其他实施例中,该吸嘴30不限于呈圆柱状,其也可以为扁平的柱状或者其他形状。In some embodiments, one end of the aerosol generating system 100 further has a nozzle 30 for the user to inhale the aerosol generated after the atomization of the matrix layer 222. In this embodiment, the nozzle 30 is cylindrical. In other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, and it can also be a flat column or other shapes.

具体地,气溶胶生成制品20可包括盒体21以及收容于盒体21中的介质输送带22,介质输送带22沿其长度方向分布有基质层222。在一些实施例中,介质输送带22可通过卷绕的方式设置于盒体21中,卷绕设置的方式能够使得在盒体21中有限的空间内能够存储较多的介质输送带22,使得单个气溶胶生成制品20能够多次雾化使用。Specifically, the aerosol generating article 20 may include a box body 21 and a medium conveying belt 22 contained in the box body 21, wherein the medium conveying belt 22 has a matrix layer 222 distributed along its length. In some embodiments, the medium conveying belt 22 may be disposed in the box body 21 in a winding manner, and the winding arrangement manner enables more medium conveying belts 22 to be stored in a limited space in the box body 21, so that a single aerosol generating article 20 can be atomized and used multiple times.

进一步地,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括储存盘23和收纳盘24,介质输送带22未被加热的部分可卷绕于储存盘23上,介质输送带22已被加热后的部分可卷绕于收纳盘24上。通过将雾化前后的介质输送带22分别卷绕在储存盘23和收纳盘24上,能够避免窜味等不佳用户体验。Furthermore, the aerosol generating product 20 may further include a storage tray 23 and a receiving tray 24. The unheated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage tray 23, and the heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the receiving tray 24. By winding the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization on the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24, respectively, poor user experience such as odor crosstalk can be avoided.

气溶胶生成装置10包括机体11以及收容于机体11中的加热器121、电源13、驱动组件14和主控板15。主控板15上设置有用于控制加热器121的控制电路,该控制电路分别与加热器121、电源13、驱动组件14电连接。加热器121用于在通电后通过接触或者非接触的方式加热气溶胶生成制品20中的基质层222,以生成气溶胶。驱动组件14用于提供介质输送带22行进的驱动力,使得介质输送带22能够从储存盘23放卷,经过加热器121被加热雾化,然后被收纳盘24收卷。The aerosol generating device 10 includes a body 11 and a heater 121, a power supply 13, a driving assembly 14 and a main control board 15 housed in the body 11. The main control board 15 is provided with a control circuit for controlling the heater 121, and the control circuit is electrically connected to the heater 121, the power supply 13 and the driving assembly 14 respectively. The heater 121 is used to heat the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 in a contact or non-contact manner after being powered on to generate an aerosol. The driving assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to travel, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can be unwound from the storage disk 23, heated and atomized by the heater 121, and then rewound by the storage disk 24.

在本实施例中,加热器121采用电阻式的加热方式,其能够通过焦耳效应产生热量。加热器121具有一加热面1211,加热面1211与介质输送带22直接接触,从而将热量传递到介质输送带22进行烘烤加热。进一步地,加热器121可以为片状,加热面1211位于加热器121沿厚度方向的一侧并可以为平面或大致为平面,便于与带状的介质输送带22充分接触,增大发热面积。In this embodiment, the heater 121 adopts a resistive heating method, which can generate heat through the Joule effect. The heater 121 has a heating surface 1211, and the heating surface 1211 is in direct contact with the medium conveyor belt 22, so as to transfer heat to the medium conveyor belt 22 for baking and heating. Further, the heater 121 can be in a sheet shape, and the heating surface 1211 is located on one side of the heater 121 along the thickness direction and can be a plane or a substantially plane, so as to facilitate full contact with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and increase the heating area.

此外,在本实施例中,加热面1211位于加热器121靠近吸嘴30的上侧面,使得加热器121还具有支撑介质输送带22的作用,有利于介质输送带22与加热器121的贴合。In addition, in this embodiment, the heating surface 1211 is located on the upper side of the heater 121 close to the suction nozzle 30 , so that the heater 121 also has the function of supporting the medium conveying belt 22 , which is beneficial to the fitting of the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121 .

当然,在其他实施例中,加热面1211也可位于加热器121的其他侧面上,例如下侧面。在其另一些实施例中,加热器121不限于为片状,其也可以为柱状等其他形状。在另一些实施例中,加热器121也可采用电磁加热、红外辐射、超声、微波、等离子等其他加热方式。Of course, in other embodiments, the heating surface 1211 may also be located on other sides of the heater 121, such as the lower side. In other embodiments, the heater 121 is not limited to being in the form of a sheet, but may also be in other shapes such as a columnar shape. In other embodiments, the heater 121 may also use other heating methods such as electromagnetic heating, infrared radiation, ultrasound, microwave, plasma, etc.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10还可包括安装座122,安装座122可采用陶瓷或PEEK(聚醚醚酮)等耐高温材料制成。加热器121的一端可插装于安装座122上,并经由安装座122固定于机体11中,可减少加热器121向机体11传递的热量,利于隔热。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a mounting seat 122, which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone). One end of the heater 121 may be inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed to the body 11 via the mounting seat 122, which may reduce the heat transferred from the heater 121 to the body 11 and facilitate heat insulation.

在一些实施例中,驱动组件14为电动驱动结构,其可包括减速器141以及与减速器141连接的输出轴142,减速器141通过输出轴142输出驱动力。在其他实施例中,驱动组件14也可包括电机等其他电动驱动结构。在另一些实施例中,驱动组件14也可不限于为电动驱动结构,其也可包括手动驱动结构,比如手柄或者手轮。In some embodiments, the drive assembly 14 is an electric drive structure, which may include a reducer 141 and an output shaft 142 connected to the reducer 141, and the reducer 141 outputs the driving force through the output shaft 142. In other embodiments, the drive assembly 14 may also include other electric drive structures such as a motor. In other embodiments, the drive assembly 14 is also not limited to an electric drive structure, and it may also include a manual drive structure, such as a handle or a handwheel.

机体11可大致呈长方体状,机体11的上端形成有供吸嘴30伸出的插口1110,机体11内形成有一用于收容气溶胶生成制品20的容纳腔1120。气溶胶生成制品20可拆卸地配接于容纳腔1120中。当气溶胶生成制品20内的基质层222用尽后,可通过更换气溶胶生成制品20来实现基质层222的更新。气溶胶生成装置10可重复利用,从而可降低气溶胶生成系统100的使用成本。当然,在其他实施例中,机体11不局限于呈长方体状,其也可以呈圆柱状、跑道形柱状或椭圆柱状等其他形状。The body 11 may be roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and a socket 1110 for the nozzle 30 to extend out is formed at the upper end of the body 11, and a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed in the body 11. The aerosol generating product 20 is detachably connected to the receiving cavity 1120. When the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 is used up, the matrix layer 222 can be updated by replacing the aerosol generating product 20. The aerosol generating device 10 can be reused, thereby reducing the use cost of the aerosol generating system 100. Of course, in other embodiments, the body 11 is not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and it can also be in other shapes such as a cylindrical shape, a racetrack-shaped column or an elliptical column.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10还可包括滑盖116,滑盖116可滑动地设置于机体11上,以遮挡或显露插口1110。在不需要使用气溶胶生成装置10时,可推动滑盖116将插口1110遮挡住,防止灰尘进入到插口1110。在需要使用时,推动滑盖116将插口1110露出,以便吸嘴30能够穿过插口1110。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a sliding cover 116, which may be slidably disposed on the body 11 to cover or expose the socket 1110. When the aerosol generating device 10 is not needed, the sliding cover 116 may be pushed to cover the socket 1110 to prevent dust from entering the socket 1110. When the aerosol generating device 10 is needed, the sliding cover 116 may be pushed to expose the socket 1110 so that the nozzle 30 can pass through the socket 1110.

机体11在一些实施例中可包括框体112以及分别与框体112相配合的盖体111、底座113。盖体111、底座113可分别设置于框体112沿厚度方向的两侧。框体112与底座113之间形成有一安装腔1130,该安装腔1130可用于容纳电源13、减速器141、主控板15等零部件。底座113与框体112之间可通过可拆卸的方式连接在一起,便于维修、更换或升级安装腔1130中的零部件。当然,底座113与框体112之间也可通过不可拆卸的方式连接在一起,避免用户误打开安装腔1130而造成零部件的损坏。In some embodiments, the body 11 may include a frame 112 and a cover 111 and a base 113 respectively matched with the frame 112. The cover 111 and the base 113 may be respectively arranged on both sides of the frame 112 along the thickness direction. An installation cavity 1130 is formed between the frame 112 and the base 113, and the installation cavity 1130 can be used to accommodate components such as the power supply 13, the reducer 141, and the main control board 15. The base 113 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner to facilitate maintenance, replacement or upgrading of components in the installation cavity 1130. Of course, the base 113 and the frame 112 can also be connected together in a non-detachable manner to prevent users from accidentally opening the installation cavity 1130 and causing damage to components.

框体112朝向盒体21的一侧还可凹陷形成有一用于容纳安装座122的安装腔1121。加热器121的一端插装于安装座122中,并经由安装座122固定于安装腔1121中。加热器121的另一端可穿过盒体21以加热盒体21中的介质输送带22。The frame 112 may be recessed on one side of the box body 21 to form a mounting cavity 1121 for accommodating the mounting seat 122. One end of the heater 121 is inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed in the mounting cavity 1121 via the mounting seat 122. The other end of the heater 121 may pass through the box body 21 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 in the box body 21.

盖体111与框体112之间形成有用于收容气溶胶生成制品20的容纳腔1120。盖体111与框体112之间可通过卡扣连接、螺纹连接、磁吸连接等可拆卸的方式连接在一起,便于通过打开盖体111,实现气溶胶生成制品20的取出和更换。在本实施例中,盖体111朝向框体112的一侧嵌置有至少一个磁铁114,框体112朝向盖体111的一侧对应至少一个磁铁114嵌置有至少一个磁铁115,使得盖体111、框体112之间通过磁铁114、磁铁115相互磁吸固定。A receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed between the cover 111 and the frame 112. The cover 111 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner such as a snap connection, a threaded connection, a magnetic connection, etc., so that the aerosol generating product 20 can be taken out and replaced by opening the cover 111. In this embodiment, at least one magnet 114 is embedded on the side of the cover 111 facing the frame 112, and at least one magnet 115 is embedded on the side of the frame 112 facing the cover 111 corresponding to the at least one magnet 114, so that the cover 111 and the frame 112 are magnetically fixed to each other through the magnets 114 and 115.

在一些实施例中,盖体111可全部或至少部分由透明的材料形成。术语“透明的”用于描述这样的材料:其允许至少显著比例的入射光穿过它,使得能够看穿材料。在本发明中,大体上透明的材料可以允许足够的光通过它,使得盖体111内的介质输送带22是可见的。In some embodiments, the cover 111 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material. The term "transparent" is used to describe a material that allows at least a significant portion of incident light to pass through it, allowing for seeing through the material. In the present invention, a substantially transparent material may allow enough light to pass through it so that the media transport belt 22 within the cover 111 is visible.

盖体111可以是完全透明的;或者,盖体111也可以具有较低水平的透明度,同时仍能透射足够的光,使得盖体111内的介质输送带22可见。进一步地,盖体111可包括由透明的材料形成的一个或多个区域,以使得介质输送带22的一部分经由该一个或多个区域可见。此外,由透明的材料形成的区域可以为彩色、有色或无色的。当然,在其他实施例中,盖体111也可以由不透明的材料制成。The cover 111 may be completely transparent; alternatively, the cover 111 may have a lower level of transparency while still transmitting enough light to allow the media conveyor belt 22 within the cover 111 to be visible. Further, the cover 111 may include one or more areas formed of a transparent material so that a portion of the media conveyor belt 22 is visible through the one or more areas. In addition, the area formed of the transparent material may be colored, tinted, or colorless. Of course, in other embodiments, the cover 111 may also be made of an opaque material.

如图22-25所示,盒体21内形成有容腔210,介质输送带22、储存盘23和收纳盘24均收容于容腔210中。在实施例中,盒体21、容腔210均大致呈长方体状,储存盘23和收纳盘24沿容腔210的长度方向并排分布。在其他实施例中,盒体21、容腔210不局限于呈长方体状,当然,储存盘23和收纳盘24的排布方式也不受限制。在另一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20也可不包括盒座211和/或盒盖212。As shown in FIGS. 22-25 , a cavity 210 is formed in the box body 21, and the medium conveyor belt 22, the storage tray 23, and the receiving tray 24 are all received in the cavity 210. In the embodiment, the box body 21 and the cavity 210 are both roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are arranged side by side along the length direction of the cavity 210. In other embodiments, the box body 21 and the cavity 210 are not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and of course, the arrangement of the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 is also not limited. In other embodiments, the aerosol generating product 20 may also not include the box seat 211 and/or the box cover 212.

盒体21可包括相互配合的盒座211和盒盖212。容腔210形成于盒座211和盒盖212之间,具体地,容腔210可由盒座211或盒盖212凹陷形成,也可由盒座211和盒盖212共同凹陷形成。盒座211和盒盖212之间可通过螺纹连接、卡扣连接、磁吸连接、粘接等可拆卸或不可拆卸的方式固定在一起。The box body 21 may include a box seat 211 and a box cover 212 that cooperate with each other. The cavity 210 is formed between the box seat 211 and the box cover 212. Specifically, the cavity 210 may be formed by a depression of the box seat 211 or the box cover 212, or may be formed by a depression of both the box seat 211 and the box cover 212. The box seat 211 and the box cover 212 may be fixed together in a detachable or non-detachable manner such as a threaded connection, a snap connection, a magnetic connection, or an adhesive connection.

在本实施例中,容腔210由盒座211沿厚度方向的一侧凹陷形成,盒盖212盖设于容腔210的敞开口处以封盖容腔210,且盒盖212与盒座211之间通过若干个螺钉213相互固定。In this embodiment, the cavity 210 is formed by a depression on one side of the box seat 211 along the thickness direction, and the box cover 212 is disposed at the open mouth of the cavity 210 to seal the cavity 210, and the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are fixed to each other by a plurality of screws 213.

在一些实施例中,盒体21可全部或至少部分由透明的材料形成,使得盒体21内的介质输送带22可见。当然,在其他实施例中,盒体21也可以由不透明的材料制成。In some embodiments, the box body 21 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material, so that the medium conveying belt 22 in the box body 21 is visible. Of course, in other embodiments, the box body 21 may also be made of an opaque material.

储存盘23和收纳盘24分别可转动地设置于盒体21中。储存盘23能够沿预设方向转动以放卷介质输送带22,收纳盘24能够沿与预设方向相同或相反的方向转动以收卷介质输送带22。在本实施例中,储存盘23被配置为沿顺时针方向(在其他实施例中也可以为逆时针方向)转动以放卷介质输送带22,收纳盘24被配置为沿顺时针方向(在其他实施例中也可以为逆时针方向)转动以收卷介质输送带22。The storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are rotatably disposed in the box body 21. The storage tray 23 can rotate in a preset direction to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 can rotate in a direction that is the same as or opposite to the preset direction to rewind the medium conveying belt 22. In this embodiment, the storage tray 23 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.

在本实施例中,收纳盘24为主动轮并与驱动组件14连接,储存盘23为从动轮,收纳盘24在驱动组件14的驱动下转动以收卷介质输送带22,从而带动储存盘23同步转动以放卷介质输送带22。在其他实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24也可都为主动轮,并可分别与驱动组件14连接。在另一些实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24也可不同步转动,例如,储存盘23先放卷一段介质输送带22,加热完成后,再驱动收纳盘24转动进行收卷。In this embodiment, the storage tray 24 is a driving wheel and is connected to the driving assembly 14, and the storage tray 23 is a driven wheel. The storage tray 24 rotates under the drive of the driving assembly 14 to reel in the medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the storage tray 23 to rotate synchronously to unwind the medium conveying belt 22. In other embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also be driving wheels and can be connected to the driving assembly 14 respectively. In other embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also rotate asynchronously. For example, the storage tray 23 first unwinds a section of the medium conveying belt 22, and after heating is completed, the storage tray 24 is driven to rotate for rewinding.

介质输送带22可包括带状的基带221以及设置于基带221上的基质层222。该基质层222可包括固体、凝胶中的一种或多种雾化介质,用于在加热后生成气溶胶。基带221用于承载基质层222。The medium conveyor belt 22 may include a belt-shaped base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222 disposed on the base belt 221. The matrix layer 222 may include one or more atomizing media such as solid and gel, and is used to generate aerosol after heating. The base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222.

基带221具有在厚度方向上相对设置的第一表面2211和第二表面2212,在介质输送带22缠绕在储存盘23、收纳盘24上时,基带221的第二表面2212可朝向储存盘23、收纳盘24的中轴线,基带221的第一表面2211相对远离储存盘23、收纳盘24的中轴线。基质层222可通过涂覆、压合或粘贴等方式设置于基带221的第一表面2211和/或第二表面2212上。此外,基质层222在基带221上可连续分布,或者也可分区域间隔分布。The base belt 221 has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 that are arranged opposite to each other in the thickness direction. When the medium conveying belt 22 is wound on the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 may face the central axis of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, and the first surface 2211 of the base belt 221 is relatively far away from the central axis of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24. The matrix layer 222 may be arranged on the first surface 2211 and/or the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 by coating, lamination or bonding. In addition, the matrix layer 222 may be distributed continuously on the base belt 221, or may be distributed at intervals in different regions.

具体地,在本实施例中,基质层222设置于基带221的第一表面2211上。当然,在其他实施例中,基质层222也可设置于基带221的第二表面2212,或者同时设置于基带221的第一表面2211和第二表面2212。Specifically, in this embodiment, the matrix layer 222 is disposed on the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221. Of course, in other embodiments, the matrix layer 222 may also be disposed on the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221, or disposed on both the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221.

进一步地,基带221可采用导热材料制成,例如铝箔或者铜箔等导热金属材料制成。当然,基带221也可采用导热的非金属材料制成,例如石墨等。在另一些实施例中,介质输送带22也可全部由基质层222制成,即,介质输送带22不包括基带221。Furthermore, the base belt 221 may be made of a heat-conducting material, such as a heat-conducting metal material such as aluminum foil or copper foil. Of course, the base belt 221 may also be made of a heat-conducting non-metallic material, such as graphite. In other embodiments, the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be made entirely of the matrix layer 222, that is, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not include the base belt 221.

加热器121可与介质输送带22未设置有基质层222的一侧(在本实施例中为介质输送带22的第二表面2212)接触,通过基带221向基质层222传递热量。这样,可以避免加热后的基质层222黏连在加热器121上,影响加热器121的加热效果。当然,在其他实施例中,加热器121也可直接与基质层222接触,有利于提高热传递效率,减少热量损失,此时,介质输送带22可无需采用导热材料制成。The heater 121 can contact the side of the medium conveying belt 22 where the matrix layer 222 is not provided (in this embodiment, the second surface 2212 of the medium conveying belt 22), and transfer heat to the matrix layer 222 through the base belt 221. In this way, it is possible to prevent the heated matrix layer 222 from adhering to the heater 121, thereby affecting the heating effect of the heater 121. Of course, in other embodiments, the heater 121 can also directly contact the matrix layer 222, which is conducive to improving the heat transfer efficiency and reducing the heat loss. In this case, the medium conveying belt 22 does not need to be made of a heat-conducting material.

在一些实施例中,容腔210的底壁还可凸出形成有隔板214、隔板215,隔板214、隔板215的内壁面分别界定有第一收容空间2140、第二收容空间2150,储存盘23、收纳盘24分别可转动地设置于第一收容空间2140和第二收容空间2150中。第一收容空间2140的一侧具有出口2141,第二收容空间2150的一侧具有进口2151,储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22能够通过出口2141穿出,并通过进口2151收卷于收纳盘24上。In some embodiments, the bottom wall of the cavity 210 may also protrude to form a partition 214 and a partition 215, and the inner wall surfaces of the partition 214 and the partition 215 respectively define a first receiving space 2140 and a second receiving space 2150, and the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24 are rotatably disposed in the first receiving space 2140 and the second receiving space 2150. One side of the first receiving space 2140 has an outlet 2141, and one side of the second receiving space 2150 has an inlet 2151, and the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can pass through the outlet 2141 and be rolled up on the receiving disk 24 through the inlet 2151.

介质输送带22雾化前后的部分分别收容于第一收容空间2140和第二收容空间2150中。由于通常基质层222在雾化后会变得较为蓬松,使得介质输送带22的厚度变大。为了更好地利用容腔210内的空间,可将第二收容空间2150的直径设计为大于第一收容空间2140的直径。当然,在其他实施例中,在不考虑容腔210的空间尺寸的情况下,第二收容空间2150的直径也可小于或等于第一收容空间2140的直径。The parts of the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization are respectively contained in the first containing space 2140 and the second containing space 2150. Since the matrix layer 222 usually becomes more fluffy after atomization, the thickness of the medium conveyor belt 22 becomes larger. In order to better utilize the space in the cavity 210, the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can be designed to be larger than the diameter of the first containing space 2140. Of course, in other embodiments, without considering the spatial size of the cavity 210, the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can also be less than or equal to the diameter of the first containing space 2140.

在本实施例中,隔板214、隔板215分别呈一侧开口的圆弧形,隔板214和隔板215连接形成一S形结构,且隔板214位于隔板215的下侧,隔板214位于隔板215远离吸嘴30的一侧。当然,在其他实施例中,隔板214和隔板215的结构也可作其他变形,例如,隔板214和隔板215也可不连接在一起,再例如,隔板214和/或隔板215也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。当然,在另一些实施例中,隔板214和隔板215也可在水平方向上并排排布,或者也可与水平方向或竖直方向呈一定夹角倾斜分布。In this embodiment, the partition 214 and the partition 215 are respectively in the shape of an arc with one side open, and the partition 214 and the partition 215 are connected to form an S-shaped structure, and the partition 214 is located on the lower side of the partition 215, and the partition 214 is located on the side of the partition 215 away from the suction nozzle 30. Of course, in other embodiments, the structure of the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be deformed in other ways, for example, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be not connected together, and for another example, the partition 214 and/or the partition 215 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. Of course, in other embodiments, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, or can also be inclined at a certain angle to the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.

储存盘23可包括储存卷轴233以及分别设置于储存卷轴233两端的储存底盘231、储存盘盖232。盒座211上形成有安装孔2142,储存卷轴233的一端可转动地安装于安装孔2142中。介质输送带22未被加热的部分可卷绕在储存卷轴233上,储存底盘231、储存盘盖232可限位介质输送带22在储存卷轴233轴向上的浮动空间,避免介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。在组装时,可先将储存底盘231安装在盒座211上,并且储存底盘231能够在盒座211上顺畅转动,然后将介质输送带22以缠绕的方式储存在储存盘23内,最后再盖上储存盘盖232。The storage disk 23 may include a storage reel 233 and a storage chassis 231 and a storage disk cover 232 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 233. A mounting hole 2142 is formed on the cassette seat 211, and one end of the storage reel 233 is rotatably mounted in the mounting hole 2142. The unheated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 233, and the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 may limit the floating space of the medium conveying belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 233 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process. During assembly, the storage chassis 231 may be first mounted on the cassette seat 211, and the storage chassis 231 may be able to rotate smoothly on the cassette seat 211, and then the medium conveying belt 22 may be stored in the storage disk 23 in a winding manner, and finally the storage disk cover 232 may be covered.

在本实施例中,储存底盘231、储存盘盖232均呈圆盘形,储存卷轴233呈圆柱状并与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232同轴设置,使得卷绕在储存卷轴233上的介质输送带22也可圆柱形。当然,在其他实施例中,储存卷轴233也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。储存底盘231、储存盘盖232的径向截面的形状可与储存卷轴233的径向截面的形状相匹配(相同或相似),或者,也可与储存卷轴233的径向截面的形状不匹配(不相同或不相似)。In this embodiment, the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 are both in the shape of a disk, and the storage reel 233 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 233 can also be in the shape of a cylinder. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 233 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. The shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233.

在本实施例中,储存卷轴233与储存底盘231一体成型,其可由储存底盘231的一侧中部沿轴向延伸形成。在其他实施例中,储存卷轴233也可与储存盘盖232一体成型,或者,储存卷轴233也可部分形成于储存底盘231上、部分形成于储存盘盖232上,或者,储存卷轴233也可以为一个单独成型的部件。In this embodiment, the storage reel 233 is integrally formed with the storage chassis 231, and can be formed by extending axially from the middle portion of one side of the storage chassis 231. In other embodiments, the storage reel 233 can also be integrally formed with the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 can also be partially formed on the storage chassis 231 and partially formed on the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 can also be a separately formed component.

在一些实施例中,储存底盘231和储存盘盖232之间的距离大于介质输送带22的宽度,让介质输送带22不与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232之间产生摩擦,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停。这里,储存底盘231和储存盘盖232之间的距离是指储存底盘231朝向储存盘盖232的一侧与储存盘盖232朝向储存底盘231的一侧之间的距离。In some embodiments, the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 is greater than the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the medium conveying belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck. Here, the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 refers to the distance between the side of the storage chassis 231 facing the storage tray cover 232 and the side of the storage tray cover 232 facing the storage chassis 231.

可以理解地,在其他实施例中,储存底盘231和储存盘盖232之间的距离也可等于介质输送带22的宽度,使得介质输送带22的运动更稳定。在另一些实施例中,储存卷轴233也可仅一端设置有储存底盘231或储存盘盖232,介质输送带22另一端的限位可通过盒盖212或盒座211实现。当然,在另外一些实施例中,储存卷轴233的两端也可不设置有储存底盘231和储存盘盖232。It can be understood that in other embodiments, the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 may also be equal to the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable. In other embodiments, the storage reel 233 may be provided with the storage chassis 231 or the storage disc cover 232 at only one end, and the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be limited by the box cover 212 or the box seat 211. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 233 may not be provided with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 at both ends.

类似地,收纳盘24也可包括收纳卷轴243以及分别设置于收纳卷轴243两端的收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242。盒座211上形成有安装孔2152,储存卷轴233的一端可转动地安装于安装孔2152中。介质输送带22被加热后的部分可卷绕在收纳卷轴243上,收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242可限位介质输送带22在收纳卷轴243轴向上的浮动空间,避免介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。在组装时,可先将收纳底盘241安装在盒座211上,并且收纳底盘241能够在盒座211上顺畅转动,然后将介质输送带22雾化后的部分以缠绕的方式收纳在收纳盘24内,最后再盖上收纳盘盖242。Similarly, the storage tray 24 may also include a storage reel 243 and a storage chassis 241 and a storage tray cover 242 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 243. A mounting hole 2152 is formed on the cassette seat 211, and one end of the storage reel 233 is rotatably mounted in the mounting hole 2152. The heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 243, and the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may limit the floating space of the medium conveyor belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 243 to prevent the medium conveyor belt 22 from coming out during the winding process. During assembly, the storage chassis 241 may be first mounted on the cassette seat 211, and the storage chassis 241 may be able to rotate smoothly on the cassette seat 211, and then the atomized portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be stored in the storage tray 24 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 242 may be covered.

在本实施例中,收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242均呈圆盘形,收纳卷轴243呈圆柱状并与收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242同轴设置,使得卷绕在收纳卷轴243上的介质输送带22也可圆柱形。当然,在其他实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242的径向截面的形状可与收纳卷轴243的径向截面的形状相匹配(相同或相似),或者,也可与收纳卷轴243的径向截面的形状不匹配(不相同或不相似)。In this embodiment, the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 are both in the shape of a disk, and the storage reel 243 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 243 can also be in the shape of a cylinder. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 243 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. The shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243.

在一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243可包括与收纳底盘241一体成型的轴段2431以及与收纳盘盖242一体成型的轴段2432,轴段2431、轴段2432相互套接后形成收纳卷轴243。在其他实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可仅由收纳底盘241或收纳盘盖242一体延伸形成,或者,收纳卷轴243也可以为一个单独成型的部件。In some embodiments, the storage reel 243 may include a shaft segment 2431 integrally formed with the storage chassis 241 and a shaft segment 2432 integrally formed with the storage tray cover 242, and the shaft segments 2431 and 2432 are mutually sleeved to form the storage reel 243. In other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may also be formed by only extending the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242, or the storage reel 243 may also be a separately formed component.

在一些实施例中,收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242之间的距离大于介质输送带22的宽度,让介质输送带22不与收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242之间产生摩擦,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停。这里,收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242之间的距离是指收纳底盘241朝向收纳盘盖242的一侧与收纳盘盖242朝向收纳底盘241的一侧之间的距离。In some embodiments, the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 is greater than the width of the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck. Here, the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 refers to the distance between the side of the storage chassis 241 facing the storage tray cover 242 and the side of the storage tray cover 242 facing the storage chassis 241.

可以理解地,在其他实施例中,收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242之间的距离也可等于介质输送带22的宽度,使得介质输送带22的运动更稳定。在另一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可仅一端设置有收纳底盘241或收纳盘盖242,介质输送带22另一端的限位可通过盒盖212或盒座211实现。当然,在另外一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243的两端也可不设置有收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242。It can be understood that in other embodiments, the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may also be equal to the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable. In other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may also be provided with the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242 at only one end, and the position limitation of the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be achieved by the box cover 212 or the box seat 211. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may not be provided with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 at both ends.

收纳卷轴243上形成有一插孔244,输出轴142可穿过盒座211从而插接在插孔244中。在一些实施例中,插孔244、输出轴142的径向截面可以为D形、四边形、多边形、椭圆形等非圆形,使得输出轴142能够在插孔244中周向固定,从而使得减速器141能够带动收纳盘24转动,且插接配合的方式使得气溶胶生成制品20与气溶胶生成装置10之间的装拆容易。当然,在其他实施例中,输出轴142也可通过其他方式与收纳盘24连接,例如螺纹连接、销接等。The storage reel 243 is formed with an insertion hole 244, and the output shaft 142 can pass through the box seat 211 and be inserted into the insertion hole 244. In some embodiments, the radial cross-section of the insertion hole 244 and the output shaft 142 can be a non-circular shape such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 142 can be circumferentially fixed in the insertion hole 244, so that the reducer 141 can drive the storage tray 24 to rotate, and the plug-in matching method makes it easy to assemble and disassemble the aerosol generating product 20 and the aerosol generating device 10. Of course, in other embodiments, the output shaft 142 can also be connected to the storage tray 24 in other ways, such as threaded connection, pin connection, etc.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括阻尼组件26,阻尼组件26与储存盘23连接,用于在储存盘23相对于盒体21转动的过程中提供阻尼扭力。收纳盘24在减速器141的驱动下旋转带动介质输送带22运动,因受到储存盘23的阻尼扭力,介质输送带22会处于一种绷紧状态,从而使介质输送带22在运动过程中达到预紧的效果,使介质输送带22能够很好地保持与加热器121的贴合。这里,减速器141的扭力=κ* F1*(R1/R2) / η,其中,κ为安全系数,F1为阻尼扭力,η为减速器141的传动效率,R1为介质输送带22缠绕在收纳盘24上的部分的半径,R2为介质输送带22缠绕在储存盘23上的部分的半径。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a damping assembly 26, which is connected to the storage disk 23 and is used to provide a damping torque during the rotation of the storage disk 23 relative to the box body 21. The storage disk 24 rotates under the drive of the reducer 141 to drive the medium conveying belt 22 to move. Due to the damping torque of the storage disk 23, the medium conveying belt 22 will be in a taut state, so that the medium conveying belt 22 achieves a pre-tightening effect during the movement, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can maintain a good fit with the heater 121. Here, the torque of the reducer 141 = κ * F1 * (R1/R2) / η, where κ is a safety factor, F1 is a damping torque, η is a transmission efficiency of the reducer 141, R1 is the radius of the portion of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 24, and R2 is the radius of the portion of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23.

具体地,储存盘23、盒体21分别具有摩擦面2311、摩擦面2144,在储存盘23相对于盒体21转动时,摩擦面2311与摩擦面2144之间发生相对摩擦转动从而产生摩擦阻尼,该摩擦阻尼使得储存盘23在转动时产生一个与其转动方向相反的阻尼扭力F1。Specifically, the storage disk 23 and the box body 21 have a friction surface 2311 and a friction surface 2144 respectively. When the storage disk 23 rotates relative to the box body 21, relative friction rotation occurs between the friction surface 2311 and the friction surface 2144, thereby generating friction damping. The friction damping causes the storage disk 23 to generate a damping torque F1 in the opposite direction of its rotation when rotating.

阻尼组件26在一些实施例中可包括弹性件260,例如弹簧、弹片、硅胶件等。该弹性件260分别与储存盘23、盒体21抵接,通过弹性件260的弹性变形使得储存盘23的摩擦面2311弹性抵紧在盒体21的摩擦面2144上。储存盘23、盒体21分别具有限位面235、限位面216,弹性件260的两端分别抵靠于限位面235和限位面216上,通过受压产生弹性变形,从而对储存盘23施加一个弹性力,使得摩擦面2311抵紧在摩擦面2144上。进一步地,限位面235、限位面216可在储存盘23的轴向上相对设置,使得弹性件260受压而产生的弹性力沿储存盘23的轴向。In some embodiments, the damping assembly 26 may include an elastic member 260, such as a spring, a spring sheet, a silicone member, etc. The elastic member 260 is respectively in contact with the storage disk 23 and the box body 21, and the friction surface 2311 of the storage disk 23 is elastically pressed against the friction surface 2144 of the box body 21 through the elastic deformation of the elastic member 260. The storage disk 23 and the box body 21 have a limiting surface 235 and a limiting surface 216, respectively. The two ends of the elastic member 260 are respectively pressed against the limiting surface 235 and the limiting surface 216, and elastic deformation is generated by pressure, thereby applying an elastic force to the storage disk 23, so that the friction surface 2311 is pressed against the friction surface 2144. Further, the limiting surface 235 and the limiting surface 216 can be arranged opposite to each other in the axial direction of the storage disk 23, so that the elastic force generated by the elastic member 260 under pressure is along the axial direction of the storage disk 23.

在一些实施例中,第一收容空间2140的底壁可凸出形成有摩擦凸起2143,储存底盘231远离储存盘盖232的一侧可抵靠在摩擦凸起2143上。该摩擦凸起2143与储存底盘231相接触的一侧形成摩擦面2144,相应地,储存底盘231与摩擦凸起2143相接触的表面形成摩擦面2311。在本实施例中,摩擦凸起2143为圆环形,且其中心线与储存盘23的转动中心线重合。In some embodiments, the bottom wall of the first receiving space 2140 may be protruded to form a friction protrusion 2143, and the side of the storage base 231 away from the storage disk cover 232 may abut against the friction protrusion 2143. The side of the friction protrusion 2143 in contact with the storage base 231 forms a friction surface 2144, and correspondingly, the surface of the storage base 231 in contact with the friction protrusion 2143 forms a friction surface 2311. In this embodiment, the friction protrusion 2143 is annular, and its center line coincides with the rotation center line of the storage disk 23.

可以理解地,在其他实施例中,摩擦凸起2143也可形成于储存盘23上。当然,在另一些实施例中,摩擦凸起2143也可以有多个,和/或,摩擦凸起2143也不局限于呈圆环形。例如,摩擦凸起2143有多个,该多个摩擦凸起2143为同心设置的圆环形。再例如,,摩擦凸起2143有多个,该多个摩擦凸起2143可呈圆弧形并在储存盘盖232的周向和/或径向间隔排布。It can be understood that in other embodiments, the friction protrusion 2143 can also be formed on the storage disk 23. Of course, in other embodiments, there can be multiple friction protrusions 2143, and/or the friction protrusion 2143 is not limited to being in a circular ring shape. For example, there are multiple friction protrusions 2143, and the multiple friction protrusions 2143 are in a circular ring shape arranged concentrically. For another example, there are multiple friction protrusions 2143, and the multiple friction protrusions 2143 can be in an arc shape and arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction and/or radial direction of the storage disk cover 232.

在本实施例中,弹性件260为弹簧266,该弹簧266可设置于储存卷轴233中,弹簧266的两端分别抵靠于限位面235和限位面216上,从而将储存盘23弹性抵紧在盒座211的摩擦凸起2143上。储存卷轴233上形成有一阻尼孔234,阻尼孔234的一端敞开,另一端形成有限位面235。弹簧266能够从阻尼孔234的敞开侧装入到阻尼孔234中,并抵靠在限位面235上。较佳地,阻尼孔234、弹簧266、储存盘23的中轴线均重合,有利于储存盘23的受力均匀。In this embodiment, the elastic member 260 is a spring 266, which can be arranged in the storage reel 233, and the two ends of the spring 266 respectively abut against the limiting surface 235 and the limiting surface 216, so that the storage disk 23 is elastically pressed against the friction protrusion 2143 of the box seat 211. A damping hole 234 is formed on the storage reel 233, and one end of the damping hole 234 is open, and the other end forms a limiting surface 235. The spring 266 can be installed into the damping hole 234 from the open side of the damping hole 234, and abut against the limiting surface 235. Preferably, the central axis of the damping hole 234, the spring 266, and the storage disk 23 are all coincident, which is conducive to uniform force on the storage disk 23.

盒盖212朝向盒座211的一侧可凸出形成有凸台2121,该凸台2121可伸入到阻尼孔234中,凸台2121朝向盒座211的一端端面形成限位面216。可以理解地,在其他实施例中,盒盖212上也可不设置有凸台2121,弹簧266可直接抵靠于盒盖212上。A boss 2121 may be formed on one side of the box cover 212 facing the box seat 211, and the boss 2121 may extend into the damping hole 234, and an end surface of the boss 2121 facing the box seat 211 forms a limiting surface 216. It can be understood that in other embodiments, the box cover 212 may not be provided with the boss 2121, and the spring 266 may directly abut against the box cover 212.

在盒盖212固定到盒座211上后,凸台2121能够压缩弹簧266,使得弹簧266对储存底盘231施加一个朝向盒座211的弹性力F2。储存底盘231在弹性力F2的作用下让摩擦面2311、摩擦面2144在相对转动时产生摩擦力,从而产生阻尼扭力F1。通常,可通过调整弹簧266的弹性力F2,来调整储存盘23受到的阻尼扭力F1。After the box cover 212 is fixed to the box seat 211, the boss 2121 can compress the spring 266, so that the spring 266 applies an elastic force F2 toward the box seat 211 to the storage chassis 231. Under the action of the elastic force F2, the storage chassis 231 generates friction between the friction surfaces 2311 and 2144 during relative rotation, thereby generating a damping torque F1. Generally, the damping torque F1 on the storage tray 23 can be adjusted by adjusting the elastic force F2 of the spring 266.

具体地,在本实施例中,阻尼扭力F1=F2*U*R3,其中,U为摩擦面2311与摩擦面2144之间的摩擦系数,R3为摩擦面2311与摩擦面2144之间的接触半径。在本实施例中,R3=(摩擦面2144的最大半径+摩擦面2144的最小半径)/2。Specifically, in this embodiment, the damping torque F1=F2*U*R3, wherein U is the friction coefficient between the friction surface 2311 and the friction surface 2144, and R3 is the contact radius between the friction surface 2311 and the friction surface 2144. In this embodiment, R3=(maximum radius of the friction surface 2144+minimum radius of the friction surface 2144)/2.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括雾化座25,雾化座25内形成有雾化腔250,雾化座25的侧壁上形成有与雾化腔250相连通的进口251和出口252。介质输送带22能够经由进口251进入雾化腔250,在雾化腔250中加热雾化后再经由出口252传出。加热器121的一端可伸入到雾化腔250中,以加热进入到雾化腔250中的介质输送带22。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include an atomizing seat 25, in which an atomizing chamber 250 is formed, and an inlet 251 and an outlet 252 are formed on the side wall of the atomizing seat 25, which are connected to the atomizing chamber 250. The medium conveying belt 22 can enter the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251, and after being heated and atomized in the atomizing chamber 250, it can be transmitted through the outlet 252. One end of the heater 121 can extend into the atomizing chamber 250 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 entering the atomizing chamber 250.

在一些实施例中,雾化座25可通过可拆卸的方式与盒座211安装在一起,雾化座25可重复使用,降低更换成本。当然,在其实施例中,雾化座25也可通过不可拆卸的方式与盒座211安装在一起,或者,雾化座25也可与盒座211一体成型。In some embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 can be installed together with the box seat 211 in a detachable manner, and the atomizer seat 25 can be reused to reduce replacement costs. Of course, in its embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 can also be installed together with the box seat 211 in a non-detachable manner, or the atomizer seat 25 can also be integrally formed with the box seat 211.

在一些实施例中,进口251、出口252的截面(这里指与介质输送带22的行进方向垂直的截面)形状可与介质输送带22的截面(这里指与介质输送带22的行进方向垂直的截面)形状相同或相似。此外,进口251、出口252与介质输送带22之间可采用间隙配合,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停,还能够避免进口251、出口252的边缘刮擦到介质输送带22。此外,进口251的周缘与介质输送带22之间形成的环形间隙2510和/或出口252的周缘与介质输送带22之间形成的环形间隙2520还能够作为气流通道使用,以将雾化腔250与容腔210相连通,进而与外界相连通。In some embodiments, the cross-section of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22) may be the same or similar to the cross-section of the medium conveyor belt 22 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22). In addition, a clearance fit may be adopted between the inlet 251, the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck, and the edges of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be prevented from scratching the medium conveyor belt 22. In addition, the annular gap 2510 formed between the periphery of the inlet 251 and the medium conveyor belt 22 and/or the annular gap 2520 formed between the periphery of the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be used as an airflow channel to connect the atomization chamber 250 with the receiving chamber 210, and then with the outside world.

可以理解地,环形间隙2510、环形间隙2520的尺寸不易过小,否则可能会造成吸阻过大,导致雾化腔250压强过小而造成抽吸紊流,影响抽吸体验。当然,环形间隙2510、环形间隙2520的尺寸也不易过大,减少或避免雾化腔250内生成的气溶胶经由进口251、出口252的泄漏。It is understandable that the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too small, otherwise it may cause excessive suction resistance, resulting in too low pressure in the atomizing chamber 250 and causing suction turbulence, affecting the suction experience. Of course, the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too large, reducing or avoiding the leakage of the aerosol generated in the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251 and the outlet 252.

具体地,在本实施例中,雾化座25设置于盒座211的上侧,其可包括主体部254以及由主体部254向上延伸的延伸部255。主体部254可收容于容腔210的上侧,雾化腔250形成于主体部254内,进口251、出口252分别形成于雾化座25的横向两相对侧。延伸部255内形成有与雾化腔250相连通的出气通道253,吸嘴30的下端与出气通道253相连通。延伸部255可伸出于盒体21之外,便于与吸嘴30相互插接配合。延伸部255的侧壁上还可形成有将出气通道253与外界相连通的通气口2550。Specifically, in the present embodiment, the atomizer seat 25 is arranged on the upper side of the box seat 211, and may include a main body 254 and an extension portion 255 extending upward from the main body 254. The main body 254 can be accommodated in the upper side of the cavity 210, the atomizer cavity 250 is formed in the main body 254, and the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are respectively formed on the two opposite sides of the atomizer seat 25. An air outlet channel 253 connected to the atomizer cavity 250 is formed in the extension portion 255, and the lower end of the suction nozzle 30 is connected to the air outlet channel 253. The extension portion 255 can extend out of the box body 21, so as to facilitate mutual plug-in cooperation with the suction nozzle 30. A vent 2550 that connects the air outlet channel 253 with the outside world can also be formed on the side wall of the extension portion 255.

当然,在其他实施例中,雾化座25也可设置于盒体21的其他位置。此外,进口251、出口252的设置方式也不受限制,例如,进口251、出口252可设置于雾化座25的同一侧;或者,进口251设置于雾化座25的横向一侧,出口252设置于雾化座25的底侧。Of course, in other embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 may also be disposed at other positions of the box body 21. In addition, the configuration of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 is not limited, for example, the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be disposed on the same side of the atomizer seat 25; or, the inlet 251 is disposed on one lateral side of the atomizer seat 25, and the outlet 252 is disposed on the bottom side of the atomizer seat 25.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括设置于容腔210中的导向结构28,用于在介质输送带22的行进过程中进行导向,保证介质输送带22的顺畅传输,并保证介质输送带22与加热器121良好的接触。在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成制品20可包括多个导向结构28,该多个导向结构28在介质输送带22的传输路径上间隔分布。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a guide structure 28 disposed in the cavity 210, which is used to guide the medium conveying belt 22 during its travel, to ensure smooth transmission of the medium conveying belt 22, and to ensure good contact between the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121. In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may include a plurality of guide structures 28, which are spaced apart on the transmission path of the medium conveying belt 22.

在一些实施例中,该多个导向结构28可包括在介质输送带22的传输路径上依次分布的限位滚轮28a、限位滚轮28b、限位滚轮28c,通过各限位滚轮的滚动摩擦保证介质输送带22的顺畅传输。待加热的介质输送带22依次经限位滚轮28a、限位滚轮28b、进口251进入雾化腔250中雾化,雾化后的介质输送带22从出口252输出再经过限位滚轮28c导向,进而收卷在收纳盘24上。当然,在其他实施例中,导向结构28也可包括凸筋、凸柱等其他结构。In some embodiments, the plurality of guide structures 28 may include a limiting roller 28a, a limiting roller 28b, and a limiting roller 28c sequentially distributed on the transmission path of the medium conveyor belt 22, and the rolling friction of each limiting roller ensures the smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22. The medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated sequentially passes through the limiting roller 28a, the limiting roller 28b, and the inlet 251 into the atomizing chamber 250 for atomization, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 is output from the outlet 252 and then guided by the limiting roller 28c, and then rolled up on the storage tray 24. Of course, in other embodiments, the guide structure 28 may also include other structures such as convex ribs and convex columns.

限位滚轮28a设置于出口2141的附近,可使得储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22能够顺畅传出,避免由于储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22的尺寸改变而对介质输送带22的传输产生影响。限位滚轮28b、限位滚轮28c分别设置于雾化座25的横向两相对侧,用于使介质输送带22与加热器121良好接触。需要说明的是,限位滚轮28b、限位滚轮28c分别与进口251、出口252对应设置,当进口251、出口252的设置位置改变时,限位滚轮28b、限位滚轮28c的设置位置可对应改变。The limiting roller 28a is arranged near the outlet 2141, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can be smoothly transmitted, and the transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 is not affected by the change in the size of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23. The limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c are respectively arranged on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25 in the lateral direction, so as to make the medium conveying belt 22 in good contact with the heater 121. It should be noted that the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c are respectively arranged corresponding to the inlet 251 and the outlet 252. When the setting positions of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are changed, the setting positions of the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c can be changed accordingly.

进一步地,限位滚轮28c和收纳盘24之间还可设置有限位滚轮28d,限位滚轮28d能够增大介质输送带22在经过限位滚轮28c时的转角,改善雾化后的介质输送带22在经过转角时由于转角过小而产生的分层问题。Furthermore, a limiting roller 28d can be provided between the limiting roller 28c and the storage tray 24. The limiting roller 28d can increase the turning angle of the medium conveying belt 22 when passing through the limiting roller 28c, thereby improving the stratification problem caused by the atomized medium conveying belt 22 passing through the corner due to the small turning angle.

图26示出了本发明一些变更实施例中的气溶胶生成制品20,其与上述实施例中的主要区别在于,本实施例中的阻尼组件26包括软质结构件267,该软质结构件267可采用硅胶等软质材料制成并能够在受压后发生弹性变形,从而使得储存盘23相对于盒体21转动时,储存盘23与盒体21之间产生摩擦力,从而为储存盘23提供阻尼扭力。Figure 26 shows an aerosol generating product 20 in some modified embodiments of the present invention. The main difference between them and the above-mentioned embodiments is that the damping component 26 in this embodiment includes a soft structural member 267. The soft structural member 267 can be made of soft materials such as silicone and can be elastically deformed after being compressed, so that when the storage disk 23 rotates relative to the box body 21, friction is generated between the storage disk 23 and the box body 21, thereby providing damping torque for the storage disk 23.

具体地,储存卷轴233上可沿轴向形成有一阻尼孔234,软质结构件267容置在阻尼孔234中。进一步地,盒座211可朝向阻尼孔234内凸出形成有一导向柱2111,软质结构件267可呈圆筒形并过盈配合于导向柱2111的外壁面以及阻尼孔234的孔壁面之间。可通过调整软质结构件267的过盈量和/或柔软度,来调整储存盘23与盒体21在相对转动时产生的摩擦力。Specifically, a damping hole 234 may be formed in the axial direction of the storage reel 233, and the soft structural member 267 is accommodated in the damping hole 234. Further, the cassette seat 211 may be formed with a guide column 2111 protruding toward the damping hole 234, and the soft structural member 267 may be cylindrical and interference fit between the outer wall surface of the guide column 2111 and the hole wall surface of the damping hole 234. The friction force generated by the storage disk 23 and the cassette body 21 during relative rotation can be adjusted by adjusting the interference amount and/or softness of the soft structural member 267.

导向柱2111远离储存盘盖232的一端沿径向向外凸出形成有限位面216,储存盘盖232朝向盒座211的一侧形成有限位面235。限位面216和限位面235可用于限位软质结构件267在导向柱2111上的轴向位置。软质结构件267的两端可分别抵靠于限位面216和限位面235上,使得软质结构件267的位置更稳定。当然,软质结构件267也可在限位面216和限位面235之间具有一定的浮动空间。One end of the guide column 2111 away from the storage disk cover 232 protrudes radially outward to form a limited surface 216, and the storage disk cover 232 forms a limited surface 235 on the side facing the cassette seat 211. The limited surface 216 and the limited surface 235 can be used to limit the axial position of the soft structure 267 on the guide column 2111. The two ends of the soft structure 267 can be respectively against the limited surface 216 and the limited surface 235, so that the position of the soft structure 267 is more stable. Of course, the soft structure 267 can also have a certain floating space between the limited surface 216 and the limited surface 235.

在其他实施例中,可根据需要对上述具体结构作任意变形。例如,导向柱2111也可形成于储存盘盖232上。再例如,软质结构件267也可呈实心圆柱形。当然,在另一些他实施例中,也可通过在导向柱2111的外壁面与阻尼孔234的孔壁面之间填充阻尼介质(例如阻尼硅胶),通过阻尼介质的粘性来使得储存盘23相对于盒体21转动时发生阻尼扭力。In other embodiments, the above-mentioned specific structure can be arbitrarily deformed as needed. For example, the guide column 2111 can also be formed on the storage disk cover 232. For another example, the soft structural member 267 can also be in the shape of a solid cylinder. Of course, in other embodiments, a damping medium (such as damping silica gel) can be filled between the outer wall surface of the guide column 2111 and the hole wall surface of the damping hole 234, and the viscosity of the damping medium can be used to make the storage disk 23 generate damping torque when rotating relative to the box body 21.

在一些实施例中,容腔210的腔底面也可形成有摩擦面2144,储存底盘231可与该摩擦面2144接触,在储存盘23相对于盒体21转动时,储存盘23与摩擦面2144之间产生摩擦力。In some embodiments, the bottom surface of the cavity 210 may also be formed with a friction surface 2144 , and the storage base 231 may contact the friction surface 2144 . When the storage disk 23 rotates relative to the box body 21 , friction is generated between the storage disk 23 and the friction surface 2144 .

在图27所示的实施例中,储存底盘231与容腔210的腔底面之间不接触,从而在储存盘23相对于盒体21转动时,储存盘23与容腔210的腔底面之间不会产生摩擦力,仅储存卷轴233与导向柱2111之间会在相对转动时产生摩擦力。In the embodiment shown in Figure 27, there is no contact between the storage chassis 231 and the bottom surface of the cavity 210, so that when the storage disk 23 rotates relative to the box body 21, no friction force will be generated between the storage disk 23 and the bottom surface of the cavity 210. Only friction force will be generated between the storage reel 233 and the guide column 2111 during relative rotation.

图28-32示出了本发明第四实施例中的气溶胶生成系统100,该气溶胶生成系统100包括相互配合的气溶胶生成装置10和气溶胶生成制品20。其中,气溶胶生成制品20用于存储基质层222,气溶胶生成装置10用于在通电后加热基质层222,以生成气溶胶。28-32 show an aerosol generating system 100 in a fourth embodiment of the present invention, wherein the aerosol generating system 100 comprises an aerosol generating device 10 and an aerosol generating article 20 that cooperate with each other. The aerosol generating article 20 is used to store a substrate layer 222, and the aerosol generating device 10 is used to heat the substrate layer 222 after being powered on to generate aerosol.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成系统100的一端还具有吸嘴30,用于供用户抽吸基质层222雾化后生成的气溶胶。在本实施例中,吸嘴30呈圆柱状。在其他实施例中,该吸嘴30不限于呈圆柱状,其也可以为扁平的柱状或者其他形状。In some embodiments, one end of the aerosol generating system 100 further has a nozzle 30 for the user to inhale the aerosol generated after the atomization of the matrix layer 222. In this embodiment, the nozzle 30 is cylindrical. In other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, and it can also be a flat column or other shapes.

具体地,气溶胶生成制品20可包括盒体21以及收容于盒体21中的介质输送带22,介质输送带22沿其长度方向分布有基质层222。在一些实施例中,介质输送带22可通过卷绕的方式设置于盒体21中,卷绕设置的方式能够使得在盒体21中有限的空间内能够存储较多的介质输送带22,使得单个气溶胶生成制品20能够多次雾化使用。Specifically, the aerosol generating article 20 may include a box body 21 and a medium conveying belt 22 contained in the box body 21, wherein the medium conveying belt 22 has a matrix layer 222 distributed along its length. In some embodiments, the medium conveying belt 22 may be disposed in the box body 21 in a winding manner, and the winding arrangement manner enables more medium conveying belts 22 to be stored in a limited space in the box body 21, so that a single aerosol generating article 20 can be atomized and used multiple times.

进一步地,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括储存盘23和收纳盘24,介质输送带22未被加热的部分可卷绕于储存盘23上,介质输送带22已被加热后的部分可卷绕于收纳盘24上。通过将雾化前后的介质输送带22分别卷绕在储存盘23和收纳盘24上,能够避免窜味等不佳用户体验。Furthermore, the aerosol generating product 20 may further include a storage tray 23 and a receiving tray 24. The unheated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage tray 23, and the heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the receiving tray 24. By winding the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization on the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24, respectively, poor user experience such as odor crosstalk can be avoided.

气溶胶生成装置10包括机体11以及收容于机体11中的加热器121、电源13、驱动组件14和主控板15。主控板15上设置有用于控制加热器121的控制电路,该控制电路分别与加热器121、电源13、驱动组件14电连接。加热器121用于在通电后通过接触或者非接触的方式加热气溶胶生成制品20中的基质层222,以生成气溶胶。驱动组件14用于提供介质输送带22行进的驱动力,使得介质输送带22能够从储存盘23放卷,经过加热器121被加热雾化,然后被收纳盘24收卷。The aerosol generating device 10 includes a body 11 and a heater 121, a power supply 13, a driving assembly 14 and a main control board 15 housed in the body 11. The main control board 15 is provided with a control circuit for controlling the heater 121, and the control circuit is electrically connected to the heater 121, the power supply 13 and the driving assembly 14 respectively. The heater 121 is used to heat the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 in a contact or non-contact manner after being powered on to generate an aerosol. The driving assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to travel, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can be unwound from the storage disk 23, heated and atomized by the heater 121, and then rewound by the storage disk 24.

在本实施例中,加热器121采用电阻式的加热方式,其能够通过焦耳效应产生热量。加热器121具有一加热面1211,加热面1211与介质输送带22直接接触,从而将热量传递到介质输送带22进行烘烤加热。进一步地,加热器121可以为片状,加热面1211位于加热器121沿厚度方向的一侧并可以为平面或大致为平面,便于与带状的介质输送带22充分接触,增大发热面积。In this embodiment, the heater 121 adopts a resistive heating method, which can generate heat through the Joule effect. The heater 121 has a heating surface 1211, and the heating surface 1211 is in direct contact with the medium conveyor belt 22, so as to transfer heat to the medium conveyor belt 22 for baking and heating. Further, the heater 121 can be in a sheet shape, and the heating surface 1211 is located on one side of the heater 121 along the thickness direction and can be a plane or a substantially plane, so as to facilitate full contact with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and increase the heating area.

此外,在本实施例中,加热面1211位于加热器121靠近吸嘴30的上侧面,使得加热器121还具有支撑介质输送带22的作用,有利于介质输送带22与加热器121的贴合。In addition, in this embodiment, the heating surface 1211 is located on the upper side of the heater 121 close to the suction nozzle 30 , so that the heater 121 also has the function of supporting the medium conveying belt 22 , which is beneficial to the fitting of the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121 .

当然,在其他实施例中,加热面1211也可位于加热器121的其他侧面上,例如下侧面。在其另一些实施例中,加热器121不限于为片状,其也可以为柱状等其他形状。在另一些实施例中,加热器121也可采用电磁加热、红外辐射、超声、微波、等离子等其他加热方式。Of course, in other embodiments, the heating surface 1211 may also be located on other sides of the heater 121, such as the lower side. In other embodiments, the heater 121 is not limited to being in the form of a sheet, but may also be in other shapes such as a columnar shape. In other embodiments, the heater 121 may also use other heating methods such as electromagnetic heating, infrared radiation, ultrasound, microwave, plasma, etc.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10还可包括安装座122,安装座122可采用陶瓷或PEEK(聚醚醚酮)等耐高温材料制成。加热器121的一端可插装于安装座122上,并经由安装座122固定于机体11中,可减少加热器121向机体11传递的热量,利于隔热。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a mounting seat 122, which may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone). One end of the heater 121 may be inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed to the body 11 via the mounting seat 122, which may reduce the heat transferred from the heater 121 to the body 11 and facilitate heat insulation.

在一些实施例中,驱动组件14为电动驱动结构,其可包括减速器141以及与减速器141连接的输出轴142,减速器141通过输出轴142输出驱动力。在其他实施例中,驱动组件14也可包括电机等其他电动驱动结构。在另一些实施例中,驱动组件14也可不限于为电动驱动结构,其也可包括手动驱动结构,比如手柄或者手轮。In some embodiments, the drive assembly 14 is an electric drive structure, which may include a reducer 141 and an output shaft 142 connected to the reducer 141, and the reducer 141 outputs the driving force through the output shaft 142. In other embodiments, the drive assembly 14 may also include other electric drive structures such as a motor. In other embodiments, the drive assembly 14 is also not limited to an electric drive structure, and it may also include a manual drive structure, such as a handle or a handwheel.

机体11可大致呈长方体状,机体11的上端形成有供吸嘴30伸出的插口1110,机体11内形成有一用于收容气溶胶生成制品20的容纳腔1120。气溶胶生成制品20可拆卸地配接于容纳腔1120中。当气溶胶生成制品20内的基质层222用尽后,可通过更换气溶胶生成制品20来实现基质层222的更新。气溶胶生成装置10可重复利用,从而可降低气溶胶生成系统100的使用成本。当然,在其他实施例中,机体11不局限于呈长方体状,其也可以呈圆柱状、跑道形柱状或椭圆柱状等其他形状。The body 11 may be roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and a socket 1110 for the nozzle 30 to extend out is formed at the upper end of the body 11, and a receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed in the body 11. The aerosol generating product 20 is detachably connected to the receiving cavity 1120. When the matrix layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 is used up, the matrix layer 222 can be updated by replacing the aerosol generating product 20. The aerosol generating device 10 can be reused, thereby reducing the use cost of the aerosol generating system 100. Of course, in other embodiments, the body 11 is not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and it can also be in other shapes such as a cylindrical shape, a racetrack-shaped column or an elliptical column.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10还可包括滑盖116,滑盖116可滑动地设置于机体11上,以遮挡或显露插口1110。在不需要使用气溶胶生成装置10时,可推动滑盖116将插口1110遮挡住,防止灰尘进入到插口1110。在需要使用时,推动滑盖116将插口1110露出,以便吸嘴30能够穿过插口1110。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a sliding cover 116, which may be slidably disposed on the body 11 to cover or expose the socket 1110. When the aerosol generating device 10 is not needed, the sliding cover 116 may be pushed to cover the socket 1110 to prevent dust from entering the socket 1110. When the aerosol generating device 10 is needed, the sliding cover 116 may be pushed to expose the socket 1110 so that the nozzle 30 can pass through the socket 1110.

机体11在一些实施例中可包括框体112以及分别与框体112相配合的盖体111、底座113。盖体111、底座113可分别设置于框体112沿厚度方向的两侧。框体112与底座113之间形成有一安装腔1130,该安装腔1130可用于容纳电源13、减速器141、主控板15等零部件。底座113与框体112之间可通过可拆卸的方式连接在一起,便于维修、更换或升级安装腔1130中的零部件。当然,底座113与框体112之间也可通过不可拆卸的方式连接在一起,避免用户误打开安装腔1130而造成零部件的损坏。In some embodiments, the body 11 may include a frame 112 and a cover 111 and a base 113 respectively matched with the frame 112. The cover 111 and the base 113 may be respectively arranged on both sides of the frame 112 along the thickness direction. An installation cavity 1130 is formed between the frame 112 and the base 113, and the installation cavity 1130 can be used to accommodate components such as the power supply 13, the reducer 141, and the main control board 15. The base 113 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner to facilitate the maintenance, replacement or upgrading of the components in the installation cavity 1130. Of course, the base 113 and the frame 112 can also be connected together in a non-detachable manner to prevent the user from accidentally opening the installation cavity 1130 and causing damage to the components.

框体112朝向盒体21的一侧还可凹陷形成有一用于容纳安装座122的安装腔1121。加热器121的一端插装于安装座122中,并经由安装座122固定于安装腔1121中。加热器121的另一端可穿过盒体21以加热盒体21中的介质输送带22。The frame 112 may be recessed on one side of the box body 21 to form a mounting cavity 1121 for accommodating the mounting seat 122. One end of the heater 121 is inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed in the mounting cavity 1121 via the mounting seat 122. The other end of the heater 121 may pass through the box body 21 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 in the box body 21.

盖体111与框体112之间形成有用于收容气溶胶生成制品20的容纳腔1120。盖体111与框体112之间可通过卡扣连接、螺纹连接、磁吸连接等一种或几种可拆卸的方式连接在一起,便于通过打开盖体111,实现气溶胶生成制品20的取出和更换。在本实施例中,盖体111朝向框体112的一侧嵌置有至少一个磁铁114,框体112朝向盖体111的一侧对应至少一个磁铁114嵌置有至少一个磁铁115,使得盖体111、框体112之间通过磁铁114、磁铁115相互磁吸固定。A receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed between the cover 111 and the frame 112. The cover 111 and the frame 112 can be connected together by one or more detachable methods such as snap connection, threaded connection, magnetic connection, etc., so that the aerosol generating product 20 can be taken out and replaced by opening the cover 111. In this embodiment, at least one magnet 114 is embedded on the side of the cover 111 facing the frame 112, and at least one magnet 115 is embedded on the side of the frame 112 facing the cover 111 corresponding to the at least one magnet 114, so that the cover 111 and the frame 112 are magnetically fixed to each other through the magnets 114 and 115.

在一些实施例中,盖体111可全部或至少部分由透明的材料形成。术语“透明的”用于描述这样的材料:其允许至少显著比例的入射光穿过它,使得能够看穿材料。在本发明中,大体上透明的材料可以允许足够的光通过它,使得盖体111内的介质输送带22是可见的。In some embodiments, the cover 111 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material. The term "transparent" is used to describe a material that allows at least a significant portion of incident light to pass through it, allowing for seeing through the material. In the present invention, a substantially transparent material may allow enough light to pass through it so that the media transport belt 22 within the cover 111 is visible.

盖体111可以是完全透明的;或者,盖体111也可以具有较低水平的透明度,同时仍能透射足够的光,使得盖体111内的介质输送带22可见。进一步地,盖体111可包括由透明的材料形成的一个或多个区域,以使得介质输送带22的一部分经由该一个或多个区域可见。此外,由透明的材料形成的区域可以为彩色、有色或无色的。当然,在其他实施例中,盖体111也可以由不透明的材料制成。The cover 111 may be completely transparent; alternatively, the cover 111 may have a lower level of transparency while still transmitting enough light to allow the media conveyor belt 22 within the cover 111 to be visible. Further, the cover 111 may include one or more areas formed of a transparent material so that a portion of the media conveyor belt 22 is visible through the one or more areas. In addition, the area formed of the transparent material may be colored, tinted, or colorless. Of course, in other embodiments, the cover 111 may also be made of an opaque material.

如图32-34所示,盒体21内形成有容腔210,介质输送带22、储存盘23和收纳盘24均收容于容腔210中。在实施例中,盒体21、容腔210均大致呈长方体状,储存盘23和收纳盘24沿容腔210的长度方向并排分布。在其他实施例中,盒体21、容腔210不局限于呈长方体状,当然,储存盘23和收纳盘24的排布方式也不受限制。在另一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20也可不包括盒座211和/或盒盖212。As shown in FIGS. 32-34 , a cavity 210 is formed in the box body 21, and the medium conveyor belt 22, the storage tray 23, and the receiving tray 24 are all received in the cavity 210. In the embodiment, the box body 21 and the cavity 210 are both roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are arranged side by side along the length direction of the cavity 210. In other embodiments, the box body 21 and the cavity 210 are not limited to being in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and of course, the arrangement of the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 is also not limited. In other embodiments, the aerosol generating product 20 may also not include the box seat 211 and/or the box cover 212.

盒体21可包括相互配合的盒座211和盒盖212。容腔210形成于盒座211和盒盖212之间,具体地,容腔210可由盒座211或盒盖212凹陷形成,也可由盒座211和盒盖212共同凹陷形成。盒座211和盒盖212之间可通过螺纹连接、卡扣连接、磁吸连接、粘接等可拆卸或不可拆卸的方式固定在一起。The box body 21 may include a box seat 211 and a box cover 212 that cooperate with each other. The cavity 210 is formed between the box seat 211 and the box cover 212. Specifically, the cavity 210 may be formed by a depression of the box seat 211 or the box cover 212, or may be formed by a depression of both the box seat 211 and the box cover 212. The box seat 211 and the box cover 212 may be fixed together in a detachable or non-detachable manner such as a threaded connection, a snap connection, a magnetic connection, or an adhesive connection.

在本实施例中,容腔210由盒座211沿厚度方向的一侧凹陷形成,盒盖212盖设于容腔210的敞开口处以封盖容腔210,且盒盖212与盒座211之间通过若干个螺钉213相互固定。In this embodiment, the cavity 210 is formed by a depression on one side of the box seat 211 along the thickness direction, and the box cover 212 is disposed at the open mouth of the cavity 210 to seal the cavity 210, and the box cover 212 and the box seat 211 are fixed to each other by a plurality of screws 213.

在一些实施例中,盒体21可全部或至少部分由透明的材料形成,使得盒体21内的介质输送带22可见。当然,在其他实施例中,盒体21也可以由不透明的材料制成。In some embodiments, the box body 21 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material, so that the medium conveying belt 22 in the box body 21 is visible. Of course, in other embodiments, the box body 21 may also be made of an opaque material.

储存盘23和收纳盘24分别可转动地设置于盒体21中。储存盘23能够沿预设方向转动以放卷介质输送带22,收纳盘24能够沿与预设方向相同或相反的方向转动以收卷介质输送带22。在本实施例中,储存盘23被配置为沿顺时针方向(在其他实施例中也可以为逆时针方向)转动以放卷介质输送带22,收纳盘24被配置为沿顺时针方向(在其他实施例中也可以为逆时针方向)转动以收卷介质输送带22。The storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 are rotatably disposed in the box body 21. The storage tray 23 can rotate in a preset direction to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 can rotate in a direction that is the same as or opposite to the preset direction to rewind the medium conveying belt 22. In this embodiment, the storage tray 23 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to unwind the medium conveying belt 22, and the receiving tray 24 is configured to rotate in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) to rewind the medium conveying belt 22.

在本实施例中,收纳盘24为主动轮并与驱动组件14连接,储存盘23为从动轮,收纳盘24在驱动组件14的驱动下转动以收卷介质输送带22,从而带动储存盘23同步转动以放卷介质输送带22。在其他实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24也可都为主动轮,并可分别与驱动组件14连接。在另一些实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24也可不同步转动,例如,储存盘23先放卷一段介质输送带22,加热完成后,再驱动收纳盘24转动进行收卷。In this embodiment, the storage tray 24 is a driving wheel and is connected to the driving assembly 14, and the storage tray 23 is a driven wheel. The storage tray 24 rotates under the drive of the driving assembly 14 to reel in the medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the storage tray 23 to rotate synchronously to unwind the medium conveying belt 22. In other embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also be driving wheels and can be connected to the driving assembly 14 respectively. In other embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the storage tray 24 can also rotate asynchronously. For example, the storage tray 23 first unwinds a section of the medium conveying belt 22, and after heating is completed, the storage tray 24 is driven to rotate for rewinding.

介质输送带22可包括带状的基带221以及设置于基带221上的基质层222。该基质层222可包括固体、凝胶中的一种或多种,用于在加热后生成气溶胶。基带221用于承载基质层222。The medium conveyor belt 22 may include a belt-shaped base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222 disposed on the base belt 221. The matrix layer 222 may include one or more of a solid and a gel, and is used to generate an aerosol after heating. The base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222.

基带221具有在厚度方向上相对设置的第一表面2211和第二表面2212,在介质输送带22缠绕在储存盘23、收纳盘24上时,基带221的第二表面2212可朝向储存盘23、收纳盘24的中轴线,基带221的第一表面2211相对远离储存盘23、收纳盘24的中轴线。基质层222可通过涂覆、压合或粘贴等方式设置于基带221的第一表面2211和/或第二表面2212上。此外,基质层222在基带221上可连续分布,或者也可分区域间隔分布。The base belt 221 has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 that are arranged opposite to each other in the thickness direction. When the medium conveying belt 22 is wound on the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 may face the central axis of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, and the first surface 2211 of the base belt 221 is relatively far away from the central axis of the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24. The matrix layer 222 may be arranged on the first surface 2211 and/or the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 by coating, lamination or bonding. In addition, the matrix layer 222 may be distributed continuously on the base belt 221, or may be distributed at intervals in different regions.

具体地,在本实施例中,基质层222设置于基带221的第一表面2211上。当然,在其他实施例中,基质层222也可设置于基带221的第二表面2212,或者同时设置于基带221的第一表面2211和第二表面2212。Specifically, in this embodiment, the matrix layer 222 is disposed on the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221. Of course, in other embodiments, the matrix layer 222 may also be disposed on the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221, or disposed on both the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221.

进一步地,基带221可采用导热材料制成,例如铝箔或者铜箔等导热金属材料制成。当然,基带221也可采用导热的非金属材料制成,例如石墨等。在另一些实施例中,介质输送带22也可全部由基质层222制成,即,介质输送带22不包括基带221。Furthermore, the base belt 221 may be made of a heat-conducting material, such as a heat-conducting metal material such as aluminum foil or copper foil. Of course, the base belt 221 may also be made of a heat-conducting non-metallic material, such as graphite. In other embodiments, the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be made entirely of the matrix layer 222, that is, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not include the base belt 221.

加热器121可与介质输送带22未设置有基质层222的一侧(在本实施例中为介质输送带22的第二表面2212)接触,通过基带221向基质层222传递热量。这样,可以避免加热后的基质层222黏连在加热器121上,影响加热器121的加热效果。当然,在其他实施例中,加热器121也可直接与基质层222接触,有利于提高热传递效率,减少热量损失,此时,介质输送带22可无需采用导热材料制成。The heater 121 can contact the side of the medium conveying belt 22 where the matrix layer 222 is not provided (in this embodiment, the second surface 2212 of the medium conveying belt 22), and transfer heat to the matrix layer 222 through the base belt 221. In this way, it is possible to prevent the heated matrix layer 222 from adhering to the heater 121, thereby affecting the heating effect of the heater 121. Of course, in other embodiments, the heater 121 can also directly contact the matrix layer 222, which is conducive to improving the heat transfer efficiency and reducing the heat loss. In this case, the medium conveying belt 22 does not need to be made of a heat-conducting material.

在一些实施例中,容腔210的底壁还可凸出形成有隔板214、隔板215,隔板214、隔板215的内壁面分别界定有第一收容空间2140、第二收容空间2150,储存盘23、收纳盘24分别可转动地设置于第一收容空间2140和第二收容空间2150中。第一收容空间2140的一侧具有出口2141,第二收容空间2150的一侧具有进口2151,储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22能够通过出口2141穿出,并通过进口2151收卷于收纳盘24上。In some embodiments, the bottom wall of the cavity 210 may also protrude to form a partition 214 and a partition 215, and the inner wall surfaces of the partition 214 and the partition 215 respectively define a first receiving space 2140 and a second receiving space 2150, and the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24 are rotatably disposed in the first receiving space 2140 and the second receiving space 2150. One side of the first receiving space 2140 has an outlet 2141, and one side of the second receiving space 2150 has an inlet 2151, and the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can pass through the outlet 2141 and be rolled up on the receiving disk 24 through the inlet 2151.

介质输送带22雾化前后的部分分别收容于第一收容空间2140和第二收容空间2150中。由于通常基质层222在雾化后会变得较为蓬松,使得介质输送带22的厚度变大。为了更好地利用容腔210内的空间,可将第二收容空间2150的直径设计为大于第一收容空间2140的直径。当然,在其他实施例中,在不考虑容腔210的空间尺寸的情况下,第二收容空间2150的直径也可小于或等于第一收容空间2140的直径。The parts of the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization are respectively contained in the first containing space 2140 and the second containing space 2150. Since the matrix layer 222 usually becomes more fluffy after atomization, the thickness of the medium conveyor belt 22 becomes larger. In order to better utilize the space in the cavity 210, the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can be designed to be larger than the diameter of the first containing space 2140. Of course, in other embodiments, without considering the spatial size of the cavity 210, the diameter of the second containing space 2150 can also be less than or equal to the diameter of the first containing space 2140.

在本实施例中,隔板214、隔板215分别呈一侧开口的圆弧形,隔板214和隔板215连接形成一S形结构,且隔板214位于隔板215的下侧,隔板214位于隔板215远离吸嘴30的一侧。当然,在其他实施例中,隔板214和隔板215的结构也可作其他变形,例如,隔板214和隔板215也可不连接在一起,再例如,隔板214和/或隔板215也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。当然,在另一些实施例中,隔板214和隔板215也可在水平方向上并排排布,或者也可与水平方向或竖直方向呈一定夹角倾斜分布。In this embodiment, the partition 214 and the partition 215 are respectively in the shape of an arc with one side open, and the partition 214 and the partition 215 are connected to form an S-shaped structure, and the partition 214 is located on the lower side of the partition 215, and the partition 214 is located on the side of the partition 215 away from the suction nozzle 30. Of course, in other embodiments, the structure of the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be deformed in other ways, for example, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be not connected together, and for another example, the partition 214 and/or the partition 215 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. Of course, in other embodiments, the partition 214 and the partition 215 can also be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, or can also be inclined at a certain angle to the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.

储存盘23可包括储存卷轴233以及分别设置于储存卷轴233两端的储存底盘231、储存盘盖232。介质输送带22未被加热的部分可卷绕在储存卷轴233上,储存底盘231、储存盘盖232可限位介质输送带22在储存卷轴233轴向上的浮动空间,避免介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。在组装时,可先将储存底盘231安装在盒座211上,并且储存底盘231能够在盒座211上顺畅转动,然后将介质输送带22以缠绕的方式储存在储存盘23内,最后再盖上储存盘盖232。The storage tray 23 may include a storage reel 233 and a storage chassis 231 and a storage tray cover 232 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 233. The unheated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 233, and the storage chassis 231 and the storage tray cover 232 may limit the floating space of the medium conveying belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 233 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process. During assembly, the storage chassis 231 may be first installed on the cassette seat 211, and the storage chassis 231 may be able to rotate smoothly on the cassette seat 211, and then the medium conveying belt 22 may be stored in the storage tray 23 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 232 may be covered.

在本实施例中,储存底盘231、储存盘盖232均呈圆盘形,储存卷轴233呈圆柱状并与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232同轴设置,使得卷绕在储存卷轴233上的介质输送带22也可圆柱形。当然,在其他实施例中,储存卷轴233也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。储存底盘231、储存盘盖232的径向截面的形状可与储存卷轴233的径向截面的形状相匹配(相同或相似),或者,也可与储存卷轴233的径向截面的形状不匹配(不相同或不相似)。In this embodiment, the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 are both in the shape of a disk, and the storage reel 233 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 233 can also be in the shape of a cylinder. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 233 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. The shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 233.

在本实施例中,储存卷轴233与储存底盘231一体成型,其可由储存底盘231的一侧中部沿轴向延伸形成。在其他实施例中,储存卷轴233也可与储存盘盖232一体成型,或者,储存卷轴233也可部分形成于储存底盘231上、部分形成于储存盘盖232上,或者,储存卷轴233也可以为一个单独成型的部件。In this embodiment, the storage reel 233 is integrally formed with the storage chassis 231, and can be formed by extending axially from the middle portion of one side of the storage chassis 231. In other embodiments, the storage reel 233 can also be integrally formed with the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 can also be partially formed on the storage chassis 231 and partially formed on the storage disc cover 232, or the storage reel 233 can also be a separately formed component.

在一些实施例中,储存底盘231和储存盘盖232之间的距离大于介质输送带22的宽度,让介质输送带22不与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232之间产生摩擦,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停。In some embodiments, the distance between the storage base 231 and the storage base cover 232 is greater than the width of the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage base 231 and the storage base cover 232, allowing the medium conveyor belt 22 to move smoothly without getting stuck.

可以理解地,在其他实施例中,储存底盘231和储存盘盖232之间的距离也可等于介质输送带22的宽度,使得介质输送带22的运动更稳定。在另一些实施例中,储存卷轴233也可仅一端设置有储存底盘231或储存盘盖232,介质输送带22另一端的限位可通过盒盖212或盒座211实现。当然,在另外一些实施例中,储存卷轴233的两端也可不设置有储存底盘231和储存盘盖232。It can be understood that in other embodiments, the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 may also be equal to the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable. In other embodiments, the storage reel 233 may be provided with the storage chassis 231 or the storage disc cover 232 at only one end, and the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be limited by the box cover 212 or the box seat 211. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 233 may not be provided with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disc cover 232 at both ends.

类似地,收纳盘24也可包括收纳卷轴243以及分别设置于收纳卷轴243两端的收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242。盒座211上形成有安装孔2152,储存卷轴233的一端可转动地安装于安装孔2152中。介质输送带22被加热后的部分可卷绕在收纳卷轴243上,收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242可限位介质输送带22在收纳卷轴243轴向上的浮动空间,避免介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。在组装时,可先将收纳底盘241安装在盒座211上,并且收纳底盘241能够在盒座211上顺畅转动,然后将介质输送带22雾化后的部分以缠绕的方式收纳在收纳盘24内,最后再盖上收纳盘盖242。Similarly, the storage tray 24 may also include a storage reel 243 and a storage chassis 241 and a storage tray cover 242 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 243. A mounting hole 2152 is formed on the cassette seat 211, and one end of the storage reel 233 is rotatably mounted in the mounting hole 2152. The heated portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 243, and the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may limit the floating space of the medium conveyor belt 22 in the axial direction of the storage reel 243 to prevent the medium conveyor belt 22 from coming out during the winding process. During assembly, the storage chassis 241 may be first mounted on the cassette seat 211, and the storage chassis 241 may be able to rotate smoothly on the cassette seat 211, and then the atomized portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 may be stored in the storage tray 24 in a winding manner, and finally the storage tray cover 242 may be covered.

在本实施例中,收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242均呈圆盘形,收纳卷轴243呈圆柱状并与收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242同轴设置,使得卷绕在收纳卷轴243上的介质输送带22也可圆柱形。当然,在其他实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可呈椭圆形或方形等其他形状。收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242的径向截面的形状可与收纳卷轴243的径向截面的形状相匹配(相同或相似),或者,也可与收纳卷轴243的径向截面的形状不匹配(不相同或不相似)。In this embodiment, the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 are both in the shape of a disk, and the storage reel 243 is in the shape of a cylinder and is coaxially arranged with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage reel 243 can also be in the shape of a cylinder. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 243 can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a square. The shape of the radial cross section of the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 can match (be the same as or similar to) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243, or can also not match (be different from or different from) the shape of the radial cross section of the storage reel 243.

在一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243可包括与收纳底盘241一体成型的轴段2431以及与收纳盘盖242一体成型的轴段2432,轴段2431、轴段2432相互套接后形成收纳卷轴243。在其他实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可仅由收纳底盘241或收纳盘盖242一体延伸形成,或者,收纳卷轴243也可以为一个单独成型的部件。In some embodiments, the storage reel 243 may include a shaft segment 2431 integrally formed with the storage chassis 241 and a shaft segment 2432 integrally formed with the storage tray cover 242, and the shaft segments 2431 and 2432 are mutually sleeved to form the storage reel 243. In other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may also be formed by only extending the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242, or the storage reel 243 may also be a separately formed component.

在一些实施例中,收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242之间的距离大于介质输送带22的宽度,让介质输送带22不与收纳底盘241、收纳盘盖242之间产生摩擦,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停。In some embodiments, the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 is greater than the width of the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 does not generate friction with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242, allowing the medium conveyor belt 22 to move smoothly without getting stuck.

可以理解地,在其他实施例中,收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242之间的距离也可等于介质输送带22的宽度,使得介质输送带22的运动更稳定。在另一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243也可仅一端设置有收纳底盘241或收纳盘盖242,介质输送带22另一端的限位可通过盒盖212或盒座211实现。当然,在另外一些实施例中,收纳卷轴243的两端也可不设置有收纳底盘241和收纳盘盖242。It can be understood that in other embodiments, the distance between the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 may also be equal to the width of the medium conveying belt 22, so that the movement of the medium conveying belt 22 is more stable. In other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may also be provided with the storage chassis 241 or the storage tray cover 242 at only one end, and the position limitation of the other end of the medium conveying belt 22 may be achieved by the box cover 212 or the box seat 211. Of course, in other embodiments, the storage reel 243 may not be provided with the storage chassis 241 and the storage tray cover 242 at both ends.

收纳卷轴243上形成有一插孔244,输出轴142可穿过盒座211从而插接在插孔244中。在一些实施例中,插孔244、输出轴142的径向截面可以为D形、四边形、多边形、椭圆形等非圆形,使得输出轴142能够在插孔244中周向固定,从而使得减速器141能够带动收纳盘24转动,且插接配合的方式使得气溶胶生成制品20与气溶胶生成装置10之间的装拆容易。当然,在其他实施例中,输出轴142也可通过其他方式与收纳盘24连接,例如螺纹连接、销接等。The storage reel 243 is formed with an insertion hole 244, and the output shaft 142 can pass through the box seat 211 and be inserted into the insertion hole 244. In some embodiments, the radial cross-section of the insertion hole 244 and the output shaft 142 can be a non-circular shape such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 142 can be circumferentially fixed in the insertion hole 244, so that the reducer 141 can drive the storage tray 24 to rotate, and the plug-in matching method makes it easy to assemble and disassemble the aerosol generating product 20 and the aerosol generating device 10. Of course, in other embodiments, the output shaft 142 can also be connected to the storage tray 24 in other ways, such as threaded connection, pin connection, etc.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括阻尼组件26,阻尼组件26用于在储存盘23相对于盒体21转动的过程中提供阻尼扭力。收纳盘24在减速器141的驱动下旋转带动介质输送带22运动,因受到储存盘23的阻尼扭力,介质输送带22会处于一种绷紧状态,从而使介质输送带22在运动过程中达到预紧的效果,使介质输送带22能够很好地保持与加热器121的贴合。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a damping assembly 26, which is used to provide a damping torque during the rotation of the storage disk 23 relative to the box body 21. The storage disk 24 is driven by the reducer 141 to rotate and drive the medium conveying belt 22 to move. Due to the damping torque of the storage disk 23, the medium conveying belt 22 will be in a taut state, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can achieve a pre-tightening effect during the movement, so that the medium conveying belt 22 can maintain a good fit with the heater 121.

如图33-36所示,阻尼组件26包括与储存盘23连接的第一阻尼件261、与盒体21连接的第二阻尼件262以及分别与第一阻尼件261和第二阻尼件262连接的扭力弹性元件263。第一阻尼件261与储存盘23相对周向固定并能够同步转动,第二阻尼件262可相对于盒体21转动。第一阻尼件261、第二阻尼件262可相互套接在一起,扭力弹性元件263用于使第一阻尼件261和第二阻尼件262之间产生阻尼扭力。当第一阻尼件261转动时,需要克服该阻尼扭力后才能带动第二阻尼件262转动。设计扭力弹性元件263对第一阻尼件261提供的阻尼扭力的方向与储存盘23的放卷转动方向相反。As shown in FIGS. 33-36 , the damping assembly 26 includes a first damping member 261 connected to the storage disk 23, a second damping member 262 connected to the box body 21, and a torsion elastic element 263 connected to the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262, respectively. The first damping member 261 is fixed relative to the storage disk 23 in the circumferential direction and can rotate synchronously, and the second damping member 262 can rotate relative to the box body 21. The first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 can be mutually sleeved together, and the torsion elastic element 263 is used to generate a damping torsion between the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262. When the first damping member 261 rotates, it needs to overcome the damping torsion before the second damping member 262 can be driven to rotate. The direction of the damping torsion provided by the torsion elastic element 263 to the first damping member 261 is designed to be opposite to the unwinding rotation direction of the storage disk 23.

具体地,在本实施例中,储存卷轴233内可形成有一插孔2330,阻尼组件26可至少部分收容于插孔2330中。第一阻尼件261在插孔2330中周向固定,使得第一阻尼件261与储存卷轴233之间不会产生相对转动。第一阻尼件261内形成有一阻尼腔2610,第二阻尼件262至少部分设置于阻尼腔2610中。扭力弹性元件263可包括扭力弹簧,该扭力弹簧可设置于阻尼腔2610中并套设于第二阻尼件262上。Specifically, in this embodiment, a plug hole 2330 may be formed in the storage reel 233, and the damping assembly 26 may be at least partially received in the plug hole 2330. The first damping member 261 is circumferentially fixed in the plug hole 2330, so that the first damping member 261 and the storage reel 233 do not rotate relative to each other. A damping chamber 2610 is formed in the first damping member 261, and the second damping member 262 is at least partially disposed in the damping chamber 2610. The torsion elastic element 263 may include a torsion spring, which may be disposed in the damping chamber 2610 and sleeved on the second damping member 262.

第一阻尼件261和第二阻尼件262上分别形成有安装孔2613、安装孔2624,扭力弹簧的两个端部2631分别插装于该安装孔2613和安装孔2624中。在一些实施例中,安装孔2613和/或安装孔2624可以为弧形孔,使得扭力弹簧的端部2631在安装孔2613和/或安装孔2624中具有一定的活动空间,能够方便扭力弹簧的组装。当然,在其他实施例中,安装孔2613和/或安装孔2624的形状也尺寸也可与扭力弹簧的端部2631的形状和尺寸相匹配。The first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 are respectively formed with a mounting hole 2613 and a mounting hole 2624, and the two ends 2631 of the torsion spring are respectively inserted into the mounting hole 2613 and the mounting hole 2624. In some embodiments, the mounting hole 2613 and/or the mounting hole 2624 can be an arc-shaped hole, so that the end 2631 of the torsion spring has a certain movable space in the mounting hole 2613 and/or the mounting hole 2624, which can facilitate the assembly of the torsion spring. Of course, in other embodiments, the shape and size of the mounting hole 2613 and/or the mounting hole 2624 can also match the shape and size of the end 2631 of the torsion spring.

第二阻尼件262与盒体21之间可相互插接配合。第二阻尼件262与盒体21之间还可设置有阻尼介质265,例如阻尼油脂。阻尼介质265具有一定的粘性,利用阻尼介质265的粘性来阻碍第二阻尼件262的运动,从而获得阻尼效果。在第二阻尼件262相对于盒体21产生转动时,阻尼介质265让第二阻尼件262产生一个与其转动方向相反的阻尼力T1。设计该阻尼力T1大于等于第一阻尼件261和第二阻尼件262之间通过扭力弹性元件263形成的阻尼扭力T2。The second damping member 262 and the box body 21 can be plugged into each other. A damping medium 265, such as damping grease, can also be provided between the second damping member 262 and the box body 21. The damping medium 265 has a certain viscosity, and the viscosity of the damping medium 265 is used to hinder the movement of the second damping member 262, thereby obtaining a damping effect. When the second damping member 262 rotates relative to the box body 21, the damping medium 265 causes the second damping member 262 to generate a damping force T1 in the opposite direction of its rotation. The damping force T1 is designed to be greater than or equal to the damping torsion T2 formed between the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 through the torsion elastic element 263.

具体地,第二阻尼件262的一端可内凹形成有阻尼孔2620,盒座211上可凸出形成有与阻尼孔2620插接配合的安装轴2142。阻尼介质265可填充在安装轴2142的外壁面与阻尼孔2620的腔壁面之间。Specifically, one end of the second damping member 262 may be concavely formed with a damping hole 2620, and the box seat 211 may be protruding with a mounting shaft 2142 plugged into the damping hole 2620. The damping medium 265 may be filled between the outer wall of the mounting shaft 2142 and the cavity wall of the damping hole 2620.

在一些实施例中,第一阻尼件261可相对于第二阻尼件262具有第一位置和第二位置。第一阻尼件261相对于第二阻尼件262处于第一位置时,第一阻尼件261和第二阻尼件262之间通过扭力弹性元件263形成的阻尼扭力T2最大,此时T2=T2max≤T1。第一阻尼件261相对于第二阻尼件262处于第二位置时,第一阻尼件261和第二阻尼件262之间通过扭力弹性元件263形成的阻尼扭力T2最小,此时T2=T2 min<T2max。In some embodiments, the first damping member 261 may have a first position and a second position relative to the second damping member 262. When the first damping member 261 is in the first position relative to the second damping member 262, the damping torque T2 formed between the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 through the torsion elastic element 263 is the largest, and at this time T2=T2max≤T1. When the first damping member 261 is in the second position relative to the second damping member 262, the damping torque T2 formed between the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 through the torsion elastic element 263 is the smallest, and at this time T2=T2 min<T2max.

具体地,第一阻尼件261包括凸台2611,第二阻尼件262包括在周向上相对设置的第一限位面2621和第二限位面2622,第一限位面2621和第二限位面2622之间形成供凸台2611滑动的滑道2623。当凸台2611抵靠于第一限位面2621时,第一阻尼件261相对于第二阻尼件262处于第一位置。当凸台2611抵靠于第二限位面2622时,第一阻尼件261相对于第二阻尼件262处于第二位置。Specifically, the first damping member 261 includes a boss 2611, and the second damping member 262 includes a first limiting surface 2621 and a second limiting surface 2622 that are arranged opposite to each other in the circumferential direction, and a slideway 2623 for the boss 2611 to slide is formed between the first limiting surface 2621 and the second limiting surface 2622. When the boss 2611 abuts against the first limiting surface 2621, the first damping member 261 is in a first position relative to the second damping member 262. When the boss 2611 abuts against the second limiting surface 2622, the first damping member 261 is in a second position relative to the second damping member 262.

在本实施例中,凸台2611位于第一阻尼件261靠近盒座211的一端,组装制造更方便。当然,在其他实施例中,凸台2611也可设置于第一阻尼件261的其他位置,例如,也可凸出设置于第一阻尼件261在其轴向两端之间的侧壁的任意位置。In this embodiment, the boss 2611 is located at one end of the first damping member 261 close to the box seat 211, which is more convenient for assembly and manufacturing. Of course, in other embodiments, the boss 2611 can also be set at other positions of the first damping member 261, for example, it can also be protruded and set at any position of the side wall of the first damping member 261 between its two axial ends.

第一阻尼件261、第二阻尼件262、扭力弹性元件263、储存卷轴233均可同轴设置。在第一阻尼件261、第二阻尼件262、扭力弹性元件263安装好后,凸台2611抵靠于第二限位面2622上,使得扭力弹性元件263对第一阻尼件261产生阻尼扭力T2min。该阻尼扭力T2min能够使得在阻尼组件26组装好后,第一阻尼件261与第二阻尼件262之间不会发生晃动。The first damping member 261, the second damping member 262, the torsion elastic element 263, and the storage reel 233 can all be coaxially arranged. After the first damping member 261, the second damping member 262, and the torsion elastic element 263 are installed, the boss 2611 abuts against the second limiting surface 2622, so that the torsion elastic element 263 generates a damping torsion T2min on the first damping member 261. The damping torsion T2min can prevent the first damping member 261 and the second damping member 262 from shaking after the damping assembly 26 is assembled.

在减速器141带动收纳盘24转动,进而通过介质输送带22带动储存盘23转动时,因T2 min<T2max≤T1,储存盘23会先带动第一阻尼件261由第二位置运行到第一位置,使得凸台2611抵靠于第一限位面2621上。减速器141继续运动,将通过第一阻尼件261带动第二阻尼件262转动,此时,减速器141需要克服阻尼力T1,使得介质输送带22在运动过程中一直受到阻尼力T1作用而绷紧。这里,减速器141的扭力=κ* T1*(R1/R2) / η,其中,κ为安全系数,η为减速器141的传动效率,R1为介质输送带22缠绕在收纳盘24上的部分的半径,R2为介质输送带22缠绕在储存盘23上的部分的半径。When the reducer 141 drives the storage tray 24 to rotate, and then drives the storage tray 23 to rotate through the medium conveyor belt 22, because T2 min<T2max≤T1, the storage tray 23 will first drive the first damping member 261 to move from the second position to the first position, so that the boss 2611 abuts against the first limit surface 2621. The reducer 141 continues to move, and will drive the second damping member 262 to rotate through the first damping member 261. At this time, the reducer 141 needs to overcome the damping force T1, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 is always tightened by the damping force T1 during the movement. Here, the torque of the reducer 141 = κ* T1*(R1/R2) / η, where κ is the safety factor, η is the transmission efficiency of the reducer 141, R1 is the radius of the portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 wrapped around the storage tray 24, and R2 is the radius of the portion of the medium conveyor belt 22 wrapped around the storage tray 23.

当减速器141停止运动时,因为扭力弹性元件263的回复力矩的存在,扭力弹性元件263会对第一阻尼件261一直产生一个阻尼扭力T2max,进而对储存盘23产生阻尼扭力T2max。如此,可使得介质输送带22在不运动的时候也能持续处于预紧状态,不会松弛。此外,即使由于意外情况导致介质输送带22松弛,在扭力弹性元件263的回复力矩的作用下,能够将第一阻尼件261回转至抵靠在第二限位面2622上,从而带动储存盘23转动而张紧介质输送带22。When the reducer 141 stops moving, due to the restoring torque of the torsion elastic element 263, the torsion elastic element 263 will always generate a damping torque T2max on the first damping member 261, and then generate a damping torque T2max on the storage disk 23. In this way, the medium conveying belt 22 can be kept in a pre-tightened state even when it is not moving, and will not relax. In addition, even if the medium conveying belt 22 relaxes due to unexpected circumstances, under the action of the restoring torque of the torsion elastic element 263, the first damping member 261 can be rotated back to abut against the second limiting surface 2622, thereby driving the storage disk 23 to rotate and tightening the medium conveying belt 22.

第一限位面2621和第二限位面2622之间的转动角度(即,第一限位面2621和第二限位面2622在第二阻尼件262的周向上的角度)的范围可以为70°~150°,在此范围内,能够获得合适大小的T2 min和T2max,还能使得介质输送带22获得合适的回撤长度。The rotation angle between the first limiting surface 2621 and the second limiting surface 2622 (i.e., the angle between the first limiting surface 2621 and the second limiting surface 2622 in the circumferential direction of the second damping member 262) can range from 70° to 150°. Within this range, T2 min and T2max of appropriate sizes can be obtained, and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also obtain an appropriate retraction length.

在一些实施例中,阻尼组件26还可包括弹性挡圈264,弹性挡圈264可套设于第二阻尼件262上,用于限位第一阻尼件261在第二阻尼件262上的轴向位置,使得阻尼组件26的结构稳定,且组装方便。第二阻尼件262的一端可伸出第一阻尼件261之外,第二阻尼件262伸出第一阻尼件261的部分可内凹形成有供弹性挡圈264卡装的卡槽2625。In some embodiments, the damping assembly 26 may further include an elastic retaining ring 264, which may be sleeved on the second damping member 262 and used to limit the axial position of the first damping member 261 on the second damping member 262, so that the structure of the damping assembly 26 is stable and easy to assemble. One end of the second damping member 262 may extend out of the first damping member 261, and the portion of the second damping member 262 extending out of the first damping member 261 may be concave to form a slot 2625 for the elastic retaining ring 264 to be mounted.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括雾化座25,雾化座25内形成有雾化腔250,雾化座25的侧壁上形成有与雾化腔250相连通的进口251和出口252。介质输送带22能够经由进口251进入雾化腔250,在雾化腔250中加热雾化后再经由出口252传出。加热器121的一端可伸入到雾化腔250中,以加热进入到雾化腔250中的介质输送带22。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include an atomizing seat 25, in which an atomizing chamber 250 is formed, and an inlet 251 and an outlet 252 are formed on the side wall of the atomizing seat 25, which are connected to the atomizing chamber 250. The medium conveying belt 22 can enter the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251, and after being heated and atomized in the atomizing chamber 250, it can be transmitted through the outlet 252. One end of the heater 121 can extend into the atomizing chamber 250 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 entering the atomizing chamber 250.

在一些实施例中,雾化座25可通过可拆卸的方式与盒座211安装在一起,雾化座25可重复使用,降低更换成本。当然,在其实施例中,雾化座25也可通过不可拆卸的方式与盒座211安装在一起,或者,雾化座25也可与盒座211一体成型。In some embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 can be installed together with the box seat 211 in a detachable manner, and the atomizer seat 25 can be reused to reduce replacement costs. Of course, in its embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 can also be installed together with the box seat 211 in a non-detachable manner, or the atomizer seat 25 can also be integrally formed with the box seat 211.

在一些实施例中,进口251、出口252的截面(这里指与介质输送带22的行进方向垂直的截面)形状可与介质输送带22的截面(这里指与介质输送带22的行进方向垂直的截面)形状相同或相似。此外,进口251、出口252与介质输送带22之间可采用间隙配合,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停,还能够避免进口251、出口252的边缘刮擦到介质输送带22。此外,进口251的周缘与介质输送带22之间形成的环形间隙2510和/或出口252的周缘与介质输送带22之间形成的环形间隙2520还能够作为气流通道使用,以将雾化腔250与容腔210相连通,进而与外界相连通。In some embodiments, the cross-section of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22) may be the same or similar to the cross-section of the medium conveyor belt 22 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22). In addition, a clearance fit may be adopted between the inlet 251, the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck, and the edges of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be prevented from scratching the medium conveyor belt 22. In addition, the annular gap 2510 formed between the periphery of the inlet 251 and the medium conveyor belt 22 and/or the annular gap 2520 formed between the periphery of the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be used as an airflow channel to connect the atomization chamber 250 with the receiving chamber 210, and then with the outside world.

可以理解地,环形间隙2510、环形间隙2520的尺寸不易过小,否则可能会造成吸阻过大,导致雾化腔250压强过小而造成抽吸紊流,影响抽吸体验。当然,环形间隙2510、环形间隙2520的尺寸也不易过大,减少或避免雾化腔250内生成的气溶胶经由进口251、出口252的泄漏。It is understandable that the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too small, otherwise it may cause excessive suction resistance, resulting in too low pressure in the atomizing chamber 250 and causing suction turbulence, affecting the suction experience. Of course, the size of the annular gap 2510 and the annular gap 2520 should not be too large, reducing or avoiding the leakage of the aerosol generated in the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251 and the outlet 252.

具体地,在本实施例中,雾化座25设置于盒座211的上侧,其可包括主体部254以及由主体部254向上延伸的延伸部255。主体部254可收容于容腔210的上侧,雾化腔250形成于主体部254内,进口251、出口252分别形成于雾化座25的横向两相对侧。延伸部255内形成有与雾化腔250相连通的出气通道253,吸嘴30的下端与出气通道253相连通。延伸部255可伸出于盒体21之外,便于与吸嘴30相互插接配合。延伸部255的侧壁上还可形成有将出气通道253与外界相连通的通气口2550。Specifically, in the present embodiment, the atomizer seat 25 is arranged on the upper side of the box seat 211, and may include a main body 254 and an extension portion 255 extending upward from the main body 254. The main body 254 can be accommodated in the upper side of the cavity 210, the atomizer cavity 250 is formed in the main body 254, and the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are respectively formed on the two opposite sides of the atomizer seat 25. An air outlet channel 253 connected to the atomizer cavity 250 is formed in the extension portion 255, and the lower end of the suction nozzle 30 is connected to the air outlet channel 253. The extension portion 255 can extend out of the box body 21, so as to facilitate mutual plug-in cooperation with the suction nozzle 30. A vent 2550 that connects the air outlet channel 253 with the outside world can also be formed on the side wall of the extension portion 255.

当然,在其他实施例中,雾化座25也可设置于盒体21的其他位置。此外,进口251、出口252的设置方式也不受限制,例如,进口251、出口252可设置于雾化座25的同一侧;或者,进口251设置于雾化座25的横向一侧,出口252设置于雾化座25的底侧。Of course, in other embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 may also be disposed at other positions of the box body 21. In addition, the configuration of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 is not limited, for example, the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 may be disposed on the same side of the atomizer seat 25; or, the inlet 251 is disposed on one lateral side of the atomizer seat 25, and the outlet 252 is disposed on the bottom side of the atomizer seat 25.

在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20还可包括设置于容腔210中的导向结构28,用于在介质输送带22的行进过程中进行导向,保证介质输送带22的顺畅传输,并保证介质输送带22与加热器121良好的接触。在一些实施例中,该气溶胶生成制品20可包括多个导向结构28,该多个导向结构28在介质输送带22的传输路径上间隔分布。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may further include a guide structure 28 disposed in the cavity 210, which is used to guide the medium conveying belt 22 during its travel, to ensure smooth transmission of the medium conveying belt 22, and to ensure good contact between the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121. In some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may include a plurality of guide structures 28, which are spaced apart on the transmission path of the medium conveying belt 22.

在一些实施例中,该多个导向结构28可包括在介质输送带22的传输路径上依次分布的限位滚轮28a、限位滚轮28b、限位滚轮28c,通过各限位滚轮的滚动摩擦保证介质输送带22的顺畅传输。待加热的介质输送带22依次经限位滚轮28a、限位滚轮28b、进口251进入雾化腔250中雾化,雾化后的介质输送带22从出口252输出再经过限位滚轮28c导向,进而收卷在收纳盘24上。当然,在其他实施例中,导向结构28也可包括凸筋、凸柱等其他结构。In some embodiments, the plurality of guide structures 28 may include a limiting roller 28a, a limiting roller 28b, and a limiting roller 28c sequentially distributed on the transmission path of the medium conveyor belt 22, and the rolling friction of each limiting roller ensures the smooth transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22. The medium conveyor belt 22 to be heated sequentially passes through the limiting roller 28a, the limiting roller 28b, and the inlet 251 into the atomizing chamber 250 for atomization, and the atomized medium conveyor belt 22 is output from the outlet 252 and then guided by the limiting roller 28c, and then rolled up on the storage tray 24. Of course, in other embodiments, the guide structure 28 may also include other structures such as convex ribs and convex columns.

限位滚轮28a设置于出口2141的附近,可使得储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22能够顺畅传出,避免由于储存盘23上缠绕的介质输送带22的尺寸改变而对介质输送带22的传输产生影响。限位滚轮28b、限位滚轮28c分别设置于雾化座25的横向两相对侧,用于使介质输送带22与加热器121良好接触。需要说明的是,限位滚轮28b、限位滚轮28c分别与进口251、出口252对应设置,当进口251、出口252的设置位置改变时,限位滚轮28b、限位滚轮28c的设置位置可对应改变。The limiting roller 28a is arranged near the outlet 2141, so that the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23 can be smoothly transmitted, and the transmission of the medium conveying belt 22 is not affected by the change in the size of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the storage disk 23. The limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c are respectively arranged on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25, so as to make the medium conveying belt 22 in good contact with the heater 121. It should be noted that the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c are respectively arranged corresponding to the inlet 251 and the outlet 252. When the setting positions of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are changed, the setting positions of the limiting roller 28b and the limiting roller 28c can be changed accordingly.

进一步地,限位滚轮28c和收纳盘24之间还可设置有限位滚轮28d,限位滚轮28d能够增大介质输送带22在经过限位滚轮28c时的转角,改善雾化后的介质输送带22在经过转角时由于转角过小而产生的分层问题。Furthermore, a limiting roller 28d can be provided between the limiting roller 28c and the storage tray 24. The limiting roller 28d can increase the turning angle of the medium conveying belt 22 when passing through the limiting roller 28c, thereby improving the stratification problem caused by the atomized medium conveying belt 22 passing through the corner due to the small turning angle.

图37-41示出了本发明第五实施例中的气溶胶生成系统100,该气溶胶生成系统100包括相互配合的气溶胶生成装置10和气溶胶生成制品20。其中,气溶胶生成制品20中设置有基质层222。气溶胶生成装置10包括电池、加热器121、控制电路等电子元器件,电池用于为加热器121供电,控制电路用于控制加热器121的加热工作。加热器121可在通电后通过接触或者非接触的方式加热气溶胶生成制品20中的基质层222,以生成气溶胶。37-41 show an aerosol generating system 100 in a fifth embodiment of the present invention, wherein the aerosol generating system 100 comprises an aerosol generating device 10 and an aerosol generating product 20 that cooperate with each other. Among them, a substrate layer 222 is provided in the aerosol generating product 20. The aerosol generating device 10 comprises electronic components such as a battery, a heater 121, and a control circuit. The battery is used to power the heater 121, and the control circuit is used to control the heating work of the heater 121. After being powered on, the heater 121 can heat the substrate layer 222 in the aerosol generating product 20 in a contact or non-contact manner to generate an aerosol.

进一步地,该气溶胶生成系统100还可包括吸嘴30,该吸嘴30可安装于气溶胶生成制品20的一端,用于供用户抽吸气溶胶生成制品20雾化后生成的气溶胶。在本实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20的上端形成有出气通道253。吸嘴30呈圆柱状,其可通过可拆卸或不可拆卸的方式安装于出气通道253中。在其他实施例中,该吸嘴30不限于呈圆柱状,其也可以为扁平的柱状或者其他形状;当然,吸嘴30也可安装于气溶胶生成装置10的一端。Furthermore, the aerosol generating system 100 may further include a nozzle 30, which may be mounted at one end of the aerosol generating product 20, and is used for the user to inhale the aerosol generated by the aerosol generating product 20 after atomization. In this embodiment, an air outlet channel 253 is formed at the upper end of the aerosol generating product 20. The nozzle 30 is cylindrical, and may be mounted in the air outlet channel 253 in a detachable or non-detachable manner. In other embodiments, the nozzle 30 is not limited to being cylindrical, and may also be a flat column or other shapes; of course, the nozzle 30 may also be mounted at one end of the aerosol generating device 10.

在本实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10大致呈长方形柱状,气溶胶生成装置10内形成有一用于收容气溶胶生成制品20的容纳腔1120。容纳腔1120的一端具有插口1110,以供吸嘴30伸出。当然,在其他实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10的横截面形状不局限于呈长方形,其也可以呈圆形、跑道形或椭圆形等其他形状。In this embodiment, the aerosol generating device 10 is substantially in the shape of a rectangular column, and a receiving chamber 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed in the aerosol generating device 10. One end of the receiving chamber 1120 has a socket 1110 for the nozzle 30 to extend out. Of course, in other embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the aerosol generating device 10 is not limited to being rectangular, and it may also be in other shapes such as a circle, a racetrack, or an ellipse.

气溶胶生成制品20可拆卸地配接于容纳腔1120中,当气溶胶生成制品20内的基质层222用尽后,可通过更换气溶胶生成制品20来实现基质层222的更新。气溶胶生成装置10可重复利用,从而可降低气溶胶生成系统100的使用成本。The aerosol generating article 20 is detachably mounted in the accommodating chamber 1120. When the substrate layer 222 in the aerosol generating article 20 is used up, the substrate layer 222 can be updated by replacing the aerosol generating article 20. The aerosol generating device 10 is reusable, thereby reducing the use cost of the aerosol generating system 100.

如图38-41所示,在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20可包括盒体21以及收容于盒体21中的介质输送带22。盒体21内形成有一容腔210,介质输送带22容纳在容腔210中。介质输送带22整体呈带状并具有一定的长度,介质输送带22沿其长度方向分布有基质层222。该基质层222可包括固体、凝胶中的一种或多种雾化介质,其能够在加热后生成气溶胶。As shown in FIGS. 38-41 , in some embodiments, the aerosol generating article 20 may include a box body 21 and a medium conveying belt 22 accommodated in the box body 21. A cavity 210 is formed in the box body 21, and the medium conveying belt 22 is accommodated in the cavity 210. The medium conveying belt 22 is in a belt shape as a whole and has a certain length, and a matrix layer 222 is distributed along the length direction of the medium conveying belt 22. The matrix layer 222 may include one or more atomizing media in solid and gel, which can generate aerosol after heating.

在一些实施例中,盒体21大致呈长方体状,其可包括相互配合的盒座211和盒盖212。容腔210形成于盒座211和盒盖212之间,具体地,容腔210可由盒座211或盒盖212凹陷形成,也可由盒座211和盒盖212共同凹陷形成。盒座211和盒盖212之间可通过螺纹连接、卡扣连接、磁吸连接、粘接等一种或几种可拆卸或不可拆卸的方式连接在一起。In some embodiments, the box body 21 is roughly in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, and may include a box seat 211 and a box cover 212 that cooperate with each other. The cavity 210 is formed between the box seat 211 and the box cover 212. Specifically, the cavity 210 may be formed by the depression of the box seat 211 or the box cover 212, or may be formed by the depression of the box seat 211 and the box cover 212. The box seat 211 and the box cover 212 may be connected together by one or more detachable or non-detachable methods such as threaded connection, snap connection, magnetic connection, and bonding.

在一些实施例中,盒体21可全部或至少部分由透明的材料形成。术语“透明的”用于描述这样的材料:其允许至少显著比例的入射光穿过它,使得能够看穿材料。在本发明中,大体上透明的材料可以允许足够的光通过它,使得盒体21内的介质输送带22是可见的。In some embodiments, the box body 21 may be formed entirely or at least partially of a transparent material. The term "transparent" is used to describe a material that allows at least a significant proportion of incident light to pass through it, allowing for seeing through the material. In the present invention, a substantially transparent material may allow enough light to pass through it so that the media transport belt 22 within the box body 21 is visible.

盒体21可以是完全透明的;或者,盒体21也可以具有较低水平的透明度,同时仍能透射足够的光,使得盒体21内的介质输送带22可见。进一步地,盒体21可包括由透明的材料形成的一个或多个区域,以使得介质输送带22的一部分经由该一个或多个区域可见。此外,由透明的材料形成的区域可以为彩色、有色或无色的。The box body 21 may be completely transparent; alternatively, the box body 21 may have a lower level of transparency while still transmitting enough light to make the media conveyor belt 22 visible within the box body 21. Further, the box body 21 may include one or more areas formed of a transparent material so that a portion of the media conveyor belt 22 is visible through the one or more areas. In addition, the area formed of the transparent material may be colored, tinted, or colorless.

当然,在其他实施例中,盒体21也可以由不透明的材料制成。在另一些实施例中,气溶胶生成制品20也可不包括盒体21,介质输送带22可直接安装于气溶胶生成装置10中。Of course, in other embodiments, the box body 21 may also be made of an opaque material. In other embodiments, the aerosol generating product 20 may not include the box body 21 , and the medium conveyor belt 22 may be directly installed in the aerosol generating device 10 .

介质输送带22可通过卷绕的方式设置于盒体21中。具体地,盒体21中可设置有储存盘23和收纳盘24,介质输送带22未被加热的部分可卷绕于储存盘23上,介质输送带22已被加热后的部分可卷绕于收纳盘24上。气溶胶生成装置10能够推动介质输送带22从储存盘23放卷,经过加热器121加热雾化后被收纳盘24收卷。卷绕设置的方式使得盒体21内能够存储较多的介质输送带22,使得单个气溶胶生成制品20能够多次雾化使用,且雾化前后的介质输送带22分别卷绕在储存盘23和收纳盘24上,避免窜味等不佳用户体验。The medium conveyor belt 22 can be arranged in the box body 21 in a winding manner. Specifically, a storage disk 23 and a receiving disk 24 can be arranged in the box body 21, and the unheated part of the medium conveyor belt 22 can be wound on the storage disk 23, and the heated part of the medium conveyor belt 22 can be wound on the receiving disk 24. The aerosol generating device 10 can push the medium conveyor belt 22 to unwind from the storage disk 23, and after being heated and atomized by the heater 121, it is wound up by the receiving disk 24. The winding arrangement enables more medium conveyor belts 22 to be stored in the box body 21, so that a single aerosol generating product 20 can be atomized and used multiple times, and the medium conveyor belt 22 before and after atomization is respectively wound on the storage disk 23 and the receiving disk 24, so as to avoid poor user experience such as odor crosstalk.

在一些实施例中,储存盘23可包括储存卷轴233以及分别设置于储存卷轴233两端的储存底盘231、储存盘盖232。介质输送带22未被加热的部分可盘绕在储存卷轴233上,储存底盘231、储存盘盖232可用于阻挡介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。In some embodiments, the storage tray 23 may include a storage reel 233 and a storage bottom plate 231 and a storage tray cover 232 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 233. The unheated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 233, and the storage bottom plate 231 and the storage tray cover 232 may be used to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.

在一些实施例中,介质输送带22的宽度两端还可分别与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232接触连接,能够使得介质输送带22的运动更稳定,还能够通过介质输送带22与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232之间的摩擦力来完成动力从供给转轴2331到储存底盘231、储存盘盖232,进一步到介质输送带22的传递。In some embodiments, both ends of the width of the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be respectively contacted and connected with the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, which can make the movement of the medium conveyor belt 22 more stable, and can also complete the power transmission from the supply shaft 2331 to the storage chassis 231, the storage disk cover 232, and further to the medium conveyor belt 22 through the friction between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the storage chassis 231, the storage disk cover 232.

在另一些实施例中,介质输送带22的宽度也可小于储存底盘231、储存盘盖232之间的距离,让介质输送带22在储存卷轴233的轴向上具有一定的浮动空间,介质输送带22不与储存底盘231、储存盘盖232之间产生摩擦,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停。In other embodiments, the width of the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be smaller than the distance between the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 has a certain floating space in the axial direction of the storage reel 233, and no friction is generated between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the storage chassis 231 and the storage disk cover 232, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck.

当然,在其他实施例中,储存盘23也可仅设置有储存底盘231和储存盘盖232中的一个,或者,也可两端都不设置有储存底盘231、储存盘盖232。介质输送带22的宽度两端的限位可通过盒体21实现。Of course, in other embodiments, the storage tray 23 may be provided with only one of the storage bottom tray 231 and the storage tray cover 232, or both ends may not be provided with the storage bottom tray 231 and the storage tray cover 232. The width limit of the medium conveying belt 22 at both ends can be achieved by the box body 21.

类似地,收纳盘24也可包括收纳卷轴243以及分别设置于收纳卷轴243两端的收纳底盘、收纳盘盖242。介质输送带22已被加热后的部分可盘绕在收纳卷轴243上,收纳底盘、收纳盘盖242可用于阻挡介质输送带22在卷绕过程中脱出。Similarly, the storage tray 24 may also include a storage reel 243 and a storage bottom plate and a storage tray cover 242 respectively disposed at both ends of the storage reel 243. The heated portion of the medium conveying belt 22 may be wound on the storage reel 243, and the storage bottom plate and the storage tray cover 242 may be used to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from coming out during the winding process.

在一些实施例中,介质输送带22的宽度两端还可分别与收纳底盘、收纳盘盖242接触连接,能够使得介质输送带22的运动更稳定,还能够通过介质输送带22与收纳底盘、收纳盘盖242之间的摩擦力来完成动力从收纳转轴241到收纳底盘、收纳盘盖242,进一步到介质输送带22的传递。In some embodiments, both ends of the width of the medium conveyor belt 22 can also be respectively contacted and connected with the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242, which can make the movement of the medium conveyor belt 22 more stable, and can also complete the transmission of power from the storage shaft 241 to the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242, and further to the medium conveyor belt 22 through the friction between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242.

在另一些实施例中,介质输送带22的宽度也可小于收纳底盘、收纳盘盖242之间的距离,让介质输送带22在收纳卷轴243的轴向上具有一定的浮动空间,介质输送带22不与收纳底盘、收纳盘盖242之间产生摩擦,使得介质输送带22能够顺畅运动,不会发生卡停。In other embodiments, the width of the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be smaller than the distance between the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 has a certain floating space in the axial direction of the storage reel 243, and no friction is generated between the medium conveyor belt 22 and the storage chassis and the storage tray cover 242, so that the medium conveyor belt 22 can move smoothly without getting stuck.

当然,在其他实施例中,收纳盘也可仅设置有收纳底盘和收纳盘盖242中的一个,或者,也可两端都不设置有收纳底盘、收纳盘盖242。介质输送带22的宽度两端的限位可通过盒体21实现。Of course, in other embodiments, the storage tray may be provided with only one of the storage bottom tray and the storage tray cover 242, or both ends may not be provided with the storage bottom tray or the storage tray cover 242. The width limit of the medium conveying belt 22 at both ends may be achieved by the box body 21.

在一些实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24中的一个为主动轮,另一个为从动轮。以收纳盘24为主动轮、储存盘23为从动轮为例,收纳盘24在外界驱动力的作用下转动以收卷介质输送带22,从而带动储存盘23同步转动以放卷介质输送带22。在其他实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24也可都为主动轮。在另一些实施例中,储存盘23、收纳盘24也可不同步转动,例如,储存盘23先放卷一段介质输送带22,加热完成后,再驱动收纳盘24转动进行收卷。In some embodiments, one of the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 is a driving wheel, and the other is a driven wheel. For example, the receiving tray 24 is the driving wheel and the storage tray 23 is the driven wheel. Under the action of an external driving force, the receiving tray 24 rotates to reel in the medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the storage tray 23 to rotate synchronously to unwind the medium conveying belt 22. In other embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 may also be driving wheels. In other embodiments, the storage tray 23 and the receiving tray 24 may also rotate asynchronously. For example, the storage tray 23 first unwinds a section of the medium conveying belt 22, and after heating is completed, the receiving tray 24 is driven to rotate for rewinding.

在一些实施例中,介质输送带22可包括基带221以及设置于基带221上的基质层222。该基带221用于承载基质层222,基带221具有在厚度方向上相对设置的第一表面2211和第二表面2212,在介质输送带22缠绕在储存卷轴233上时,基带221的第二表面2212可朝向储存卷轴233,基带221的第一表面2211相对远离储存卷轴233。基质层222可通过涂覆、压合或粘贴等方式设置于基带221的第一表面2211和/或第二表面2212上。此外,基质层222在基带221上可连续分布,或者也可分区域间隔分布。In some embodiments, the medium conveying belt 22 may include a base belt 221 and a matrix layer 222 disposed on the base belt 221. The base belt 221 is used to carry the matrix layer 222. The base belt 221 has a first surface 2211 and a second surface 2212 disposed opposite to each other in the thickness direction. When the medium conveying belt 22 is wound on the storage reel 233, the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 may face the storage reel 233, and the first surface 2211 of the base belt 221 may be relatively far away from the storage reel 233. The matrix layer 222 may be disposed on the first surface 2211 and/or the second surface 2212 of the base belt 221 by coating, lamination or bonding. In addition, the matrix layer 222 may be distributed continuously on the base belt 221, or may be distributed at intervals in different regions.

具体地,在本实施例中,基质层222设置于基带221的第一表面2211上。当然,在其他实施例中,基质层222也可设置于基带221的第二表面2212,或者同时设置于基带221的第一表面2211和第二表面2212。Specifically, in this embodiment, the matrix layer 222 is disposed on the first surface 2211 of the base tape 221. Of course, in other embodiments, the matrix layer 222 may also be disposed on the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221, or disposed on both the first surface 2211 and the second surface 2212 of the base tape 221.

进一步地,基带221可采用导热材料制成,例如铝箔或者铜箔等导热金属材料制成。当然,基带221也可采用导热的非金属材料制成,例如石墨等。在另一些实施例中,介质输送带22也可全部由基质层222制成,即,介质输送带22不包括基带221。Furthermore, the base belt 221 may be made of a heat-conducting material, such as a heat-conducting metal material such as aluminum foil or copper foil. Of course, the base belt 221 may also be made of a heat-conducting non-metallic material, such as graphite. In other embodiments, the medium conveyor belt 22 may also be made entirely of the matrix layer 222, that is, the medium conveyor belt 22 does not include the base belt 221.

此外,在本实施例中,加热器121采用电阻式的加热方式,加热器121通过焦耳效应产生热量,从而将热量传递到介质输送带22进行烘烤加热。在实现方式上,加热器121与介质输送带22可以直接物理接触实现热传导,加热器121与介质输送带22也可以通过热辐射等不直接接触的方式实现热量从加热器121到介质输送带22的传递。In addition, in this embodiment, the heater 121 adopts a resistive heating method, and the heater 121 generates heat through the Joule effect, thereby transferring the heat to the medium conveyor belt 22 for baking and heating. In terms of implementation, the heater 121 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can be in direct physical contact to achieve heat conduction, and the heater 121 and the medium conveyor belt 22 can also achieve heat transfer from the heater 121 to the medium conveyor belt 22 through indirect contact methods such as heat radiation.

进一步地,加热器121可与介质输送带22未设置有基质层222的一侧接触,通过基带221向基质层222传递热量。这样,可以避免加热后的基质层222黏连在加热器121上,影响加热器121的加热效果。Furthermore, the heater 121 can contact the side of the medium conveyor belt 22 where the matrix layer 222 is not provided, and transfer heat to the matrix layer 222 through the base belt 221. In this way, it can be avoided that the heated matrix layer 222 adheres to the heater 121 and affects the heating effect of the heater 121.

当然,在其他实施例中,加热器121也可直接与基质层222接触,有利于提高热传递效率,减少热量损失,此时,介质输送带22可无需采用导热材料制成。在另一些实施例中,加热器121也可采用电磁加热、红外辐射、超声、微波、等离子等其他加热方式。Of course, in other embodiments, the heater 121 may also be in direct contact with the matrix layer 222, which is beneficial to improving the heat transfer efficiency and reducing heat loss. In this case, the medium conveyor belt 22 may not need to be made of a heat-conducting material. In other embodiments, the heater 121 may also use other heating methods such as electromagnetic heating, infrared radiation, ultrasound, microwave, plasma, etc.

在一些实施例中,盒体21中还可设置有雾化座25,雾化座25内形成有雾化腔250,雾化座25的侧壁上形成有与雾化腔250相连通的进口251和出口252。介质输送带22能够经由进口251进入雾化腔250,在雾化腔250中加热雾化后再经由出口252传出。加热器121的一端可伸入到雾化腔250中,以加热进入到雾化腔250中的介质输送带22。In some embodiments, an atomizing seat 25 may be further provided in the box body 21, an atomizing chamber 250 is formed in the atomizing seat 25, and an inlet 251 and an outlet 252 are formed on the side wall of the atomizing seat 25, which are connected to the atomizing chamber 250. The medium conveying belt 22 can enter the atomizing chamber 250 through the inlet 251, and after being heated and atomized in the atomizing chamber 250, it can be transmitted through the outlet 252. One end of the heater 121 can extend into the atomizing chamber 250 to heat the medium conveying belt 22 entering the atomizing chamber 250.

进口251、出口252的截面(这里指与介质输送带22的行进方向垂直的截面)形状与介质输送带22的截面(这里指与介质输送带22的行进方向垂直的截面)形状相同或相似,且进口251、出口252与介质输送带22之间可采用间隙配合,避免刮擦介质输送带22。当然,进口251、出口252与介质输送带22之间的间隙不易过大,减少或避免雾化腔250内生成的气溶胶经由进口251、出口252的泄漏。The cross-section of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22) is the same or similar to the cross-section of the medium conveyor belt 22 (here, the cross-section perpendicular to the direction of travel of the medium conveyor belt 22), and the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be fitted with a gap to avoid scratching the medium conveyor belt 22. Of course, the gap between the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 and the medium conveyor belt 22 is not too large to reduce or avoid leakage of the aerosol generated in the atomization chamber 250 through the inlet 251 and the outlet 252.

具体地,在本实施例中,雾化座25设置于容腔210的上侧,雾化腔250与出气通道253的下端直接连通,使得气溶胶的输出路径较短。进口251、出口252分别形成于雾化座25的横向两相对侧。当然,在其他实施例中,雾化座25也可设置于容腔210的其他位置,雾化腔250也可与出气通道253间接连通。此外,进口251、出口252的设置方式也不受限制,例如,进口251、出口252可设置于雾化座25的同一侧;或者,进口251设置于雾化座25的横向一侧,出口252设置于雾化座25的底侧。Specifically, in the present embodiment, the atomizer seat 25 is arranged on the upper side of the cavity 210, and the atomizer chamber 250 is directly connected to the lower end of the air outlet channel 253, so that the output path of the aerosol is shorter. The inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are respectively formed on two opposite sides of the atomizer seat 25 in the lateral direction. Of course, in other embodiments, the atomizer seat 25 can also be arranged at other positions of the cavity 210, and the atomizer chamber 250 can also be indirectly connected to the air outlet channel 253. In addition, the arrangement of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 is also not limited. For example, the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 can be arranged on the same side of the atomizer seat 25; or, the inlet 251 is arranged on one side of the atomizer seat 25 in the lateral direction, and the outlet 252 is arranged on the bottom side of the atomizer seat 25.

在一些实施例中,盒体21中还可设置有导向结构28,用于在介质输送带22的行进过程中进行导向,并保证介质输送带22与加热器121良好的接触。在本实施例中,导向结构28可以有多个,该多个导向结构28在介质输送带22的传输路径上间隔分布。各导向结构28可以为可转动结构,比如可以为导向辊或滚轮;当然,可以理解地,在其他实施例中,各导向结构28也可以为非转动结构,比如可以为固定设置于盒体21中的导向柱或者其他。In some embodiments, a guide structure 28 may be further provided in the box body 21 for guiding the medium conveying belt 22 during its travel and ensuring good contact between the medium conveying belt 22 and the heater 121. In this embodiment, there may be a plurality of guide structures 28, which are spaced apart on the transmission path of the medium conveying belt 22. Each guide structure 28 may be a rotatable structure, such as a guide roller or a wheel; of course, it is understandable that in other embodiments, each guide structure 28 may also be a non-rotatable structure, such as a guide column or other structure fixedly provided in the box body 21.

在本实施例中,各导向结构28均为导向辊。进一步地,该多个导向结构28包括两个导向辊28e、28f,该两个导向辊28e、28f分别设置于雾化座25的横向两相对侧,用于使介质输送带22与加热器121良好接触。待加热的介质输送带22沿导向辊28e、进口251进入雾化腔250中雾化,雾化后的介质输送带22从出口252输出再经过导向辊28f导向,进而收卷在收纳盘24上。需要说明的是,该两个导向辊28e、28f分别与进口251、出口252对应设置,当进口251、出口252的设置位置改变时,该两个导向辊28e、28f可对应改变。In the present embodiment, each guide structure 28 is a guide roller. Further, the plurality of guide structures 28 include two guide rollers 28e and 28f, which are respectively arranged on two opposite sides of the atomizing seat 25 in the lateral direction, and are used to make the medium conveying belt 22 in good contact with the heater 121. The medium conveying belt 22 to be heated enters the atomizing chamber 250 along the guide rollers 28e and the inlet 251 for atomization, and the atomized medium conveying belt 22 is output from the outlet 252 and then guided by the guide roller 28f, and then rolled up on the storage tray 24. It should be noted that the two guide rollers 28e and 28f are respectively arranged corresponding to the inlet 251 and the outlet 252. When the setting positions of the inlet 251 and the outlet 252 are changed, the two guide rollers 28e and 28f can be changed accordingly.

在一些实施例中,盒体21中还设置有驱动转轴27,通过驱动转轴27转动,推动介质输送带22从储存盘23放卷,并经过加热器121加热雾化。驱动转轴27可设置于加热器121和收纳盘24之间的介质输送带22的行进路径上,更进一步地,设置于导向辊28f和收纳盘24之间的行进路径之间。驱动转轴27可具有凸轮或类凸轮结构,使得驱动转轴27在转动的过程中,能够改变介质输送带22在加热器121和收纳盘24之间的路径长度。In some embodiments, a driving shaft 27 is further provided in the box body 21, and the driving shaft 27 rotates to push the medium conveying belt 22 to unwind from the storage tray 23 and be heated and atomized by the heater 121. The driving shaft 27 can be arranged on the travel path of the medium conveying belt 22 between the heater 121 and the storage tray 24, and further, between the travel path between the guide roller 28f and the storage tray 24. The driving shaft 27 can have a cam or a cam-like structure, so that the driving shaft 27 can change the path length of the medium conveying belt 22 between the heater 121 and the storage tray 24 during the rotation process.

结合图42所示,在一些实施例中,驱动转轴27上可形成有穿口270,从出口252出来的介质输送带22从穿口270穿过再收卷在收纳盘24上。该结构使得驱动转轴27在转动的过程中,介质输送带22能够缠绕在驱动转轴27上,可增加驱动转轴27每次转动时介质输送带22的拉伸长度,同时,驱动转轴27具有暂时收卷介质输送带22的作用,避免介质输送带22松弛。As shown in FIG. 42 , in some embodiments, a through hole 270 may be formed on the driving shaft 27, and the medium conveying belt 22 coming out of the outlet 252 passes through the through hole 270 and is then reeled onto the receiving tray 24. This structure allows the medium conveying belt 22 to be wound around the driving shaft 27 during the rotation of the driving shaft 27, which can increase the stretching length of the medium conveying belt 22 each time the driving shaft 27 rotates. At the same time, the driving shaft 27 has the function of temporarily reeling in the medium conveying belt 22 to prevent the medium conveying belt 22 from being loosened.

具体地,在本实施例中,驱动转轴27包括两个间隔设置的转轴271,两个转轴271的直径可相等也可不相等,两个转轴271之间的间隔形成穿口270。两个转轴271平行间隔设置,驱动转轴27的转动中心线可与其中一个转轴271的中轴线重合。当然,在其他实施例中,驱动转轴27的转动中心线也可与两个转轴271的中轴线均平行而不重合。Specifically, in this embodiment, the driving shaft 27 includes two rotating shafts 271 arranged at intervals, the diameters of the two rotating shafts 271 may be equal or unequal, and the interval between the two rotating shafts 271 forms a through hole 270. The two rotating shafts 271 are arranged in parallel and at intervals, and the rotation center line of the driving shaft 27 may coincide with the central axis of one of the rotating shafts 271. Of course, in other embodiments, the rotation center line of the driving shaft 27 may also be parallel to the central axes of the two rotating shafts 271 but not coincident.

进一步地,驱动转轴27还可包括两个间隔设置的连接板272,两个连接板272分别设置于转轴271的两端,可用于限位介质输送带22。Furthermore, the driving shaft 27 may further include two spaced connection plates 272 . The two connection plates 272 are respectively disposed at two ends of the shaft 271 and may be used to limit the medium conveying belt 22 .

如图39所示,驱动转轴27在第一转动位置时,介质输送带22可从两个转轴271之间的穿口270穿过,且未缠绕在两个转轴271上,此时,介质输送带22在加热器121和收纳盘24之间具有最短的路径长度。As shown in Figure 39, when the driving shaft 27 is in the first rotation position, the medium conveying belt 22 can pass through the opening 270 between the two shafts 271 and is not wrapped around the two shafts 271. At this time, the medium conveying belt 22 has the shortest path length between the heater 121 and the storage tray 24.

如图40所示,驱动转轴27在第二转动位置时,从导向辊28f出来的介质输送带22从距离导向辊28f较远的一个转轴271绕过后从穿口270穿出,然后再绕过距离导向辊28f较近的一个转轴271再收卷在收纳盘24上。此时,介质输送带22在加热器121和收纳盘24之间具有最长的路径长度。该驱动转轴27的结构,能够使得介质输送带22每次具有较长的拉伸长度,拉伸长度接近两个转轴271的周长之和。As shown in FIG40 , when the driving shaft 27 is in the second rotation position, the medium conveying belt 22 coming out of the guide roller 28f passes through a shaft 271 farther from the guide roller 28f, passes through the opening 270, and then passes through a shaft 271 closer to the guide roller 28f and is wound on the storage tray 24. At this time, the medium conveying belt 22 has the longest path length between the heater 121 and the storage tray 24. The structure of the driving shaft 27 enables the medium conveying belt 22 to have a longer stretching length each time, and the stretching length is close to the sum of the circumferences of the two shafts 271.

驱动转轴27沿顺时针方向(在其他实施例中也可以为逆时针方向)由图39所示的第一转动位置向图40所示的第二转动位置转动时,能够推动介质输送带22从储存盘23放卷,且驱动转轴27在每次转动时,储存盘23放卷的介质输送带22速度一致,从而驱动转轴27每旋转一个循环,储存盘23放卷的介质输送带22的长度一致。驱动转轴27沿逆时针方向(在其他实施例中也可以为顺时针方向)由图40所示的第二转动位置向图39所示的第一转动位置转动时,驱动转轴27放卷缠绕在其上的介质输送带22,并通过收纳盘24的转动来进行收卷。When the driving shaft 27 rotates in a clockwise direction (or counterclockwise direction in other embodiments) from the first rotation position shown in FIG. 39 to the second rotation position shown in FIG. 40, the medium conveying belt 22 can be pushed to unwind from the storage disk 23, and the speed of the medium conveying belt 22 unwound from the storage disk 23 is consistent each time the driving shaft 27 rotates, so that the length of the medium conveying belt 22 unwound from the storage disk 23 is consistent each time the driving shaft 27 rotates one cycle. When the driving shaft 27 rotates in a counterclockwise direction (or clockwise direction in other embodiments) from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 40 to the first rotation position shown in FIG. 39, the driving shaft 27 unwinds the medium conveying belt 22 wound thereon, and rewinds it by rotating the storage disk 24.

进一步地,盒体21中还可设置有气流传感器218,气流传感器218能够经由进口251或者出口252与雾化腔250相连通。当吸嘴30有抽吸动作时,气流传感器218能够感应到气流或气压变化,控制电路能够根据气流传感器218的信号启动电池为加热器121供电,开始雾化工作。当然,在其他实施例中,气流传感器218也可设置于气溶胶生成装置10中。在另一些实施例中,气溶胶生成系统100中也可不设置有气流传感器218。Furthermore, an airflow sensor 218 may be provided in the box body 21, and the airflow sensor 218 may be connected to the atomizing chamber 250 via the inlet 251 or the outlet 252. When the suction nozzle 30 has a suction action, the airflow sensor 218 can sense the change of airflow or air pressure, and the control circuit can start the battery to power the heater 121 according to the signal of the airflow sensor 218 to start the atomization work. Of course, in other embodiments, the airflow sensor 218 may also be provided in the aerosol generating device 10. In other embodiments, the airflow sensor 218 may not be provided in the aerosol generating system 100.

如图37、38、43所示,气溶胶生成装置10可包括机体11以及收容于机体11中的电池、加热器121、控制电路、驱动组件14和传动组件150。其中,电池分别与加热器121、驱动组件14电连接,用于为加热器121、驱动组件14提供电能。控制电路分别与加热器121、驱动组件14电连接,用于控制加热器121、驱动组件14的工作。在一些实施例中,机体11中还可设置有支架155,该支架155可用于驱动组件14和传动组件150的支撑和安装。As shown in FIGS. 37, 38, and 43, the aerosol generating device 10 may include a body 11 and a battery, a heater 121, a control circuit, a drive assembly 14, and a transmission assembly 150 contained in the body 11. The battery is electrically connected to the heater 121 and the drive assembly 14, respectively, for providing electrical energy to the heater 121 and the drive assembly 14. The control circuit is electrically connected to the heater 121 and the drive assembly 14, respectively, for controlling the operation of the heater 121 and the drive assembly 14. In some embodiments, a bracket 155 may also be provided in the body 11, and the bracket 155 may be used for supporting and installing the drive assembly 14 and the transmission assembly 150.

机体11可包括框体112以及分别与框体112相配合的盖体111、底座113。盖体111、底座113可分别盖设于框体112沿厚度方向的两侧。盖体111与框体112之间形成有用于收容气溶胶生成制品20的容纳腔1120。盖体111与框体112之间可通过卡扣连接、螺纹连接、磁吸连接等可拆卸的方式连接在一起,便于通过打开盖体111,实现气溶胶生成制品20的取出和更换。The body 11 may include a frame 112, and a cover 111 and a base 113 respectively matched with the frame 112. The cover 111 and the base 113 may be respectively covered on both sides of the frame 112 in the thickness direction. A receiving cavity 1120 for receiving the aerosol generating product 20 is formed between the cover 111 and the frame 112. The cover 111 and the frame 112 may be connected together in a detachable manner such as a snap connection, a threaded connection, a magnetic connection, etc., so that the aerosol generating product 20 can be taken out and replaced by opening the cover 111.

在本实施例中,盖体111朝向框体112的一侧嵌置有若干个磁铁114,框体112朝向盖体111的一侧分别对应若干个磁铁114嵌置有若干个磁铁115,使得盖体111、框体112之间通过磁铁114、磁铁115相互磁吸固定。In this embodiment, a plurality of magnets 114 are embedded on the side of the cover 111 facing the frame 112, and a plurality of magnets 115 are embedded on the side of the frame 112 facing the cover 111 corresponding to the plurality of magnets 114, so that the cover 111 and the frame 112 are magnetically fixed to each other through the magnets 114 and 115.

底座113与框体112之间形成有安装腔1130,驱动组件14和传动组件150均可收容在安装腔1130中。底座113与框体112之间可通过可拆卸的方式连接在一起,便于维修、更换或升级安装腔1130中的零部件。当然,底座113与框体112之间也可通过不可拆卸的方式连接在一起,避免用户误打开安装腔1130而造成零部件的损坏。An installation cavity 1130 is formed between the base 113 and the frame 112, and the drive assembly 14 and the transmission assembly 150 can be accommodated in the installation cavity 1130. The base 113 and the frame 112 can be connected together in a detachable manner, which is convenient for repairing, replacing or upgrading the components in the installation cavity 1130. Of course, the base 113 and the frame 112 can also be connected together in a non-detachable manner to prevent the user from accidentally opening the installation cavity 1130 and causing damage to the components.

在本实施例中,框体112相对于盖体111、底座113具有较大的厚度,容纳腔1120、安装腔1130的至少大部分由框体112凹陷形成。当然,在其他实施例中,机体11的具体结构不局限于上述具体实施例。In this embodiment, the frame 112 has a greater thickness than the cover 111 and the base 113, and at least most of the accommodating cavity 1120 and the installation cavity 1130 are formed by the depression of the frame 112. Of course, in other embodiments, the specific structure of the body 11 is not limited to the above specific embodiment.

容纳腔1120的底壁(即与盖体111相对设置的一侧壁)可进一步凹陷形成有安装腔1121,用于加热器121的安装和固定。加热器121的一端可直接或间接插装于安装腔1121中固定,另一端伸出安装腔1121并可插入到雾化腔250中,用于在通电后加热进入到雾化腔250中的基质层222。在一些实施例中,加热器121可以为片状,便于与带状的介质输送带22充分接触,以通过热传导的方式充分加热介质输送带22上的基质层222。当然,在其他实施例中,加热器121不限于为片状,其也可以为柱状等其他形状;此外,加热器121也可设置于机体11的其他位置。The bottom wall of the accommodating cavity 1120 (i.e., a side wall disposed opposite to the cover body 111) may be further recessed to form an installation cavity 1121 for the installation and fixation of the heater 121. One end of the heater 121 may be directly or indirectly inserted into the installation cavity 1121 for fixation, and the other end may extend out of the installation cavity 1121 and may be inserted into the atomizing cavity 250, for heating the matrix layer 222 entering the atomizing cavity 250 after power is turned on. In some embodiments, the heater 121 may be in the form of a sheet, so as to facilitate full contact with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, so as to fully heat the matrix layer 222 on the medium conveyor belt 22 by heat conduction. Of course, in other embodiments, the heater 121 is not limited to being in the form of a sheet, and may also be in other shapes such as a columnar shape; in addition, the heater 121 may also be disposed at other positions of the body 11.

进一步地,气溶胶生成装置10还可包括容置于安装腔1121中的安装座122。在一些实施例中,安装座122可采用陶瓷或PEEK(聚醚醚酮)等耐高温材料制成。加热器121的一端可插装于安装座122上,并经由安装座122固定于安装腔1121中,可减少加热器121向安装腔1121的腔壁传递的热量,利于隔热。Furthermore, the aerosol generating device 10 may also include a mounting seat 122 accommodated in the mounting cavity 1121. In some embodiments, the mounting seat 122 may be made of high temperature resistant materials such as ceramic or PEEK (polyetheretherketone). One end of the heater 121 may be inserted into the mounting seat 122 and fixed in the mounting cavity 1121 via the mounting seat 122, which can reduce the heat transferred from the heater 121 to the cavity wall of the mounting cavity 1121, and facilitate heat insulation.

驱动组件14用于提供介质输送带22行进的驱动力。传动组件150与驱动组件14连接,用于将驱动组件14的驱动力传递给气溶胶生成制品20。在本实施例中,驱动组件14为电动驱动结构,其可包括减速器141以及与减速器141连接的输出轴142。当然,在其他实施例中,驱动组件14也可包括电机等其他电动驱动结构。在另一些实施例中,驱动组件14也可不限于为电动驱动结构,其也可以为手动驱动结构,比如手柄或者手轮。The drive assembly 14 is used to provide a driving force for the medium conveyor belt 22 to travel. The transmission assembly 150 is connected to the drive assembly 14, and is used to transmit the driving force of the drive assembly 14 to the aerosol generating article 20. In this embodiment, the drive assembly 14 is an electric drive structure, which may include a reducer 141 and an output shaft 142 connected to the reducer 141. Of course, in other embodiments, the drive assembly 14 may also include other electric drive structures such as a motor. In other embodiments, the drive assembly 14 is also not limited to an electric drive structure, and it may also be a manual drive structure, such as a handle or a hand wheel.

传动组件150可包括驱动齿轮151、放卷齿轮152以及收纳齿轮154。驱动齿轮151与减速器141的输出轴142连接,并能够在减速器141的驱动下与输出轴142同步转动。放卷齿轮152可直接或间接与驱动齿轮151啮合,用于对介质输送带22经过加热器121提供动力。收纳齿轮154可直接或间接与驱动齿轮151啮合,用于对介质输送带22的收卷提供动力。The transmission assembly 150 may include a driving gear 151, an unwinding gear 152, and a receiving gear 154. The driving gear 151 is connected to the output shaft 142 of the reducer 141, and can rotate synchronously with the output shaft 142 under the drive of the reducer 141. The unwinding gear 152 can be directly or indirectly meshed with the driving gear 151 to provide power for the medium conveying belt 22 to pass through the heater 121. The receiving gear 154 can be directly or indirectly meshed with the driving gear 151 to provide power for the winding of the medium conveying belt 22.

在一些实施例中,驱动齿轮151能够在减速器141的驱动下沿第一方向或与第一方向相反的第二方向转动。在本实施例中,第一方向为逆时针方向,第二方向为顺时针方向;在其他实施例中,也可以是第一方向为顺时针方向,第二方向为逆时针方向。驱动齿轮151沿第一方向转动时,放卷齿轮152转动,以推动介质输送带22经过加热器121。In some embodiments, the driving gear 151 can rotate in a first direction or a second direction opposite to the first direction under the drive of the reducer 141. In this embodiment, the first direction is counterclockwise and the second direction is clockwise; in other embodiments, the first direction may be clockwise and the second direction may be counterclockwise. When the driving gear 151 rotates in the first direction, the unwinding gear 152 rotates to push the medium conveying belt 22 to pass through the heater 121.

在本实施例中,收纳齿轮154被配置为根据驱动齿轮151的转动方向与驱动齿轮151啮合或分离。在一些实施例中,传动组件150还包括转接齿轮153,驱动齿轮151与收纳齿轮154之间通过转接齿轮153啮合或脱离啮合。具体地,转接齿轮153可具有与收纳齿轮154分离的第一位置以及与收纳齿轮154啮合的第二位置。在本实施例中,可通过减速器141、驱动齿轮151的正反转来调整收纳齿轮154与转接齿轮153之间的相对位置。驱动齿轮151沿第一方向转动时,驱动齿轮151能够带动转接齿轮153移动至转接齿轮153与收纳齿轮154脱离的第一位置。驱动齿轮151沿第二方向转动时,驱动齿轮151能够带动转接齿轮153移动至转接齿轮153与收纳齿轮154啮合的第二位置。驱动齿轮151沿第一方向或第二方向转动时,转接齿轮153与驱动齿轮151始终保持啮合。当然,在其他实施例中,收纳齿轮154与转接齿轮153之间的相对位置也可通过手动操作的方式来实现。In this embodiment, the storage gear 154 is configured to be engaged or disengaged with the driving gear 151 according to the rotation direction of the driving gear 151. In some embodiments, the transmission assembly 150 further includes a transfer gear 153, and the driving gear 151 and the storage gear 154 are engaged or disengaged through the transfer gear 153. Specifically, the transfer gear 153 may have a first position separated from the storage gear 154 and a second position engaged with the storage gear 154. In this embodiment, the relative position between the storage gear 154 and the transfer gear 153 can be adjusted by the forward and reverse rotation of the reducer 141 and the driving gear 151. When the driving gear 151 rotates in the first direction, the driving gear 151 can drive the transfer gear 153 to move to the first position where the transfer gear 153 is disengaged from the storage gear 154. When the driving gear 151 rotates in the second direction, the driving gear 151 can drive the transfer gear 153 to move to the second position where the transfer gear 153 is engaged with the storage gear 154. When the driving gear 151 rotates in the first direction or the second direction, the transfer gear 153 always keeps meshing with the driving gear 151. Of course, in other embodiments, the relative position between the storage gear 154 and the transfer gear 153 can also be achieved by manual operation.

框体112上还可形成有供转接齿轮153滑动安装的滑槽1131。转接齿轮153的一端具有齿轮轴1531,齿轮轴1531可滑动地安装于滑槽1131中。具体地,在本实施例中,滑槽1131呈跑道形,齿轮轴1531可在滑槽1131的长度方向来回滑动,从而使得转接齿轮153在第一位置和第二位置之间平滑地切换。可以理解地,在其他实施例中,滑槽1131的具体形状不受限制,例如,其也可呈椭圆形或长方形等其他形状。此外,滑槽1131的设置位置也不受限制,例如,滑槽1131也可形成于支架155上。The frame 112 may also be formed with a slide groove 1131 for slidingly installing the transfer gear 153. One end of the transfer gear 153 has a gear shaft 1531, and the gear shaft 1531 can be slidably installed in the slide groove 1131. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the slide groove 1131 is in the shape of a runway, and the gear shaft 1531 can slide back and forth in the length direction of the slide groove 1131, so that the transfer gear 153 can be smoothly switched between the first position and the second position. It can be understood that in other embodiments, the specific shape of the slide groove 1131 is not limited, for example, it can also be in other shapes such as an ellipse or a rectangle. In addition, the setting position of the slide groove 1131 is also not limited, for example, the slide groove 1131 can also be formed on the bracket 155.

在本实施例中,支架155大致呈板状。驱动齿轮151、放卷齿轮152、转接齿轮153以及收纳齿轮154均设置于支架155朝向气溶胶生成制品20的一侧,便于与气溶胶生成制品20连接。减速器141设置于支架155背离气溶胶生成制品20的一侧,输出轴142穿过支架155以与驱动齿轮151连接。In this embodiment, the bracket 155 is generally plate-shaped. The driving gear 151, the unwinding gear 152, the transfer gear 153, and the storage gear 154 are all arranged on the side of the bracket 155 facing the aerosol generating product 20, so as to facilitate connection with the aerosol generating product 20. The reducer 141 is arranged on the side of the bracket 155 away from the aerosol generating product 20, and the output shaft 142 passes through the bracket 155 to be connected with the driving gear 151.

收纳齿轮154的一端具有输出轴1541,输出轴1541与收纳盘24的收纳卷轴243连接并能够带动收纳卷轴243同步转动。在一些实施例中,输出轴1541和收纳卷轴243可通过相互套接的方式连接在一起,且输出轴1541和收纳卷轴243具有D形、四边形、多边形、椭圆形等非圆形截面,以使得输出轴1541和收纳卷轴243能够同步转动,且输出轴1541和收纳卷轴243之间拆装容易。One end of the storage gear 154 has an output shaft 1541, and the output shaft 1541 is connected to the storage reel 243 of the storage tray 24 and can drive the storage reel 243 to rotate synchronously. In some embodiments, the output shaft 1541 and the storage reel 243 can be connected together by mutual sleeve connection, and the output shaft 1541 and the storage reel 243 have a non-circular cross-section such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 1541 and the storage reel 243 can rotate synchronously, and the output shaft 1541 and the storage reel 243 are easy to disassemble and assemble.

放卷齿轮152的一端具有输出轴1521,输出轴1521与驱动转轴27连接并能够带动驱动转轴27同步转动。在一些实施例中,输出轴1521的转动中心线和驱动转轴27中的一个转轴271的转动中心线重合。当然,在其他实施例中,输出轴1521的转动中心线也可以与各转轴271的转动中心线均不重合。输出轴1521与驱动转轴27可通过相互套接的方式连接在一起,且输出轴1521具有D形、四边形、多边形、椭圆形等非圆形截面,以使得输出轴1521和驱动转轴27能够同步转动,且输出轴1521和驱动转轴27之间拆装容易。One end of the unwinding gear 152 has an output shaft 1521, which is connected to the driving shaft 27 and can drive the driving shaft 27 to rotate synchronously. In some embodiments, the rotation center line of the output shaft 1521 coincides with the rotation center line of one of the shafts 271 in the driving shaft 27. Of course, in other embodiments, the rotation center line of the output shaft 1521 may not coincide with the rotation center line of each shaft 271. The output shaft 1521 and the driving shaft 27 can be connected together by mutual sleeve connection, and the output shaft 1521 has a non-circular cross-section such as a D-shape, a quadrilateral, a polygon, an ellipse, etc., so that the output shaft 1521 and the driving shaft 27 can rotate synchronously, and the output shaft 1521 and the driving shaft 27 are easy to disassemble and assemble.

如图44所示,在一个实施例中,驱动齿轮151沿第一方向(示例为逆时针方向)转动时,能够对转接齿轮153施加一个作用力F,该作用力F能够使得转接齿轮153从第二位置滑动到第一位置并保持在第一位置。此时,收纳齿轮154与转接齿轮153脱离,收纳齿轮154不会被转接齿轮153带动转动,收纳盘24不收纳。放卷齿轮152在驱动齿轮151的带动下与驱动齿轮151同步反向(示例为顺时针方向)转动,进而带动驱动转轴27沿顺时针方向转动,推动介质输送带22传输并经过加热器121。As shown in FIG. 44 , in one embodiment, when the driving gear 151 rotates in a first direction (counterclockwise in the example), a force F can be applied to the transfer gear 153, and the force F can cause the transfer gear 153 to slide from the second position to the first position and remain in the first position. At this time, the storage gear 154 is disengaged from the transfer gear 153, and the storage gear 154 will not be driven to rotate by the transfer gear 153, and the storage tray 24 will not be stored. Driven by the driving gear 151, the unwinding gear 152 rotates synchronously with the driving gear 151 in the opposite direction (clockwise in the example), thereby driving the driving shaft 27 to rotate in the clockwise direction, pushing the medium conveyor belt 22 to transmit and pass through the heater 121.

如图45所示,加热完成后,通过控制电路控制驱动齿轮151沿第二方向(示例为顺时针方向)转动,从而会对转接齿轮153施加一个与作用力F相反的作用力F' ,该作用力F' 能够使得转接齿轮153从第一位置滑动到第二位置并保持在第二位置。此时,放卷齿轮152在驱动齿轮151的带动下与驱动齿轮151同步反向(示例为逆时针方向)转动,进而带动驱动转轴27沿逆时针方向转动,从而放卷介质输送带22缠绕在驱动转轴27上的部分。同时,转接齿轮153在驱动齿轮151的带动下与驱动齿轮151沿逆时针方向转动,进而带动与转接齿轮153啮合的收纳齿轮154沿顺时针方向转动,进而带动收纳盘24沿顺时针方向转动,从而收卷介质输送带22。As shown in FIG. 45 , after heating is completed, the control circuit controls the driving gear 151 to rotate in the second direction (clockwise in the example), thereby applying a force F' opposite to the force F to the transfer gear 153, and the force F' can make the transfer gear 153 slide from the first position to the second position and remain in the second position. At this time, the unwinding gear 152 rotates synchronously with the driving gear 151 in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in the example) under the drive of the driving gear 151, thereby driving the driving shaft 27 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, thereby unwinding the portion of the medium conveying belt 22 wound on the driving shaft 27. At the same time, the transfer gear 153 rotates with the driving gear 151 in the counterclockwise direction under the drive of the driving gear 151, thereby driving the storage gear 154 meshing with the transfer gear 153 to rotate in the clockwise direction, thereby driving the storage tray 24 to rotate in the clockwise direction, thereby winding the medium conveying belt 22.

本实施例中,通过驱动转轴27的转动来推动介质输送带22的传输,可保证每次驱动转轴27转动而行进的介质输送带22的长度一致。通过减速器141、驱动齿轮151的正反转来达到介质输送带22的放卷和收纳动作,并通过减速器141、驱动齿轮151的正反转来调整收纳齿轮154与转接齿轮153之间的相对位置,自动化程度高,控制精度高。In this embodiment, the transmission of the medium conveyor belt 22 is promoted by the rotation of the driving shaft 27, so that the length of the medium conveyor belt 22 that moves each time the driving shaft 27 rotates can be ensured to be consistent. The unwinding and storage actions of the medium conveyor belt 22 are achieved by the forward and reverse rotation of the reducer 141 and the driving gear 151, and the relative position between the storage gear 154 and the transfer gear 153 is adjusted by the forward and reverse rotation of the reducer 141 and the driving gear 151, with a high degree of automation and high control accuracy.

再如图43所示,在一些实施例中,气溶胶生成装置10还可包括位置检测部件16,该位置检测部件16可包括电位计161,电位计161能够对收纳齿轮154的旋转角度进行检测并反馈给控制电路。电位计161、收纳齿轮154可同轴设置,且电位计161能够与收纳齿轮154同步转动。具体地,电位计161的检测轴162可穿过支架155并与收纳齿轮154相互插接固定,从而能够在收纳齿轮154的驱动下与收纳齿轮154同步转动。当然,在其他实施例中,位置检测部件16不限于为电位计161,其也可采用其他已知的位置传感器;此外,位置检测部件16也可通过检测收纳齿轮154等其他齿轮的旋转角度,来精确控制减速器141的工作。As shown in FIG. 43 , in some embodiments, the aerosol generating device 10 may further include a position detection component 16, which may include a potentiometer 161. The potentiometer 161 can detect the rotation angle of the storage gear 154 and feed it back to the control circuit. The potentiometer 161 and the storage gear 154 can be coaxially arranged, and the potentiometer 161 can rotate synchronously with the storage gear 154. Specifically, the detection shaft 162 of the potentiometer 161 can pass through the bracket 155 and be plugged and fixed with the storage gear 154, so that it can rotate synchronously with the storage gear 154 under the drive of the storage gear 154. Of course, in other embodiments, the position detection component 16 is not limited to the potentiometer 161, and other known position sensors can also be used; in addition, the position detection component 16 can also accurately control the operation of the reducer 141 by detecting the rotation angle of other gears such as the storage gear 154.

图46示出了本发明第六实施例中的气溶胶生成系统100,该气溶胶生成系统100可包括壳体101、带状介质输送带22以及传输装置40。带状介质输送带22可移动地设置于壳体101内,传输装置40设置于壳体101内并与带状介质输送带22相配合,以为该带状介质输送带22提供动力。带状介质输送带22在一些实施例中可呈但不限于扁带状,其可采用表面布置有固态气溶胶生成基质的锡箔带制成。46 shows an aerosol generating system 100 in a sixth embodiment of the present invention, and the aerosol generating system 100 may include a housing 101, a belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and a transmission device 40. The belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 is movably disposed in the housing 101, and the transmission device 40 is disposed in the housing 101 and cooperates with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to provide power to the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22. In some embodiments, the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 may be in the shape of a flat belt, but is not limited to it, and may be made of a tin foil belt with a solid aerosol generating matrix arranged on the surface.

该气溶胶生成系统100在一些实施例中还可包括用于缠绕未进行加热的带状介质输送带22的第一卷轴结构102、用于缠绕已完成加热的带状介质输送带22的第二卷轴结构103、对带状介质输送带22局部进行加热的加热结构12。传输装置40可对带状介质输送带22进行精确传输,使得可供雾化次数多,每次雾化的带状介质输送带22的区域不会混合在一起,口味佳,提高用户体验感。In some embodiments, the aerosol generating system 100 may further include a first reel structure 102 for winding an unheated strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22, a second reel structure 103 for winding a heated strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22, and a heating structure 12 for locally heating the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22. The transmission device 40 can accurately transmit the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22, so that more atomization times are available, and the regions of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 atomized each time will not be mixed together, so that the taste is good and the user experience is improved.

具体地,当完成一部分的带状介质输送带22的加热后,通过第二卷轴结构103对已完成加热的带状介质输送带22部分进行缠绕收集,同时第一卷轴结构102释放未进行加热的带状介质输送带22,从而可对带状介质输送带22的不同位置进行加热。传输装置40在一些实施例中可设置于第一卷轴结构102与加热结构104之间的传输路径上,以将相应的带状介质输送带22传输至加热结构12处进行加热。Specifically, after a portion of the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 is heated, the portion of the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 that has been heated is wound and collected by the second reel structure 103, and the first reel structure 102 releases the unheated strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, so that different positions of the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 can be heated. In some embodiments, the transmission device 40 can be disposed on the transmission path between the first reel structure 102 and the heating structure 104 to transmit the corresponding strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to the heating structure 12 for heating.

该气溶胶生成系统100通过将已完成加热的带状介质输送带22部分、未进行加热的带状介质输送带22的部分分开收集储存,从而可以防止窜味等不佳情况的发生,从而提升用户的体验感。The aerosol generating system 100 can prevent the occurrence of undesirable situations such as odor crosstalk by collecting and storing the heated portion of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and the unheated portion of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 separately, thereby improving the user experience.

在一些实施例中,第一卷轴结构102、第二卷轴结构103可分别包括设置于壳体101内的底盘1021、设置于底盘1021上的卷轴1022、设置于卷轴1022上且与底盘1021配合的盖体1023,其中,盖体1023与底盘1021可相对设置于卷轴1022的两端上,从而可形成用于容纳所卷绕收集的带状介质输送带22的第二收容空间。In some embodiments, the first reel structure 102 and the second reel structure 103 may respectively include a chassis 1021 disposed in the shell 101, a reel 1022 disposed on the chassis 1021, and a cover body 1023 disposed on the reel 1022 and matched with the chassis 1021, wherein the cover body 1023 and the chassis 1021 may be relatively disposed at the two ends of the reel 1022, thereby forming a second receiving space for accommodating the wound and collected belt medium conveyor belt 22.

图47及图48示出了本发明一个实施例中的传输装置40,用于传输带状介质输送带22,其可包括锁定组件41以及驱动组件46。锁定组件41具有与带状介质输送带22相对固定的锁定状态以及与带状介质输送带22相对分离或松接触的解锁状态。驱动组件46与锁定组件41连接,以驱动锁定组件41沿第一方向B1(图示为水平方向)移动。该锁定组件41处于锁定状态时,可与带状介质输送带22相对固定,从而可带动带状气溶胶生成基质移动;该锁定组件处于解锁状态时,能够回复到初始位置,如此往复,实现对带状介质输送带22的持续输送,直至整根带状介质输送带22加热完成。FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 show a transmission device 40 in one embodiment of the present invention, which is used to transmit a strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and may include a locking component 41 and a driving component 46. The locking component 41 has a locking state relatively fixed with the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 and an unlocking state relatively separated or loosely contacted with the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22. The driving component 46 is connected to the locking component 41 to drive the locking component 41 to move along the first direction B1 (horizontal direction in the figure). When the locking component 41 is in the locked state, it can be relatively fixed with the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, so as to drive the strip-shaped aerosol generating substrate to move; when the locking component is in the unlocked state, it can return to the initial position, and so on, to achieve continuous conveyance of the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 until the entire strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 is heated.

一同参阅图48至图50,锁定组件41在一些实施例中包括至少一个夹持件411,该至少一个夹持件411能够沿着与第一方向B1相交的第二方向B2(图示为竖直方向)来回移动,以实现锁定组件41在锁定状态和解锁状态之间来回切换。具体地,该至少一个夹持件411可以通过朝向带状介质输送带22移动以夹住带状介质输送带22实现上述锁定状态,以及通过远离带状介质输送带22移动来实现上述解锁状态。Referring to FIGS. 48 to 50 together, the locking assembly 41 in some embodiments includes at least one clamping member 411, which can move back and forth along a second direction B2 (vertical direction in the figure) intersecting the first direction B1 to switch back and forth between the locking state and the unlocking state of the locking assembly 41. Specifically, the at least one clamping member 411 can move toward the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to clamp the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to achieve the above-mentioned locking state, and move away from the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to achieve the above-mentioned unlocking state.

当锁定组件41处于解锁状态时,锁定组件41与带状介质输送带22相对分离或松接触的解锁状态,此时即使锁定组件41移动,也不会带动带状介质输送带22同步移动。此处,相对分离是指锁定组件41与带状介质输送带22不接触;松接触是指锁定组件41接触带状介质输送带22,但锁定组件41沿第一方向B1移动时不能带动带状介质输送带22移动。较佳地,当锁定组件41处于解锁状态时,锁定组件41与带状介质输送带22不接触,即,两个夹持件411之间的距离大于带状介质输送带22的厚度。When the locking assembly 41 is in an unlocked state, the locking assembly 41 is in a relatively separated or loosely contacted unlocked state with the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22. At this time, even if the locking assembly 41 moves, it will not drive the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to move synchronously. Here, relative separation means that the locking assembly 41 is not in contact with the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22; loose contact means that the locking assembly 41 is in contact with the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22, but the locking assembly 41 cannot drive the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to move when moving along the first direction B1. Preferably, when the locking assembly 41 is in an unlocked state, the locking assembly 41 is not in contact with the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22, that is, the distance between the two clamping members 411 is greater than the thickness of the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22.

在一些实施例中,上述的第二方向B2与上述的第一方向B1垂直布置,以便该至少一个夹持件可以沿着垂直于第一方向B1的方向来回移动,实现对该带状介质输送带22的垂直夹持,效果较佳。In some embodiments, the second direction B2 is arranged perpendicular to the first direction B1 so that the at least one clamping member can move back and forth along a direction perpendicular to the first direction B1 to achieve vertical clamping of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 with better effect.

在一些实施例中,该锁定组件41可包括两个夹持件411,该两个夹持件411可沿上述第二方向B2相靠近和相远离。当该两个夹持件411沿着上述第二方向B2相靠近时,可以分别从该带状介质输送带22的两相对侧夹持该带状介质输送带22。当该两个夹持件411沿着上述第二方向B2相远离时,可让对该带状介质输送带22的夹持解除。在一些实施例中,该两个夹持件411也可以是一个可以移动,一个不可以移动,同样可以实现夹持带状介质输送带22的目的。In some embodiments, the locking assembly 41 may include two clamping members 411, and the two clamping members 411 may be moved closer to and farther from each other along the second direction B2. When the two clamping members 411 are moved closer to each other along the second direction B2, the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 may be clamped from two opposite sides of the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22. When the two clamping members 411 are moved away from each other along the second direction B2, the clamping of the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 may be released. In some embodiments, one of the two clamping members 411 may be movable and the other may not be movable, and the purpose of clamping the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 may also be achieved.

在一些实施例中,该两个夹持件411可呈块状,每一夹持件411均具有夹持面4111,该夹持面4111为对应夹持件411上朝向另一夹持件411的一面,两个夹持件411分别通过其夹持面4111与带状介质输送带22的两相对面接触夹紧。在一些实施例中,该两个夹持件411的夹持面4111相正对,且两者的形状和尺寸相同,以便可以更稳妥地夹持带状介质输送带22,可以防止对准度不够造成的应力集中对带状介质输送带22造成的伤害。在一些实施例中,夹持面4111的宽长可与带状介质输送带22的宽度相当,具体地,夹持面4111的宽度可等于、略大于或略小于带状介质输送带22的宽度。In some embodiments, the two clamping members 411 may be block-shaped, and each clamping member 411 has a clamping surface 4111, which is a surface of the corresponding clamping member 411 facing the other clamping member 411. The two clamping members 411 are respectively in contact with two opposite surfaces of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 through their clamping surfaces 4111. In some embodiments, the clamping surfaces 4111 of the two clamping members 411 are opposite to each other, and the shapes and sizes of the two clamping members 411 are the same, so that the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 can be clamped more securely, and the stress concentration caused by insufficient alignment can be prevented from causing damage to the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22. In some embodiments, the width and length of the clamping surface 4111 can be equivalent to the width of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22. Specifically, the width of the clamping surface 4111 can be equal to, slightly larger than, or slightly smaller than the width of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22.

在其它实施例中,夹持面4111也可呈圆形设置,圆形夹持面4111的直径可与带状介质输送带22的宽度相当,即夹持面4111的直径可等于、略大于、或略小于带状介质输送带22的宽度。In other embodiments, the clamping surface 4111 may also be set in a circular shape, and the diameter of the circular clamping surface 4111 may be equivalent to the width of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, that is, the diameter of the clamping surface 4111 may be equal to, slightly larger than, or slightly smaller than the width of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22.

在一些实施例中,夹持件411可采用弹性材料制成,或者,至少夹持件411的夹持面4111由弹性材料形成。如此设置,夹持件411与带状介质输送带22的抵接更柔和,其一个方面可以增加摩擦力,另一个方面可防止夹持件411的夹持面4111过硬而损坏带状介质输送带22。当然,夹持件411并不局限于上述材料制成,对于一些结构强度比较高的带状介质输送带22而言,夹持件411也可完全采用刚性材料制成。In some embodiments, the clamping member 411 may be made of an elastic material, or at least the clamping surface 4111 of the clamping member 411 may be formed of an elastic material. In this way, the clamping member 411 and the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 are more gently abutted, which can increase friction on one hand, and prevent the clamping surface 4111 of the clamping member 411 from being too hard and damaging the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 on the other hand. Of course, the clamping member 411 is not limited to being made of the above materials. For some strip-shaped medium conveying belts 22 with relatively high structural strength, the clamping member 411 may also be made of a completely rigid material.

再如图48至图50所示,该锁定组件41在一些实施例中还包括至少一个推动件413,至少一个推动件413与驱动组件46相连接,用于驱动至少一个夹持件411移动至锁定状态并保持在锁定状态。也可以说,该锁定组件41在一些实施例中还可包括与驱动组件46相连接的推动件413,该推动件413用于给该至少一个夹持件411提供沿着第二方向B2移动的至少一个推动力。具体地,该推动件413的一端与驱动组件46相连,另一端与该至少一个夹持件411相连接。As shown in Figures 48 to 50, the locking assembly 41 in some embodiments further includes at least one pusher 413, which is connected to the drive assembly 46 and is used to drive at least one clamping member 411 to move to a locked state and remain in the locked state. It can also be said that the locking assembly 41 in some embodiments further includes a pusher 413 connected to the drive assembly 46, which is used to provide at least one driving force for the at least one clamping member 411 to move along the second direction B2. Specifically, one end of the pusher 413 is connected to the drive assembly 46, and the other end is connected to the at least one clamping member 411.

再如图所示,锁定组件41还包括至少一个弹性件412,至少一个弹性件412与至少一个夹持件连接,用于驱动至少一个夹持件411移动至解锁状态并保持在解锁状态。也可以说,该锁定组件41在一些实施例中还可包括弹性件412,该弹性件412用于给该至少一个夹持件411提供至少一个弹性复位力,该至少一个弹性复位力的方向与至少一个推动力的方向相反。As shown in the figure, the locking assembly 41 further includes at least one elastic member 412, which is connected to at least one clamping member and is used to drive at least one clamping member 411 to move to an unlocked state and maintain it in the unlocked state. It can also be said that the locking assembly 41 in some embodiments may also include an elastic member 412, which is used to provide at least one elastic reset force to the at least one clamping member 411, and the direction of the at least one elastic reset force is opposite to the direction of the at least one driving force.

如此,当该至少一个弹性复位力用于驱动该至少一个夹持件411远离该带状介质输送带22时,至少一个推动力则用于驱动该至少一个夹持件411靠近该带状介质输送带22。反之,当该至少一个弹性复位力用于驱动该至少一个夹持件411靠近该带状介质输送带22时,至少一个推动力则用于驱动该至少一个夹持件411远离该带状介质输送带22。Thus, when the at least one elastic restoring force is used to drive the at least one clamping member 411 away from the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22, the at least one driving force is used to drive the at least one clamping member 411 closer to the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22. Conversely, when the at least one elastic restoring force is used to drive the at least one clamping member 411 closer to the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22, the at least one driving force is used to drive the at least one clamping member 411 away from the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22.

在一些实施例中,当该锁定组件41包括可相向和相背移动的两个夹持件411时,该推动件413给每一个夹持件411均提供一个推动力,且该推动件413分别给该两个夹持件411的推动力的方向相反(相背或相向),以推动该两个夹持件411相远离或相靠近。此时,弹性件412则分别给两个夹持件411提供方向相反的两个弹性复位力。上述弹性件412的设置,使得上述两个夹持件411弹性保持在解锁状态。当该推动件413分别对该两个夹持件411施加的推动力分别大于对应的弹性复位力,才会驱动该两个夹持件411靠拢,直至夹紧该带状介质输送带22。In some embodiments, when the locking assembly 41 includes two clamping members 411 that can move toward and away from each other, the pushing member 413 provides a pushing force to each clamping member 411, and the pushing forces provided by the pushing member 413 to the two clamping members 411 are in opposite directions (away from each other or toward each other) to push the two clamping members 411 away from or closer to each other. At this time, the elastic member 412 provides two elastic reset forces in opposite directions to the two clamping members 411. The setting of the elastic member 412 allows the two clamping members 411 to be elastically maintained in an unlocked state. When the pushing forces applied by the pushing member 413 to the two clamping members 411 are respectively greater than the corresponding elastic reset forces, the two clamping members 411 will be driven together until the belt medium conveyor belt 22 is clamped.

在图示的实施例中,该弹性件412可设置于两个夹持件411之间,为该两个夹持件411相互远离提供弹性复位力。在其它实施例中,该弹性件412可包括两个弹性单元,该两个弹性单元分别设置于两个该夹持件411相背的一端,为两个夹持件411相互靠近提供弹性复位力。In the illustrated embodiment, the elastic member 412 may be disposed between the two clamping members 411 to provide an elastic restoring force for the two clamping members 411 to move away from each other. In other embodiments, the elastic member 412 may include two elastic units, which are respectively disposed at opposite ends of the two clamping members 411 to provide an elastic restoring force for the two clamping members 411 to move closer to each other.

在一些实施例中,至少一个推动件413被配置为沿第一方向B1移动,以驱动至少一个夹持件411沿第二方向B2移动至所述锁定状态,并在至少一个夹持件411处于锁定状态时,带动锁定组件41沿第一方向B1移动。也可以说,推动件413可沿第一方向B1来回移动地设置,并可操作地与该至少一个夹持件411相配合,以提供上述的至少一个推动力。In some embodiments, at least one pusher 413 is configured to move along the first direction B1 to drive at least one clamping member 411 to move along the second direction B2 to the locked state, and when at least one clamping member 411 is in the locked state, the locking assembly 41 is driven to move along the first direction B1. In other words, the pusher 413 can be arranged to move back and forth along the first direction B1, and can be operably matched with the at least one clamping member 411 to provide the at least one driving force mentioned above.

具体地,当该锁定组件41处于解锁状态时,该推动件413可与该至少一个夹持件411脱离接触。当需要夹持该带状介质输送带22,推动件413沿第一方向B1朝向该至少一个夹持件411移动至接触,并进一步地逐步提高对该至少一个夹持件411提供的至少一个推动力的力度,直至克服对应弹性复位力之后,解决该至少一个夹持件411对应该带状介质输送带22的锁定。Specifically, when the locking assembly 41 is in the unlocked state, the pushing member 413 can be out of contact with the at least one clamping member 411. When the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 needs to be clamped, the pushing member 413 moves toward the at least one clamping member 411 along the first direction B1 until it contacts the at least one clamping member 411, and further gradually increases the strength of at least one pushing force provided to the at least one clamping member 411 until the corresponding elastic reset force is overcome, thereby resolving the locking of the at least one clamping member 411 corresponding to the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22.

在一些实施例中,至少一个夹持件411包括至少一个第一配合斜面4112,至少一个推动件413包括至少一个第二配合斜面4130,至少一个第二配合斜面4130推抵至少一个第一配合斜面4112,使至少一个夹持件411沿第二方向B2移动至锁定状态。也可以说,该推动件413与该至少一个夹持件411之间设有至少一个楔形配合结构,该至少一个楔形配合结构将推动件413沿着第一方向B1的驱动力分解出上述至少一个推动力。In some embodiments, at least one clamping member 411 includes at least one first mating slope 4112, and at least one pushing member 413 includes at least one second mating slope 4130. The at least one second mating slope 4130 pushes against the at least one first mating slope 4112, so that the at least one clamping member 411 moves along the second direction B2 to a locked state. In other words, at least one wedge-shaped mating structure is provided between the pushing member 413 and the at least one clamping member 411, and the at least one wedge-shaped mating structure decomposes the driving force of the pushing member 413 along the first direction B1 into the at least one driving force mentioned above.

结合图52及图53所示,该至少一个楔形配合结构在一些实施例中可包括形成于该至少一个夹持件411上的第一配合斜面4112以及形成于推动件413上的至少一个第二配合斜面4130,该第一配合斜面4112与该至少一个第二配合斜面4130相配合,以实现驱动力的分解。As shown in Figures 52 and 53, in some embodiments, the at least one wedge-shaped mating structure may include a first mating bevel 4112 formed on the at least one clamping member 411 and at least one second mating bevel 4130 formed on the pushing member 413, and the first mating bevel 4112 cooperates with the at least one second mating bevel 4130 to achieve the decomposition of the driving force.

具体地,当第一配合斜面4112、第二配合斜面4130接触时,夹持件411受到推动件413的推动而沿第二方向B2移动。该第一配合斜面4112与该至少一个第二配合斜面4130可以是斜平面或弧面。推动件413通过第二配合斜面4130与第一配合斜面4112配合,给可移动的夹持件411提供与夹持件411自身所受到的弹性复位力的方向相反的推动力,从而推动件413通过与夹持件411配合,来改变锁定组件41的状态。Specifically, when the first mating bevel 4112 and the second mating bevel 4130 are in contact, the clamping member 411 is pushed by the pushing member 413 and moves along the second direction B2. The first mating bevel 4112 and the at least one second mating bevel 4130 can be inclined planes or arc surfaces. The pushing member 413 cooperates with the first mating bevel 4112 through the second mating bevel 4130 to provide the movable clamping member 411 with a pushing force in the opposite direction to the elastic reset force to which the clamping member 411 itself is subjected, so that the pushing member 413 changes the state of the locking assembly 41 by cooperating with the clamping member 411.

再如图49所示,推动件413在一些实施例中可包括朝夹持件411伸出的一对施力部4131,该一对施力部4131分别与该两个夹持件411对应设置,每一施力部4131的末端朝向另一施力部4131的一侧设置有第二配合斜面4130,且该一对施力部4131上的第二配合斜面4130靠近夹持件411的一端的距离大于远离夹持件411的一端的距离,即该一对施力部4131上的第二配合斜面4130的呈八字形布置,以便与该两个夹持件411配合时,为该两个夹持件411提供一个相向的推动力。可以理解地,在一些实施例中,施力部4131也可设置于夹持件411上,相应地,第一配合斜面4112可设置于施力部4131上,第二配合斜面4130可设置于推动件413上。As shown in Figure 49 again, in some embodiments, the pushing member 413 may include a pair of force-applying portions 4131 extending toward the clamping member 411, and the pair of force-applying portions 4131 are respectively arranged corresponding to the two clamping members 411, and a second mating inclined surface 4130 is arranged at the end of each force-applying portion 4131 facing the side of the other force-applying portion 4131, and the distance of the second mating inclined surface 4130 on the pair of force-applying portions 4131 close to one end of the clamping member 411 is greater than the distance away from one end of the clamping member 411, that is, the second mating inclined surfaces 4130 on the pair of force-applying portions 4131 are arranged in an eight-shaped shape, so as to provide a directional pushing force for the two clamping members 411 when mating with the two clamping members 411. It can be understood that in some embodiments, the force applying portion 4131 may also be disposed on the clamping member 411 , and accordingly, the first mating inclined surface 4112 may be disposed on the force applying portion 4131 , and the second mating inclined surface 4130 may be disposed on the pushing member 413 .

如图56所示,示出了在第二方向B2上位于上方的施力部4131与夹持件411,当推动件413在第一方向B1上朝向夹持件411移动,并且推动件413的施力部4131的第二配合斜面4130与夹持件411的第一配合斜面4112接触时,施力部4131对夹持件411有垂直于第一配合斜面4112的作用力F,作用力F可以分解为沿第二方向B2的作用力F2以及与F2垂直的作用力F1,作用力F2能够推动夹持件411沿第二方向B2移动。夹持件411仅能沿着相应轴线在第二方向B2上移动,而且弹性件412给夹持件411的弹性复位力与作用力F2方向相反,因此,当第二方向B2的作用力F2大于弹性复位力时,夹持件411在第二方向B2上向下移动。As shown in FIG. 56 , the force-applying portion 4131 and the clamping member 411 located at the top in the second direction B2 are shown. When the pusher 413 moves toward the clamping member 411 in the first direction B1, and the second matching inclined surface 4130 of the force-applying portion 4131 of the pusher 413 contacts the first matching inclined surface 4112 of the clamping member 411, the force-applying portion 4131 exerts a force F perpendicular to the first matching inclined surface 4112 on the clamping member 411. The force F can be decomposed into a force F2 along the second direction B2 and a force F1 perpendicular to F2. The force F2 can push the clamping member 411 to move along the second direction B2. The clamping member 411 can only move along the corresponding axis in the second direction B2, and the elastic restoring force of the elastic member 412 on the clamping member 411 is opposite to the direction of the force F2. Therefore, when the force F2 in the second direction B2 is greater than the elastic restoring force, the clamping member 411 moves downward in the second direction B2.

可以理解地,第二方向B2上位于下方的夹持件411同理,因此当两个夹持件411相靠近时,锁定组件41可从解锁状态切换至锁定状态。It can be understood that the clamping member 411 located at the bottom in the second direction B2 is similar, so when the two clamping members 411 are close to each other, the locking assembly 41 can be switched from the unlocked state to the locked state.

对于第二方向B2上位于上方的夹持件411而言,当推动件413在第一方向B1上背向夹持件411移动时,作用力F减小,第二方向B2作用力F2减小,当第二方向B2作用力F2小于弹性复位力时,夹持件411向上移动。第二方向B2上位于下方的夹持件411同理,因此当两个夹持件411相远离时,锁定组件41可从锁定状态切换至解锁状态。For the clamping member 411 located at the upper side in the second direction B2, when the pushing member 413 moves away from the clamping member 411 in the first direction B1, the force F decreases, and the force F2 in the second direction B2 decreases. When the force F2 in the second direction B2 is less than the elastic reset force, the clamping member 411 moves upward. The same is true for the clamping member 411 located at the lower side in the second direction B2. Therefore, when the two clamping members 411 move away from each other, the locking assembly 41 can be switched from the locked state to the unlocked state.

可以理解地,其它实施例中,例如在只有一个夹持件411可移动和/或弹性件412设置于一可移动夹持件411远离另一夹持件411的一端的实施例中,第一配合斜面4112与第二配合斜面4130可以以与该实施例相同或相似的原理进行设置。It can be understood that in other embodiments, for example, in an embodiment where only one clamping member 411 is movable and/or the elastic member 412 is arranged at one end of a movable clamping member 411 away from the other clamping member 411, the first mating bevel 4112 and the second mating bevel 4130 can be arranged according to the same or similar principle as that of the embodiment.

推动件413在一些实施例中可呈块状设置,推动件413与夹持件411可分别沿第一方向B1分布,推动件413上设有供带状介质输送带22通过的穿孔4132,该穿孔4132可位于两个施力部4131之间,且在第一方向B1上贯通推动件413,该穿孔4132与两个夹持件411的夹持面4111之间对应。In some embodiments, the pushing member 413 may be arranged in a block shape. The pushing member 413 and the clamping member 411 may be distributed along the first direction B1 respectively. The pushing member 413 is provided with a through hole 4132 for the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to pass through. The through hole 4132 may be located between the two force-applying portions 4131 and pass through the pushing member 413 in the first direction B1. The through hole 4132 corresponds to the clamping surfaces 4111 of the two clamping members 411.

一同参阅图54a至图54c,推动件413在第一方向B1上朝夹持件411移动且作用于夹持件411时,第二配合斜面4130与第一配合斜面4112抵接,推动件413通过第二配合斜面4130推动夹持件411移动以夹紧带状介质输送带22,弹性件412处于压缩状态,即推动件413与夹持件411接触配合,使得两个夹持件411呈锁定状态,夹紧带状介质输送带22;在推动件413继续在第一方向B1上朝夹持件411所在侧移动时,将可带动夹持件411一同移动,且带动带状介质输送带22移动。Referring to Figures 54a to 54c together, when the pushing member 413 moves toward the clamping member 411 in the first direction B1 and acts on the clamping member 411, the second mating inclined surface 4130 abuts against the first mating inclined surface 4112, and the pushing member 413 pushes the clamping member 411 to move through the second mating inclined surface 4130 to clamp the belt-like medium conveyor belt 22, and the elastic member 412 is in a compressed state, that is, the pushing member 413 contacts and cooperates with the clamping member 411, so that the two clamping members 411 are in a locked state, clamping the belt-like medium conveyor belt 22; when the pushing member 413 continues to move toward the side where the clamping member 411 is located in the first direction B1, it will drive the clamping member 411 to move together, and drive the belt-like medium conveyor belt 22 to move.

如图55a至图55c所示,推动件413在第一方向B1上背离夹持件411移动时,第二配合斜面4130远离第一配合斜面4112,推动件413解除对夹持件411的作用,弹性件412释放弹性复位力,推动夹持件411移动,两个夹持件411呈解锁状态,释放带状介质输送带22。当推动件413恢复在第一方向B1上朝夹持件411移动且作用于夹持件411时,进行下一次带状介质输送带22的传输。其中,在推动件413在第一方向B1上背离夹持件411移动时,夹持件411同样在第一方向B1上朝向推动件413移动,以供推动件413作用,实现下一次带状介质输送带22的传输。As shown in Figures 55a to 55c, when the pusher 413 moves away from the clamping member 411 in the first direction B1, the second matching slope 4130 moves away from the first matching slope 4112, the pusher 413 releases the effect on the clamping member 411, and the elastic member 412 releases the elastic reset force to push the clamping member 411 to move, and the two clamping members 411 are in an unlocked state, releasing the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22. When the pusher 413 resumes moving toward the clamping member 411 in the first direction B1 and acts on the clamping member 411, the next transmission of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 is performed. Among them, when the pusher 413 moves away from the clamping member 411 in the first direction B1, the clamping member 411 also moves toward the pusher 413 in the first direction B1, so that the pusher 413 can act on it, and the next transmission of the strip-shaped medium conveying belt 22 is realized.

再如图49所示,锁定组件41在一些实施例中还包括第一安装座414,该至少一个夹持件411可沿第二方向B2来回移动地设置于第一安装座414上。该推动件413可沿第一方向B1来回移动地设置于该第一安装座414上,并能够带动第一安装座414沿第一方向B1来回移动。As shown in FIG. 49 , in some embodiments, the locking assembly 41 further includes a first mounting seat 414, and the at least one clamping member 411 is disposed on the first mounting seat 414 so as to be movable back and forth along the second direction B2. The pushing member 413 is disposed on the first mounting seat 414 so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction B1, and can drive the first mounting seat 414 to move back and forth along the first direction B1.

具体地,两个夹持件411可沿第二方向B2来回移动地设置于第一安装座414上。第一安装座414上可设有安装轴415,安装轴415沿第二方向B2延伸设置,该两个夹持件411分别套设于安装轴415上,可从而实现在第一安装座414上沿第二方向B2来回移动。弹性件412设置在该两个夹持件411之间,为该两个夹持件411相互远离的弹性复位力。Specifically, the two clamping members 411 can be arranged on the first mounting seat 414 so as to move back and forth along the second direction B2. The first mounting seat 414 can be provided with a mounting shaft 415, which is extended along the second direction B2. The two clamping members 411 are respectively sleeved on the mounting shaft 415, so as to move back and forth along the second direction B2 on the first mounting seat 414. The elastic member 412 is arranged between the two clamping members 411, and is an elastic restoring force for the two clamping members 411 to move away from each other.

在一些实施例中,第一安装座414上可设有两根安装轴415,且该两根安装轴415在第一方向B1上分别位于带状介质输送带22的两侧,各夹持件411分别通过两个安装环417对应套设于该两根安装轴415上,使得夹持件411沿第二方向B2上下移动的平衡性更好。In some embodiments, two mounting shafts 415 may be provided on the first mounting seat 414, and the two mounting shafts 415 are respectively located on both sides of the belt medium conveyor belt 22 in the first direction B1, and each clamping member 411 is respectively sleeved on the two mounting shafts 415 through two mounting rings 417, so that the clamping member 411 has better balance when moving up and down along the second direction B2.

第一安装座414还可设有两个间隔部416,两个间隔部416分别与两根安装轴415对应设置,且间隔部416上设有供安装轴415穿过的第一安装孔4161,安装轴415穿设于该第一安装孔4161中,实现安装轴415的安装。间隔部416还可将两个夹持件411隔开。每一安装轴415上的弹性件412可包括两个柱状弹簧,该两个柱状弹簧分别套设于安装轴415上,并位于对应的夹持件411与间隔部416之间,为对应的夹持件提供弹性复位力,采用独立的弹簧分别驱动该两个夹持件411,稳定性更好。The first mounting seat 414 may also be provided with two spacers 416, which are respectively arranged corresponding to the two mounting shafts 415, and the spacers 416 are provided with first mounting holes 4161 for the mounting shafts 415 to pass through, and the mounting shafts 415 are inserted into the first mounting holes 4161 to achieve the installation of the mounting shafts 415. The spacers 416 may also separate the two clamping members 411. The elastic member 412 on each mounting shaft 415 may include two columnar springs, which are respectively sleeved on the mounting shaft 415 and located between the corresponding clamping member 411 and the spacers 416, to provide elastic reset force for the corresponding clamping member, and the two clamping members 411 are respectively driven by independent springs, so as to achieve better stability.

再如图49所示,第一安装座414可呈矩形框状,其可包括顶壁4141、与顶壁4141相对的底壁4142以及连接顶壁4141与底壁4142的支撑壁4143。该两根安装轴415间隔地设置于第一安装座414内,且两端分别固定于顶壁4141和底壁4142上。该两个间隔部416分别设置于该两个支撑壁4143上,且相向伸出。顶壁4141和底壁4142上对应设有供安装轴415的末端安装的第二安装孔4145。As shown in FIG. 49 , the first mounting seat 414 may be in the shape of a rectangular frame, and may include a top wall 4141, a bottom wall 4142 opposite to the top wall 4141, and a support wall 4143 connecting the top wall 4141 and the bottom wall 4142. The two mounting shafts 415 are arranged in the first mounting seat 414 at intervals, and the two ends are respectively fixed on the top wall 4141 and the bottom wall 4142. The two spacers 416 are respectively arranged on the two support walls 4143 and extend toward each other. The top wall 4141 and the bottom wall 4142 are correspondingly provided with second mounting holes 4145 for mounting the ends of the mounting shafts 415.

推动件413安装于第一安装座414内,第一安装座414内具有位于第一方向B1上的间隔的第一位置C和第二位置D,推动件413可相对于该第一安装座414在第一位置C与第二位置D之间来回移动。当推动件413从该第二位置D移动到第一位置C,推动件413作用于夹持件411,为夹持件411提供推动力。当推动件413从第一位置C移动到第二位置D,推动件413作用于夹持件411的推动力移除。The push member 413 is installed in the first mounting seat 414. The first mounting seat 414 has a first position C and a second position D spaced apart in the first direction B1. The push member 413 can move back and forth between the first position C and the second position D relative to the first mounting seat 414. When the push member 413 moves from the second position D to the first position C, the push member 413 acts on the clamping member 411 to provide a driving force for the clamping member 411. When the push member 413 moves from the first position C to the second position D, the driving force of the push member 413 acting on the clamping member 411 is removed.

再如图47至图49所示,传输装置40还包括第二安装座42,第一安装座414可沿第一方向B1来回移动地设置于第二安装座42上;第一安装座414与第二安装座42之间设有阻尼装置,用于在第一安装座414相对于第二安装座42移动时为第一安装座414提供阻尼力。也可以说,传输装置40在一些实施例中还可包括第二安装座42,第二安装座42可固定于气溶胶生成系统100的壳体101上,以借由锁定组件41相对于第二安装座42的来回移动实现对带状介质输送带22的连续性输送。As shown in Figures 47 to 49, the transmission device 40 further includes a second mounting seat 42, and the first mounting seat 414 is disposed on the second mounting seat 42 so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction B1; a damping device is disposed between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42, for providing a damping force to the first mounting seat 414 when the first mounting seat 414 moves relative to the second mounting seat 42. It can also be said that the transmission device 40 may further include a second mounting seat 42 in some embodiments, and the second mounting seat 42 may be fixed to the housing 101 of the aerosol generating system 100, so as to realize continuous conveyance of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 by the back and forth movement of the locking assembly 41 relative to the second mounting seat 42.

具体地,锁定组件41的第一安装座414可沿第一方向B1来回移动地设置于第二安装座42上。由于推动件413和该至少一个夹持件411之间楔形配合,推动件413在推动该至少一个夹持件411相对于第一安装座414沿第二方向B2移动的过程中,还会对第一安装座414产生一个与推动件413移动的方向同向的推动分力F1(如图56所示)。第一安装座414与第二安装座42之间设有阻尼装置,该阻尼装置为第一安装座414提供一个与推动分力F1的方向相反的阻尼力,阻尼力大于推动分力。Specifically, the first mounting seat 414 of the locking assembly 41 can be arranged on the second mounting seat 42 so as to be movable back and forth along the first direction B1. Due to the wedge-shaped fit between the pushing member 413 and the at least one clamping member 411, the pushing member 413 will also generate a pushing component force F1 in the same direction as the moving direction of the pushing member 413 on the first mounting seat 414 during the process of pushing the at least one clamping member 411 to move along the second direction B2 relative to the first mounting seat 414 (as shown in FIG. 56 ). A damping device is provided between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42, and the damping device provides a damping force in the opposite direction to the pushing component force F1 for the first mounting seat 414, and the damping force is greater than the pushing component force.

由于此阻尼力的存在,推动件413在推动该至少一个夹持件411移动的过程中,第一安装座414与第二安装座42的相对位置都是固定的。直到该至少一个夹持件411移动到位后,推动件413相对第一安装座414固定,推动件413产生的推动力全部传递给第一安装座414,而能驱动第一安装座414克服与第二安装座42之间阻尼力相对第二安装座42移动。Due to the existence of the damping force, the relative positions of the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 are fixed during the process of the pushing member 413 pushing the at least one clamping member 411 to move. After the at least one clamping member 411 moves into place, the pushing member 413 is fixed relative to the first mounting seat 414, and the driving force generated by the pushing member 413 is fully transmitted to the first mounting seat 414, thereby driving the first mounting seat 414 to overcome the damping force between the first mounting seat 42 and the second mounting seat 42 to move relative to the second mounting seat 42.

结合图56可知,在图示的实施例中,推动件413朝夹持件411移动、且与夹持件411接触配合的过程中,第一安装座414即夹持件411受到与第一方向B1的推动分力F1方向相反的阻尼力,且阻尼力可抵消该第一方向B1的推动分力F1。因此,两个夹持件411只能沿着第二方向B2相靠近移动;当推动件413继续朝向夹持件411移动时,并且当推动件413产生的推动力全部传递给第一安装座414,而推动力大于阻尼力时,夹持件411带动第一安装座414背向推动件413的一侧移动。在一些实施例中,可将第一安装座414与第二安装座42之间的阻尼力设置为大于两倍的推动分力F1。As can be seen from FIG. 56 , in the illustrated embodiment, when the push member 413 moves toward the clamping member 411 and contacts and cooperates with the clamping member 411, the first mounting seat 414, i.e., the clamping member 411, is subjected to a damping force in the opposite direction to the pushing force F1 in the first direction B1, and the damping force can offset the pushing force F1 in the first direction B1. Therefore, the two clamping members 411 can only move closer to each other along the second direction B2; when the push member 413 continues to move toward the clamping member 411, and when the pushing force generated by the push member 413 is fully transmitted to the first mounting seat 414, and the pushing force is greater than the damping force, the clamping member 411 drives the first mounting seat 414 to move to the side away from the push member 413. In some embodiments, the damping force between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 can be set to be greater than twice the pushing force F1.

第二安装座42在一些实施例中可为框架结构,第二安装座42可包括顶部421以及连接于顶部421的两侧壁422,两侧壁422在第一方向B1上间隔并相对设置。第二安装座42的内部具有位于第一方向B1上的间隔的第三位置E、第四位置F。第一安装座414设置于第二安装座42内,且第一安装座414可沿着第一方向B1在第二安装座42的第三位置E与第四位置F之间来回移动,以实现锁定组件41在第二安装座42中的移动。In some embodiments, the second mounting seat 42 may be a frame structure, and the second mounting seat 42 may include a top 421 and two side walls 422 connected to the top 421, and the two side walls 422 are spaced apart and arranged opposite to each other in the first direction B1. The interior of the second mounting seat 42 has a third position E and a fourth position F spaced apart in the first direction B1. The first mounting seat 414 is disposed in the second mounting seat 42, and the first mounting seat 414 can move back and forth between the third position E and the fourth position F of the second mounting seat 42 along the first direction B1 to realize the movement of the locking assembly 41 in the second mounting seat 42.

再如图49及图51所示,传输装置40在一些实施例中还可包括用于引导锁定组件41移动的导向结构43,锁定组件41在该导向结构43的导向下,沿着第一方向B1在第二安装座42的第三位置E与第四位置F之间来回移动。As shown in Figures 49 and 51, the transmission device 40 in some embodiments may also include a guide structure 43 for guiding the movement of the locking assembly 41. Under the guidance of the guide structure 43, the locking assembly 41 moves back and forth between the third position E and the fourth position F of the second mounting seat 42 along the first direction B1.

导向结构43可设置于第一安装座414与第二安装座42之间,导向结构43可包括设置于第一安装座414与第二安装座42的其中一者上的导槽431、对应设置于另一者上的导轨432,导槽431、导轨432可沿第一方向B1延伸设置。The guide structure 43 may be disposed between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 . The guide structure 43 may include a guide groove 431 disposed on one of the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 and a guide rail 432 correspondingly disposed on the other. The guide groove 431 and the guide rail 432 may extend along the first direction B1 .

第一安装座414的顶壁4141的外壁面与第二安装座42的顶部421的内壁面相对,导槽431、导轨432可分别设置于第一安装座414的顶壁4141、第二安装座42的顶部421的该两相对面上。在该实施例中,导槽431可设置于第一安装座414的顶壁4141的外壁面上,且导槽431贯通第一安装座414在第一方向B1上的两端。导轨432可对应设置于第二安装座42的顶部421的内壁面上,导轨432可自第三位置E延伸至第四位置F,侧壁422将第一安装座414限制在第二安装座42的第三位置E与第四位置F之间移动。在一些实施例中,导槽431可为燕尾槽,导轨432可为与燕尾槽相适配的燕尾型导轨432。The outer wall surface of the top wall 4141 of the first mounting seat 414 is opposite to the inner wall surface of the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42, and the guide groove 431 and the guide rail 432 can be respectively arranged on the two opposite surfaces of the top wall 4141 of the first mounting seat 414 and the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42. In this embodiment, the guide groove 431 can be arranged on the outer wall surface of the top wall 4141 of the first mounting seat 414, and the guide groove 431 passes through both ends of the first mounting seat 414 in the first direction B1. The guide rail 432 can be correspondingly arranged on the inner wall surface of the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42, and the guide rail 432 can extend from the third position E to the fourth position F, and the side wall 422 restricts the first mounting seat 414 from moving between the third position E and the fourth position F of the second mounting seat 42. In some embodiments, the guide groove 431 can be a dovetail groove, and the guide rail 432 can be a dovetail-type guide rail 432 adapted to the dovetail groove.

在其它实施例中,第二安装座42还可包括设置在第一方向B1上的两相对侧的至少一侧上的连接壁,该连接壁与顶部421及侧壁422连接,导轨432、导槽431中的一者可设置于第二安装座42的该连接壁上,另一者对应设置于锁紧组件的第一安装座414和/或推动件413上。In other embodiments, the second mounting seat 42 may also include a connecting wall arranged on at least one of the two opposite sides in the first direction B1, and the connecting wall is connected to the top 421 and the side wall 422. One of the guide rail 432 and the guide groove 431 may be arranged on the connecting wall of the second mounting seat 42, and the other is correspondingly arranged on the first mounting seat 414 and/or the pushing member 413 of the locking assembly.

在一些实施例中,第一安装座414和第二安装座42之间的阻尼装置可设置于导向结构43上,例如阻尼装置可设置于导槽431与导轨432之间,从而控制第一安装座414与第二安装座42之间的阻尼力。其中,阻尼装置可以为阻尼脂,可通过将阻尼脂涂设于导槽431和/或导轨432上实现。阻尼脂是一种高阻力润滑脂,使得第一安装座414更加平稳、顺畅、准确地移动,且可降低运行时的噪音。In some embodiments, a damping device between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42 may be disposed on the guide structure 43, for example, the damping device may be disposed between the guide groove 431 and the guide rail 432, so as to control the damping force between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42. The damping device may be damping grease, which may be achieved by applying the damping grease to the guide groove 431 and/or the guide rail 432. The damping grease is a high-resistance lubricating grease, which enables the first mounting seat 414 to move more steadily, smoothly, and accurately, and can reduce noise during operation.

可以理解地,可根据阻尼力大小的需求,进行阻尼脂的设置和调整,使得可满足两个夹持件411先相靠近,再由推动件413一同带动移动的移动需求。在其它实施例中,阻尼装置可以为阻尼片、阻尼器等起阻尼作用的其它结构。在其它实施例中,阻尼装置可设置于除导向结构43外的位置处。It can be understood that the damping grease can be set and adjusted according to the requirements of the damping force, so that the two clamping members 411 can be moved closer first and then driven to move together by the pushing member 413. In other embodiments, the damping device can be other structures such as a damping sheet and a damper that have a damping effect. In other embodiments, the damping device can be set at a position other than the guide structure 43.

传输装置40在一些实施例中,还可包括用于引导带状介质输送带22的移动的引导结构44,引导结构44可引导带状介质输送带22在第一方向B1上进行传输。具体地,再结合图47至图50所示,引导结构44可设置于第二安装座42上,且可分别设置于两个侧壁422上,各引导结构44可分别包括间隔设置的两根滚轴441,两根滚轴441相互平行,两根滚轴441之间形成供引导带状介质输送带22通过的间隙442。In some embodiments, the transmission device 40 may further include a guide structure 44 for guiding the movement of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and the guide structure 44 may guide the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to be transmitted in the first direction B1. Specifically, in combination with FIGS. 47 to 50, the guide structure 44 may be disposed on the second mounting seat 42, and may be disposed on two side walls 422, respectively, and each guide structure 44 may include two rollers 441 disposed at intervals, the two rollers 441 are parallel to each other, and a gap 442 is formed between the two rollers 441 for guiding the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to pass through.

滚轴441可转动设置于侧壁422上,带状介质输送带22穿过间隙442,通过两根滚轴441的滚动带动移动,该引导结构44对带状介质输送带22在第一方向B1上的移动起到定位、引导的作用。其中,侧壁422对应引导结构44处设有开口4221,滚轴441位于该开口4221内,间隙位于该开口4221内。The roller 441 is rotatably disposed on the side wall 422, and the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 passes through the gap 442 and is driven to move by the rolling of the two rollers 441. The guide structure 44 plays a role in positioning and guiding the movement of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 in the first direction B1. The side wall 422 is provided with an opening 4221 corresponding to the guide structure 44, the roller 441 is located in the opening 4221, and the gap is located in the opening 4221.

两个间隙442与推动件413的穿孔4132、两个夹持件411的夹持面4111之间、第一安装座414的两支撑壁4143之间的空间对应,其中,该相对应的各部分可呈中心对齐设置,即在第二方向B2上中心对齐,使得带状介质输送带22可在第一方向B1上顺滑地传输。在其它实施例中,引导结构44可采用其它结构实现,只要能起到引导带状介质输送带22在第一方向B1上的移动即可。The two gaps 442 correspond to the through-holes 4132 of the pusher 413, the space between the clamping surfaces 4111 of the two clamping members 411, and the space between the two supporting walls 4143 of the first mounting seat 414, wherein the corresponding parts can be centrally aligned, i.e., centrally aligned in the second direction B2, so that the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 can be smoothly transported in the first direction B1. In other embodiments, the guide structure 44 can be implemented with other structures as long as it can guide the movement of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 in the first direction B1.

再如图48及图49所示,第二安装座42上在一些实施例中还可设有缓冲件45,缓冲件45可分别设置于两个侧壁422上,缓冲件45与第一安装座414对应,具体可分别与第一安装座414的两对相邻的支撑壁4143对应,第二安装座42的侧壁422内壁面对应设有供缓冲件45安装的安装槽3222。可以理解地,当第一安装座414移动到第三位置E或第四位置F时,缓冲件45对第一安装座414起到缓冲作用,具有减震、防噪的效果。其中,缓冲件45可远离顶部421设置,当然,缓冲件45也可靠近顶部421设置,只要不影响各部件的工作、不影响带状介质输送带22的传输即可。As shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 , in some embodiments, the second mounting seat 42 may be provided with a buffer 45, which may be respectively arranged on two side walls 422, and the buffer 45 corresponds to the first mounting seat 414, and specifically may correspond to two pairs of adjacent support walls 4143 of the first mounting seat 414, and the inner wall surface of the side wall 422 of the second mounting seat 42 is provided with a mounting groove 3222 for the buffer 45 to be installed. It can be understood that when the first mounting seat 414 moves to the third position E or the fourth position F, the buffer 45 plays a buffering role on the first mounting seat 414, and has the effect of shock absorption and noise prevention. Among them, the buffer 45 can be arranged away from the top 421, and of course, the buffer 45 can also be arranged close to the top 421, as long as it does not affect the work of each component and the transmission of the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22.

再如图48至图50所示,驱动组件46在一些实施例中可包括电机461、由电机461驱动的丝杆462以及由丝杆462驱动的拨杆463,拨杆463与锁定组件41的推动件413相连,并可在丝杆462的驱动下沿第一方向B1来回移动,以带动推动件413沿第一方向B1来回移动。As shown in Figures 48 to 50, in some embodiments, the driving assembly 46 may include a motor 461, a screw rod 462 driven by the motor 461, and a lever 463 driven by the screw rod 462. The lever 463 is connected to the pushing member 413 of the locking assembly 41 and can move back and forth along the first direction B1 under the drive of the screw rod 462 to drive the pushing member 413 to move back and forth along the first direction B1.

具体地,丝杆462可设置于第二安装座42的上方或下方,且丝杆462的轴向平行于第一方向B1。丝杆462的长度可根据第三位置E与第四位置F在第一方向B1上的距离来设置,使得拨杆463具有足够的移动行程以驱动锁定组件41在第三位置E与第四位置F之间来回移动。Specifically, the screw rod 462 can be disposed above or below the second mounting seat 42, and the axial direction of the screw rod 462 is parallel to the first direction B1. The length of the screw rod 462 can be set according to the distance between the third position E and the fourth position F in the first direction B1, so that the lever 463 has a sufficient movement stroke to drive the locking assembly 41 to move back and forth between the third position E and the fourth position F.

在一些实施例中,驱动组件46可设置于第二安装座42的下方,第二安装座42的下方设有用于安装驱动组件46的基座423,基座423内具有容纳空间4231,驱动组件46安装于该容纳空间4231中。In some embodiments, the driving component 46 can be disposed below the second mounting seat 42 . A base 423 for mounting the driving component 46 is disposed below the second mounting seat 42 . The base 423 has a receiving space 4231 , and the driving component 46 is installed in the receiving space 4231 .

基座423可包括与两侧壁422连接的间隔壁4232、自间隔壁4232背向侧壁422延伸的围壁4233,围壁4233具有与间隔壁4232相对的敞开口4221,基座423还可包括封堵该敞开口4221的底板4235;间隔壁4232与围壁4233、底板4235一同界定出该容纳空间4231。The base 423 may include a partition wall 4232 connected to the two side walls 422, and a surrounding wall 4233 extending from the partition wall 4232 away from the side wall 422, the surrounding wall 4233 has an open opening 4221 opposite to the partition wall 4232, and the base 423 may also include a bottom plate 4235 blocking the open opening 4221; the partition wall 4232, the surrounding wall 4233 and the bottom plate 4235 together define the accommodating space 4231.

底板4235与围壁4233可通过连接结构连接,连接结构可包括设置于围壁4233上的第一连接筒471、对应设置于底板4235上的第二连接筒472以及螺栓473,第一连接筒471内壁设有与螺栓473的外螺纹相匹配的内螺纹,螺栓473固定安装于第二连接筒472内,且与第一连接筒471的内螺纹螺接配合。The base plate 4235 and the surrounding wall 4233 may be connected via a connecting structure, which may include a first connecting tube 471 disposed on the surrounding wall 4233, a second connecting tube 472 correspondingly disposed on the base plate 4235, and a bolt 473. The inner wall of the first connecting tube 471 is provided with an internal thread matching the external thread of the bolt 473. The bolt 473 is fixedly installed in the second connecting tube 472 and is threadedly engaged with the internal thread of the first connecting tube 471.

电机461、丝杆462可安装于底板4235上,拨杆463可通过与丝杆462相匹配的丝杆螺母连接于丝杆462上,丝杆螺母可跟随丝杆462的转动沿丝杆462的轴向(也即第一方向B1)移动,从而带动锁定组件41在第一方向B1上移动。The motor 461 and the screw rod 462 can be installed on the base plate 4235, and the lever 463 can be connected to the screw rod 462 through a screw nut matching the screw rod 462. The screw nut can move along the axial direction (i.e., the first direction B1) of the screw rod 462 following the rotation of the screw rod 462, thereby driving the locking assembly 41 to move in the first direction B1.

在一些实施例中,驱动组件46与推动件413连接,驱动组件46先驱动推动件413作用于至少一个夹持件411以锁紧带状介质输送带22,再驱动锁定组件41整体移动,进而带动带状介质输送带22移动。In some embodiments, the driving assembly 46 is connected to the pusher 413 , and the driving assembly 46 first drives the pusher 413 to act on at least one clamping member 411 to lock the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 , and then drives the locking assembly 41 to move as a whole, thereby driving the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 to move.

再如图49及图50所示,拨杆463在一些实施例中可包括套接于丝杆螺母上的套接部4631以及与推动件413连接的杆部4632。推动件413设有供驱动组件46连接且开口朝下的插槽4133。可以理解地,推动件413与驱动组件46并不局限于通过插槽4133配合,其也可以采用其他常规的方式连接。As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 , in some embodiments, the lever 463 may include a sleeve portion 4631 sleeved on the screw nut and a rod portion 4632 connected to the pusher 413. The pusher 413 is provided with a slot 4133 with an opening facing downward for connection with the drive assembly 46. It is understandable that the pusher 413 and the drive assembly 46 are not limited to being matched through the slot 4133, and they may also be connected in other conventional ways.

拨杆463的套接部4631可位于基座423的容纳空间4231内,杆部4632可穿过间隔壁4232以插接至插槽4133中,间隔壁4232上设有供拨杆463在第一方向B1上来回移动的移动通道4234,该移动通道4234沿第一方向B1延伸,且与丝杆462对应。The sleeve portion 4631 of the lever 463 can be located in the accommodating space 4231 of the base 423, and the rod portion 4632 can pass through the partition wall 4232 to be inserted into the slot 4133. The partition wall 4232 is provided with a moving channel 4234 for the lever 463 to move back and forth in the first direction B1. The moving channel 4234 extends along the first direction B1 and corresponds to the screw rod 462.

在一些实施例中,推动件413设置于第一安装座414内,且推动件413的底面可与第一安装座414的底壁4142的外表面相齐平。插槽4133自推动件413的底面延伸至推动件413内部,拨杆463在第二方向B2上的长度大于插槽4133在第二方向B2上的深度。因此,拨杆463与插槽4133插接配合时,推动件413的顶部将第一安装座414顶起。In some embodiments, the push member 413 is disposed in the first mounting seat 414, and the bottom surface of the push member 413 can be flush with the outer surface of the bottom wall 4142 of the first mounting seat 414. The slot 4133 extends from the bottom surface of the push member 413 to the inside of the push member 413, and the length of the lever 463 in the second direction B2 is greater than the depth of the slot 4133 in the second direction B2. Therefore, when the lever 463 is plugged into the slot 4133, the top of the push member 413 lifts up the first mounting seat 414.

在一些实施例中,推动件413的底面及第一安装座414的底壁4142的外表面与间隔壁4232的上表面之间具有一间隔,从而锁定组件41在第一方向B1上移动时,阻尼装置的阻尼作用位于第二安装座42的顶部421与第二安装座42的顶壁4141之间,以便于阻尼力的调整。其中,推动件413内部可设有镂空槽,以减轻推动件413的重量,维持移动的稳定性。In some embodiments, there is a gap between the bottom surface of the pusher 413 and the outer surface of the bottom wall 4142 of the first mounting seat 414 and the upper surface of the partition wall 4232, so that when the locking assembly 41 moves in the first direction B1, the damping effect of the damping device is located between the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42 and the top wall 4141 of the second mounting seat 42, so as to facilitate the adjustment of the damping force. A hollow groove may be provided inside the pusher 413 to reduce the weight of the pusher 413 and maintain the stability of movement.

可以理解地,电机461与拨杆463之间并不局限于通过丝杆462连接,诸如齿轮传动、皮带传动等其他传动结构也可适用。It can be understood that the connection between the motor 461 and the lever 463 is not limited to being connected through the screw rod 462, and other transmission structures such as gear transmission, belt transmission, etc. may also be applicable.

在一些实施例中,驱动组件46还可包括调速箱464,调速箱464设置于底板4235上,丝杆462、齿轮可转动安装于调速箱464中。电机461可固定安装于底板4235上,且电机461的接线端子与电缆465连接,电缆465可平行于第二方向B2且延伸至第二安装座42外部,以便于接线,其中,电机461可以为步进电机,电缆465可以为柔性线缆。In some embodiments, the driving assembly 46 may further include a speed regulating box 464, which is disposed on the bottom plate 4235, and the screw rod 462 and the gear are rotatably mounted in the speed regulating box 464. The motor 461 may be fixedly mounted on the bottom plate 4235, and the wiring terminal of the motor 461 is connected to the cable 465, and the cable 465 may be parallel to the second direction B2 and extend to the outside of the second mounting seat 42 for easy wiring, wherein the motor 461 may be a stepping motor, and the cable 465 may be a flexible cable.

在一些实施例中,驱动组件46的基座423可位于第二安装座42的上方,驱动组件46安装于基座423内,移动通道4234设置于第二安装座42的顶部421;导向结构43可设置于第一安装座414的底壁4142与基座423的间隔壁4232之间,同样可通过驱动组件46驱动推动件413移动。In some embodiments, the base 423 of the driving component 46 can be located above the second mounting seat 42, the driving component 46 is installed in the base 423, and the moving channel 4234 is arranged at the top 421 of the second mounting seat 42; the guide structure 43 can be arranged between the bottom wall 4142 of the first mounting seat 414 and the partition wall 4232 of the base 423, and the driving component 46 can also be used to drive the pushing member 413 to move.

下面结合工作原理,对传输装置40做进一步说明:The transmission device 40 is further described below in conjunction with the working principle:

再如图48所示,传输装置40工作时,带状介质输送带22从第二安装座42外部,可从靠近推动件413侧的两个滚轴441之间的间隙442进入第二安装座42,再依次通过推动件413的穿孔4132、两个夹持件411之间、远离推动件413的两个滚轴441之间的间隙442,并从第二安装座42穿出。As shown in Figure 48, when the transmission device 40 is working, the belt medium conveyor belt 22 can enter the second mounting seat 42 from the outside of the second mounting seat 42 through the gap 442 between the two rollers 441 close to the pushing member 413, and then pass through the through hole 4132 of the pushing member 413, between the two clamping members 411, and the gap 442 between the two rollers 441 away from the pushing member 413, and then pass through the second mounting seat 42.

一同参阅图54a至图54c,电机461转动并驱动丝杆462转动,拨杆463带动推动件413从第一安装座414的第二位置D向第一位置C移动,在推动件413向左移动的过程中,推动件413通过其两个施力部4131分别与两个夹持件411接触配合,由于第一安装座414与第二安装座42之间阻尼力的作用,此时第一安装座414相对第二安装座42静止,两个夹持件411在第二方向B2上相靠近移动,并且夹紧带状介质输送带22;当推动件413继续向左移动时,推动件413带动第一安装座414一同向左移动,且夹紧组件带动带状介质输送带22一同向左移动,从而实现带状介质输送带22在第一方向B1上的传输。Referring to Figures 54a to 54c together, the motor 461 rotates and drives the screw rod 462 to rotate, and the lever 463 drives the pushing member 413 to move from the second position D of the first mounting seat 414 to the first position C. In the process of the pushing member 413 moving to the left, the pushing member 413 contacts and cooperates with the two clamping members 411 through its two force-applying parts 4131 respectively. Due to the damping force between the first mounting seat 414 and the second mounting seat 42, the first mounting seat 414 is stationary relative to the second mounting seat 42 at this time, and the two clamping members 411 move closer to each other in the second direction B2 and clamp the belt medium conveyor belt 22; when the pushing member 413 continues to move to the left, the pushing member 413 drives the first mounting seat 414 to move to the left together, and the clamping assembly drives the belt medium conveyor belt 22 to move to the left together, thereby realizing the transmission of the belt medium conveyor belt 22 in the first direction B1.

结合图55a至图55c所示,当完成带状介质输送带22的一次传输后,电机461向反方向转动,并驱动丝杆462往反方向转动,拨杆463带动推动件413从第一安装座414的第一位置C向第二位置D移动,在推动件413向右移动的过程中,推动件413的两个施力部4131分别脱离两个夹持件411,解除与两个夹持件411的配合,在弹性件412的作用下,两个夹持件411相远离移动,此时锁定组件41与带状介质输送带22相对分离;当推动件413继续向右移动时,推动件413带动第一安装座414一同向右移动。As shown in Figures 55a to 55c, after completing one transmission of the belt medium conveyor belt 22, the motor 461 rotates in the opposite direction and drives the screw rod 462 to rotate in the opposite direction. The lever 463 drives the pushing member 413 to move from the first position C of the first mounting seat 414 to the second position D. In the process of the pushing member 413 moving to the right, the two force-applying parts 4131 of the pushing member 413 respectively disengage from the two clamping members 411, and release the cooperation with the two clamping members 411. Under the action of the elastic member 412, the two clamping members 411 move away from each other. At this time, the locking assembly 41 is relatively separated from the belt medium conveyor belt 22; when the pushing member 413 continues to move to the right, the pushing member 413 drives the first mounting seat 414 to move to the right together.

在具体实施时,控制方式可以为,驱动锁定组件41从第二安装座42的第四位置F移动至第三位置E,进行带状介质输送带22的一次传输;然后驱动锁定组件41从第三位置E向第四位置F移动,且在移动过程中松开带状介质输送带22,回到第四位置F,以进行下一次的传输。In a specific implementation, the control method can be to drive the locking component 41 to move from the fourth position F of the second mounting seat 42 to the third position E to perform one transmission of the belt medium conveyor belt 22; then drive the locking component 41 to move from the third position E to the fourth position F, and release the belt medium conveyor belt 22 during the movement, and return to the fourth position F for the next transmission.

在其它实施例中,控制方式可以为,控制推动件413向左移动一段时间,带动带状介质输送带22移动一段距离,然后静止一段时间,再继续向左移动,继续带动带状介质输送带22移动一段距离;或者,控制推动件413向左移动一段时间,带动带状介质输送带22移动一段距离,然后控制推动件413向右移动,松开带状介质输送带22,再控制推动件413向左移动进行带状介质输送带22的第二次传输。In other embodiments, the control method may be to control the pushing member 413 to move to the left for a period of time, drive the belt medium conveyor belt 22 to move a distance, then stop for a period of time, and then continue to move to the left, and continue to drive the belt medium conveyor belt 22 to move a distance; or, control the pushing member 413 to move to the left for a period of time, drive the belt medium conveyor belt 22 to move a distance, and then control the pushing member 413 to move to the right, release the belt medium conveyor belt 22, and then control the pushing member 413 to move to the left for the second transmission of the belt medium conveyor belt 22.

图57及图58示出了本发明另一些实施例中的传输装置40,如图所示,该传输装置40可应用于气溶胶生成系统100中,用于传输设有定位孔223的带状介质输送带22。其中,定位孔223可设有多个,且沿带状介质输送带22的长度方向间隔分布,各定位孔223可均匀分布。57 and 58 show a transmission device 40 in other embodiments of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the transmission device 40 can be applied to the aerosol generating system 100 to transmit the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 provided with positioning holes 223. There can be a plurality of positioning holes 223, which are spaced apart along the length direction of the strip-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and the positioning holes 223 can be evenly distributed.

该传输装置40与上述实施例的传输装置40的主要区别在于,锁定组件41可通过插接来实现与带状介质输送带22的锁定,而非夹持,即锁定组件41处于锁定状态时,锁定组件41可插接固定带状介质输送带22,且与带状介质输送带22相对固定,两者成为一整体。The main difference between the transmission device 40 of the transmission device 40 of the above-mentioned embodiment is that the locking component 41 can be locked with the belt medium conveyor belt 22 by plugging instead of clamping, that is, when the locking component 41 is in a locked state, the locking component 41 can be plugged and fixed with the belt medium conveyor belt 22, and is relatively fixed with the belt medium conveyor belt 22, and the two become a whole.

该锁定组件41可包括至少一个锁定件411a,锁定件411a上设有与上述第一配合斜面4112结构相同的第三配合斜面4112a。锁定件411a上可设有沿第二方向B2延伸的限位柱4111a,该限位柱4111a与所需传输的带状介质输送带22上的定位孔223相适配,使得锁定件411a通过其限位柱4111a与定位孔223配合时,即限位柱4111a插入到定位孔223中时,锁定组件41与带状介质输送带22相对固定,从而可带动带状介质输送带22移动。The locking assembly 41 may include at least one locking member 411a, on which a third matching inclined surface 4112a having the same structure as the first matching inclined surface 4112 is provided. The locking member 411a may be provided with a limiting column 4111a extending along the second direction B2, and the limiting column 4111a is adapted to the positioning hole 223 on the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to be transmitted, so that when the locking member 411a is matched with the positioning hole 223 through its limiting column 4111a, that is, when the limiting column 4111a is inserted into the positioning hole 223, the locking assembly 41 is relatively fixed to the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22, thereby driving the belt-shaped medium conveying belt 22 to move.

其中,定位孔223可呈圆形或其它形状,限位柱4111a可呈圆柱状或与定位孔223相匹配的其它柱状,且限位柱4111a的横截面尺寸与定位孔223的尺寸相适配,例如两者的尺寸相同,使得限位柱4111a可插入定位孔223中,并与带状介质输送带22成为一体,以及便于从定位孔223中抽出,以便于进行下一次的传输。其中,限位柱4111a、定位孔223可在宽度方向上对应设置有多个,以便于快速实现插接配合。The positioning hole 223 may be circular or in other shapes, the limiting post 4111a may be cylindrical or in other cylindrical shapes matching the positioning hole 223, and the cross-sectional dimensions of the limiting post 4111a are adapted to the dimensions of the positioning hole 223, for example, the dimensions of the two are the same, so that the limiting post 4111a can be inserted into the positioning hole 223 and become one with the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22, and can be easily withdrawn from the positioning hole 223 for the next transmission. The limiting post 4111a and the positioning hole 223 may be provided with a plurality of corresponding ones in the width direction to facilitate quick plug-in matching.

可以理解地,锁定组件41并不局限于通过上述的方式实现对带状介质输送带22的锁定,其也可以通过磁力结构、吸盘等其他方式固定。It is understandable that the locking assembly 41 is not limited to locking the belt-shaped medium conveyor belt 22 in the above manner, and it can also be fixed by other means such as a magnetic structure, a suction cup, etc.

可以理解的,以上实施例仅表达了本发明的优选实施方式,其描述较为具体和详细,但并不能因此而理解为对本发明专利范围的限制;应当指出的是,对于本领域的普通技术人员来说,在不脱离本发明构思的前提下,可以对上述技术特点进行自由组合,还可以做出若干变形和改进,这些都属于本发明的保护范围;因此,凡跟本发明权利要求范围所做的等同变换与修饰,均应属于本发明权利要求的涵盖范围。It can be understood that the above embodiments only express the preferred implementation modes of the present invention, and the descriptions thereof are relatively specific and detailed, but they cannot be understood as limiting the patent scope of the present invention. It should be pointed out that, for ordinary technicians in this field, the above technical features can be freely combined without departing from the concept of the present invention, and several deformations and improvements can be made, which all belong to the protection scope of the present invention. Therefore, all equivalent changes and modifications made to the scope of the claims of the present invention should belong to the coverage of the claims of the present invention.

Claims (10)

一种气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,包括:An aerosol generating system, characterized in that it comprises: 介质输送带(22),呈带状,且可移动设置;The medium conveyor belt (22) is in the form of a belt and can be movably arranged; 加热结构(12),用于加热所述介质输送带(22);A heating structure (12) for heating the medium conveyor belt (22); 至少两组限位结构(29),其中,包括至少一组第一限位结构(291)与至少一组第二限位结构(292),所述第一限位结构(291)与第二限位结构(292)相对设置以使得所述介质输送带(22)与所述加热结构(12)紧密接触。At least two groups of limiting structures (29), including at least one group of first limiting structures (291) and at least one group of second limiting structures (292), wherein the first limiting structures (291) and the second limiting structures (292) are arranged relative to each other so that the medium conveying belt (22) and the heating structure (12) are in close contact. 根据权利要求1所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,所述第一限位结构(291)与所述介质输送带(22)接触并朝所述介质输送带(22)与所述加热结构(12)贴合方向向所述介质输送带(22)施加作用力;The aerosol generating system according to claim 1, characterized in that the first limiting structure (291) contacts the medium conveying belt (22) and applies a force to the medium conveying belt (22) in a direction in which the medium conveying belt (22) and the heating structure (12) are fitted together; 和/或,所述第二限位结构(292)与所述介质输送带(22)接触并朝所述介质输送带(22)与所述加热结构(12)贴合方向向所述介质输送带(22)施加作用力。And/or, the second limiting structure (292) contacts the medium conveying belt (22) and applies a force to the medium conveying belt (22) in the direction of the medium conveying belt (22) and the heating structure (12) being in contact with each other. 根据权利要求2所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,还包括出气通道(253);The aerosol generating system according to claim 2, characterized in that it further comprises an air outlet channel (253); 所述出气通道(253)与所述加热结构(12)相对设置,用于输出所述介质输送带(22)加热产生的气溶胶;The air outlet channel (253) is arranged opposite to the heating structure (12) and is used to output aerosol generated by heating the medium conveyor belt (22); 所述介质输送带(22)设置于所述加热结构(12)朝向所述出气通道(253)的一面;The medium conveying belt (22) is arranged on a side of the heating structure (12) facing the air outlet channel (253); 所述第一限位结构(291)和/或所述第二限位结构(292)压设于所述介质输送带(22)上。The first limiting structure (291) and/or the second limiting structure (292) are pressed onto the medium conveying belt (22). 根据权利要求1所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,所述加热结构(12)包括第一侧(122)以及第二侧(122b);所述第一限位结构(291)设置于所述第一侧(122);以及所述第二限位结构(292)设置于所述第二侧(122b)。The aerosol generating system according to claim 1, characterized in that the heating structure (12) comprises a first side (122) and a second side (122b); the first limiting structure (291) is arranged on the first side (122); and the second limiting structure (292) is arranged on the second side (122b). 根据权利要求4所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,所述第一侧(122)以及第二侧(122b)沿所述介质输送带(22)移动方向依次设置。The aerosol generating system according to claim 4, characterized in that the first side (122) and the second side (122b) are arranged sequentially along the moving direction of the medium conveyor belt (22). 根据权利要求1所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,还包括雾化腔(250),所述加热结构(12)至少部分设置于所述雾化腔(250)中;所述雾化腔(250)具有进口(251)以及出口(252),所述进口(251)以及出口(252)沿所述介质输送带(22)移动方向依次设置;The aerosol generating system according to claim 1, characterized in that it further comprises an atomizing chamber (250), wherein the heating structure (12) is at least partially disposed in the atomizing chamber (250); the atomizing chamber (250) has an inlet (251) and an outlet (252), and the inlet (251) and the outlet (252) are sequentially disposed along the moving direction of the medium conveying belt (22); 至少一组所述第一限位结构(291)设置于所述进口(251)远离所述出口(252)的一侧;至少一组所述第二限位结构(292)设置于所述出口(252)远离所述进口(251)的一侧。At least one group of the first limiting structures (291) is arranged on a side of the inlet (251) away from the outlet (252); and at least one group of the second limiting structures (292) is arranged on a side of the outlet (252) away from the inlet (251). 根据权利要求6所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,还包括第一导向结构(282);所述第一导向结构(282)设置于所述进口(251)远离所述出口(252)的一侧,用于将待加热的所述介质输送带(22)导入所述进口(251);The aerosol generating system according to claim 6, characterized in that it further comprises a first guide structure (282); the first guide structure (282) is arranged on a side of the inlet (251) away from the outlet (252), and is used to guide the medium conveyor belt (22) to be heated into the inlet (251); 至少一组所述第一限位结构(291)设置于所述第一导向结构(282)与所述进口(251)之间,且朝远离所述介质输送带(22)与所述加热结构(12)贴合的方向偏移所述第一导向结构(282)设置。At least one set of the first limiting structures (291) is arranged between the first guide structure (282) and the inlet (251), and is arranged offset from the first guide structure (282) in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveying belt (22) and the heating structure (12). 根据权利要求6所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,还包括第二导向结构(283);所述第二导向结构(283)设置于所述出口(252)远离所述进口(251)的一侧,用于供从所述出口(252)输出的且经过加热的所述介质输送带(22)移动导向;The aerosol generating system according to claim 6, characterized in that it further comprises a second guide structure (283); the second guide structure (283) is arranged on a side of the outlet (252) away from the inlet (251), and is used for guiding the heated medium conveyor belt (22) output from the outlet (252); 至少一组所述第二限位结构(292)设置于所述第二导向结构(283)与所述出口(252)之间,且朝远离所述介质输送带(22)与所述加热结构(12)贴合的方向偏移所述第二导向结构(283)设置。At least one set of the second limiting structures (292) is arranged between the second guide structure (283) and the outlet (252), and is arranged offset from the second guide structure (283) in a direction away from the contact between the medium conveying belt (22) and the heating structure (12). 根据权利要求1所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,至少一组所述第一限位结构(291)包括限位凸筋和/或限位轮;The aerosol generating system according to claim 1, characterized in that at least one set of the first limiting structures (291) comprises limiting ribs and/or limiting wheels; 和/或,至少一组所述第二限位结构(292)包括限位凸筋和/或限位轮。And/or, at least one group of the second limiting structures (292) includes limiting ribs and/or limiting wheels. 根据权利要求1所述的气溶胶生成系统,其特征在于,还包括机体(11),所述机体(11)上设置有容纳腔(1120),所述介质输送带(22)组件可拆卸设置于所述容纳腔(1120)中。The aerosol generating system according to claim 1, further comprising a body (11), wherein the body (11) is provided with a receiving cavity (1120), and the medium conveying belt (22) assembly is detachably arranged in the receiving cavity (1120).
PCT/CN2024/092723 2023-05-12 2024-05-11 Aerosol generation system Pending WO2024235171A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (14)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202310540145.XA CN118923935A (en) 2023-05-12 2023-05-12 Aerosol generating product and aerosol generating device
CN202310538897.2 2023-05-12
CN202310538897.2A CN118923926A (en) 2023-05-12 2023-05-12 Aerosol generating product and aerosol generating device
CN202310540145.X 2023-05-12
CN202310539036.6A CN118923927A (en) 2023-05-12 2023-05-12 Aerosol generating product and aerosol generating device
CN202310539036.6 2023-05-12
CN202310541761.7A CN118923939A (en) 2023-05-12 2023-05-12 Aerosol Generating Device
CN202310541761.7 2023-05-12
CN202310540081.3 2023-05-12
CN202310541866.2A CN118923940A (en) 2023-05-12 2023-05-12 Aerosol Generating System
CN202310541549.0A CN118923938A (en) 2023-05-12 2023-05-12 Aerosol generating device and its transmission device
CN202310541866.2 2023-05-12
CN202310540081.3A CN118923933A (en) 2023-05-12 2023-05-12 Atomizing device and aerosol generating device
CN202310541549.0 2023-05-12

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024235171A1 true WO2024235171A1 (en) 2024-11-21

Family

ID=93518677

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2024/092723 Pending WO2024235171A1 (en) 2023-05-12 2024-05-11 Aerosol generation system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024235171A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4735358A (en) * 1986-03-04 1988-04-05 Daiken Iko Kabushiki Kaisha Method and apparatus of vaporizing active substances
CN1102964A (en) * 1993-08-10 1995-05-31 菲利普莫里斯生产公司 Electrical smoking article having continuous tobacco flavor web and flavor cassette therefor
CN114223966A (en) * 2021-12-28 2022-03-25 海南摩尔兄弟科技有限公司 Atomization device
CN114947234A (en) * 2022-06-06 2022-08-30 海南摩尔兄弟科技有限公司 Atomization control method and electronic atomizer
WO2023037215A1 (en) * 2021-09-09 2023-03-16 Philip Morris Products S.A. Inductive heating aerosol-generating system with nicotine tape

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4735358A (en) * 1986-03-04 1988-04-05 Daiken Iko Kabushiki Kaisha Method and apparatus of vaporizing active substances
CN1102964A (en) * 1993-08-10 1995-05-31 菲利普莫里斯生产公司 Electrical smoking article having continuous tobacco flavor web and flavor cassette therefor
WO2023037215A1 (en) * 2021-09-09 2023-03-16 Philip Morris Products S.A. Inductive heating aerosol-generating system with nicotine tape
CN114223966A (en) * 2021-12-28 2022-03-25 海南摩尔兄弟科技有限公司 Atomization device
CN114947234A (en) * 2022-06-06 2022-08-30 海南摩尔兄弟科技有限公司 Atomization control method and electronic atomizer

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7500645B2 (en) Aerosol generating system having a charging device and an aerosol generating device having end contacts
KR102571323B1 (en) Aerosol-generating system with case
WO2001034934A3 (en) Reel spool and stand assembly for coiled tubing injector system
RU2746402C1 (en) Aerosol generating system with an aerosol generating device and protection means for control button
US2894700A (en) Portable dictation apparatus
JPH02228383A (en) Adhesive film pasting device
JP2015504668A (en) Aerosol generator and system
JP2022504970A (en) Case for aerosol generator with detector
WO2024235171A1 (en) Aerosol generation system
CA2276595A1 (en) Manual device for transferring a film from a carrier tape to a substrate
CN212219304U (en) Magnetic attraction printing platform
JP2023501882A (en) holder
WO2007111826A3 (en) Binder strip cassette
CN113393966A (en) Temperature sensor for power cable fire protection
CN118923927A (en) Aerosol generating product and aerosol generating device
CN118923939A (en) Aerosol Generating Device
CN118923935A (en) Aerosol generating product and aerosol generating device
JP4927031B2 (en) Recording tape attaching method and recording tape attaching apparatus
CN221587502U (en) Receiving mechanism, gluing device and battery production system
CN118923926A (en) Aerosol generating product and aerosol generating device
CN118923933A (en) Atomizing device and aerosol generating device
US3690590A (en) Coaxial tape cartridge
CN222673081U (en) Rewinding and unwinding equipment and battery production line
CN113788373A (en) An automatic cable reel device
CN222997422U (en) Aerosol generating device and aerosol generating system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24806523

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1